JP7485174B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a lottery is held when a certain lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common for the machine to be configured to perform effects that allow the player to predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light-emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and perform effects using images, sounds, lights, movable objects, etc. depending on the progress of the game.

Specifically, in slot machines, when the start lever is operated, a presentation selected by lottery is executed. Also, when a predetermined game state is started, an opening presentation is executed, and when a predetermined ending trigger occurs, an ending presentation is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-192800 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control the execution of presentations, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimally control the execution of presentations.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means for controlling the execution of a performance,
The performance control means includes:
A first performance control means for controlling the execution of the first performance according to the first performance information based on the occurrence of a first execution opportunity during the execution of the performance;
a second performance control means for controlling the execution of the second performance in accordance with the second performance information when a second execution trigger occurs during the execution of the performance and a predetermined start trigger occurs thereafter;
A means for controlling execution of a specific performance in accordance with specific performance information based on the occurrence of a specific trigger;
A means for reading out the first performance information and the specific performance information into separate storage areas in a predetermined situation in which the second performance is not executed;
a means for reading out the first performance information, the specific performance information, and the second performance information into a same storage area in a specific situation where the second performance is executed;
Equipped with
A plurality of display effects are set as the display effects to be executed as the first effect,
A plurality of display effects are set as the display effects to be executed as the second effect,
The present invention is characterized in that, regardless of which display performance is set as the first performance, the configuration does not affect the determination of the type of display performance to be executed as the second performance.

The present invention makes it possible to optimally control the execution of presentations.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the patterns visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. 1A is a front view of a common display area, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on the common display section. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the role selection process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the normal mode is selected. FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected. FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected. FIG. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values with different winning probabilities among the setting values of "1" to "6." FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an offset table. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop operation response process executed by a main MPU. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game zones existing in a slot machine. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a top-up process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a preparation state process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the ART state processing executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus process executed by the master MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending handling process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a freeze setting process executed by a main MPU; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a display layer. 13A to 13H are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of various effects executed in the normal game state. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the first expected performance and the second expected performance, and (f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the type of the first expected performance and the expectation of winning a bonus, and the correspondence between the type of the second expected performance and the expectation of winning a BB when a bonus is won. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the presentation side ROM for executing various presentations in normal game mode, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the presentation side RAM for executing various presentations. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of each layer, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output setting area, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display setting area. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams for explaining the manner in which the effect table is read out when the game is not the execution target game for either the bonus announcement effect or the re-variation effect. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the manner in which the effect table is read out in the case of a game in which a bonus announcement effect or a re-variation effect is executed. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second synthesis effect table. 13 is a time chart showing how a second expected effect is started based on a second composite effect table. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance execution process executed by the performance side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a display control process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus notification process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance content determination process executed by the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the first performance information setting process executed by the performance side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a second performance information setting process executed by the performance side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the production side MPU. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the winning result response processing executed by the production side MPU, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the production setting processing at the start of a bonus executed by the production side MPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the added main performance and added sub-performance in the ART state. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the added main performance and added sub-performance in the ART state. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side ROM for executing various performances in the ART state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side RAM for executing various performances in the ART state. An explanatory diagram to explain the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table. 13 is a flowchart showing non-normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU. (a) is a flowchart showing the presentation setting processing at the start of ART executed by the presentation side MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing the processing for starting a game during ART executed by the presentation side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance adjustment process executed by the performance side MPU. A flowchart showing the processing for added performance executed by the performance side MPU. 13A is a flowchart showing the flag clearing process executed by the production side MPU, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the game number update process executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the added main performance and added sub-performance are executed in the ART state. A flowchart showing the reel management process executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the reel initialization processing executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an origin setting process executed by the production side MPU. This is a flowchart showing the origin return process for reels executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the start setting process of the correction operation executed by the production side MPU. 13A is a flowchart showing the standby setting process executed by the production side MPU, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the standby management process executed by the production side MPU. 13A to 13F are time charts showing how the correction operation standby state and the reel error state are set. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus notification drive table. 13A is a flowchart showing the setting process for driving the reels executed by the production side MPU, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the control process for driving the reels executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel flag setting process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the role setting process executed by the production side MPU when a bonus is won. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how the reel error state is released and the reel operation performance is executed. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a history image displayed on an image display device, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the trigger for generating history constituent data and the type of image included in the history image. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side RAM for displaying history images, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the configuration data storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing a history image processing executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a history information storage process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the number information update process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of generating history configuration data executed by the production side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the types of selection condition tables and the wording designation data set in the selection condition tables, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the history memory area set as a reference destination in each selection condition table. An explanatory diagram for explaining the second selection condition table at the end of ART. 13 is a flowchart showing a text selection process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a heading setting process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a point calculation process executed by a production side MPU. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a heading point table, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an additional point table. 13 is a flowchart showing a plate setting process executed by the production side MPU. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the plate lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a game start response process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a history image management process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the end performance response processing executed by the performance side MPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of a history menu screen displayed on the image display device. 13 is a flowchart showing a display operation response process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the selection response processing executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the processing during mode selection executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a past history selection process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART in the second embodiment, and (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the additional performance in the ART state. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the reduced-addition performance. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side ROM for executing various performances in the ART state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side RAM for executing various performances in the ART state. A flowchart showing the processing for starting a game during ART executed by the production side MPU. (a) is a flowchart showing the performance adjustment processing executed by the performance side MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing the additional performance processing executed by the performance side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a flag clearing process executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the game number update process executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the added performance is executed in the ART state. 13 is a flowchart showing a past history selection process executed by the production side MPU in the third embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed into a box shape that is open at the front as a whole by fixing multiple wooden panels.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 with an axis 12a on the left side of the front door as a pivot axis so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side of the front door, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a specified key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed in a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When this start lever 41 is operated when game media such as medals and virtual medals have been bet, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate simultaneously.

On the right side of the start lever 41, there are stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is located directly below the display window 21L, 21M, 21R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 32L when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel started spinning.

One game (play) is the period from when the start lever 41 is operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, when the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop to when the various processes, such as the awarding of game media and management of the game status, are completed.

On the right side below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a medal insertion port 45 for inserting medals as investment value. As shown in FIG. 2, medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45 are guided by a selector 52 provided on the back side of the front door 12 to a hopper device 53 if reception is permitted, or from a medal discharge port 58 provided at the bottom front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 59 if reception is prohibited (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has the function of paying out medals stored in the storage tank through the medal discharge port 58 to the medal receiving tray 59 when a winning combination corresponding to the award of game media is established on an active line.

As shown in FIG. 1, below the medal insertion slot 45, there is provided a return button 46 that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 52. Also, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R on the left side, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at one time, and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 51 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and memorizes, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and any medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement button 51 is operated while virtual medals are stored and memorized, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58 as real medals.

As shown in Figs. 2 and 3, a power supply unit 54 is provided inside the cabinet 11 to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 that is operated to change the setting state of the slot machine 10 within the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 4 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from "0" to "20" are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 70 (described below) to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are seven types of symbols: "Bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), and "White 7" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of the various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 5 is a front view of the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the middle symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. When a specified number of gaming media have been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, and if a winning combination corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, either a benefit in the form of gaming media, a benefit in the form of a replay, or a transition to a gaming state is awarded.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line that can result in a win. The main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a combination of symbols that can result in a win is formed on a line that extends in a straight line, such as the subline SL1 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL2 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL3 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the subline SL4 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, no win is formed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won, with reference to Figure 6. Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won.

The minor prizes that award gaming media include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, it is the first supplementary prize. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, it is the second supplementary prize. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third supplementary win will occur. If any of the first to third supplementary wins occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "1".

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then the first bell win will occur. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, then the second bell win will occur. If either the first or second bell win occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "11".

If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" pattern, the first watermelon win is obtained. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second watermelon win is obtained. If either the first or second watermelon win is obtained, the number of game media to be awarded is "5". If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" pattern, regardless of the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, a cherry win is obtained. If a cherry win is obtained, the number of game media to be awarded is "2".

Winnings that grant a replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without betting gaming media, include the normal replay winnings, first special replay winnings, second special replay winnings, first RT replay winnings, second RT replay winnings, first fall replay winnings, and second fall replay winnings. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then a regular replay will be won.

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first special replay is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the second special replay is won.

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, a first RT replay win will be awarded. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, a second RT replay win will be awarded.

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, the first fall replay is won. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, the second fall replay is won.

If any of the above replay wins are won, a replay bonus will be awarded, which allows you to play the next game without having to bet on gaming media. Specifically, if any of the replay wins are won in a game in which you have bet on gaming media "3", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming media "3" bet on, without having to bet on gaming media.

Of the various replay winnings mentioned above, the first RT replay winning, second RT replay winning, first fall replay winning, and second fall replay winning not only trigger the awarding of the replay winning privilege, but also trigger a transition to a lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, multiple types of lottery modes are set in the role selection process (Figure 14) so that the types of roles to be selected and the winning probability of each role are different, and transitions between these lottery modes occur when a replay winning, which triggers a transition to a lottery mode, is achieved. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transitioning to each lottery mode will be explained in detail later.

State transition winnings, which only result in a transition of the game state, include the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, the 3rd BB winning, the 4th BB winning, the 1st RB winning, and the 2nd RB winning. In detail, if the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, then the 1st BB winning occurs. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern, then the 2nd BB winning occurs. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern on the main line ML, the third BB is won. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern on the main line ML, the first RB is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second RB will be won.

When the first BB win, the second BB win, the third BB win, or the fourth BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the BB state. When the first RB win or the second RB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to the bonus state. The bonus state is a game state in which the expected number of game media given per unit number of games is higher than in game states other than the bonus state. Specifically, a combination that enables the first bell win to be achieved is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.5) than in other game states, and when the combination is won, the first bell win is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher than in gaming states other than the bonus state. Note that the number of gaming media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than in other gaming states, and if the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher in the bonus state than in gaming states other than the bonus state, the number of gaming media required to start one game in the bonus state may be greater than in other gaming states.

Of the bonus states, the BB state continues over multiple games and ends when an ending condition is met based on the occurrence of an event that corresponds to the execution of the game. The ending condition can be any, but in this slot machine 10, the ending condition is set to be that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is equal to or greater than the BB ending reference number (specifically, "350"). Note that the ending condition may also be configured to be met when the number of games executed in the BB state reaches the BB ending reference number.

Of the bonus states, the RB state continues over multiple games and ends when a termination condition is met based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution of the game. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, the termination condition is set to be that the total number of game media awarded since the RB state began is equal to or greater than the RB termination reference number (specifically, "150"). This RB termination reference number is a number smaller than the BB termination reference number. Therefore, the BB state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state. Note that the termination condition may be met when the number of games executed in the RB state reaches the RB termination reference number. In this case, by setting the RB termination reference number of games smaller than the BB termination reference number of games, the BB state can be made a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state.

Next, we will explain the devices used to make various announcements and perform various effects.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, an image display device 63, and a gadget 75 are provided at the top of the front door 12, and a speaker 62 is provided at the bottom of the front door 12. The upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to an abnormality that occurs in the slot machine 10, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. The upper lamp 61 is also controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality that occurs in the slot machine 10, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. The speaker 62 is also controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. In other words, a display performance is executed on the image display device 63.

As shown in FIG. 1, the reel 75 comprises a reel main body 76 fixed to the front side of the game panel 20, and a reel movable part 77 that protrudes downward from the reel main body 76 and can move up and down. The reel main body 76 is a hollow housing, and inside the reel main body 76 is housed a reel drive part 78 that can move the reel movable part 77 up and down. The reel drive part 78 is electrically connected to the performance control device 90 described below, and moves the reel movable part 77 up and down based on drive data output from the performance control device 90.

The reel movable part 77 has a rod-shaped support part 77a that extends vertically downward from the lower end of the reel drive part 78. A through hole (not shown) that passes vertically through the bottom part is provided at the bottom of the reel main body part 76. The support part 77a is inserted into the through hole and extends below the bottom part. The reel movable part 77 has a spherical performance part 77b that is provided at the free end (lower end) of the support part 77a on the opposite side to the reel drive part 78.

The outer peripheral surface of the support portion 77a is provided with a detection protrusion 79 that can detect the position of the reel movable portion 77. The reel movable portion 77 can move up and down from a state in which the spherical performance portion 77b is staying at an initial position, which is the upper end of the movable range of the spherical performance portion 77b, to a state in which the spherical performance portion 77b is staying at a displaced position, which is the lower end of the movable range. The reel main body portion 76 is provided with an initial position sensor 75a for detecting the detection protrusion 79 when the spherical performance portion 77b is staying at the initial position, and a displaced position sensor 75b for detecting the detection protrusion 79 when the spherical performance portion 77b is staying at the displaced position.

The reel drive unit 78 moves the reel movable part 77 upward when it receives the first drive data from the performance control device 90 described later, and moves the reel movable part 77 downward when it receives the second drive data from the performance control device 90. The first drive data is output to the reel drive unit 78 on the condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. If the reel movable part 77 is already in the initial position, the initial position sensor 75a is in the ON state. In this case, the output of the first drive data is canceled, so the first drive data is not output additionally. In addition, the second drive data is output to the reel drive unit 78 on the condition that the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state. If the reel movable part 77 is already in the displacement position, the displacement position sensor 75b is in the ON state. In this case, the output of the second drive data is canceled, so the second drive data is not output additionally.

The spherical performance part 77b is located in front of the game panel 20 and is exposed to the outside, allowing the player to touch the spherical performance part 77b. When an upward external force is applied to the spherical performance part 77b, the spherical performance part 77b can move upward to an initial position which is the upper end of the range of motion of the spherical performance part 77b. Also, when a downward external force is applied to the spherical performance part 77b, the spherical performance part 77b can move downward to a displacement position which is the lower end of the range of motion of the spherical performance part 77b.

As shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the return button 46 on the front door 12 is provided a presentation operation device 64 that is manually operated by the player to change the display content on the image display device 63. The presentation operation device 64 has a center button 64a, as well as an up button 64b located above the center button 64a and a down button 64c located below it. The display content on the image display device 63 is changed by performing a specified operation on the center button 64a, the up button 64b, and the down button 64c. The relationship between the operation of the presentation operation device 64 and the display content on the image display device 63 will be explained in detail later.

The gaming panel 20 of the front door 12 is provided below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R with a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored, a dual-purpose display section 66 that displays the number of gaming media that are awarded when a small winning combination is won and, when the image display device 63 notifies the player of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, displays information corresponding to the order notified, and an advantageous zone display section 67 that displays information corresponding to the fact that the gaming zone is an advantageous zone. The credit display section 65 is made up of a seven-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED that emits light in green or other color.

Figure 7(a) is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a combined display section 66 and a favorable zone display section 67 are provided. In the common display area 68, the combined display section 66, which is provided by arranging two seven-segment displays 66a, 66b side by side in the horizontal direction as shown in Figure 7(a), and the favorable zone display section 67, which is made up of one light-emitting section, are integrated.

When any of the small prize winnings (first to third compensation winnings, first to second bell winnings, first to second watermelon winnings, or cherry winnings) corresponding to the awarding of game media is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to that small prize winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small prize winning was achieved. Specifically, when any of the first to third compensation winnings is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and a "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby indicating that "1" game media has been awarded. When any of the first to second bell winnings is achieved, a "1" is displayed on both the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby indicating that "11" game media have been awarded. In addition, when any of the first and second watermelon winnings is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "5" game media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry winning is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "2", thereby notifying that "2" game media have been awarded. On the other hand, even if a winning that does not award game media, such as any of the replay winnings, any of the BB winnings, and any of the RB winnings, is achieved, the display corresponding to that winning is not made on the dual-use display unit 66, and in this case, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of awarded game media on the dual-use display unit 66 ends when a game media is bet to start the next game after the game in which the display was made, and the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are in a non-display state at the timing of the bet.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R notified on the image display device 63 includes a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. There are stopping orders where the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, a stopping order where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, a stopping order where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, a stopping order where the first stop is on the left reel 32L and the rest is optional, a stopping order where the first stop is on the center reel 32M and the rest is optional, and a stopping order where the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the rest is optional.

Notification of the stopping order on the image display device 63 may be performed when a role including the first bell winning data is won in the role selection process, when a role including the first RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the second RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the first fall replay winning data is won, or when a role including the second fall replay winning data is won. Specifically, when a role including the first bell winning data is won, the first bell winning is achieved if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role among the above stopping orders. Then, when the first bell winning is achieved, the gaming medium "11" is awarded to the player as already explained.

When a combination including the first RT replay winning data is won, the first RT replay winning occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the first RT replay winning occurs, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning) than in the normal mode. When a combination including the second RT replay winning data is won, the second RT replay winning occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the second RT replay winning occurs, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning) than in the first RT mode.

When a combination including the first fall replay winning data is won, the first fall replay winning is avoided if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the first fall replay winning is made, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but this shift to the normal mode can be avoided by avoiding the first fall replay winning. Also, when a combination including the second fall replay winning data is won, the second fall replay winning is avoided if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the second fall replay winning is made, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but this shift to the first RT mode can be avoided by avoiding the second fall replay winning.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b displays the stop order of the order to be notified. The display contents are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order of the combined display unit 66 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order of the image display device 63. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of display contents of the combined display unit 66 are set in correspondence with some or all of the notification contents of the stop order of the image display device 63.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the combined display unit 66 displays a message corresponding to the awarding of game media. This makes it easier to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figures 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66.

When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced on the image display device 63, as shown in Fig. 8(a), the image display device 63 displays the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stopping operations required to end the game, and each unit display image G1 to G3 displays an image corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows the stop order when the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Therefore, the left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R. The unit display images G1 to G3 are set in the second notification display layer 108 (FIG. 38) described later, and are displayed in a manner in which they are present on the front side of the screen compared to the image for performance. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in a manner having transparency. This makes it possible to make the image set on the back side of the screen compared to the unit display images G1 to G3 visible even in a situation in which the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed.

In the image display device 63, an image is displayed that notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8(b), an "L" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. In other words, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and an image corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed in each unit display image G1 to G3, whereas in the combined display unit 66, a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than that of the image display unit 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display unit 63. The combined display unit 66 is also located on the opposite side to the image display unit 63, across the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be viewed. This means that the combined display unit 66 is positioned away from the image display unit 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63 are started after the lottery process for the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63, but these displays may be configured to start simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display unit 63 is ended when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed.

The dual-purpose display unit 66 is disposed in the center of the common display area 68, whereas the advantageous zone display unit 67 is disposed in a corner of the common display area 68. The advantageous zone display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the gaming zone is an advantageous zone between the normal zone and the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone is either a zone in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, which allows for the establishment of an advantageous winning for the player when the winning combinations that are the target of establishment are different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or a zone in which the probability of transitioning to the ART state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is higher than in the normal zone. On the other hand, the normal section is a section in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows for a winning combination advantageous to the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, is not announced, and is a section in which the probability of transitioning to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is lower than in the advantageous section, or a section in which transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met in the normal zone and a transition to the advantageous zone occurs, the advantageous zone display unit 67 turns on to start notifying that the zone is advantageous. When the conditions for transitioning to the normal zone are met in the advantageous zone and a transition to the normal zone occurs, the advantageous zone display unit 67 turns off to end the notification that the zone is advantageous. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall, etc. that the zone is advantageous. The dual-purpose display unit 66, which is provided in a common display area 68, turns on when a game medium is awarded and turns off when the next game starts, and turns on when the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display unit 63 and turns off when the game ends. Therefore, by locating the advantageous zone display section 67 within the common display area 68, it is possible to proactively create a situation in which only the advantageous zone display section 67 is lit in the common display area 68 when the advantageous zone is in a configuration that prevents it from being too noticeable to players, making it easier for the manager of the amusement hall to check the advantageous zone display section 67.

In addition, instead of maintaining the favorable zone display unit 67 in a lit state during favorable zones, the favorable zone display unit 67 may be configured to flash at a predetermined cycle during favorable zones. Also, other displays such as liquid crystal display devices may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the favorable zone display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that forms the back portion of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81. On one of the board surfaces of the main control board 71, which is an element mounting surface, an MPU 72 and a ratio display 85 that displays to notify the management results of the game history are mounted. The board box 81 is formed transparently so that the MPU 72 and the ratio display 85 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 and the ratio display 85 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81 that faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the housing 11 and exposing the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81, and also to visually observe the MPU 72 and the ratio display 85 through the opposing wall 82.

9 is a front view of the ratio display 85. As shown in FIG. 9, the identifier display section 86 and the ratio display section 87 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction on the display surface of the ratio display 85. The identifier display section 86 includes a 7-segment display 86a on the left side, a 7-segment display 86b on the right side, and an auxiliary display section 86c for identifiers. The ratio display section 87 includes a 7-segment display 87a on the left side, a 7-segment display 87b on the right side, and an auxiliary display section 87c for ratios. Each of the 7-segment displays 86a, 86b, 87a, and 87b displays not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetical characters. In the slot machine 10, the management result of the game history is notified using the ratio display 85, and the contents of this notification will be described in detail later. The display of the management result of the game history on the display surface of the ratio display 85 is visible through the opposing wall section 82 of the board box 81. The ratio display 85 may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display.

As shown in FIG. 3, the board box 81 is formed by combining a number of case bodies in front and behind, and these case bodies are provided with joints 83 that prevent the case bodies from being separated and leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. The joints 83 are arranged in a row on one side of the board box 81, which is approximately a rectangular parallelepiped. As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are used to prevent the case bodies from being separated and the case bodies are separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, it is possible to prevent the case bodies from being separated again by connecting another joint 83 thereafter. In addition, since the joints 83 are destroyed when the case bodies are separated and a trace is left, it is possible to visually check the joints 83 to see whether the case bodies have been separated illegally. In addition, a seal seal 84 is attached to another side of the board box 81 other than the side on which the joints 83 are arranged in a row so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace if the seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a performance control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The performance control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 and stacked on the front door 12. The performance control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image display device 63, and gimmicks 75 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that, like the main control device 70, the performance control device 90 is configured with a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in FIG. 10.

As shown in FIG. 10, the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 is equipped with an MPU 72 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49, the settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and the setting key detection sensor that detects the insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like, and the signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the credit display unit 65, the dual-purpose display unit 66, the advantageous zone display unit 67, the performance control device 90, etc. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 has a function of guiding a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and discharging it to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state, and specifically, it operates the path switching piece provided in the selector 52 between an acceptance permission position and an acceptance prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

In addition, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is achieved and a medal is paid out. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the credit display unit 65 so that the number of game media stored as virtual medals is displayed. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when the award of game media occurs. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous zone display unit 67 so that an announcement is made that the advantageous zone is in effect when the advantageous zone is in effect. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that an announcement corresponding to the management result of the game is made. In addition, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the performance control device 90 at each timing of each game, and in addition, when a command for announcing the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is transmitted to the performance control device 90 on the image display device 63, the MPU 72 executes display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that an announcement corresponding to the announcement content is made. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90, while direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the performance control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the subject of relatively complex display control, and direct display control is performed in the MPU 72 for the combined display unit 66, which is the subject of relatively simple display control. This makes it possible to perform both displays that emphasize increasing attention to the performance and displays that emphasize reliability, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to the main control unit 70 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below a reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and enables the processing state before the power failure to be restored after power is restored. In addition, the power supply 54 is provided with a power failure power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power failure power when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 when the power failure power supply unit can supply backup power (for example, for one or two days). However, by pressing the reset button 56 on the power supply device 54 and then turning on the slot machine 10, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized.

The performance control device 90 is equipped with a performance control board 91 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 has a built-in ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. It also has built-in a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a random number generating circuit.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. In addition, while backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply unit of the power supply device 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, backup power may be supplied to the RAM 94.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 72 (FIG. 10) of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to an initial position sensor 75a that detects the detection protrusion 79 of the reel 75 that is in the initial position described above, a displacement position sensor 75b that detects the detection protrusion 79 that has moved to the displacement position described above, a central operation sensor 64d that detects the operation of the central button 64a in the performance operation device 64, an upper operation sensor 64e that detects the operation of the upper button 64b, and a lower operation sensor 64f that detects the operation of the lower button 64c, and the signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 92. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, the image display device 63, and the reel drive unit 78. Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 controls the illumination of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, the display of the image display device 63, and the drive control of the props 75, thereby enabling various notifications and performances to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 94 has a read area 94a into which data tables for various notifications and various performances are read. As will be described in detail later, the read area 94a has 11 layers, and the data tables for various notifications and various performances are read into the corresponding layers in the read area 94a. The MPU 92 executes various notifications and various performances by controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61, controlling the sound output of the speaker 62, controlling the display of the image display device 63, and controlling the drive of the role-playing device 75 based on the data tables read into each layer of the read area 94a.

In this slot machine 10, game history data is stored in RAM 94 while a game is in progress, and a history image display is performed in which a history image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the game history data stored in the RAM 94. The player can check the game history by displaying the history image displayed based on the game history data on the image display device 63 at any time.

As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 94 is provided with a history storage area 94b in which game history data used for displaying history images is stored, and an image playback storage area 94c in which history configuration data indicating the configuration of previously generated history images is stored. The MPU 92 generates history configuration data based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The history configuration data is data that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the types of multiple images that make up the history image, and the history configuration data includes multiple designation data that designate the multiple images that make up the history image. The image playback storage area 94c is a storage area that can store multiple (specifically, 32) pieces of history configuration data. Details of the history images, the history storage area 94b, the image playback storage area 94c, and the various designation data will be described later.

In addition to the MPU 92, the performance control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor 95 (VDP 95), a character ROM (not shown), a video RAM 96, and the like. The VDP 95 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP 95 is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM 96, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 96 from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns to be displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 96 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the performance based on a command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, it outputs a drawing list to the VDP 95 indicating the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the performance determined. The VDP 95 reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list received from the MPU 92, and creates display data in the video RAM 96 using the read image data. The display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96. Two frame areas are provided in the video RAM 96, and the display data is created alternately in the two frame areas. The VDP 95 outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

Since two frame areas are provided in the video RAM 96, while drawing (output of image signals) to the image display device 63 is being performed using display data created in one frame area, the creation of display data to be used in the future is performed for the other frame area. In other words, a double buffer method is adopted, and the output of the image signal to the image display device 63 is performed in parallel with the creation of display data corresponding to the update timing one frame later than the frame related to the output.

For ease of explanation, in the following explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73, and main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the performance control device 90 are referred to as the performance MPU 92, performance ROM 93, and performance RAM 94, respectively.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 11.

The main process first executes initialization processing (step S101). In the initialization processing, an interrupt by the timer interrupt processing is permitted, and various initial settings are made to the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72.

Then, a reel initialization command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S102). The reel initialization command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to execute a process for returning the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 to its initial position. Upon receiving the reel initialization command, the production side MPU 92 executes the reel initialization process (Figure 69) described below.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power has been turned ON (step S103). If the power has been turned ON with the setting key inserted (step S103: YES), and the reset button 56 has not been turned ON when the power was turned ON (step S104: NO), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 has been turned ON when the power was turned ON (step S104: YES), the clear process (step S105) is executed, and then the winning probability setting process is executed (step S106).

In the clear process, all areas in the master RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, the areas in the master RAM 74 that store the setting value of the slot machine 10, the area in which data indicating whether or not the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state is stored, the area in which data indicating the total number of game media awarded in the bonus state is stored, the area in which data indicating the game state is stored, the area in which data for specifying the end condition of the ART state is stored, the area in which data indicating the game section is stored, and the area in which data indicating the management result of the game history is stored are all cleared to "0". As a result, when the clear process is executed, the game enters a normal game state and a normal section regardless of the state before the power is cut off, and if the state before the power is cut off is a state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormal state is released. Note that the areas in which the data indicating the management result of the game history is stored (specifically, the total number of games counter 74a and the advantageous number of games counter 74b, which will be described later) may be excluded from the targets for clearing to "0" during the clear process.

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the credit display unit 65 displays "Setting 1" when the winning probability setting process starts, and if the clear process (step S105) is not executed, the display corresponds to the setting value before the power is cut off. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the reset button 56 is operated when the setting value is "Setting 6", the setting value is updated to "Setting 1". If the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, a setting end command is sent to the production side MPU 92, and a process for ending the display of the setting value on the credit display unit 65 is performed, and the winning probability setting process is ended. The setting end command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the update of the setting value has ended. The setting end command contains numerical information indicating the current setting value, and the production side MPU 92 determines the current setting value based on the numerical information set in the received setting end command.

After the winning probability setting process is executed, the initialization process of the advantageous zone is executed (step S107). In the initialization process of the advantageous zone, a process is executed to initialize information related to the advantageous zone. The contents of the initialization process of the advantageous zone are the same as those of steps S1007 and S1014 described below. As a result, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game zone is reliably set to the normal zone. The specific processing contents of the initialization process of the advantageous zone will be described later. After the initialization process of the advantageous zone is executed, a transition is made to normal processing (step S108). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S103: NO), the power recovery process from step S109 onwards is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal or not (step S109). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S110). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether the RAM determination value is normal or not (step S111). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal or not.

If the answer is yes in all of steps S109 to S111, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state before the power was cut off (step S112). In addition, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S113). After that, a power recovery command is sent to the production MPU 92 to make it recognize that the power recovery processing has been executed (step S114), and then the address before the power failure is returned to (step S115).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S109 to S111, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is prohibited (step S116), all output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S117), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S118). This then results in an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing the clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 12. Note that the timer interrupt process is initiated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 that are used in the normal process described below are saved to the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 and power outage processing is executed.

The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal is input to the main MPU 72 from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54. In the power outage processing, first it is determined whether the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is returned to, and the command transmission is terminated. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. Then, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power outage is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether the data in the main RAM 74 is normal or not is calculated and saved in the main RAM 74, and further access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are carried out. In step S204, a watchdog timer clear process is carried out to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunctions. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is carried out to enable the main MPU 72 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S206, a stepping motor control process is carried out to drive the stepping motors provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S207, a sensor monitoring process is carried out to read the status of various sensors connected to the input ports and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not.

In step S208, when the stop button 42-44 corresponding to any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are currently spinning is operated, a stop operation response process (FIG. 25) is performed in which a command corresponding to that operation is sent to the production side MPU 92. Based on the command received from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 determines that a stop operation has been performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop operation response process (FIG. 25) will be described in detail later.

In step S209, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S210, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S211, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the performance side MPU 92. In step S212, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S213, the values of each register saved in the main side RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 72. In step S214, a management process (FIG. 102) is performed to manage the game history and to display the contents corresponding to the management results on the dual-purpose display unit 66. Thereafter, in step S215, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated. The management process (FIG. 102) of step S214 will be described in detail later.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 13.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, a start waiting process is performed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay win occurred in the previous game. If any replay win occurred, a re-play process is performed to set the same number of bets as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. If no replay win occurred, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 was operated, and if the settlement button 51 was operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement button 51 is not operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either was performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medals were inserted nor the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process of step S302 is executed, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached a specified number (specifically, "3") (step S303), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the number of bets has reached the specified number (step S303: YES), it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304), and if the start lever 41 has not been operated (step S304: NO), the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, if the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), the main line ML is enabled and then the reception prohibition process is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion port 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. After that, a role selection process is executed to select the role for the current game (step S306), and if the value of the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S307: YES), a reel control process is executed to drive and control each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the role selection process for the current game (step S308).

Then, the medium granting process is executed (step S309). In the medium granting process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, a process is executed to grant the player a number of game media corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when granting virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and if the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit of the number of medals stored, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of medals stored is paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium granting process, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a response process is executed at the end of the game to enable the setting of the game state and game zone corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). In addition, an external output setting process is executed to output the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall (step S311).

Then, it is determined whether or not the second expected performance flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S312), and if the second expected performance flag is set to "1" (step S312: YES), the processing of step S312 is repeated until the second expected performance flag is cleared to "0". The second expected performance flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that the game is the target game for the second expected performance described below. If a negative determination is made in step S312, it is determined whether or not the re-change performance flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S313), and if the re-change performance flag is set to "1" (step S313: YES), the processing of step S313 is repeated until the re-change performance flag is cleared to "0". The re-change performance flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that the game is the target game for the re-change performance described below.

If a negative judgment is made in step S313, and the value of the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S314: YES), the acceptance permission process is executed (step S315), and the process returns to step S301. When the acceptance permission process is executed, the medal inserted through the medal insertion port 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

<Role selection process>
Next, the lottery process for determining a winning combination executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S401). In the random number acquisition process, a random number to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After executing the random number acquisition process in step S401, the lottery table for determining whether the hand is a hit or a miss is read from the main ROM 73 (step S402). In this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probability from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the lottery process for the hand. "Setting n+1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". Specifically, "setting n+1" has a higher winning probability for the hand that triggers the transition to the BB state than "setting n", so "setting n+1" is more advantageous for the player than "setting n". In addition, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables differ in the main MPU 72 even if the setting value is the same stage: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In addition, as a game state, a bonus state (BB state and RB state) exists in addition to the state of each lottery mode. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, the current lottery mode, and the current game state is selected.

Using "Setting 3" as an example, we will explain the lottery tables corresponding to the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode in the non-bonus state. First, we will explain the lottery table for normal mode that is selected in normal mode. Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for normal mode. Note that the following explanation will refer to the explanatory diagram in Figure 16 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 15, the lottery table for normal mode has index values IV set, and each index value IV is associated with a winning role and has a point value PV set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery role in relation to the maximum value of the free run counter ("65535").

Specifically, the first bell winning data and the first compensation winning data are set for index value IV=1. When a win occurs with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 16, if the first stop (the reel on which the first stop command was issued) is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning will occur reliably regardless of the types of the second and third stop targets, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the first compensation winning will occur reliably.

In this slot machine 10, reel control that allows up to four symbols to slide after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control that stops each reel 32L, 32M, 32R within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. By performing such reel control, it is possible to easily achieve a winning combination corresponding to a winning role, and it is possible to prevent a winning combination corresponding to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the constituent symbols that make up the combination of symbols for achieving a winning combination on one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42-44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this event is also called a "missed win"). The first to third compensation wins, the first bell win, the second bell win, and the various replay wins are winning patterns that will not result in a missed win if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first watermelon win, second watermelon win, cherry win, first BB win, second BB win, third BB win, fourth BB win, first RB win, and second RB win are winning patterns that may result in a missed win depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first bell winning data and the second compensation winning data are set for index value IV=2. When a win occurs with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 16, if the first stop is center reel 32M, the first bell winning is achieved regardless of the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are the second and third stop targets and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the second compensation winning is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first bell winning data and the third compensation winning data are set for index value IV=3. When a win occurs with index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. 16, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is achieved regardless of the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the third compensation winning is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first bell winning data is set for index value IV=4. When a win occurs with index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 16, the first bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 15, only the second bell winning data is set for index value IV=17. When a win occurs with index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 16, the second bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=5. When a win occurs with index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 16, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the first watermelon winning may not be achieved. As shown in FIG. 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=18. When a win occurs with index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the second watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV=6. When a win occurs with index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 16, a cherry winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of left stop button 42 relative to the spinning position of left reel 32L, there is a possibility that a cherry winning will not occur.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the 3rd BB winning data is set for index value IV=7. When a win occurs with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 16, the 3rd BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the 3rd BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the 4th BB winning data is set for index value IV=8. When a win occurs with index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 16, the 4th BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the 4th BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the 1st RB winning data is set for index value IV=9. When a win occurs with index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 16, the first RB win can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first RB win may not occur.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first BB winning data is set for index value IV=19. When a win occurs with index value IV=19, as shown in FIG. 16, the first BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second BB winning data is set for index value IV=20. When a win occurs with index value IV=20, as shown in FIG. 16, the second BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the second BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second RB winning data is set for index value IV=21. When a win occurs with index value IV = 21, as shown in Figure 16, the second RB win can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the second RB win may not occur.

Here, winning data other than the bonus winning data including the first to fourth BB winning data and the first to second RB winning data is erased in the game in which the winning was made regardless of whether or not a win was made, and is not carried over to games following the winning game. In contrast, the bonus winning data is stored and held until the corresponding bonus win is made, even in games following the winning game, except when the main RAM 74 is cleared. In this case, in a game in which the bonus winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to all of the bonus winning data is excluded from the lottery. This makes it possible to prevent new bonus winning data from being stored even when bonus winning data has already been stored and to prevent multiple bonus winning data from being accumulated and stored.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first special replay winning data is set for index value IV=10. When a win occurs with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 16, the first special replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second special replay winning data is set for index value IV=22. When a win occurs with index value IV=22, as shown in FIG. 16, the second special replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

Regular replay winning data and 1st RT replay winning data are set for index values IV = 11 to 16, as shown in Figure 15. In this case, if a win occurs with index value IV = 11, as shown in Figure 16, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command was issued) is the center reel 32M, and the third stop (the reel on which the last stop command was issued) is the right reel 32R, then the 1st RT replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise, a regular replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=12, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when a win occurs with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first RT replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when a win occurs with index value IV=15, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first RT replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if a win occurs with index value IV=16, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, then the first RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; otherwise, a regular replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 15 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 are each approximately 1/6.6. The probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is approximately 1/13.1. The probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is approximately 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is approximately 1/423. The probability of winning when the index value IV=7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 are each approximately 1/437. The probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is approximately 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is approximately 1/655. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, the probability of winning when the index value IV=14, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 are each about 1/41. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/16.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=18 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=19 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=20 are each about 1/437. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=21 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=22 is about 1/655.

As already explained, in the lottery table for normal mode, in addition to the winning data for index values IV = 11 to 16, the winning data for first RT replay is set. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/41. If any of index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, and the stop order of the first, second, and third stops of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination, a first RT replay win is established, and the lottery mode transitions from normal mode to first RT mode. When transitioning to first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process for combinations (FIG. 14) becomes the lottery table for first RT mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the first RT mode that is selected when the game is set to "Setting 3" and the game is in the first RT mode. Figures 17 and 18 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 15). Also, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 23 to 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those for the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode.

In this case, the index values IV = 1-6, 23-24 are set with roles that can award game media, and the winning data and winning probabilities set for each of the index values IV = 1-6, 23-24 are the same as those for the index values IV = 1-6, 17-18 in the normal mode lottery table, so the types of roles that can award game media and the winning probabilities of those roles are the same in both normal mode and first RT mode.

In addition, bonus winning data is set for index values IV=7-9, 25-27 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, similar to index values IV=7-9, 19-21 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the winning probability is the same as that of the lottery table for the normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus role in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same. In addition, special replay winning data is set for index values IV=10, 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, similar to index values IV=10, 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the winning probability is the same as that of the lottery table for the normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning each special replay role in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

The winning data set for index values IV = 11 to 22 is different from that in normal mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 17, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

When the index value IV = 11 is a winning combination, as shown in Figure 18, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second RT replay is won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay is won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when the index value IV = 12 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the second RT replay is won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay is won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when a win occurs with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second RT replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when a win occurs with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second RT replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize is surely won regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if the winning combination is an index value IV=15, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, then the second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, if the winning combination is an index value IV=16, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, then the second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the first RT mode, if a winning combination occurs with index value IV = 11 to 16, and the first, second, and third stops of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R match the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination, a second RT replay win is established and the lottery mode transitions from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When transitioning to the second RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the combination lottery process (Figure 14) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, in addition to the regular replay winning data, the first fall replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV = 17 to 22. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 17 to 22 is approximately 1/10.9.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, when the index value IV=17 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, when the index value IV=18 is won, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=19, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a first fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=20, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a first fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=21 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the index value IV=22 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the first fall replay winning combination is established, the lottery mode transitions to the normal mode. When the lottery mode transitions to the normal mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 14) becomes the lottery table for the normal mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, roles that make it possible to achieve a replay win are set for index values IV = 10 to 22, 28. And because the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of roles that make it possible to achieve a replay win in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/4.1. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.7. In other words, the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than normal mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when the game is set to "Setting 3" and the game is in the second RT mode. Figures 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 15) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 17). In addition, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 18 to 23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those for the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the index values IV = 23 to 28 in the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In this case, the index values IV = 1-6, 18-19 are set to roles that can award game media, and the winning data and winning probabilities set for each of the index values IV = 1-6, 18-19 are the same as those for the index values IV = 1-6, 17-22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and are also the same as those for the index values IV = 1-6, 23-24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode. As a result, the types of roles that can award game media and the winning probabilities of those roles are the same in the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode.

In addition, the index values IV = 7 to 9, 20 to 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are set with bonus winning data in the same way as the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the index values IV = 7 to 9, 25 to 27 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the same as that in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus role in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same. In addition, the index values IV = 10, 23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are set with special replay winning data in the same way as the index values IV = 10, 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the index values IV = 10, 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the same as that in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. In other words, the probability of winning each special replay role is the same in normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV = 11 to 17 differs from that in normal mode and first RT mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 19, in addition to normal replay winning data, second fall replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 11 to 16. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

20, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if the index value IV=12 is won, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a second fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a second fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=15 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay winning combination will occur without any difference in timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination will occur without any difference in timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=16 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination will occur without any difference in timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination will occur without any difference in timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode. When the first RT mode is entered, the lottery table referenced in the role selection process (Figure 14) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=17 in the lottery table for the second RT mode. The probability of winning with index value IV=17 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically, the winning rate is about 1 in 5.5. If a win occurs with index value IV=17, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, the combinations that allow a replay win are set for index values IV = 10 to 17, 23. The winning probability of these combinations is set as already explained, so that the winning probability of the combinations that allow a replay win in the second RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is about 1/3.0. In contrast, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7, and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, this is not limited to this, and the replay probability may be the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, or may be substantially the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, although the replay probability is slightly different.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 also stores a bonus lottery table that is referenced in the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 14) when in the BB or RB state, and also stores an internal lottery table that is referenced in the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 14) when a bonus combination is won but the corresponding bonus win is not achieved.

In the bonus lottery table, the odds of winning a combination that allows the first bell win to occur are approximately 1/1.5, and if the combination is won, the first bell win will occur regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the bonus lottery table, the odds of winning a combination that allows the first watermelon win to occur are approximately 1/6.6, and the odds of winning a combination that allows the cherry win to occur are approximately 1/7.8. The first watermelon win and cherry win will not occur depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As described above, the bonus lottery table is set so that in the BB state or RB state, the first bell win is basically achieved in each game and "11" game media is awarded, but the first watermelon win or cherry win may also be achieved. When the first watermelon win is achieved, "5" game media is awarded, and when the cherry win is achieved, "2" game media is awarded. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (e.g., "350"), and the RB state ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start of the RB state is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (e.g., "150"). Therefore, the number of games required until the BB state and the RB state end will vary depending on the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 14) and whether or not a miss occurs. The bonus lottery table is common to the setting values "1" to "6" that change the advantage of the slot machine 10.

The internal lottery table is set so that winning data corresponding to index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 22 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 15) is set with the winning probability of those index values IV, and in addition, index values to which only normal replay winning data is set are set so that the total winning probability of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when the internal winning state of a bonus role is reached, the role that allows the award of game media and the winning probability of that role are the same as in normal mode, and the replay probability is the same as in normal mode, but the bonus role will not be won, and furthermore, the role that triggers a transition to normal mode, first RT mode, or second RT mode will not be won.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, there are index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" and index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values of "1" to "6". Figures 21(a) to 21(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values of "1" to "6", where Figure 21(a) shows the case of the normal mode lottery table, Figure 21(b) shows the case of the first RT mode lottery table, and Figure 21(c) shows the case of the second RT mode lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index values IV=17-22 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", and the index values IV=1-16 are index values IV with the same winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the index values IV=23-28 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", and the index values IV=1-22 are index values IV with the same winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 21(c), in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV=18-23 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", and the index values IV=1-17 are index values IV with the same winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6".

In other words, in any lottery table, index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" are collected in the index value IV of the front range, which is consecutive from index value IV = 1, and index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values "1" to "6" are collected in the index value IV of the rear range, which is consecutive from the index value IV next to the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. In this way, by collecting index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" in the front range and collecting index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values "1" to "6" in the rear range, it becomes easier to set and modify index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" and index values IV with different winning probabilities at the design stage of the slot machine 10.

Although the index value IV included in the rear range in which the winning probability differs between the set values "1" to "6" in each lottery table is different, the winning data and winning probability set for each index value IV included in the rear range are common between each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the rear range includes index values IV=17 to 22, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the rear range includes index values IV=23 to 28, and in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21(c), the rear range includes index values IV=18 to 23. In this case, the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=17 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=23 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=18 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are mutually identical, the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=18 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=19 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are mutually identical, and the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=19 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=20 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are mutually identical. The set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=20 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=26 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the same, the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=21 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=27 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the same, and the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the same. This makes it possible to make the types of roles with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6" common in each lottery table, and to make the winning probability of each set value of the role the same in each lottery table.

Incidentally, the winning probability of each of the index values in which only the second bell winning data is set, the index value in which only the second watermelon winning data is set, the index value in which only the first BB winning data is set, the index value in which only the second BB winning data is set, the index value in which only the second RB winning data is set, and the index value IV in which only the second special replay winning data is set are all set so that the larger set value tends to have a higher winning probability than the smaller set value. However, this is not limited to this, and as long as the larger set value is more advantageous for the player than the smaller set value, it may be configured so that for some index values, the larger set value tends to have a lower winning probability than the smaller set value.

As already explained, the index values IV = 1 to 10 included in the front range in each lottery table are set with the same winning data and the winning probabilities are also the same. This makes it possible to make the winning probabilities of roles with the same winning probability between the setting values "1" to "6" in each lottery table and roles with the same type of winning data set the same.

In the configuration in which the front range and the rear range are set as described above, the front range includes roles that allow the award of game media, roles that allow replay winning, and roles that allow bonus winning, while the rear range includes roles that allow the award of game media, roles that allow replay winning, and roles that allow bonus winning. In other words, roles that allow the award of game media are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these roles have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, roles that allow replay winning are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these roles have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, roles that allow bonus winning are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these roles have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. This could result in a complicated processing configuration for determining the winning role in various processes after the role selection process (Figure 14) is executed.

In addition, the index values set in the latter half of the front range in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table are set with winning data for generating a transition opportunity between lottery modes and winning data for changing the replay probability, so the first index value IV of the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, an index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. In addition, for example, an index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the second special replay winning data is set will be "22" in the lottery table for the normal mode, "28" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and "23" in the lottery table for the second RT mode. In this case, if different index values IV are to be used in various processes after the lottery process for the role (FIG. 14) is executed, even though the role is the same, it will be necessary to grasp not only the index value IV but also the current lottery mode each time the process for identifying the role is performed, which may complicate the processing configuration.

To eliminate the above-mentioned inconveniences, in this slot machine 10, an offset table 97 is pre-stored in the main ROM 73 during the design stage of the slot machine 10. Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 97.

As shown in FIG. 22, the offset table 97 is set with winning number information. Numerical information of "1" to "41" is set as winning number information in consecutive numbers. In the offset table 97, each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, each index value IV of the first RT mode lottery table, and each index value IV of the second RT mode lottery table are associated with winning number information of any one of "1" to "41". This association is made so that a group of small roles that allow the award of game media, a group of bonus roles that allow the establishment of a bonus win, and a group of replay roles that allow the establishment of a replay win are each formed by consecutive winning number information. In addition, this association is made so that roles with the same type of winning data set can be treated as the same winning number information even between different lottery modes.

Specifically, the offset table 97 is set so that a group of information on consecutive winning numbers "1" to "8" is a group of small winning combinations, a group of information on consecutive winning numbers "9" to "14" is a group of bonus winning combinations, and a group of information on consecutive winning numbers "15" and onwards is a group of replay winning combinations. In addition, in the replay winning combination group, replay winning combinations for which normal replay winning data is not set are collected in the winning number information for "15" and "16," and replay winning combinations for which normal replay winning data is set are collected in the winning number information for "17" and onwards.

In each lottery table, the first bell winning data and the first compensation winning data are set to the index value IV of "1", but the winning number information of "1" is set for the index value IV = 1 in any lottery table. In each lottery table, the first bell winning data and the second compensation winning data are set to the index value IV = 2, but the winning number information of "2" is set for the index value IV = 2 in any lottery table. In each lottery table, the first bell winning data and the third compensation winning data are set to the index value IV = 3, but the winning number information of "3" is set for the index value IV = 3 in any lottery table. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set to the index value IV of "4", but the winning number information of "4" is set for the index value IV = 4 in any lottery table.

Only the second bell winning data is set for the index value IV of "17" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "23" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "18" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with the winning number information of "5". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 14).

In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV of "5", but the winning number information of "6" is set for that index value IV = 5 in all lottery tables.

Only the second watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV of "18" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "24" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "19" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with the winning number information of "7". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 14).

In each lottery table, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV of "6", but the winning number information of "8" is set for the index value IV = 6 in all lottery tables. In each lottery table, only 3rd BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "7", but the winning number information of "9" is set for the index value IV = 7 in all lottery tables. In each lottery table, only 4th BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "8", but the winning number information of "10" is set for the index value IV = 8 in all lottery tables.

Only the first BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "19" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "25" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "20" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with winning number information of "11". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 14).

Only the second BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "20" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "26" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "21" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with winning number information of "12". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 14).

In each lottery table, only the first RB winning data is set for the index value IV of "9", but the winning number information of "13" is set for the index value IV = 9 in all lottery tables.

Only the second RB winning data is set for the index value IV of "21" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "27" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "22" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with winning number information of "14". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 14).

In each lottery table, only the first special replay winning data is set for the index value IV of "10", but the winning number information of "15" is set for the index value IV = 10 in all lottery tables.

Only the second special replay winning data is set in the index value IV of "22" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "28" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "23" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with winning number information of "16". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 14).

For winning numbers "17" and after, the index value IV is not commonized in each lottery table, and individual winning number information is set for each index value IV of each lottery table. This is because the type of winning data set in the index value IV associated with winning numbers "17" and after is not common between each lottery table. Specifically, in the lottery table for normal mode, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set have winning number information of "17" to "22", respectively. In addition, in the lottery table for first RT mode, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which normal replay winning data and second RT replay winning data are set have winning number information of "23" to "28", respectively, and the index values IV = 17 to 22 in which normal replay winning data and first fall replay winning data are set have winning number information of "29" to "34", respectively. In addition, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV=11-16 in which the normal replay winning data and the second fall replay winning data are set have the winning number information of "35"-"40" set, respectively, and the index value IV=17 in which only the normal replay winning data is set has the winning number information of "41" set.

By providing the offset table 97 as described above, it is possible to handle the state in which roles that allow the award of game media, roles that allow replay winning, and roles that allow bonus winning are mixed in the front and back ranges in a state where they are aggregated for roles of the same group in various processes after the role selection process (Figure 14). In addition, roles that have different index values IV set between each lottery table despite having the same winning data set can be treated as the same information in various processes after the role selection process (Figure 14). Furthermore, when the result of the role selection process (Figure 14) is sent to the production side MPU 92, the winning number information can be set in the command for sending the result, making it possible to reduce the amount of information in the command.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also associated in the offset table 97 with winning number information that is common to the index values IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. In the bonus lottery table, an index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set, an index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set, and an index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set are set, but the index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set is associated with winning number information of "4", the index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set is associated with winning number information of "6", and the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with winning number information of "8". Also, as already explained, in the case of the internal lottery table, the winning data corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 22 in the lottery table for normal mode is set with the winning probability of those index values IV, and in addition, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set to have the total winning probability of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for normal mode. Therefore, the index values IV corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 22 in the lottery table for normal mode are associated with the winning number information corresponding to those index values IV in the lottery table for normal mode, and the index value IV in which only the normal replay winning data is set is associated with the winning number information of "41" in the same manner as the index value IV = 17 in which only the normal replay winning data is set in the lottery table for the second RT mode.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 14), after a lottery table is selected (step S402), the first round flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S403). In the lottery process for winning combinations, a lottery is performed from the index value IV in the front range among the index value IV in the front range, which has the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6", and the index value IV in the back range, which has different winning probability among the set values "1" to "6". In this case, the first round flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the current lottery target is in the front range or not.

Then, a first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S404). The target index counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the type of role that is the target of the lottery. The first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the case of the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV = 1 to 16 falls in the front range, so the first reference value is "16", in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the index value IV = 1 to 22 falls in the front range, so the first reference value is "22", and in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV = 1 to 17 falls in the front range, so the first reference value is "17".

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the case of a bonus lottery table, only three index values IV are set, and the probability of winning is the same for all of these index values IV between the set values "1" and "6", so the first reference value is "3". Also, although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV that fall into the front range is set as the first reference value.

Then, a judgment value DV to be used when judging whether the hand is a hit or a miss is set (step S405). In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding the point value PV set for the index value IV currently being selected to the current judgment value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random number acquired in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV set for the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to set the new judgment value DV. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, the first reference value is "16", so the point value PV set for the index value IV = 16 in the normal mode lottery table is added to the random number acquired in step S401 to set the judgment value DV.

After that, a win/loss determination is made for the role currently being selected (step S406). In determining whether the role is a win/loss determination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it does not exceed "65535", the value of the target index counter is subtracted by 1 (step S407), and it is determined whether the value of the target index counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S408). If the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S408: NO), the process returns to step S405, and a win/loss determination is made for the role corresponding to the updated value of the target index counter.

If the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S408: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is a bonus state (step S409). Since the index value IV of the rear range is not set in the bonus lottery table, if the current state is a bonus state (step S409: YES), it is determined that no winning combination was won in this game, and the process proceeds directly to step S414.

If the current state is not a bonus state (step S409: NO), it is determined whether or not the first lap flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S410). In other words, it is determined whether or not the index value IV group for which the winning/losing judgment of the role has been completed is in the front range. If the first lap flag is set to "1" (step S410: YES), the first lap flag is cleared to "0" (step S411), and then the target index counter is set to a second reference value (step S412). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV = 17 to 22 correspond to the rear range, in the first RT mode lottery table, index values IV = 23 to 28 correspond to the rear range, and in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV = 18 to 23 correspond to the rear range, so that the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. In addition, in the case of a bonus lottery table, since there is no index value IV included in the rear range, the second reference value is not set. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV that fall into the rear range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S405, and a win/loss determination is made for the role corresponding to the second reference value. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S410, it is assumed that no role was won in this game, and the process proceeds directly to step S414.

On the other hand, if the number of winning numbers exceeds "65535" in step S406, information on the winning combination currently being selected and the corresponding winning number is acquired, and a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning data corresponding to the currently being selected combination in the main RAM 74 (step S413). Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process.

First, it is determined whether the first lap flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the currently winning combination is an index value IV included in the front range (step S501). If the first lap flag is set to "1" (step S501: YES), the value of the target index counter in the main RAM 74 corresponds to the currently winning index value IV, so the process from step S503 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first lap flag is "0", it means that the winning combination this time is an index value IV included in the rear range. When making a win/loss judgment of the index value IV included in the rear range, a second reference value is set in the target index counter, but since the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range, the index value IV of the winning combination this time does not match the value of the target index counter. The difference between the index value IV of the winning combination this time and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that was the subject of the lottery this time. Therefore, if a negative judgment is made in step S501, the first reference value of the lottery table that was the subject of the lottery this time is added to the value of the target index counter (step S502). In this case, the first reference value added is "16" if the lottery table is for the normal mode, "22" if the lottery table is for the first RT mode, and "17" if the lottery table is for the second RT mode.

If a positive judgment is made in step S501, or if the processing of step S502 is executed, the offset table 97 is read from the master ROM 73 (step S503). Then, information on the type of lottery table currently being selected and the winning number corresponding to the current value of the target index counter is read from the offset table 97, and the winning number information is stored in the master RAM 74 as winning number information for the current game (step S504). Naturally, if no winning combination is achieved, the winning number information is not stored in the master RAM 74.

Then, the information on the winning data included in the currently winning combination is expanded in the main RAM 74 (step S505). The main RAM 74 has the same number of winning corresponding areas as the number of winning data existing in the slot machine 10, and in step S505, the winning corresponding areas corresponding to the winning data included in the currently winning combination are set to "1", and the winning corresponding areas corresponding to the winning data other than the various bonus winning data such as the first BB winning data, the second BB winning data, the third BB winning data, the fourth BB winning data, the first RB winning data, and the second RB winning data, which are not included in the currently winning combination, are cleared to "0". The value of the winning corresponding area corresponding to the various bonus winning data is set to "1" when a combination including the corresponding winning data is won, and the state in which "1" is set is maintained until the corresponding winning is established unless the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is executed. Then, the winning corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is established or the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is executed. In addition, the winning corresponding areas corresponding to winning data other than various bonus winning data are cleared to "0" even if no winning combination is achieved in the combination selection process (Figure 14).

Returning to the explanation of the role selection process (FIG. 14), if a positive judgment is made in step S409, if a negative judgment is made in step S410, or if the process of step S413 is executed, a first stop information setting process is executed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S414), and then a performance content determination process (FIG. 51) is executed (step S415). In the performance content determination process, a process is executed to determine the outline of the performance to be executed in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image display device 63, and role device 75 in the current game. The performance content determination process (FIG. 51) will be described in detail later.

Then, a process for transmitting a game start command is executed (step S416). In this transmission process, information corresponding to the outline of the content determined in the presentation content determination process (step S415), information on the winning number corresponding to the winning role if a winning role was determined in the current role selection process (FIG. 14), and information corresponding to the current selection mode and the current game status are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the presentation side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize the outline of the content of the presentation determined by the main side MPU 72 and the winning number information.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command, it grasps the outline of the production for the current game from the game start command. The production side MPU 92 then determines the details of the production in a manner that corresponds to the outline of the production that it has grasped, taking into account the winning number information set in the game start command, information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and information corresponding to the current game state. It then reads out a data table corresponding to the determined content of the production from the production side ROM 93 to a corresponding layer in the read area 94a (Figure 10) of the production side RAM 94, and executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, display control of the image display device 63, and drive control of the gadget 75 according to the read data table.

Then, in step S417, a first control process for the game section is executed, in step S418, a process for a bonus at the start of the game is executed, in step S419, a process for adding bonuses is executed, and in step S420, a notification control process is executed. In the notification control process, which will be described in detail later, when announcing the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, display control is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the stop order to be notified is performed, and a process is executed so that the notification of the stop order to be notified is executed on the image display device 63. The process contents of steps S418 to S420 will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S601). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 14) in the previous game, and if not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and sets the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate. After that, the process waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

After executing the rotation start process in step S601, the constant speed rotation in progress flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S602). The constant speed rotation in progress flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, and is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, a constant speed rotation start command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S603). The constant speed rotation start command is a command that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has become constant and it is possible to generate a stop command.

After sending the constant speed rotation start command in step S603, it is determined whether any of the stop operation detection flags provided in the main RAM 74 are set to "1" (step S604). The stop operation detection flags are flags that allow the main MPU 72 to detect that the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are rotating at a constant speed have been turned on, and are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Here, the stop operation response processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25. Note that the stop operation response processing is executed in step S208 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12).

In the stop operation response process, first, it is determined whether any of the left third stop flag, the middle third stop flag, and the right third stop flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S701). The left third stop flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp that the left stop button 42 has been turned on to stop the rotation of the left reel 32L as the third (last) stop operation, the middle third stop flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp that the middle stop button 43 has been turned on to stop the rotation of the middle reel 32M as the third stop operation, and the right third stop flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp that the right stop button 44 has been turned on to stop the rotation of the right reel 32R as the third stop operation.

If none of the left third stop flag, the middle third stop flag, and the right third stop flag are set to "1" (step S701: NO), the left reel 32L is set as the target reel, and steps S703 to S712 are executed for the target reel. Specifically, if the constant speed rotation flag corresponding to the current target reel is set to "1" (step S703: YES), the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 42b, and 42c corresponding to the target reel are stored in the main RAM 74 (step S704). The main RAM 74 is provided with a signal storage area capable of storing the last two detection signals of each stop detection sensor 42a, 42b, and 42c. In step S703, the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 42b, and 42c corresponding to the target reel are stored in the signal storage area.

Then, it is determined whether or not an ON operation of the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the target reel has been detected (step S705). In step S705, the signal storage area in the main RAM 74 is referenced, and if a rise from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal in the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 42a, 43a, 44a corresponding to the target reel is detected, it is determined that an ON operation of the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the target reel has been detected.

If an ON operation of the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the target reel is detected (step S705: YES), it is determined whether the current stop operation is a stop operation corresponding to the third stop (step S706). Specifically, if the constant speed rotation flags corresponding to the two reels other than the target reel in the main RAM 74 are "0", it is determined that the current stop operation is a stop operation corresponding to the third stop. If the current stop operation is a stop operation corresponding to the third stop (step S706: YES), the third stop flag corresponding to the current target reel among the left third stop flag, the center third stop flag, and the right third stop flag is set to "1" (step S707).

Then, it is determined whether the second expectation performance flag or the re-change performance flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). As already explained, the second expectation performance flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to grasp that the game is a target game for the second expectation performance described later, and the re-change performance flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to grasp that the game is a target game for the re-change performance described later. If a positive judgment is made in step S708, numerical information corresponding to the total period (specifically, 2.5 seconds) of the execution period of the middle stop performance described later (specifically, 1 second) and the execution period of the first expectation performance described later (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is set in the master performance timer counter provided in the master RAM 74 (step S709). The master performance timer counter is a timer counter that allows the master MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expectation performance described later in the game for the second expectation performance or the re-change performance. The value set in the timer counter for the main performance in step S709 is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process (step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12)) is performed. Details of the middle stop performance, first expectation performance, second expectation performance, and re-changing performance will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S706, if a negative judgment is made in step S708, or if the processing of step S709 is performed, the stop operation detection flag corresponding to the current target reel is set to "1" (step S710). As already explained, the stop operation detection flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp that the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during constant speed rotation have been turned on, and is provided in the main RAM 74 in one-to-one correspondence with each of the stop buttons 42-44. When the ON operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during constant speed rotation is detected, the corresponding stop operation detection flag is set to "1".

If the stop operation detection flag is set to "1" in step S710, the constant speed rotation flag corresponding to the target reel in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S711). After that, it is determined whether the current target reel is the right reel 32R (step S712), and if the target reel is not the right reel 32R (step S712: NO), the target reel is updated (step S713) and the process returns to step S703. In step S713, if the current target reel is the left reel 32L, the target reel is updated to the center reel 32M, and if the current target reel is the center reel 32M, the target reel is updated to the right reel 32R. Also, if it is determined in step S712 that the target reel is the right reel 32R, the stop operation response process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that any of the third stop flags is set to "1", the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a corresponding to the third stop flag set to "1" are stored in the signal storage area of the main RAM 74 (step S714). Then, it is determined whether or not the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop has been detected (step S715). Specifically, it is determined that the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop has been performed when a falling from a HI state to a LOW state of the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a corresponding to the third stop is detected in the signal storage area of the main RAM 74.

If an OFF operation of the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is detected (step S715: YES), the third stop flag corresponding to the third stop is cleared to "0" (step S716), and an OFF operation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S717). The OFF operation command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that an OFF operation of the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop has been performed. The OFF operation command contains data that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type of the third stop (the reel for which the last stop command was issued). Then, proceed to step S718. The processing of steps S718 to S723 will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process (FIG. 24), if it is determined in step S604 that none of the stop operation detection flags are set to "1", the process of step S604 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop operation detection flags are set to "1". Then, if it is determined that any of the stop operation detection flags are set to "1" (step S604: YES), this means that a stop command has been generated, so a stop command command transmission process is executed (step S605). The stop command command is a command for causing the performance side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been turned on to generate a stop command. In the stop command command transmission process in step S605, the stop command command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92, and the stop operation detection flag determined to be set to "1" in step S604 is cleared to "0". If the stop command command transmission process is executed in step S605, the stop control process shown in steps S606 to S612 is executed to stop the reel that is spinning.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the time the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is confirmed (step S606). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S607).

In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop buttons 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is, a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S607, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

Then, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol that will actually stop at the base position is determined (step S608). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S609), and if they are equal (step S609: YES), a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S610). Then, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S611). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S612), and the process returns to step S604.

The stop information here refers to information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 14). By using this stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reaching symbol that reaches the base position when each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, slip number data showing the correspondence between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, this is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.

The processes for setting the above stop information include a first stop information setting process executed in step S414 of the role selection process (FIG. 14) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S612 of the reel control process (FIG. 24). In the first stop information setting process, the stop information is set according to the result of the role selection process. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop results of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

If it is determined in step S611 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S613. In the winning determination process, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is identified. Then, based on the contents of the winning data expanded in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination in the combination lottery process, and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, a winning combination is established and a winning corresponding process is executed.

In the winning response process, if the winning is a small win, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay win, a flag setting process is executed in the main RAM 74 so that a replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302 in the normal process (Figure 13)).

If the winning determination process is executed in step S613, the bonus notification process (FIG. 50) described below is executed (step S614), and a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S615). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, includes data indicating the type of win.

<About game status and game area>
Next, the game states and game intervals will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game intervals existing in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has the following game states: normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST5, and ART state ST6. These game states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the player remains by executing the clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74. In addition, when the BB state ST3 ends and there is no transition to the preparation state ST5, when the RB state ST4 ends and there is no transition to the preparation state ST5, and when the ART state ST6 ends without being triggered by a transition to the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In terms of the expected value of the game medium to be awarded in one game, the normal game state ST1 is a game state with a lower advantage than the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the preparation state ST5, and the ART state ST6, and has approximately the same advantage as the bonus internal state ST2. In addition, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player may remain in any of these lottery modes in the normal game state ST1. In addition, when the clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1, which is the normal mode.

The bonus internal state ST2 is a game state in which a player remains if a bonus win corresponding to any bonus winning data is not achieved in a game in which the bonus winning data is set, and is a game state that ends if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is achieved. As already explained, in the bonus internal state ST2, the internal lottery table is referenced in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 14). In this case, since the winning combination (i.e., the index value IV) that transitions the lottery mode is not set in the internal lottery table, the lottery mode does not transition in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 15) is referenced, the bonus internal state ST2 can also be said to be a game state in which the replay probability is maintained in the normal mode. However, without being limited to this, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be higher than in normal mode, for example, may be the same as the replay probability in the first RT mode, may be the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode, may be a replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, may be a replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, or may be a replay probability higher than in the second RT mode. Also, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than in normal mode.

The contents of BB state ST3 and RB state ST4 have already been explained. In BB state ST3 and RB state ST4, a transition to lottery mode does not occur.

The preparation state ST5 is a game state in which the player remains before moving to the ART state ST6, and can be moved to from the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4. As already explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, and the preparation state ST5 can be in any of these lottery modes. When a winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the preparation state ST5, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Then, when the first bell is won, "11" game media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the preparation state ST5. In addition, in the preparation state ST5, if a winning number of "17" to "22" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay winning is announced, if a winning number of "23" to "28" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second RT replay winning is announced, and if a winning number of "29" to "34" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first fall replay winning to be avoided is announced. In the preparation state ST5, the second RT replay winning is realized and the lottery mode transitions to the second RT mode, and the game state transitions to the ART state ST6. In addition, a transition to the preparation state ST5 may occur when the lottery mode is the second RT mode, in which case the lottery mode will transition to the first RT mode, and then if a transition to the second RT mode occurs, it will transition to the ART state ST6.

As described above, the ART state ST6 is a game state to which a player enters when a second RT replay win is achieved in the preparation state ST5. The ART state ST6 ends when the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". In this case, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Also, if a bonus is won during the ART state ST6, the game state will enter the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, or RB state ST4. In this case, the game state will enter the preparation state ST5 after the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 ends, and will eventually return to the ART state ST6.

As already explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, and in ART state ST6, any of these lottery modes can be selected. When a winning number between "1" and "3" is set in ART state ST6, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow the first bell to be won is announced. When the first bell is won, "11" gaming media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of gaming media to be awarded in one game in ART state ST6. In addition, in the ART state ST6, when the winning number of "17" to "22" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay winning is announced, when the winning number of "23" to "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second RT replay winning is announced, when the winning number of "29" to "34" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first fall replay winning to be avoided is announced, and when the winning number of "35" to "40" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second fall replay winning to be avoided is announced. As a result, in the ART state ST6, the lottery mode is basically maintained in the second RT mode. And, the second RT mode is a mode in which the replay probability is higher than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In other words, the ART state ST6 is a game state in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced, and is a game state in which the replay probability is basically maintained at a high level. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net increase in the number of game media in the ART state ST6. Note that even if the lottery mode in the ART state ST6 transitions from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode, the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST6 is subtracted even if the ART state ST6 is maintained and the situation is not the second RT mode.

In a configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST6. A normal zone SC1 and an advantageous zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the setting values "1" to "6", the lottery modes of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, the various game states ST1 to ST6, and the game zones of the normal zone SC1 and the advantageous zone SC2.

The normal section SC1 is a section in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows a player to win a prize advantageous to the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, is not announced, and the probability of the transition condition to the ART state ST6, which is a game state advantageous to the player, being established is lower than in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, in the normal section SC1, the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is not established. When the clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 and normal mode are established, and the normal section SC1 is established. In addition, when the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the normal section SC1 is also established.

The advantageous section SC2 is a section that corresponds to at least one of a section in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, which allows a player to win a favorable winning combination when the winning combinations that are the target winning combinations according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are different, and a section in which the probability of transitioning to the ART state ST6, which is a game state that is favorable to the player, is higher than that of the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 continues reliably until the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows a winning combination that gives the largest number of game media among the types of winning combinations that are the target winning combinations according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, is executed at least once. Specifically, the advantageous zone SC2 continues until a winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the role selection process (FIG. 14) and the notification of the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is executed at least once. The minimum end condition is met when the notification of the stop sequence is executed at least once, and the minimum end condition is met regardless of whether the first bell is actually won. When the notification is executed at least once, the advantageous zone SC2 continues until either the end condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous zone SC2 was set, or the condition that the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) is met.

As shown in FIG. 26, the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4 can occur in either the normal section SC1 or the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the preparation state ST5 and the ART state ST6 are never occurred in the normal section SC1, but only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables the setting of the game states ST1 to ST6 and game sections SC1 and SC2 as described above will be described. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S417 in the lottery process for the winning combination (Figure 14). The process of step S417 is executed after the winning or losing combination has been determined at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether the current game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4), the preparation state ST5, or the ART state ST6 (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, the processing from step S802 onwards is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The advantageous zone flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the gaming zone is an advantageous zone SC2 or not. When the advantageous zone flag is set to "1", it is an advantageous zone SC2, and when the advantageous zone flag value is "0", it is a normal zone SC1.

If the game zone is the normal zone SC1 (step S802: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 14) (step S803). If a positive determination is made in step S803, an advantageous transition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 will occur (step S804).

In the advantageous transition lottery process (step S804), first, the advantageous transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current role lottery process (FIG. 14) is read from the main ROM 73. In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that the winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being a winning number for the transition to the advantageous zone SC2. Incidentally, the advantageous transition table is common regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6". This fact that the table is common regardless of the setting value applies to all lottery processes other than the role lottery process (FIG. 14). After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, is read, and the read numerical information is compared against the advantageous transition table that was read. This identifies whether or not a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 has been won.

If the transition to the favorable zone SC2 is successful (step S805: YES), the favorable zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the value of the favorable continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the unannounced flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S806). The favorable continuation counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the number of games that have been continuously played in the favorable zone SC2. The unannounced flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether or not a winning number of "1" to "3" has been set in the role selection process (FIG. 14) after transition to the favorable zone SC2 and an announcement of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has already occurred.

As already explained, the first control process for the game zone is executed at the start of the game. In this case, if the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is selected in the advantageous transition lottery process (step S804), the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the first control process for the game zone. As a result, a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 occurs at the start of the game in which the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is selected. However, this is not limited to this, and the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 may occur in the game following the game in which the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is selected, or the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 may occur in a game two or more games after the game in which the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is selected.

After the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 has been set, a favorable zone start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S807). The favorable zone start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that it is time to start the advantageous zone SC2. After that, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from an off state to a lit state (step S808). This causes the advantageous zone display unit 67 to start announcing that it is the advantageous zone SC2.

When the advantageous zone SC2 is reached, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be announced. Here, we will explain the announcement control process executed in step S420 of the winning combination lottery process (Figure 14). This announcement control process is executed at the start of the game after the winning combination has been determined.

In the notification control process, when the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and a winning number between "1" and "3" is set in the role selection process (Figure 14), if either the game state is in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, or the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", a process is executed to notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow the first bell to be won.

Specifically, first, information on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow the first bell win corresponding to the current winning number is obtained. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the obtained stopping order information is started on the combined display unit 66. The display on this combined display unit 66 continues until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the current game. Then, a bell winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92. Information is set in the bell winning command to enable the production side MPU 92 to specify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow the first bell win in the current game.

Then, the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In this case, if the value of the unannounced flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and if the value of the unannounced flag is "1", it is changed to "0". This enables the main MPU 72 to determine that an announcement of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has already been made in the current advantageous zone SC2.

In the notification control process, if the winning number is set to any of "17" to "28" in the role selection process (Figure 14), and the game state is in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, a process is executed to notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win.

Specifically, first, information on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the establishment of a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win that corresponds to the current winning number is obtained. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the determined stopping order information is started on the combined display unit 66. The display on the combined display unit 66 continues until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the current game. Then, a promotion replay command is sent to the production side MPU 92. The promotion replay command is set with information that enables the production side MPU 92 to specify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the establishment of a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win in the current game.

In the notification control process, when a winning number between "29" and "40" is set in the role selection process (Figure 14), a process is executed to notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first fall replay winning or the second fall replay winning, provided that the game state is in ART state ST6.

Specifically, first, information on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first fall replay winning or the second fall replay winning that corresponds to the current winning number is obtained. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the obtained stopping order information is started on the combined display unit 66. The display on the combined display unit 66 continues until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the current game. Then, a fall replay avoidance command is sent to the production side MPU 92. The fall replay avoidance command is set with information that enables the production side MPU 92 to specify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first fall replay winning or the second fall replay winning in the current game.

...

Next, we will explain the notification process executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the notification process is executed by interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in the production side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

In the notification process, when a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72, a notification table for displaying an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the currently received command (the unit display images G1 to G3 already explained with reference to FIG. 8(a)) on the image display device 63 is read into the read area 94a in the performance RAM 94. The performance MPU 92 controls the execution of the notification according to the notification table, so that the unit display images G1 to G3 can be displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63. This display on the image display device 63 continues until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the current game.

Returning to the explanation of the first control process (FIG. 27) for the game zone SC2, if the advantageous zone flag was set to "1" in the game prior to the current game (step S802: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" was set in the current role selection process (FIG. 14) (step S809). If a positive determination is made in step S809, an ART transition selection process is executed to determine whether or not a transition to ART state ST6 will occur (step S810).

In the ART transition lottery process (step S810), first, the ART transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 14) is read from the main ROM 73. In this case, the ART transition table is set so that a winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART state ST6. In addition, the ART transition table is common regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6". After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read ART transition table. This determines whether or not a transition to ART state ST6 has been won.

If a transition to the ART state ST6 is successful (step S811: YES), the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S812). The ART win flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the need to transition to the preparation state ST5.

As described above, the advantageous transition lottery process (step S804) and the ART transition lottery process (step S810) are executed when the winning number of "4", "6", "8", or "15" is set in the role lottery process (FIG. 14). The roles corresponding to these winning numbers all have the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the advantageous transition lottery process and the ART transition lottery process are executed when a role with no set difference in winning probability is won. This makes it possible to prevent advantageous or disadvantageous occurrence between the set values of "1" to "6" regarding the probability of transition to the advantageous zone SC2 and the probability of transition to the ART state ST6.

Next, the response process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU 72, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 28. The response process at the end of a game is executed in step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This step S310 process is executed after the reel control process (step S308), and therefore is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

First, a bonus process is executed to control the transition and progress of the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S901). The bonus process will be described in detail later. After that, on the condition that the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 are not in effect (step S902: NO), a lottery mode control process is executed (step S903). In the lottery mode control process, if the first RT replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the normal mode to the first RT mode, if the second RT replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, if the first fall replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the first RT mode to the normal mode, and if the second fall replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the second RT mode to the first RT mode.

Then, jump to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S904). Specifically, if the game state is the normal game state ST1, execute the normal process (step S905), if the game state is the preparation state ST5, execute the preparation state process (step S906), and if the game state is the ART state ST6, execute the ART state process (step S907). Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S902, or if any of the processes in steps S905 to S907 are executed, execute the second control process of the game zone (step S908). In the second control process of the game zone, execute the process for transitioning the game zone to the normal zone SC1 if the transition condition from the advantageous zone SC2 to the normal zone SC1 is met.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the second control process for the play area. As described above, the response process at the end of play is executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the second control process for the play area is also executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

In steps S1001 to S1011, if the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, processing is executed to end the advantageous zone SC2. The details of these processing steps will be explained in detail later.

If it is in the advantageous zone SC2 (step S1003: YES) and a negative judgment is made in step S1006, it is judged whether the game state is the normal game state ST1 and the value of the advantageous maintenance counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1012). The advantageous maintenance counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the remaining number of advantageous maintenance games when the advantageous zone SC2 is maintained for the advantageous maintenance game number even after the transition to the normal game state ST1 when the ART state ST6 ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1012, it is judged whether the value of the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1013). As already explained, the unannounced flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to determine whether or not a winning number from "1" to "3" has been set in the role selection process (FIG. 14) after the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 and an announcement of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first bell win has already occurred. If an announcement of the stopping order has already occurred, the value of the unannounced flag is "0".

If a positive judgment is made in step S1013, an initialization process for the advantageous zone SC2 is executed (step S1014). In the initialization process for the advantageous zone SC2, the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process for the advantageous zone SC2, even if the player is in either the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating that the player is in that game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6), including counters for storing the number of games continued in that game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6). Note that the process of step S1014 is executed on the condition that the player is in the normal game state ST1, and therefore the process of clearing the advantageous zone flag to "0" is executed without executing the process of clearing the various data.

Then, the favorable zone display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state (step S1015). This ends the notification in the favorable zone display unit 67 that the zone is in favorable zone SC2.

As described above, even in the normal game state ST1, if the unannounced flag is set to "1", the advantageous zone SC2 will not end. This means that the advantageous zone SC2 will continue from the start of the advantageous zone SC2 until the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced once. If the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 starts while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing, the expectation of transitioning to the ART state ST6 will increase. Therefore, the player will pay attention to whether or not the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has been announced, which will increase the interest of the game.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30. The normal processing is executed in step S905 of the response processing at the end of a game (FIG. 28). The response processing at the end of a game is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the normal processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

In normal processing, first, it is determined whether the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1101). If the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S1101: YES), this means that a winning entry to the ART state ST6 has occurred in the ART transition lottery process (step S811 of the first control process of the game area (FIG. 27)). In this case, the ART winning flag is cleared to "0" (step S1102), and an initial continued game number setting process is executed to set the continued game number in the ART state ST6 to "50" (step S1103).

Then, the preparation state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the game state transitions to the preparation state ST5 (step S1104). This causes the preparation state processing of step S906 to be executed in the response processing at the end of the game (FIG. 28). Then, a preparation start command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1105). The preparation start command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that the preparation state ST5 is starting. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command, it starts the presentation corresponding to the preparation state ST5.

When a negative judgment is made in step S1101, or when the processing of step S1105 is performed, it is judged whether the value of the advantage maintenance counter in the main RAM 74 is "1" or more (step S1106). As already explained, the advantage maintenance counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of games of the advantage maintenance game number when the advantageous zone SC2 is maintained for the advantageous maintenance game number even after the transition to the normal game state ST1 when the ART state ST6 ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1. When the value of the advantage maintenance counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 determines that it is an advantageous maintenance zone, and when the value of the advantage maintenance counter after subtracting 1 becomes "0", it determines that the advantageous maintenance zone has ended. When the value of the advantage maintenance counter is "1" or more (step S1106: YES), the value of the advantage maintenance counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1107), and this normal processing is terminated.

Next, the process for adding bonuses executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31. The process for adding bonuses is executed in step S419 in the process for selecting the winning combination (FIG. 14). This process in step S419 is executed after the winning combination has been determined at the start of the game.

In the process for adding on, if the game state is in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", or "16" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 14) (step S1202). If a positive determination is made in step S1202, the process for adding on is executed (step S1203).

In the add-on lottery process (step S1203), first, the add-on table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 14) is read from the main ROM 73. In this embodiment, there are two types of add-on wins in which the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 is added: a first add-on win in which the number of continued games is added by "50", and a second add-on win in which the number of continued games is added by "100". The add-on table is set so that the probability of an add-on win (either the first add-on win or the second add-on win) is higher for winning numbers with a lower winning probability. Note that the add-on table is common between the set values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of an add-on win (either the first add-on win or the second add-on win) and the number of expected add-on games may be different depending on the set value. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read add-on table. This determines whether or not an additional win has been achieved (either a first additional win or a second additional win), and if an additional win has been achieved, the type of additional win.

If an additional win is obtained (step S1204: YES), it is determined whether the game state is in ART state ST6 (step S1205). If the game state is in ART state ST6 (step S1205: YES), the additional setting process during ART is executed (step S1206). In the additional setting process during ART, the value of the number of additional games corresponding to the currently selected lottery result ("50" or "100") is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74. The ART game number counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST6.

Then, the ART add-on flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1207), and this add-on processing is terminated. The ART add-on flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that an add-on win has occurred in the ART state ST6.

If it is determined in step S1205 that the gaming state is not the ART state ST6, this means that the gaming state is the preparation state ST5, so an add-on setting process during the preparation state is executed (step S1208). In the add-on setting process during the preparation state, the value of the number of add-on games corresponding to the currently selected lottery result ("50" or "100") is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

Then, the preparation-in-progress top-up flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1209), and the top-up process is terminated. The preparation-in-progress top-up flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a top-up win has occurred in the preparation state ST5.

Next, the preparation state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 32. The preparation state processing is executed in step S906 in the response processing at the end of play (FIG. 28). Since the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, the preparation state processing is also executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

In the preparation state processing, if the preparation add-on flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1301: YES), this means that an add-on win (first add-on win or second add-on win) has occurred in the add-on lottery processing (step S1203 of the add-on processing (Figure 31)), so a preparation add-on command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1202) and the preparation add-on flag is cleared to "0" (step S1203). The preparation add-on command is a command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 has been added in the preparation state ST5. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the preparation add-on command, it executes an add-on performance indicating that the current number of added games set in the preparation add-on command has been granted.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1301, or if the processing of step S1303 is performed, it is judged whether or not a second RT replay has been won in the current game (step S1304). If a second RT replay has been won (step S1304: YES), this means that an opportunity has occurred to transition from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6, and so ART start processing is executed (step S1305). In the ART start processing, information is set in the main RAM 74 so that the ART state processing of step S907 is executed in the response processing at the end of play (Figure 28). This changes the game state to the ART state ST6.

In addition, in the ART start process (step S1305), if the game state before the start of the preparation state ST5 is the bonus state and the game state immediately before the bonus state is the ART state ST6, this means that the game has returned to the ART state ST6, so settings are made to return to the game situation in the ART state ST6 immediately before transitioning to the bonus state. However, if an addition to the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 occurs in the bonus state, the game will return to the ART state ST6 from the state in which the added number of games has been added. In addition, in the ART start process (step S1305), if the current preparation state ST5 is triggered by a win to transition to the ART state ST6 in the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4, the information on the number of games starting the ART state ST6, which is 50 games, is added to the ART game number counter in the master RAM 74. In this case, if the game state before the preparation state ST5 is a bonus state and not only has a win to transition to the ART state ST6 occurred in that bonus state, but also an additional win has occurred for the number of continued games remaining in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 will start with the number of continued games granted as a result of the additional win being added. Also, if an additional win has occurred in the preparation state ST5 for the number of continued games remaining in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 will start with the number of continued games granted as a result of the additional win being added.

After executing the ART start processing in step S1305, an ART start command indicating that a transition to ART state ST6 has occurred is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1306), and this preparation state processing is terminated. The ART start command contains information indicating whether or not the current transition to ART state ST6 corresponds to a return to ART state ST6, and if it does not correspond to a return to ART state ST6, contains information indicating that 50 games have been assigned as the starting game count for ART state ST6.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 33. The ART state processing is executed in step S907 in the response processing at the end of play (FIG. 28). The response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, so the ART state processing is also executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

In the ART state processing, if the ART add-on flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), this means that an add-on win (first add-on win or second add-on win) has occurred in the add-on lottery processing (step S1203 of the add-on processing (Figure 31)), so an ART add-on command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1402) and the ART add-on flag is cleared to "0" (step S1403). The ART add-on command is a command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 has been added in the ART state ST6. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the ART add-on command, it executes an add-on effect indicating that the current number of added games set in the ART add-on command has been granted. Details of the add-on effect will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1401, or if the processing of step S1403 is performed, the value of the ART game number counter in the host RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1404). Then, on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S1405: YES), the processing of steps S1406 and S1407 is executed.

Specifically, first, the end process of the ART state ST6 is executed (step S1406). In this end process, data is set to transition the game state from the ART state ST6 to the normal game state ST1. As a result, for example, in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28), the normal process of step S905 is executed. In addition, in the end process of the ART state ST6, the advantage maintenance process is executed. In the advantage maintenance process, first, it is determined whether the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued (specifically, "1200"). This number of games that can be continued is set to a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") of the number of games that can be continued in the advantageous zone SC2, and is set to a number of games that is less than the number of games that starts the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2. If the value of the advantage continuation counter is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued, the advantage maintenance lottery table is read from the main ROM 73. A winning value corresponding to the advantage maintenance win is set in the advantage maintenance lottery table. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the master RAM 74, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read advantage maintenance lottery table to determine whether or not an advantage maintenance win has been obtained. If an advantage maintenance win has been obtained, a value corresponding to the number of advantage maintenance games (specifically, "10") is set to the advantage maintenance counter in the master RAM 74. As a result, even after the ART state ST6 has ended, the play area is maintained in the advantageous area SC2 until the number of advantage maintenance games has been played.

Then, an ART end command indicating that ART state ST6 has ended is sent to the presentation side MPU92 (step S1407), and this ART state processing is terminated. By receiving the ART end command, the presentation side MPU92 executes a presentation corresponding to the end of ART state ST6, and after the end of this presentation, executes a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 which is not an advantageous maintenance zone. Note that if an advantageous maintenance win is determined in step S1406, information indicating that an advantageous maintenance win has been determined is set in the ART end command.

Next, the bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 34. The bonus processing is executed in step S901 of the response processing at the end of play (FIG. 28). Since the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, the bonus processing is also executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

In the bonus process, if a BB win occurs that corresponds to the BB winning data stored in the master RAM 74 (step S1501: YES), the BB flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1502). The BB flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the game is in the BB state ST3.

If the BB winning that has been established this time is the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning (step S1503: YES), the specific bonus flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1504). The 3rd BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 3rd BB winning is set to an index value IV = 7 in any of the lottery tables for the normal mode (FIG. 15), the lottery table for the 1st RT mode (FIG. 17), and the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode (FIG. 19), and the 4th BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 4th BB winning is set to an index value IV = 8 in any of these lottery tables. These index values IV = 7, 8 are set as roles with the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the specific bonus flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus winning with no set difference in the winning probability has been established. When a bonus win occurs in which there is a set difference in the probability of winning, the game zone is not set to shift from the normal zone SC1 to the favorable zone SC2 at the start of the bonus state, whereas when a bonus win occurs in which there is no set difference in the probability of winning, the game zone is set to shift from the normal zone SC1 to the favorable zone SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

On the other hand, if an RB win occurs that corresponds to the RB winning data stored in the master RAM 74 (step S1501: NO, step S1505: YES), the RB flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1506). The RB flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the RB state is ST4.

If the currently established RB win is a first RB win (step S1507: YES), the specific bonus flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1508). The first RB winning data that allows the first RB win to be established is set to index value IV=9 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 17), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19). The index value IV=9 is set as a role with the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, in order for the master MPU 72 to determine that the current RB win corresponds to the establishment of a bonus win with no set difference in the winning probability, the specific bonus flag is set to "1" in step S1508.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, if the processing of step S1504 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the processing of step S1508 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1509). The total payout counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the total number of gaming media awarded to the player in the bonus state. The main MPU 72 determines whether or not the conditions for ending the bonus state have been met based on the value of the total payout counter.

Then, a bonus start command indicating that the bonus state is to be started is sent to the presentation side MPU92 (step S1510). The bonus start command contains information indicating the type of bonus state to be started this time (1st BB win, 2nd BB win, 3rd BB win, 4th BB win, 1st RB win, or 2nd RB win). When the presentation side MPU92 receives the bonus start command, it executes a presentation corresponding to the type of bonus state to be started.

Then, it is determined whether the master ending performance flag stored in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1511). The master ending performance flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that an ending performance is being executed, which is initiated when the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, as will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S1511, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S1512).

In the freeze counter setting process, the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set with numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the start of the bonus. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the game into a state of waiting for the start of a new game. In this way, when the start of a new game is being waited for, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are displayed to show that the bonus state has started, so that the player can clearly recognize that a transition to the bonus state has occurred, and the transition to the bonus state is emphasized, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. The state of waiting in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

If the BB flag or RB flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1501: NO, step S1505: NO, step S1513: YES), a bonus state process is executed to control the progress of the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S1514).

Now, the bonus state process (step S1514) will be described. In the bonus state process, if game media have been awarded in the current game, a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the total payout counter in the main RAM 74. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total payout counter after this addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state. Specifically, if the current bonus state is the BB state ST3, it is determined whether it is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (e.g., "350"), and if the current bonus state is the RB state ST4, it is determined whether it is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (e.g., "150").

If it is determined that the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state, the game state at the time when the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state was won is the ready state ST5 or the ART state ST6, or the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", a setting process for the ready state ST5 is executed. In the setting process for the ready state ST5, the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, information in the main RAM 74 is set so that the ready state process of step S906 is executed in the response process at the end of play (Figure 28). As a result, the game state after the end of the current bonus state becomes the ready state ST5.

If it is determined that the ART win flag is not set to "1", or if the setting process for the preparation state ST5 has been performed, a bonus end command indicating that the bonus state will end is sent to the presentation side MPU 92. The bonus end command contains information indicating whether the game state after the bonus state ends will be the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST5. By receiving the bonus end command, the presentation side MPU 92 starts a presentation indicating that the bonus state ends, and after the presentation ends, starts a presentation corresponding to the game state after the bonus state ends.

After sending the bonus end command, it is determined whether the master ending effect flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The master ending effect flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to identify that an ending effect is being executed, which starts when the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, as will be described in detail later. If it is determined that the master ending effect flag is not set to "1", a freeze counter setting process is executed and the process for this bonus state is terminated.

In the freeze counter setting process, a freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set with numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the game waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the game into a state of waiting for the start of a new game. In this state of waiting for the start of a new game, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 are activated to display an effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state, allowing the player to clearly recognize that the bonus state has ended. The state of waiting in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, the bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 35. The bonus processing at the start of the game is executed in step S418 of the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 14). This processing in step S418 is executed after the winning combination has been determined at the start of the game.

In the bonus processing at the start of the game, if the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not this is the start game of the bonus state, which is the first game to be executed after transitioning to the bonus state (step S1602). If a positive determination is made in step S1602, this means that the current bonus state has started in a situation where it is in the normal zone SC1, so the processing of steps S1603 to S1606 is executed.

Specifically, when the specific bonus flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1603: YES), the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the specific bonus flag is cleared to "0" (step S1604). Then, a favorable zone start command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1605), and the lighting process of the advantageous zone display unit 67 is executed (step S1606). In the lighting process, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As already explained, when the specific bonus flag is set to "1", this bonus state is triggered by a bonus role in which there is no set difference in the winning probability. In other words, when the bonus state corresponding to the bonus role in which there is no set difference in the winning probability is reached, even if the game zone before the bonus state was the normal zone SC1, it will be set to the advantageous zone SC2 in the game in which the bonus state was started. Then, by setting the advantageous zone SC2 in the game in which the bonus state has been started, processing is executed to give the player the benefit related to the ART state ST6 from step S1607 onwards. Therefore, it is possible to make the bonus state corresponding to the bonus role in which there is no set difference in the winning probability more advantageous than the bonus state corresponding to the bonus role in which there is a set difference in the winning probability.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the advantageous zone flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the game state is a bonus state (step S1607). If the processing of step S1606 is performed, or if a positive determination is made in step S1607, it is determined whether the lottery trigger role has been won in the current game (step S1608). Specifically, it is determined that the lottery trigger role has been won if any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" is set in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 14).

If the positive judgment is made in step S1608, the advantageous lottery process is executed (step S1609). In the advantageous lottery process, the bonus add-on table is first read from the main ROM 73. The bonus add-on table is common regardless of the type of bonus state, but at least one of the probability of an additional win and the number of games expected to be added may differ depending on the type of bonus state. The bonus add-on table is common regardless of the type of lottery trigger role that has been won this time, but at least one of the probability of an additional win and the number of games expected to be added may differ depending on the type of lottery trigger role that has been won this time. The bonus add-on table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of an additional win and the number of games expected to be added may differ depending on the setting value. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the bonus add-on table in the read bonus. This identifies whether or not an advantageous win has been made.

If a favorable win is obtained in the favorable lottery process (step S1609) (step S1610: YES), it is determined whether an opportunity to transition to the current bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has occurred in the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6 (step S1611). If an opportunity to transition to the current bonus state has not occurred in the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6 (step S1611: NO), it is determined whether the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1612).

If a positive judgment is made in step S1611, or if a positive judgment is made in step S1612, an add-on setting process during the bonus is executed (step S1613). In the add-on setting process during the bonus, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter provided in the master RAM 74. The ART game number counter is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6.

After that, a bonus add-on command indicating that the number of continued games in ART state ST6 has been added during the bonus state is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1614). The bonus add-on command contains information about the number of added games that has occurred this time. By receiving the bonus add-on command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the currently selected number of added games has been added.

On the other hand, if the game state at the time when the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state was won was neither the preparation state ST5 nor the ART state ST6, and the ART win flag is not set to "1" (steps S1611 and S1612: NO), the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1615), and an ART win command indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 has been won is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1616). By receiving the ART win command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation in the current game indicating that the ART state ST6 will occur after the current bonus state ends.

Next, we will explain the ending presentation of the advantageous section SC2. First, we will again refer to the flowchart in Figure 29 and explain the processing of steps S1001 to S1011 in the second control process of the game section.

First, it is determined whether the freeze standby flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1001). The freeze standby flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to identify that if a bonus state is entered during an ending performance and the number of games continued in the advantageous section SC2 during that bonus state reaches the upper limit number of games, the freeze setting at the end of the ending performance is being waited for until the bonus state ends.

If the freeze waiting flag is set to "1" (step S1001: YES), a freeze setting process is executed (step S1002). The freeze setting process is described in detail later. If the freeze waiting flag is not set to "1" (step S1001: NO), a determination is made as to whether the favorable zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the game zone is the favorable zone SC2 (step S1003). If the favorable zone flag is set to "1" (step S1003: YES), the value of the favorable continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1004). Thereafter, an ending corresponding process is executed (step S1005).

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the ending response processing executed by the main MPU 72. The ending response processing is executed in step S1005 in the second control processing of the play area (Figure 29). As already explained, the second control processing of the play area is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the ending response processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

In the ending response process, first, it is determined whether the master ending performance flag stored in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1701). The master ending performance flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the ending performance execution period of the advantageous section SC2 has begun.

If the host ending performance flag is not set to "1" (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 in the host RAM 74, is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to an ending (specifically, "1450") (step S1702). If a positive determination is made in step S1702, it is determined whether the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the host RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter in the host RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S1703). In other words, it is determined whether the sum of the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous zone SC2 and the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST6 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1703, it means that it is determined that the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6. In this case, the master ending performance flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1704).

After that, an ending performance command indicating that an ending performance should be started is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1705). By receiving the ending performance command, the performance side MPU 92 starts the ending performance even if another performance is being executed. In addition, the ending performance command is set with information corresponding to the number of games remaining until the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games remaining until the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Due to the above configuration, when the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, and it is determined that the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST6, the execution period of the ending effect is entered. In this case, the execution period of the ending effect is entered on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or greater, so the game state in which the execution period of the ending effect starts is either the ART state ST6, a bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) that occurs during the ART state ST6, or the preparation state ST5 after the bonus state that occurs during the ART state ST6 ends.

Returning to the explanation of the second control process of the game zone (FIG. 29), after executing the ending corresponding process in step S1005, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 has reached a value corresponding to the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S1006). If a positive determination is made in step S1006, the initialization process of the advantageous zone SC2 is executed (step S1007). In the initialization process of the advantageous zone SC2, the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the initialization process of the advantageous zone SC2, even if the player is in either the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, various data indicating that the player is in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, including the counter for storing the number of continued games in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, are cleared to shift the game state to the normal game state ST1. After that, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from the on state to the off state (step S1008). This ends the notification in the favorable zone display section 67 that the zone is in favorable zone SC2.

Then, it is determined whether the master ending performance flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1009). If a positive determination is made in step S1009, a freeze setting process is executed (step S1010).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1009, a forced termination command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1011). If the presentation side MPU 92 receives the forced termination command, it executes a process for setting the start of a normal presentation. In this process, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 are caused to execute a normal return presentation indicating a return to the normal game state ST1. In addition, after the normal return presentation ends, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1.

Next, the freeze setting process executed in step S1002 or step S1010 in the second control process of the play area (FIG. 29) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37. Note that since the second control process of the play area is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, the freeze setting process is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

In the freeze setting process, if the freeze waiting flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it means that the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games while the ending performance is being executed. In this case, first, the main ending performance flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). After that, if the game state at the timing when the current game is started is BB state ST3 (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game of BB state ST3 (step S1804). If the current game is not the final game of BB state ST3 (step S1804: NO), it is determined whether or not the total number of game media granted to the player in BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number (step S1805). The specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number, and specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100", which is equal to or less than half of the BB end reference number.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1804 or if a positive judgment is made in step S1805, the setting process for the ending performance is executed (step S1806). In the setting process for the ending performance, an ending end command is sent to the production side MPU 92. The ending end command is a command for the production side MPU 92 to recognize that it is the timing to end the ending performance. When the production side MPU 92 receives the ending end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are caused to execute the ending performance for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). In addition, the production side MPU 92 generates history configuration data in response to receiving the ending end command. Details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the setting process for the ending performance, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S1806, the process waits in step S314 in normal processing (FIG. 13). This puts the game into a state of waiting for the start of a new game. By executing the ending performance while the game is waiting for the start of a new game in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending performance. The waiting state in step S314 in normal processing (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in both steps S1804 and S1805, the freeze standby flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the setting process for the ending performance (step S1807). If it is not the final game of BB state ST3 and the total number of game media awarded to the player in BB state ST3 is not equal to or less than a specific reference number, the execution of the ending performance in the performance side MPU 92 is extended in the normal section SC1 and in the BB state ST3 even after the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games and the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending performance is held until the timing when the extension of the ending performance ends, that is, until the timing when the BB state ST3 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the freeze setting is in a standby state.

If the game state at the time when the current game is started is not BB state ST3 (step S1803: NO), it is determined whether the current game is other than the final game in RB state ST4 (step S1808). If the current game is not RB state ST4 or if the current game is the final game in RB state ST4 (step S1808: NO), the setting process for the ending end performance is executed (step S1809). In the setting process for the ending end performance, an ending end command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 as in the case of step S1806. The ending end command is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize that it is the timing to end the ending performance. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the ending end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the ending end performance for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). In addition, the performance side MPU 92 generates history configuration data upon receiving the ending end command. Details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the process of setting the ending end effect, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period at the end of the ending (specifically, 15 seconds) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S1806, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the process in a state of waiting for the start of a new game. By executing the ending end effect while the start of a new game is thus waited for, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending end effect. The wait state in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

As described above, by executing the setting process for the ending end effect in each of steps S1806 and S1809, if the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the execution period of the ending effect, and the game is not in a bonus state, if the game is in a bonus state but is the final game of the bonus state, or if the total number of gaming media awarded to the player in BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number, a freeze period at the end of the ending occurs at the end of the game. Then, the ending end effect is executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

If the current game is in RB state ST4 and is not the final game of the RB state ST4 (step S1808: YES), the freeze standby flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the setting process for the ending effect (step S1810). If the current game is in RB state ST4 and is not the final game of the RB state ST4, the execution of the ending effect in the performance side MPU 92 is extended in the normal section SC1 and in the RB state ST4, even after the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games and the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect is put on hold until the timing when the extension of the ending effect ends, that is, until the timing when the RB state ST4 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the freeze setting is in a standby state.

If the freeze wait flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the final game of BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S1811). If a positive determination is made in step S1811, the state in which the ending presentation is being extended in this game will end. Therefore, after clearing the freeze wait flag in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1812), the process of setting the ending presentation is executed (step S1813).

In the setting process for the ending end performance (step S1813), an ending end command is sent to the production side MPU 92, as in steps S1806 and S1809. The ending end command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that it is time to end the ending performance. When the production side MPU 92 receives the ending end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute the ending end performance for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). In addition, the production side MPU 92 generates history configuration data in response to receiving the ending end command. Details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the setting process for the ending end performance, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S1813, the process waits in step S314 in normal processing (FIG. 13). This puts the game into a state of waiting for the start of a new game. By executing the ending performance while the game is waiting for the start of a new game in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending performance. The waiting state in step S314 in normal processing (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, before explaining the execution control of the effects in the normal game state ST1, the configuration of the display layer for displaying one frame of the image display device 63 (Figure 1) will be described. One frame of the image of the image display device 63 is displayed by superimposing and synthesizing multiple (specifically, eight types) display layers. Figure 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display layers 101 to 108. As shown in Figure 38, as display layers for displaying one frame of the image, there are a background display layer 101 in which a background image is mainly set, a first performance display layer 102 to a fifth performance display layer 106 in which images for various effects are set, and a first notification display layer 107 to a second notification display layer 108 in which images for various notifications are set. The background display layer 101 is located at the back of the screen. Five performance display layers 102 to 106 are arranged from the background display layer 101 toward the front of the screen in the order of first performance display layer 102 → second performance display layer 103 → third performance display layer 104 → fourth performance display layer 105 → fifth performance display layer 106. In addition, two notification display layers 107 to 108 are arranged from the fifth performance display layer 106 toward the front of the screen in the order of first notification display layer 107 → second notification display layer 108. For this reason, the background image is displayed at the back of the screen, the image for performance is displayed closer to the front of the screen than the background image, and the image for notification is displayed at the front of the screen.

As already explained, the production side MPU 92 outputs to the VDP 95 a drawing list that indicates the contents of the image to be displayed on the image display device 63. The VDP 95 creates display data for one composite image in the frame area of the video RAM 96, in which the images of the display layers 101 to 108 are sequentially superimposed from the back of the screen to the front of the screen in the following order according to the drawing list received from the production side MPU 92: image of the background display layer 101 → image of the first performance display layer 102 → image of the second performance display layer 103 → image of the third performance display layer 104 → image of the fourth performance display layer 105 → image of the fifth performance display layer 106 → image of the first notification display layer 107 → image of the second notification display layer 108. As already explained, the VDP 95 outputs one frame of image signals corresponding to the display data created in the frame area to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data. As a result, a single composite image is generated in which the image of the background display layer 101, the image of the first performance display layer 102, the image of the second performance display layer 103, the image of the third performance display layer 104, the image of the fourth performance display layer 105, the image of the fifth performance display layer 106, the image of the first notification display layer 107, and the image of the second notification display layer 108 are sequentially superimposed from the back of the screen to the front of the screen, and this composite image is displayed on the image display device 63 as one frame of a picture.

<Regarding execution control of effects in normal gaming state ST1>
Next, the execution control of the presentation in the normal game state ST1 will be described. In the normal game state ST1, presentations corresponding to the first to sixth triggers are performed based on the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers. First, the first to sixth triggers will be described. The first to sixth triggers are triggers that occur when the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command from the main side MPU 72. Specifically, the first trigger is the reception of a game start command, and the second trigger is the reception of a constant speed rotation start command. The third trigger is the reception of a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop have been operated ON, the fourth trigger is the reception of a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the second stop have been operated ON, and the fifth trigger is the reception of a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been operated ON. The sixth trigger is the reception of an OFF operation command in which an OFF operation has been performed on the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop.

As already explained, the game start command is a command sent in step S416 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), the constant speed spin start command is a command sent in step S603 of the reel control process (FIG. 24), the stop command command is a command sent in step S605 of the reel control process (FIG. 24), and the OFF operation command is a command sent in step S717 of the stop operation response process (FIG. 25). As already explained, the constant speed spin start command is sent after the game start command is sent, and the stop command command is sent after the constant speed spin start command is sent. In addition, the OFF operation command is sent after the stop command commands corresponding to the first to third stops are sent. For this reason, the first to sixth triggers occur in the following order: first trigger → second trigger → third trigger → fourth trigger → fifth trigger → sixth trigger.

In the normal game state ST1, the following are performed: a normal base effect in which a background image corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is displayed and bass music is output; a pattern change effect in which the left, right and middle patterns are displayed on the image display device 63; a valid notification effect indicating that operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been validated; a left stop effect in which the changing left pattern stops on the image display device 63; a right stop effect in which the changing right pattern stops on the image display device 63; a reach notification effect in which a reach notification is made in accordance with the timing at which the changing right pattern stops; a long press notification effect in which a long press notification is made in accordance with the timing at which the changing right pattern stops; a middle stop effect in which the changing middle pattern stops on the image display device 63; a bonus notification effect in which a bonus win has occurred; a first expectation effect in which a bonus win is announced; a second expectation effect in which a bonus win is announced; and a re-change effect in which the stopped middle pattern is re-changed. In the normal game state ST1, the display of the left, right, and center symbols on the image display device 63 is performed as an effect indicating whether or not a bonus has been won and the type of bonus win, separate from the fluctuation of the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

Among the various effects described above, the normal base effect, the pattern change effect, the valid notification effect, the left stop effect, the right stop effect, and the center stop effect are effects that are executed regardless of the result of the lottery in the role lottery process (FIG. 14). In this embodiment, there are cases where neither the reach notification effect nor the long press notification effect is executed in response to the right stop effect, and cases where either the reach notification effect or the long press notification effect is executed in response to the right stop effect. When neither the reach notification effect nor the long press notification effect is executed in response to the right stop effect, the end of the center stop effect ends the effect for one game. On the other hand, when either the reach notification effect or the long press notification effect is executed in response to the right stop effect, the first expectation effect may be executed after the end of the center stop effect. For this reason, attention can be drawn to the presence or absence of an effect executed in response to the right stop effect and the type of the effect.

When a reach notification effect is performed in response to a right stop effect, there are cases where a first expected effect is performed after the middle stop effect ends, and cases where the effect for one game ends with the end of the middle stop effect. This allows the player to focus on whether or not the first expected effect will be performed after the middle stop effect ends. When a reach notification effect and a first expected effect are performed, there are cases where a bonus notification effect is performed after the end of the first expected effect, and cases where the effect for one game ends with the end of the first expected effect. This allows the player to focus on whether or not a bonus notification effect will be performed after the end of the first expected effect.

When a long press notification effect is performed in response to a right stop effect, a first expected effect is performed after the middle stop effect ends. After that, the second expected effect may be performed after the first expected effect ends, or the effect for one game may end with the end of the first expected effect. This allows the player to pay attention to whether or not the second expected effect will be performed after the first expected effect ends. When a long press notification effect, a first expected effect, and a second expected effect are performed, a re-change effect may be performed after the second expected effect ends, announcing the occurrence of a bonus win, or the effect for one game may end with the end of the second expected effect. This allows the player to pay attention to whether or not a re-change effect will be performed after the second expected effect ends.

Figures 39(a) to 39(h) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of various effects executed in the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, when the first trigger occurs, that is, when the effect side MPU 92 receives a game start command, the normal base effect and the pattern change effect are started. As already explained, the normal base effect and the pattern change effect are executed regardless of whether or not a bonus win (1st to 4th BB wins and 1st to 2nd RB wins) occurs in the role selection process (Figure 14).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the normal base performance, a background image G4 is displayed on the image display device 63, and normal base music is output from the speaker 62. In addition, in the pattern change performance, the left pattern, right pattern, and center pattern are displayed in a changing manner in the left area, right area, and center area of the image display device 63. In the pattern change performance, the left pattern, right pattern, and center pattern are displayed scrolling from the top of the screen of the image display device 63 to the bottom of the screen. In the image display device 63, the normal base performance and the pattern change performance proceed simultaneously.

The background image G4 is set in the background display layer 101 (Fig. 38). In addition, an image showing the left pattern changing is set in the first performance display layer 102 (Fig. 38), an image showing the right pattern changing is set in the second performance display layer 103 (Fig. 38), and an image showing the middle pattern changing is set in the third performance display layer 104 (Fig. 38). As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the images of the first performance display layer 102, the second performance display layer 103, and the third performance display layer 104 are set on the front side of the screen than the image of the background display layer 101. Therefore, in the image display device 63, the changing left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern are displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G4. While the normal base performance and the pattern change performance are being performed, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that normal base music is output, and the light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled so that it emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the normal base performance.

After that, when the second trigger occurs, that is, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a constant speed rotation start command, the valid notification performance is started. In the valid notification performance, sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that a valid notification sound is output to notify that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has become valid. The valid notification performance is performed simultaneously in parallel with the normal base performance and the pattern change performance. The speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and normal base music and the valid notification sound are output simultaneously. By performing the valid notification performance, the constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has started, and the player can be made aware that it is now possible to stop the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44.

After that, when the third trigger occurs, that is, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a stop command in which information indicating that the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the first stop has been operated ON is set, a left stop performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 39(b), in the left stop performance, the variable display of the left pattern performed in the left area of the image display device 63 ends and the display of one left pattern image G5 is started. The left pattern image G5 is set in the first performance display layer 102 (FIG. 38) in which an image showing the state in which the left pattern changes was set, and is displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G4. The left pattern image G5 displayed in the left area of the image display device 63 is an image showing any one of the numbers "1" to "9". The type of the left pattern image G5 displayed in the stopped state is determined in the left stop performance lottery described later. In the right and center areas of the image display device 63, the variable display of the right and center patterns continues even after the display of the left pattern image G5 has started. In the left stop performance, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a stop sound effect is output in time with the timing when the left pattern image G5 stops in the left area of the image display device 63. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and normal base music and a stop sound effect are output simultaneously.

After that, when the fourth trigger occurs, that is, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a stop command with information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the second stop have been turned on, a right stop performance is executed. In the right stop performance, the variable display of the right pattern in the right area of the image display device 63 ends and the display of one right pattern image G6 starts. In the right stop performance, a right pattern image G6 showing the same number as the number shown in the left pattern image G5 stops in the right area of the image display device 63, creating a reach state, or a right pattern image G6 showing a number different from the number shown in the left pattern image G5 stops and no reach state occurs.

First, a case where the right stop performance is performed in a manner in which the reach state does not occur will be described. When the reach state does not occur, in the right stop performance, as shown in FIG. 39(c), the variable display of the right pattern performed in the right area of the image display device 63 ends, and the stopped display of the right pattern image G6 showing a number different from the left pattern image G5 begins. As the right pattern image G6, there are nine types of images showing any number from "1" to "9". The right pattern image G6 is set in the second performance display layer 103 (FIG. 38) in which an image showing the state in which the right pattern changes was set, and is displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G4. In the central area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the middle pattern continues even after the stopped display of the right pattern image G6 begins. In the right stop performance, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that a stop sound effect is output in accordance with the timing at which the right pattern image G6 stops in the right area of the image display device 63. As mentioned above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds simultaneously, and the normal base music and the stop sound effect are output simultaneously. If the reach state does not occur, the reach notification effect and the long press notification effect are not performed.

After that, when the fifth trigger occurs, that is, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a stop command in which information indicating that the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop has been operated ON is set, a middle stop performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 39(d), in the middle stop performance, the variable display of the middle pattern performed in the central area of the image display device 63 ends, and the stopped display of the middle pattern image G7 starts. The middle pattern image G7 is set in the third performance display layer 104 (FIG. 38) in which an image showing the state in which the middle pattern changes was set, and is displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G4. There are nine types of images showing any of the numbers "1" to "9" as the middle pattern image G7. The type of the middle pattern image G7 to be stopped and displayed is determined in the middle stop performance lottery described later. When the stopped display of the middle pattern image G7 starts, the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the middle pattern image G7 are stopped on the image display device 63. In the middle stop performance, the speaker 62 is controlled to output a stop sound effect in time with the middle symbol image G7 stopping in the central area of the image display device 63. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and normal base music and a stop sound effect are output simultaneously. If a reach state does not occur, the performance for one game ends when the middle stop performance ends.

On the other hand, when a right stop performance is performed in a manner that generates a reach state, either a reach notification performance or a long press notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance. When a reach state occurs, in the right stop performance, as shown in FIG. 39(e), a right stop performance is performed in which a right pattern image G6 showing the same number ("1" in FIG. 39(e)) as the number ("1" in FIG. 39(e)) of the left pattern image G5 stopped and displayed in the left area of the image display device 63 stops in the right area, generating a reach state. As in the case where a reach state does not occur, the right pattern image G6 is set in the second performance display layer 103 (FIG. 38) in which an image showing the right pattern changing was set, and is displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G4.

In the reach notification performance performed in response to the right stop performance, the speaker 62 is controlled to output a reach notification sound of "reach" in time with the right pattern image G6 stopping in the right area of the image display device 63. The reach notification sound is output from the speaker 62 in priority to the stop sound effect in the right stop performance. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and the normal base music and the reach notification sound are output simultaneously. In this case, the stop sound effect is not output. By outputting the reach notification sound, the player is made aware that a reach state has occurred in which the numbers indicated by the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 match, and the attention to the performance content can be increased. Note that the reach notification performance is always performed when the bonus notification performance is performed, but the bonus notification performance is not necessarily performed just because the reach notification performance has been performed.

In the long press notification performance performed in response to the right stop performance, the speaker 62 is controlled to output a long press notification sound saying "long press" in time with the right pattern image G6 stopping in the right area of the image display device 63. The long press notification sound is output from the speaker 62 in priority to the stop sound effect in the right stop performance. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and the normal base music and the long press notification sound are output simultaneously. In this case, the stop sound effect is not output. By outputting the long press notification sound, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the second expected performance may be started by pressing and holding the stop button 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Note that the long press notification performance is always performed when the second expected performance is performed, but the second expected performance is not necessarily performed just because the long press notification performance is performed.

After that, the middle stop performance is performed based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger. As already explained, in the middle stop performance, the variable display of the middle pattern performed in the central area of the image display device 63 ends, and the stopped display of the middle pattern image G7 starts. The variable display of the middle pattern is performed in the order that the numbers displayed in the central area of the image display device 63 increase in ascending order from "1" to "9" by one, and after reaching "9", they return to "1" (in the order of 1 → 2 → ... 8 → 9 → 1). In the middle stop performance when a reach state occurs, the stopped display of the middle pattern image G7 showing the number one before the number shown by the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 starts. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), when the numbers on the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 are all "1", the stopped display of the middle pattern image G7 showing the number "9", which is one before "1", starts in the middle stop performance.

Here, the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect will be explained. In the first expectation effect, an expectation effect image showing the expectation of a bonus win (first to fourth BB wins and first to second RB wins) is displayed on the image display device 63. In the second expectation effect, an expectation effect image showing the expectation of a BB win when a bonus win occurs is displayed on the image display device 63. Figures 40(a) to 40(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect, and Figure 40(f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the type of first expectation effect and the expectation of a bonus win, and the correspondence between the type of second expectation effect and the expectation of a BB win when a bonus win occurs.

There are five types of expected performance images displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected performance and the second expected performance: a bubble image G8 (Figure 40(a)), a water current image G9 (Figure 40(b)), a whirlpool image G10 (Figure 40(c)), a school of fish image G11 (Figure 40(d)) and a giant character image G12 (Figure 40(e)). In the first expected performance and the second expected performance, these expected performance images are displayed on the image display device 63 for 1.5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 40(f), in the first expectation performance, a bubble image G8 or a water current image G9 is displayed as the expectation performance image, indicating that the likelihood of winning the bonus is low, while a whirlpool image G10 or a school of fish image G11 is displayed as the expectation performance image, indicating that the likelihood of winning the bonus is high. In addition, a giant character image G12 is displayed as the expectation performance image, indicating that the likelihood of winning the bonus is very high. The player can grasp the likelihood of winning the bonus based on the type of expectation performance image displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expectation performance.

In the second expectation performance, a bubble image G8 or a whirlpool image G10 is displayed as the expectation performance image to indicate that the expectation of winning the BB is low if a bonus is won, and a water current image G9 or a school of fish image G11 is displayed as the expectation performance image to indicate that the expectation of winning the BB is high if a bonus is won. In addition, a giant character image G12 is displayed as the expectation performance image to indicate that the expectation of winning the BB is very high if a bonus is won. The player can grasp the expectation of winning the BB if a bonus is won based on the type of expectation performance image displayed on the image display device 63 in the second expectation performance.

The type of expected performance image displayed in the first expected performance does not affect the type of expected performance image displayed in the second expected performance, and the type of expected performance image displayed in the second expected performance does not affect the type of expected performance image displayed in the first expected performance. This makes it possible to create a large number of variations (specifically, 25 types) as combinations of the performance contents of the first expected performance and the second expected performance, improving the entertainment value of the game.

By having many combinations of the presentation contents of the first and second expectation presentations, it is possible to complicate the content that can be notified to the player. For example, if a bubble image G8 is displayed in the first expectation presentation and then a giant character image G12 is displayed in the second expectation presentation, it is possible to indicate that although the expectation of a bonus win is low, if a bonus win does occur, there is a very high expectation that the bonus win will be a BB win, which is more advantageous to the player than an RB win. In this case, it is possible to make the player hope for a BB win, despite the low expectation of a bonus win.

Returning to the explanation of the flow of the presentation in the normal game state ST1, as shown in FIG. 39(f), after the middle stop presentation is performed and the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the middle pattern image G7 are stopped on the image display device 63, in the first expectation presentation, one of five types of expectation presentation images is displayed on the image display device 63. In the first expectation presentation, the bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), the water flow image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), the whirlpool image G10 (FIG. 40(c)), the school of fish image G11 (FIG. 40(d)), and the giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)) are set in the fourth presentation display layer 105. As already explained, in the display data that the VDP 95 creates in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the image of the fourth presentation display layer 105 is set on the nearer side of the screen than the images of the background display layer 101, the first presentation display layer 102, the second presentation display layer 103, and the third presentation display layer 104. Therefore, regardless of which image is displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected performance, the expected performance image is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4, the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the center pattern image G7. In the first expected performance, sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that a first expected sound effect that anticipates a bonus win is output in response to the display of the expected performance image. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and the normal base music and the first expected sound effect are output simultaneously.

As already explained, the type of expectation effect image displayed in the first expectation effect indicates the expectation of winning a bonus. When a spiral image G10 (FIG. 40(c)) or a school of fish image G11 (FIG. 40(d)), which indicates a high expectation of winning a bonus, is displayed in the first expectation effect, the player can be made aware in advance that there is a very high possibility that a bonus announcement effect or a second expectation effect will be performed after the first expectation effect has ended. In addition, when a giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)), which indicates a very high expectation of winning a bonus, is displayed in the first expectation effect, the player can be made aware in advance that there is a very high possibility that a bonus announcement effect or a second expectation effect will be performed after the first expectation effect has ended.

The bonus announcement performance is started after the first expectation performance ends. In the bonus announcement performance, as shown in FIG. 39 (g), a bonus announcement image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. The bonus announcement image G13 is set on the fifth performance display layer 106 (FIG. 38) after the display of the expectation performance image in the first expectation performance ends on the image display device 63. As already explained, in the display data that the VDP 95 creates in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the image of the fifth performance display layer 106 is set on the nearer side of the screen than the images of the background display layer 101, the first performance display layer 102, the second performance display layer 103, and the third performance display layer 104. Therefore, the bonus announcement image G13 is displayed on the nearer side of the screen than the background image G4, the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the center pattern image G7. In addition, in the bonus announcement performance, the speaker 62 is controlled to output a confirmation notification sound of "Bonus Confirmed" indicating that a bonus has been won in accordance with the timing when the bonus announcement image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, and light emission control is performed to cause the upper lamp 61 to emit light in a manner that notifies the player that a bonus has been won. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and the normal base music and the confirmation notification sound are output simultaneously. In addition, in the bonus announcement performance, the drive control of the reel 75 is performed so that a reel operation performance in which the spherical performance portion 77b (FIG. 1) of the reel 75 is operated is performed. By performing the bonus announcement performance, the player can be made aware that a bonus has been won. The details of the drive control of the reel 75 will be described later.

The second expectation performance is started when both the condition that the execution period of the first expectation performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. As already explained, in the second expectation performance, the image display device 63 displays one of the expectation performance images, which are a bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), a water flow image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), a whirlpool image G10 (FIG. 40(c)), a school of fish image G11 (FIG. 40(d)), and a giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)). The expectation performance image in the second expectation performance is set in the fourth performance display layer 105, like the expectation performance image in the first expectation performance, and is displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G4, the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the center pattern image G7. In the second expectation performance, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the second expectation sound effect that expects a BB win is output in correspondence with the display of the expectation performance image. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds simultaneously, and the normal base music and the second expected sound effect are output simultaneously.

As already explained, the fifth trigger occurs when the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is turned on, and the sixth trigger occurs when the stop button 42-44 is turned off. The first expected performance starts at the end of the execution period (specifically, one second) of the middle stop performance that starts based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger. When the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is pressed and held down in response to the long press notification sound output from the speaker 62, and the stop button 42-44 is turned off after the first expected performance ends, the second expected performance starts based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger. In addition, if the sixth trigger occurs before the first expected performance ends after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the first expected performance ends midway and the second expected performance starts based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger.

On the other hand, if the period between the fifth trigger and the sixth trigger is short, it is possible that the sixth trigger occurs in the middle of a middle stop performance, or that the sixth trigger occurs when the execution period of the first expected performance is less than the specified period (specifically, one second). In these cases, after the sixth trigger occurs, the second expected performance starts on the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches the specified period (specifically, one second). By configuring the second expected performance not to start until the execution period of the first expected performance reaches the specified period (specifically, one second), it is possible to ensure a specified period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected performance.

If the second expected performance is started only on the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the second expected performance will start before the first expected performance if the sixth opportunity occurs during the execution of the middle stop performance. In a configuration in which the first expected performance indicates the expectation of a bonus win and the second expected performance indicates the expectation of a BB win when a bonus win occurs, if the order of the first expected performance and the second expected performance are reversed, there is a risk of confusing the player. In addition, if the second expected performance is started only on the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, if the sixth opportunity occurs when the execution period of the first expected performance is less than a predetermined period (specifically, one second), there is a risk of the execution period of the first expected performance being so short that the content of the performance cannot be understood. In response to these problems, in this embodiment, the second expected performance is started based on the fact that both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. This makes it possible to prevent the second expected performance from starting before the first expected performance. In addition, a specified period (specifically, one second) is set aside as the execution period for the first expected performance, making it possible to perform the first expected performance in a manner that allows the performance content to be understood.

Returning to the explanation of the flow of the presentation in the normal gaming state ST1, if the second expected presentation has been performed in a game that is not the target game for the re-change presentation, the presentation for one game ends when the second expected presentation ends. On the other hand, in a target game for the re-change presentation, the re-change presentation is performed after the second expected presentation ends. In this slot machine 10, the target game for the re-change presentation is a game in which a bonus win has occurred and no bonus announcement presentation is performed, and a game that starts in a state in which five games have been played without a bonus win being achieved. Note that if a bonus win is achieved before the re-change presentation is performed, the re-change presentation is canceled. By making the player expect the re-change presentation to be performed after the second expected presentation ends, it is possible to increase the attention paid to the presentation.

The re-change performance starts at the timing when the second expectation performance ends. In the re-change performance, as shown in FIG. 39(h), the change of the middle pattern that was stopped and displayed in the central area of the image display device 63 is resumed, and then the stop display of the middle pattern image G7 showing the same number as the number of the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 ("1" in FIG. 39(h)) is started. By making the numbers shown by the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the middle pattern image G7 all aligned in the image display device 63, the player can recognize that the bonus win has been confirmed. The change of the middle pattern in the re-change performance and the stop display of the middle pattern image G7 after the change are performed on the third performance display layer 104 (FIG. 38) where the stop display of the middle pattern image G7 was performed. Therefore, the middle pattern image G7 after the re-change is displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G4. In the re-change performance, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the sound effect during the re-change is output in addition to the normal base music. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds simultaneously, and the normal base music and the sound effect during re-change are output simultaneously. In addition, in the re-change performance, when the numbers on the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the center pattern image G7 are aligned on the image display device 63 and the occurrence of a bonus win is announced, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light, and the operation control of the reel 75 is performed so that the reel operation performance in which the spherical performance part 77b (FIG. 1) of the reel 75 operates is started. The details of the operation control of the reel 75 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the presentation side ROM 93 and presentation side RAM 94 for executing various presentations in the normal game state ST1 will be described. First, the configuration of the presentation side ROM 93 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram in Figure 41 (a). Figure 41 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the presentation side ROM 93 for executing various presentations in the normal game state ST1. The presentation side MPU 92 uses various presentation tables that are pre-stored in the presentation side ROM 93 when executing various presentations in the normal game state ST1.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a normal base performance table storage area 93a. In the slot machine 10, there are six types of normal base performances with different background images G4 and normal base music as normal base performances corresponding to the normal game state ST1, and the normal base performance table storage area 93a stores six types of normal base performance tables for executing these normal base performances. In the normal base performance table, address information of display data for displaying the background image G4 on the image display device 63, setting destination information for specifying the setting destination of the display data, sound data for outputting the normal base music from the speaker 62, and light emission data for making the upper lamp 61 emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the normal base performance are set. Here, the display data is a data table in which information (display time, zoom, display order, etc.) about the display mode of individual images such as the background image G4 is set. In the display data, information for multiple frames about the display mode of the individual images is set, and a series of performance contents are displayed on the image display device 63 according to the display data. Details of the configuration for displaying the images of each frame on the image display device 63 according to the display data will be described later.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a pattern change performance table memory area 93b, which stores a pattern change performance table for displaying the left, right, and center patterns on the image display device 63. The pattern change performance table stores address information for display data for displaying the left pattern in the left area of the image display device 63, display data for displaying the right pattern in the right area, and display data for displaying the center pattern in the center area, as well as setting destination information for these display data.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with an effective notification performance table storage area 93c, which stores an effective notification performance table for performing effective notification performances. The effective notification performance table stores sound data for outputting the above-mentioned effective notification sound from the speaker 62.

The left stop performance table memory area 93d is provided in the performance side ROM 93, and the left stop performance table memory area 93d stores a left stop performance table for performing a left stop performance. As already explained, there are nine types of left pattern images G5 showing any of the numbers "1" to "9" as images that are stopped and displayed in the left area of the image display device 63 in the left stop performance, and the left stop performance table memory area 93d stores nine types of left stop performance tables for performing the stopped display of these nine types of left pattern images G5. The left stop performance table stores address information of the display data for performing the stopped display of the left pattern image G5 in the left area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and sound data for outputting the above-mentioned stop sound effect from the speaker 62.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a right stop performance table storage area 93e, in which a right stop performance table for performing a right stop performance is stored. As already explained, there are nine types of right pattern images G6 showing any of the numbers "1" to "9" as images that are stopped and displayed in the right area of the image display device 63 in a right stop performance, and the right stop performance table storage area 93e stores nine types of right stop performance tables for performing the stopped display of these nine types of right pattern images G6. The right stop performance table stores address information of display data for performing the stopped display of the right pattern image G6 in the right area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and sound data for outputting the above-mentioned stop sound effect from the speaker 62.

The effect-side ROM 93 is provided with a reach notification effect table storage area 93f, which stores a reach notification effect table for performing reach notification effects. Sound data is set in the reach notification effect table to output the above-mentioned reach notification sound from the speaker 62.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a long press notification performance table storage area 93g, which stores a long press notification performance table for performing a long press notification performance. The long press notification performance table has sound data set therein for outputting the above-mentioned long press notification sound from the speaker 62.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a middle stop performance table storage area 93h, which stores a middle stop performance table for performing a middle stop performance. As already explained, there are nine types of middle pattern images G7 showing any of the numbers "1" to "9" as images that are stopped and displayed in the center area of the image display device 63 in a middle stop performance, and the middle stop performance table storage area 93h stores nine types of middle stop performance tables for displaying these nine types of middle pattern images G7 in a stopped state. The middle stop performance table stores address information for display data for displaying the middle pattern images G7 in a stopped state, setting destination information for the display data, and sound data for outputting the above-mentioned stop sound effect from the speaker 62.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a first expected performance table storage area 93i, and the first expected performance table storage area 93i stores a first expected performance table for performing the first expected performance. As already explained with reference to FIG. 40(a) to FIG. 40(e), there are five types of expected performance images to be displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected performance: a bubble image G8, a water flow image G9, a whirlpool image G10, a school of fish image G11, and a giant character image G12, and the first expected performance table storage area 93i stores five types of first expected performance tables for displaying the five types of expected performance images. A blank area in which performance data is not set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and a performance execution area in which performance data for performing the first expected performance is set is provided after the blank area. The blank area is provided over the range of pointer information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the fifth trigger to the end of the middle stop performance. In the performance execution area, performance data is set, including address information of display data for displaying one of the expected performance images on the image display device 63, setting destination information for the display data, and sound data for outputting the above-mentioned first expected sound effect from the speaker 62. The sound data set in the first expected performance table is different data depending on the type of expected performance image.

In a game in which the second expected performance is not performed, the middle stop performance is started based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, and the first expected performance is started at the end of the middle stop performance. The first expected performance table is read based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger. If the first expected performance table is read based on the end of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance is executed immediately after reading, it becomes necessary to have a configuration for determining that the middle stop performance has ended, and the configuration for performing the first expected performance becomes complicated. In contrast, in this embodiment, a blank area is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, so that the first expected performance is prevented from being performed during the execution of the middle stop performance while the configuration for reading the first expected performance table based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger is performed. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for performing the first expected performance by eliminating the need for a configuration for determining the end timing of the middle stop performance.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a bonus announcement performance table storage area 93j, and the bonus announcement performance table storage area 93j stores a bonus announcement performance table for performing a bonus announcement performance after the first expected performance. There is one type of bonus announcement performance. A blank area in which no performance data is set is provided at the beginning of the bonus announcement performance table, and a performance execution area in which performance data for performing a bonus announcement performance is set after the blank area is provided. The blank area is provided over the range of pointer information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the fifth trigger to the end of the first expected performance. In the performance execution area, the following performance data is set: display data for displaying the bonus announcement image G13 on the image display device 63, setting destination information for the display data, sound data for outputting a confirmation notification sound from the speaker 62, light emission data for illuminating the upper lamp 61 in a manner indicating that a bonus win has occurred, and address information of a drive table for executing a role operation performance.

In the game in which the bonus announcement effect is to be executed, the middle stop effect is started based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, and the first expected effect is started at the end timing of the middle stop effect. After that, the bonus announcement effect is executed at the end timing of the first expected effect. The bonus announcement effect table is read based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger. If the bonus announcement effect table is read based on the end of the first expected effect and the bonus announcement effect is executed immediately after reading, it becomes necessary to have a configuration for grasping that the first expected effect has ended, and the configuration for executing the bonus announcement effect becomes complicated. In contrast, in this embodiment, a blank area is provided at the beginning of the bonus announcement effect table, so that the bonus announcement effect is prevented from being executed during the execution of the middle stop effect and the first expected effect, while the configuration for reading the bonus announcement effect table based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger is implemented. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for executing the bonus announcement effect by eliminating the need for a configuration for grasping the end timing of the first expected effect.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a second expected performance table storage area 93k, and the second expected performance table storage area 93k stores a second expected performance table for performing the second expected performance. As already explained with reference to FIG. 40(a) to FIG. 40(e), there are five types of expected performance images to be displayed on the image display device 63 in the second expected performance: a bubble image G8, a water flow image G9, a whirlpool image G10, a school of fish image G11, and a giant character image G12, and the performance side ROM 93 stores five types of second expected performance tables for displaying these five types of expected performance images. The second expected performance table contains address information of display data for displaying any one of the expected performance images on the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and sound data for outputting the above-mentioned second expected sound effect from the speaker 62. The sound data set in the second expected performance table is different data depending on the type of expected performance image.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a re-change performance table storage area 93m, and the re-change performance table storage area 93m stores a re-change performance table for performing the re-change performance. As already explained, there are nine types of middle pattern images G7 showing any of the numbers "1" to "9" as images that are stopped and displayed in the central area of the image display device 63 after the middle pattern is re-changed in the re-change performance, and the performance side ROM 93 stores nine types of re-change performance tables for stopping and displaying these nine types of middle pattern images G7 after the re-change. The re-changing performance table contains address information for display data for re-changing the center pattern stopped in the central area of the image display device 63, setting destination information for the display data, address information for display data for stopping and displaying the center pattern image G7 showing the same numbers as the numbers shown in the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 after the center pattern is re-changing, setting destination information for the display data, sound data for outputting sound effects during the re-changing, light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61, and address information for the drive table for executing the role operation performance.

As described above, in normal game state ST1, multiple effects are executed based on the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers. The number of combinations of these multiple effects is enormous, and if the effect tables for all combinations were stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables would increase. In contrast, in this embodiment, multiple individual effect tables for executing various effects are read out, and the effects of one game are performed based on combinations of effect data set in the multiple effect tables. This makes it possible to increase the variety of effect combinations that can be executed while preventing the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables from increasing.

Next, the configuration of the read area 94a provided in the performance-side RAM 94 will be explained with reference to FIG. 41(b). As already explained, the read area 94a is an area from which data tables for executing various performances and various notifications are read. FIG. 41(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance-side RAM 94 for executing various performances.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the presentation side RAM 94 has a read area 94a, and the read area 94a has the 0th layer LY0 to the 11th layer LY11 from which data tables for executing various presentations and various notifications are read. The 0th layer LY0 is a layer from which a normal base presentation table is read in the normal game state ST1, the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8 are layers from which data tables for executing various presentations are read, the 9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10 are layers from which notification tables for executing various notifications are read, and the 11th layer LY11 is a layer from which a drive table for driving and controlling the gadget 75 is read.

Figure 42 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of each layer LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 11). As shown in Figure 42 (a), each layer LYn is provided with a deployment area REn from which one of a performance table, which is a data table for executing a performance, a notification table, which is a data table for executing a notification, and a drive table, which is a data table for executing drive control of the gimmick 75, is read, and a pointer counter PCn that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the pointer information of the data table read into the deployment area REn. In this embodiment, one deployment area REn is provided in one layer LYn, and only one data table can be read into one deployment area REn at a time.

When it is time to read the data table for executing various notifications and various performances, the performance-side MPU 92 reads the data table into the deployment area REn of the corresponding layer LYn in the read area 94a. Then, according to the data table read into each layer LYn of the read area 94a, it controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, the display of the image display device 63, and the drive control of the props 75. This allows various notifications and performances to be executed.

In each data table, multiple pieces of pointer information are arranged as consecutive numerical information. Among the data tables, the performance table and the notification table contain at least one of the following: light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61, sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62, and address information and setting destination information for display data for controlling the display of the image display device 63. In addition, among the data tables, the drive table contains drive data for controlling the drive of the reel 75. The details of the drive control of the reel 75 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the production-side RAM 94 is provided with a light-emitting setting area 111 in which the light-emitting data set in the referenced pointer information in the data table read out to each layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) is set, a sound output setting area 112 in which the sound data set in the referenced pointer information is set, and a display setting area 113 in which display data specified by the address information set in the referenced pointer information is set. The production-side MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 according to the light-emitting data set in the light-emitting setting area 111, controls the sound output of the speaker 62 according to the sound data set in the sound output setting area 112, and controls the display of the image display device 63 according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

One piece of light emission data is set in the light emission setting area 111. The production side MPU 92 sets the light emission data set in the data table read into the reference layer LYn in the light emission setting area 111 while updating the reference layer LYn in the order of the 0th layer LY0 → the 1st layer LY1 → ... → the 10th layer LY10. If light emission data has already been set in the light emission setting area 111, the light emission data is cleared and then the light emission data set in the data table read into the current reference layer LYn is set. For this reason, the light emission data set later remains in the light emission setting area 111 with priority. After updating the reference layer LYn up to the 10th layer LY10, the production side MPU 92 finally controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 based on the light emission data remaining in the light emission setting area 111.

As already explained, the normal base performance table is read into the 0th layer LY0, data tables for executing various performances are read into the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8, and data tables for executing various notifications are read into the 9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10. For this reason, the light emission data is set in the light emission setting area 111 in the following order: light emission data for normal base performance → light emission data for various performances → light emission data for notifications. This results in a configuration in which light emission data for various performances is set in the light emission setting area 111 with priority over light emission data for normal base performances, and light emission data for notifications is set in the light emission setting area 111 with priority over light emission data for various performances.

The pointer information of the reference target in the data table read into the 0th to 10th layers LY0 to LY10 is updated at the update timing regardless of whether or not the lighting control of the upper lamp 61 has been performed based on the lighting data set in the data table. For example, even if the lighting data for notifications is prioritized over the lighting data for normal base effects and the lighting data for various effects, and the lighting control of the upper lamp 61 is performed based on the lighting data for notifications, the pointer information of the reference target in the normal base effect table and the performance table for various effects is updated.

The later the data table for executing effects in each game is read, the larger the layer LYn number ("n") that is read. For this reason, if multiple data tables for effects are read and multiple light emission data exists, the light emission data set in the data table for effects that is read last takes precedence over the light emission data set in the data table for effects that is read first. For example, the light emission data set in the middle stop effect table read into the fifth layer LY5 takes precedence over the light emission data set in the normal base effect table read into the zeroth layer LY0.

Next, sound output from the speaker 62 will be described. Figure 42 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output setting area 112. As shown in Figure 42 (b), the sound output setting area 112 is provided with a base area 112a in which sound data for normal base performance is set, a performance area 112b in which sound data for various performances is set, and a notification area 112c in which sound data for various notifications is set. One sound data can be set in each of the base area 112a, the performance area 112b, and the notification area 112c.

The production side MPU 92 updates the reference layer LYn in the order of 0th layer LY0 → 1st layer LY1 → ... → 10th layer LY10, and sets the sound data set in the data table read into the reference layer LYn to the corresponding areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112.

Specifically, when sound data is set in the normal base performance table read into the 0th layer LY0 of the read area 94a, the performance side MPU 92 sets the sound data in the base area 112a, when sound data is set in various performance tables read into the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8, the performance side MPU 92 sets the sound data in the performance area 112b, and when sound data is set in various notification tables read into the 9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10, the performance side MPU 92 sets the sound data in the notification area 112c.

If sound data is already set in the setting destination area 112a-112c, the sound data is cleared and then the sound data set in the data table read into the currently referenced layer LYn (n = 0-10) is set in the setting destination area 112a-112c. In the range of n = 1-8 where the data table for presentation is read, the larger the layer LYn number ("n"), the higher the sound data of the data table for presentation read into the layer LYn is set in the presentation area 112b. In each game, the data table for presentation is read in such a manner that the layer LYn number ("n") is larger for the data table read later. Therefore, the sound data set in the data table for presentation read later is set in the presentation area 112b with priority. In addition, in the range of n = 9-10 where the data table for notification is read, the larger the layer LYn number ("n"), the higher the sound data of the data table for notification read into the layer LYn is set in the presentation area 112c with priority. The notification data table is read out in such a manner that the layer LYn number ("n") increases the later the timing of reading the data table. Therefore, the sound data set in the notification data table that is read out later is preferentially set in the notification area 112c.

After updating the referenced layer LYn up to the tenth layer LY10, the performance side MPU 92 finally controls the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the sound data remaining in each area 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112. Specifically, when sound data is set in the notification area 112c, the speaker 62 outputs sound based only on the sound data in the notification area 112c. The pointer information for the normal base performance table and various performance tables is also updated when the notification table is read in the ninth to tenth layers LY9 to LY10, but when a notification sound is output, sound output for normal base performance and sound output for various performances are not performed. This prevents the notification sound from being difficult to hear due to the sound for the normal base performance and the sound for various performances.

On the other hand, if no sound data is set in the notification area 112c, the speaker 62 outputs sound based on the sound data set in the base area 112a and the performance area 112b. If sound data is set in both the base area 112a and the performance area 112b, the sound for the normal base performance and the sound for the performance are output simultaneously. Also, if sound data is set only in the base area 112a, only the sound for the normal base performance is output, and if sound data is set only in the performance area 112b, only the sound for the performance is output.

Next, the display control in the image display device 63 will be described. In the image display device 63, display control is performed based on a plurality of display data set in the display setting area 113. FIG. 42(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display setting area 113. As shown in FIG. 42(c), the display setting area 113 includes a background area 113a in which background display data is set, a first performance area 113b to a fifth performance area 113f in which display data for various performances is set, and a first notification area 113g to a second notification area 113h in which notification display data is set.

As already explained, there are eight display layers 101 to 108 (Figure 38) for displaying one frame of an image on the image display device 63, and one frame of an image is displayed by combining images set in these display layers 101 to 108. Each of areas 113a to 113h in the display setting area 113 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the display layers 101 to 108, respectively. The background area 113a is an area where display data for an image set in the background display layer 101 is set, the first performance area 113b is an area where display data for an image set in the first performance display layer 102 is set, the second performance area 113c is an area where display data for an image set in the second performance display layer 103 is set, the third performance area 113d is an area where display data for an image set in the third performance display layer 104 is set, the fourth performance area 113e is an area where display data for an image set in the fourth performance display layer 105 is set, the fifth performance area 113f is an area where display data for an image set in the fifth performance display layer 106 is set, the first notification area 113g is an area where display data for an image set in the first notification display layer 107 is set, and the second notification area 113h is an area where display data for an image set in the second notification display layer 108 is set.

In the normal game state ST1, display data for displaying the background image G4 is set in the background area 113a. Also, display data for displaying an image showing the left pattern changing and a left pattern image G5 is set in the first performance area 113b, display data for displaying an image showing the right pattern changing and a right pattern image G6 is set in the second performance area 113c, and display data for displaying an image showing the middle pattern changing, a middle pattern image G7, and an image showing the middle pattern changing again is set in the third performance area 113d. Also, display data for displaying the water flow image G9, the whirlpool image G10, the school of fish image G11, and the giant character image G12 in the first expectation performance and the second expectation performance already described with reference to Figures 40(a) to 40(e) is set in the fourth performance area 113e. Furthermore, display data for displaying the bonus notification image G13, which has already been described with reference to FIG. 39(g), is set in the fifth performance area 113f.

As already explained, the production side MPU 92 outputs to the VDP 95 a drawing list that indicates the contents of the image to be displayed on the image display device 63. The VDP 95 creates display data for one composite image in the frame area of the video RAM 96, in which the images of the display layers 101 to 108 are sequentially superimposed from the back of the screen to the front of the screen in the following order according to the drawing list received from the production side MPU 92: image of the background display layer 101 → image of the first performance display layer 102 → image of the second performance display layer 103 → image of the third performance display layer 104 → image of the fourth performance display layer 105 → image of the fifth performance display layer 106 → image of the first notification display layer 107 → image of the second notification display layer 108. The VDP 95 then outputs one frame of image signals corresponding to the display data created in the frame area to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display the image corresponding to the display data.

In the data tables read into the 0th to 10th layers LY0 to LY10, the pointer information in which the address information of the display data is set has setting destination information that specifies which of the areas 113a to 113h of the display setting area 113 the display data should be read into. When the address information and setting destination information of the display data are set in the referenced pointer information, the production side MPU 92 identifies the display data based on the address information, and sets the identified display data to one of the areas 113a to 113h of the display setting area 113 specified by the setting destination information.

When an area 113a-113h in which display data has already been set in the display setting area 113 is specified as the setting destination, the production side MPU 92 clears the already set display data and sets the display data set in the pointer information of the current reference target in the area 113a-113h. Therefore, display data for which the setting trigger occurs later is given priority over display data for which the setting trigger occurs earlier in each area 113a-113h.

Specifically, when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are met, the fourth performance area 113e is cleared and then display data for the second expected performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e. In this case, if display data for the first expected performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e, display data for the second expected performance is set in place of the display data. This allows the first expected performance to end and the second expected performance to start. Also, if the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) has ended and display data for the first expected performance has not been set in the fourth performance area 113e, display data for the second expected performance is set and the second expected performance is started.

In this way, in the display setting area 113, the area in which the display data for the second expected performance is set is set to the same area (fourth performance area 113e) as the area in which the display data for the first expected performance is set. This makes it possible to start the second expected performance without the need for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the progress of the first expected performance. In addition, when the second expected performance starts in the middle of the first expected performance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for aligning the end timing of the first expected performance with the start timing of the second expected performance. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent an overlapping period between the execution period of the first expected performance that is being performed first and the execution period of the second expected performance that is started later. This makes it possible to prevent the display content of the image display device 63 from becoming too complicated.

By setting destination information for display data in the performance table, even if the layer LYn from which the performance table is read in the read area 94a changes, it is possible to prevent the areas 113a to 113h in which the display data set in the performance table is set in the display setting area 113 from changing. This makes it possible to prevent a change in the setting destination of the display data in the display setting area 113 due to a change in the layer LYn from which the performance table is read, and also prevents the anteroposterior relationship of the images displayed on the image display device 63 from changing.

Next, the manner in which the effect table is read in the normal gaming state ST1 will be described. First, the manner in which the effect table is read in a game that is not the execution target game for either the bonus announcement effect or the re-variation effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams in Figures 43(a) to 43(d).

If the game is not the target game for the bonus announcement effect, the second expectation effect, or the re-change effect, and the number of the left pattern image G5 does not match the number of the right pattern image G6 in the right stop effect lottery described later, the reach state does not occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(a), based on the occurrence of the first trigger, one of the six types of normal base effect tables is read into the 0th layer LY0, and the pattern change effect table is read into the first layer LY1. Then, based on the occurrence of the second trigger, the valid notification effect table is read into the second layer LY2. Then, based on the occurrence of the third trigger, one of the nine types of left stop effect tables is read into the third layer LY3, based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, one of the nine types of right stop effect tables is read into the fourth layer LY4, and based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, one of the nine types of middle stop effect tables is read into the fifth layer LY5.

The pointer information of the reference target in each layer LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 11) is updated without being affected by other layers LYn. Therefore, each effect executed according to the effect table read into each layer LYn is executed in parallel. Specifically, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read into the 0th layer LY0 progresses in parallel with the pattern change effect, valid notification effect, left stop effect, right stop effect, and center stop effect executed according to the effect tables read into the 1st to 5th layers LY1 to LY5, without being affected by the progress of these effects.

On the other hand, if the number of the left pattern image G5 and the number of the right pattern image G6 match in the right stop performance lottery described later, a reach state occurs. In this case, if the first expected performance lottery at the time of a miss described later results in a lottery result in which the first expected performance is not performed, the readout mode of the performance table based on the occurrence of the fourth and fifth triggers differs from that in the case of FIG. 43(a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(b), based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, one of nine types of right stop performance tables is read out to the fourth layer LY4, and the reach notification performance table is read out to the fifth layer LY5. Then, based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, one of nine types of middle stop performance tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6. As already explained, the right stop performance table is set with sound data for outputting a stop sound effect, and the reach notification performance table is set with sound data for outputting a reach notification sound. Because the number ("5") of the fifth layer LY5 from which the reach notification performance table is read out is greater than the number ("4") of the fourth layer LY4 from which the right stop performance table is read out, sound data for outputting the reach notification sound is preferentially set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112. For this reason, in this case, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the reach notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop performance, and the stop sound effect is not output.

If any of the first expected effects is won in the first expected effect lottery when a loss occurs, which will be described later, the manner in which the effect table is read out based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger differs from the case of FIG. 43(b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(c), based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, one of nine types of middle stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6, and one of five types of first expected effect tables is read out to the seventh layer LY7.

If the game is the target game for executing the second expected effect but not the target game for executing the re-changing effect, a first composite effect table is generated that includes the contents of the symbol changing effect table, the valid notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(d), one of the six types of normal base effect tables is read into the 0th layer LY0 based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the first composite effect table is read into the first layer LY1. These effects are then executed sequentially according to the first composite effect table. The first composite effect table will be described later.

Next, the readout mode of the effect table in the case of a game in which a bonus announcement effect or a re-variation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 44(a) and FIG. 44(b). When any bonus is won (either the first to fourth BB wins or the first to second RB wins) in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 14), the announcement lottery process (step 2203 of the bonus announcement process (FIG. 50)) described later is performed. When a bonus announcement effect is won in the announcement lottery process, the readout mode of the effect table based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger differs from that in FIG. 43(c). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(a), based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, one of nine types of middle stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6, one of five types of first expectation effect tables is read out to the seventh layer LY7, and the bonus announcement effect table is read out to the eighth layer LY8.

On the other hand, if the re-change effect is won in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)) described later, and then five games are played without a bonus winning, and the game becomes the target game for the re-change effect, the second expectation effect and the re-change effect are performed in addition to the first expectation effect. In this case, a second composite effect table is generated that includes the contents of the pattern change effect table, the valid notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the center stop effect table, the first expectation effect table, the second expectation effect table, and the re-change effect table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(b), one of the six types of normal base effect tables is read into the 0th layer LY0 based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the second composite effect table is read into the first layer LY1. Then, these effects are executed sequentially according to the second composite effect table. The second composite effect table will be described later.

As described above, when the first and second composite performance tables are not generated, the various performance tables for executing the various performances are individually read out to different layers LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 8) of the readout area 94a, and the performance of one game progresses by executing various performances in parallel according to the various performance tables. Also, when the first or second composite performance table is generated, the performance of one game progresses by executing normal base performances in parallel according to the normal base performance table read out to the 0th layer LY0 and various performances in parallel according to the first or second composite performance table read out to the first layer LY1.

When the first composite effect table is generated, the contents of the symbol change effect table, the valid notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the reach notification effect table, the center stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table are read into one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1), and when the second composite effect table is generated, the contents of the symbol change effect table, the valid notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the center stop effect table, the first expected effect table, the second expected effect table, and the re-change effect table are read into one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). This reduces the maximum number of effect tables read in one game in the read area 94a. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of layers LYn in the read area 94a.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the performance side ROM 93 is provided with a synthesis table storage area 93n, and the synthesis table storage area 93n stores a first synthesis table for generating a first synthesis performance table and a second synthesis table for generating a second synthesis performance table. The first synthesis performance table is generated by setting performance data set in the symbol change performance table, the valid notification performance table, the left stop performance table, the right stop performance table, the reach notification performance table, the middle stop performance table, the first expected performance table, and the second expected performance table, for the first synthesis table. The second synthesis performance table is generated by setting performance data set in the symbol change performance table, the valid notification performance table, the left stop performance table, the right stop performance table, the long press notification performance table, the middle stop performance table, the first expected performance table, the second expected performance table, and the re-change performance table, for the second synthesis table.

Here, the contents of the composite effect table will be explained with reference to FIG. 45, using the second composite effect table as an example. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second composite effect table. Note that the first composite effect table differs from the second composite effect table in that the effect data of the reach notification effect table is set instead of the effect data of the long press notification effect table, and that the effect data of the re-change effect table is not set.

In the second synthesis table, the pointer information "0" to "w" is set to be consecutive, and performance data can be set for the pointer information, and update information is set for the pointer information. Specifically, the update information includes a jump condition for jumping the value of the pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) to the jump destination pointer information in one processing of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described below, a jump destination to be set in the pointer counter PCn when the jump condition is satisfied, and an update condition for updating the value of the pointer counter PCn by adding 1.

When the second composite effect table (Figure 45) is generated, the address information and setting destination information of the display data in the pattern change effect table are set in the pointer information area "0" to "p" in the second composite table, the sound data in the valid notification effect table is set in the pointer information area "p+1" to "q", and the address information, setting destination information, and sound data of the display data in the left stop effect table are set in the pointer information area "q+1" to "r".

In the area "r+1" to "s" of the pointer information, address information and setting destination information of the display data in the right stop performance table and sound data in the long press notification performance table are set. In the area "r+1" to "s" of the pointer information, sound data in the right stop performance table is not set. Therefore, when the second composite performance table is generated, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a long press notification sound is output instead of the stop sound effect in accordance with the right stop performance.

The pointer information area "s+1" to "t" is set with address information, setting destination information, and sound data for the display data in the intermediate stop performance table. The pointer information area "t+1" to "u" is set with address information, setting destination information, and sound data for the display data in the performance execution area of the first expected performance table. The blank area provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table is not set in the second composite performance table. The pointer information area "u+1" to "v" is set with address information, setting destination information, and sound data for the display data in the second expected performance table, and the pointer information area "v+1" to "w" is set with address information, setting destination information, sound data, light emission data, and address information of the drive table for the display data in the re-variable performance table. The pointer information area "v+1" to "w" is not set in the first composite performance table.

The presentation side ROM 93 stores one type of second synthesis table, and the second synthesis table is created by setting the presentation data set for each presentation table that is the target of execution in each game to that one type of second synthesis table. The presentation side ROM 93 stores one type of first synthesis table, and the first synthesis table is created by setting the presentation data set for each presentation table that is the target of execution in each game to that one type of first synthesis table. Since the presentation side ROM 93 stores only one type of first synthesis table and one type of second synthesis table in advance to generate the first synthesis table and the second synthesis table, the storage capacity of the presentation side ROM 93 for storing the synthesis tables is reduced.

The pointer information of the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table read out to the first layer LY1 is updated by the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later. In the second composite effect table, as shown in FIG. 45, the condition that the pointer information is one of "1" to "p" and the condition that the second trigger occurs are set as jump conditions in the pointer information "0" to "p" area in which the performance data for the pattern change performance is set, and "p+1" is set as the pointer information of the jump destination. Also, an update condition of "the second trigger occurs at p" is set in the area. In this case, the pointer information is updated by one at a 40 millisecond cycle, and the pattern change performance progresses until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "1" to "p" and the condition that the second trigger occurs are satisfied. When the pattern change performance is started, the display data for displaying the change of the left pattern is set in the first performance area 113b of the display setting area 113, the display data for displaying the change of the right pattern is set in the second performance area 113c, and the display data for displaying the change of the center pattern is set in the third performance area 113d of the display setting area 113. In the image display device 63, the change of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the center pattern is displayed according to these display data. In the image display device 63, the background image G4 is also displayed according to the display data set in the background area 113a of the display setting area 113. The display of the background image G4 is continuously executed regardless of the update mode of the pointer information of the reference target in the second composite performance table (FIG. 45).

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "p" without the second trigger occurring, the pointer information of the reference target will not be updated until the update condition that the second trigger occurs when the pointer information is in the "p" state is met. In this case, the image display device 63 continues to display the varying left, right, and center patterns according to the display data set in the first to third performance areas 113b to 113d of the display setting area 113.

If both the condition that the pointer information is any one of "1" to "p" and the condition that the second trigger occurs are met, the referenced pointer information is updated to the jump destination "p+1" in one processing round of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described below, and a valid notification performance is started. Specifically, if the second trigger occurs when the pointer information is any one of "1" to "p", or if the pointer information becomes any one of "1" to "p" after the second trigger occurs, the referenced pointer information is updated to the jump destination "p+1" and a valid notification performance is started.

In the area of pointer information "p+1" to "q" where the performance data for the valid notification performance is set, the jump conditions are set as follows: the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q", and the third trigger occurs. The jump destination pointer information is set to "q+1". In addition, an update condition of "the third trigger occurs at q" is set in the area. In this case, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q" and the condition that the third trigger occurs are met, the pointer information is updated by one at a 40 millisecond cycle, and the valid notification performance progresses. In the valid notification performance, the sound data of the valid notification sound set in the area of "p+1" to "q" is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62.

If the referenced pointer information is updated to "q" without the third trigger occurring, the sound output of the valid notification sound ends, and the referenced pointer information is no longer updated until the update condition is met that the third trigger occurs when the pointer information is in the "q" state. In this case, the image display device 63 continues to display the varying left, right, and center patterns according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

If both the condition that the pointer information is any of "p+2" to "q" and the condition that the third trigger occurs are satisfied, the reference pointer information is updated to the jump destination "q+1" in one processing of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later, and the left stop performance is started. Specifically, if the third trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any of "p+2" to "q", or if the pointer information becomes any of "p+2" to "q" after the third trigger occurs, the reference pointer information is updated to the jump destination "q+1" and the left stop performance is started. If the third trigger occurs in a situation where the valid notification performance is being performed (a situation where the pointer information is any of "p+2" to "q-1") and the pointer information is updated to "q+1", the sound data for the valid notification performance is no longer set in the performance area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the valid notification performance ends. When the left stop effect is started, the display data for displaying the varying left pattern is deleted, and the display data for displaying the stopped left pattern image G5 is set in the first effect area 113b of the display setting area 113.

In the pointer information area "q+1" to "r" where the performance data for the left stop performance is set, the jump conditions are set as follows: the pointer information is one of "q+2" to "r" and the fourth trigger occurs, and "r+1" is set as the jump destination pointer information. Also, an update condition of "the fourth trigger occurs at r" is set in the area. In this case, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "q+2" to "r" and the condition that the fourth trigger occurs are both met, the pointer information is updated by one at a 40 millisecond cycle, and the left stop performance progresses. In the left stop performance, the sound data for the stop sound effect set in the pointer information area "q+1" to "r" is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62.

If the referenced pointer information is updated to "r" without the fourth trigger occurring, the output of the stop sound effect ends, and the referenced pointer information will not be updated until the update condition is met that the fourth trigger occurs when the pointer information is in the "r" state. In this case, the image display device 63 continues to display the left pattern image G5 still and the right and center patterns fluctuating according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

If both the condition that the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r" and the condition that the fourth trigger occurs are satisfied, the reference pointer information is updated to the jump destination "r+1" in one processing of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later, and the right stop effect and long press notification effect are started. Specifically, if the fourth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r", or if the pointer information becomes any of "q+2" to "r" after the fourth trigger occurs, the reference pointer information is updated to the jump destination "r+1" and the right stop effect and long press notification effect are started. If the fourth trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "r+1" in a situation where the left stop effect is being executed (a situation where the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r-1"), the sound data for the left stop effect is no longer set in the effect area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the left stop effect ends. When the right stop performance is started, the display data for displaying the varying right pattern is deleted, and the display data for displaying the right pattern image G6 in a stopped state is set in the second performance area 113c of the display setting area 113.

In the area of pointer information "r+1" to "s" in which address information and setting destination information for the display data of the right stop effect and sound data for the long press notification effect are set, the jump conditions are set as follows: the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s" and the condition that the fifth trigger occurs, and "s+1" is set as the pointer information of the jump destination. In addition, an update condition of "the fifth trigger occurs at s" is set in the area. In this case, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s" and the condition that the fifth trigger occurs are both met, the pointer information is updated by one at a 40 millisecond cycle, and the right stop effect and the long press notification effect progress. In the long press notification effect, the sound data of the long press notification sound set in the area of pointer information "r+1" to "s" is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62.

If the referenced pointer information is updated to "s" without the fifth trigger occurring, the long press notification sound ends, and the referenced pointer information is no longer updated until the update condition is met that the fifth trigger occurs when the pointer information is at "s". In this case, the image display device 63 continues to display the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 stationary and the variable display of the middle pattern according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

If both the condition that the pointer information is any of "r+2" to "s" and the condition that the fifth trigger occurs are satisfied, the reference pointer information is updated to the jump destination "s+1" in one processing of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later, and the middle stop performance is started. Specifically, if the fifth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any of "r+2" to "s", or if the pointer information becomes any of "r+2" to "s" after the fifth trigger occurs, the reference pointer information is updated to the jump destination "s+1" and the middle stop performance is started. If the fifth trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "s+1" in a situation where the right stop performance and the long press notification performance are being performed (a situation where the pointer information is any of "r+2" to "s-1"), the sound data for the long press notification performance is no longer set in the performance area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the long press notification performance ends. When the middle stop effect is started, the display data for displaying the changing middle pattern is deleted, and the display data for displaying the middle pattern image G7 in a stopped state is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113.

In the area of the pointer information from "s+1" to "t" where the performance data for the middle stop performance is set, no jump condition, jump destination, or update condition is set. Therefore, in this area, regardless of whether the fifth trigger occurs or not, the reference pointer information is updated by one at a 40 millisecond cycle, and the middle stop performance progresses. In the middle stop performance, the sound data of the stop sound effect set in the area of the pointer information from "s+1" to "t" is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. Then, when the reference pointer information is updated to "t+1", the middle stop performance ends and the first expected performance starts. In this way, the first expected performance starts at the end timing of the middle stop performance. Even if the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the pointer information is updated to "t+1", the reference pointer information does not jump. Therefore, even if the sixth trigger occurs while the middle stop performance is being performed, the middle stop performance is performed to the end. In this case, the first expected performance starts at the end of the middle stop performance. When the first expected performance starts, display data for displaying the expected performance image in the first expected performance (bubble image G8, water flow image G9, whirlpool image G10, school of fish image G11, or giant character image G12) is set in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113. The display data is deleted from the fourth performance area 113e when the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In the area of pointer information "t+1" to "u" where the performance data of the first expected performance is set, the jump conditions are set as follows: the condition that the pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs, and "u+1" is set as the jump destination pointer information. Also, an update condition of "the sixth trigger occurs at u" is set in the area. In this case, until the reference target pointer information becomes "t+26", even if the sixth trigger occurs, the pointer information is updated by one at a cycle of 40 milliseconds, and the first expected performance progresses. It takes one second from the start of the first expected performance until the reference target pointer information is updated to "t+26". After that, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are met, the pointer information is updated by one at a cycle of 40 milliseconds, and the first expected performance continues. In the first expected performance, the sound data of the first expected sound effect set in the area from "t+1" to "u" in the pointer information is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62.

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "u" without the sixth trigger occurring, the output of the first expected sound effect ends, and the pointer information of the reference target is not updated until the update condition that the sixth trigger occurs with the pointer information in the "u" state is met. If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "u", that is, when the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) ends, the image display device 63 ends displaying the expected performance image (bubble image G8, water flow image G9, whirlpool image G10, school of fish image G11, or giant character image G12). The image display device 63 continues to display the left pattern image G5, right pattern image G6, and center pattern image G7 in a stopped state according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

When the update condition that the sixth trigger occurs when the pointer information of the reference target is "u" is satisfied, the second expected performance is started. Also, when both the condition that the pointer information is any of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to the jump destination "u+1" in one processing of the pointer update processing (FIG. 48) described later, and the second expected performance is started. Specifically, when the sixth trigger occurs when the pointer information is any of "t+26" to "u", or when the pointer information becomes any of "t+26" to "u" after the sixth trigger occurs, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to the jump destination "u+1" and the second expected performance is started. When the second expected performance starts, if the display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113, the display data is deleted. Then, display data for displaying the expected performance image (bubble image G8, water current image G9, whirlpool image G10, school of fish image G11, or giant character image G12) in the second expected performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e.

In this way, the second expected performance is started when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. As a result, even if the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is short and the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the first expected performance from becoming so short that the content of the first expected performance cannot be understood. In addition, if the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is long and the sixth trigger occurs at a timing after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance can be started without delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. This makes it possible to link the turning off of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expectation presentation in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, thereby heightening the player's sense of participation. This can therefore increase the player's interest in the game.

In the area of pointer information "u+1" to "v" where the performance data of the second expected performance is set, no jump condition, jump destination, or update condition is set. Therefore, in this area, the pointer information of the reference target is updated by one at a 40 millisecond cycle, and the second expected performance progresses. In the second expected performance, the sound data of the second expected sound effect set in the area of pointer information "u+1" to "v" is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. Then, when the reference pointer information is updated to "v+1", the second expected performance ends and the re-changing performance starts. In this way, the re-changing performance starts at the end timing of the second expected performance. When the re-changing performance starts, the display data for the stop display of the middle pattern is deleted, and the display data for the re-changing display of the middle pattern is set in the third performance area 113d of the display setting area 113.

In the area of the pointer information "v+1" to "w" where the performance data for the re-changing performance is set, no jump condition, jump destination, or update condition is set. Therefore, in this area, the pointer information of the reference target is updated by one at a 40 millisecond cycle, and the re-changing performance progresses. In the re-changing performance, the sound data set in the area of the pointer information "v+1" to "w" is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. In addition, the light emission data set in the area of the pointer information "v+1" to "w" is set in the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41 (b)), and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed based on the light emission data. Furthermore, the drive table of the role 75 specified by the address information of the drive table set in the area of the pointer information "v+1" to "w" (specifically, the pointer information of "w") is read out to the 11th layer LY11 of the readout area 94a, and the role operation performance is executed according to the drive table. Details of the character movements will be explained later.

In the game in which the re-changing performance is executed, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned off and the sixth trigger occurs, numerical information corresponding to the period from the sixth trigger to the end of the re-changing performance is set in the freeze counter in the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the freeze counter waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) until the value of the freeze counter becomes "0". Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game during the execution period of the second expectation performance in which the reference target pointer information is "u+1" to "v" and during the execution period of the re-changing performance in which the reference target pointer information is "v+1" to "w", the game is not started based on the operation, and the re-changing performance can be executed to the end. The processing configuration that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the re-changing performance will be described later.

In this embodiment, when the pointer information of the data table is updated to the final pointer information and repeat information is not set for the final pointer information, the layer LYn from which the data table is read is cleared. Specifically, the expansion area REn and pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the layer LYn from which the data table is read are cleared.

As shown in FIG. 45, no repeat information is set for "w", which is the final pointer information of the second composite performance table. Therefore, when the referenced pointer information is updated to "w" and the re-changing performance ends, the first layer LY1, from which the second composite performance table is read, is cleared. On the other hand, the 0th layer LY0, from which the normal base performance table is read, is not cleared, and the normal base performance based on the normal base performance table continues.

As already explained, the normal base effect table for executing the normal base effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is read into the 0th layer LY0, which is different from the first layer LY1 from which the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is read. Even if the pointer information of the reference target in the first layer LY1 jumps, it does not affect the pointer information of the reference target in the 0th layer LY0. For this reason, it is possible to start these effects in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers while continuously executing the display of the background image G4 and the output of the normal base music in the normal base effect.

In the first performance area 113b of the display setting area 113, display data is set for starting the variable display of the left pattern when the second composite performance table is read into the first layer LY1, and when the reference pointer information is updated to "q+1", the display data is cleared and display data is set for starting the static display of the left pattern image G5. As already explained, an image is set in the first performance display layer 102 based on the display data set in the first performance area 113b. Therefore, in the left region of the image display device 63, the variable display of the left pattern is started based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the variable display of the left pattern ends and the static display of the left pattern image G5 is started based on the occurrence of the third trigger.

In the second performance area 113c in the display setting area 113, display data is set for starting the variable display of the right pattern when the second composite performance table is read into the first layer LY1, and when the reference pointer information is updated to "r+1", the display data is cleared and display data is set for starting the static display of the right pattern image G6. As already explained, an image is set in the second performance display layer 103 based on the display data set in the second performance area 113c. Therefore, in the right region of the image display device 63, the variable display of the right pattern is started based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the variable display of the right pattern ends and the static display of the right pattern image G6 is started based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger.

In the third performance area 113d in the display setting area 113, display data for starting the variable display of the middle pattern at the timing when the second composite performance table is read out to the first layer LY1 is set, and when the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "s+1", the display data is cleared and the display data for starting the stop display of the middle pattern image G7 is set. After that, when the pointer information is updated to "v+1", the display data is cleared and the middle pattern is changed again, and then the display data for stopping and displaying the middle pattern image G7 showing the same numbers as the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 is set. Therefore, in the central area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the middle pattern is started based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the variable display of the middle pattern is ended based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, and the stop display of the middle pattern image G7 is started. After that, the re-variable display of the middle pattern is started after the end of the second expectation performance based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger. After that, the static display of the middle pattern image G7, which shows the same numbers as the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6, begins.

In the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113, display data for displaying the expected performance image of the first expected performance when the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "t+1" is set. After that, display data for displaying the expected performance image of the second expected performance when the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "u+1" is set. If the display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e at the timing when the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "u+1", the display data is cleared and the display data for the second expected performance is set. Therefore, if the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and before the first expected performance ends, the first expected performance ends midway and the second expected performance starts. This makes it possible to secure the execution period of the first expected performance for a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and start the second expected performance without causing a delay when the sixth trigger occurs.

As already explained, in the data table such as the performance table, the address information of the display data and the setting destination information of the display data are set. As a result, even if a composite performance table (first composite performance table or second composite performance table) is generated and the composite performance table is read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1) in the read area 94a, each display data set in the composite performance table can be set to any one of the first performance area 113b to the fourth performance area 113e in the display setting area 113, just as in the case where the composite performance table is not generated. As a result, the setting destination of the display data is prevented from changing depending on whether or not the composite performance table (first composite performance table or second composite performance table) is generated, and the chronological relationship of the images displayed on the image display device 63 is prevented from changing.

Next, the manner in which the second expected performance is started based on the second composite performance table will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 46. FIG. 46(a) shows the execution period of the second expected performance, FIG. 46(b) shows the execution period of the re-changing performance, FIG. 46(c) shows the execution period of the middle stop performance, FIG. 46(d) shows the execution period of the first expected performance, FIG. 46(e) shows the timing when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), FIG. 46(f) shows the occurrence timing of the fifth trigger, and FIG. 46(g) shows the occurrence timing of the sixth trigger.

First, we will explain the case where the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second).

When the fifth trigger occurs at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 46(f), the jump condition set in the area (pointer information range of "r+1" to "s") in which the performance data for the right stop performance and the long press notification performance are set in the second composite performance table (FIG. 45) is satisfied, and the referenced pointer information jumps to "s+1". As a result, the middle stop performance starts at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 46(c). As already explained, the fifth trigger occurs when the performance side MPU 92 receives a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop button 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop has been turned on is set. After that, the referenced pointer information is updated to "t+1" at the timing of t2. As a result, at the timing of t2, the middle stop performance ends as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the first expected performance starts as shown in FIG. 46(d).

After that, at the timing of t3, the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) as shown in FIG. 46(e). At the timing of t3, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "t+26". After that, after the execution period of the first expected performance has been performed for a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), and at the timing of t4 during the execution of the first expected performance, the sixth trigger occurs as shown in FIG. 46(g). As already explained, the sixth trigger occurs when the performance side MPU 92 receives an OFF operation command. When the sixth trigger occurs at the timing of t4, both the condition that the pointer information of the reference target is any of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied, so that the pointer information of the reference target jumps to the jump destination "u+1". As a result, at the timing of t4, the first expected performance ends as shown in FIG. 46(d), and the second expected performance starts as shown in FIG. 46(a). After that, at the timing of t5, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "v+1". As a result, at the timing t5, the second expectation effect ends as shown in FIG. 46(a), and the re-changing effect begins as shown in FIG. 46(b).

In this way, if the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected performance will start at the timing of the occurrence of the sixth trigger. As described above, if the sixth trigger occurs during the execution of the first expected performance when the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the first expected performance will end based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger and the second expected performance will start. Also, as already explained, if the sixth trigger occurs after the first expected performance has ended, the second expected performance will start based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger.

Therefore, if the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is turned off after the execution period of the first expected effect has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected effect can be started at the timing of the OFF operation without causing a delay. This makes it possible for the player to feel that the second expected effect has started as a result of the OFF operation of the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop. In this case, the player will press and hold the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop, and then turn off the stop button 42-44 while hoping that the second expected effect will occur. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, we will explain the case where the sixth trigger occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second).

At the timing of t6, the pointer information of the reference target in the second composite performance table (FIG. 45) is updated to "t+1". As a result, at the timing of t6, the middle stop performance ends as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the first expected performance starts as shown in FIG. 46(d). After that, at the timing of t7 when the pointer information of the reference target is in the range of "t+1" to "t+25", the sixth trigger occurs as shown in FIG. 46(g). The timing of t7 is the timing when the execution period of the first expected performance has not reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). Since the condition that the pointer information of the reference target is any of "t+26" to "u" is not satisfied, even if the sixth trigger occurs, the jump condition is not satisfied and the jump of the pointer information of the reference target does not occur. For this reason, the second expected performance does not start at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 46(a).

After that, at timing t8, the reference target pointer information is updated to "t+26", and at timing t8, the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) as shown in FIG. 46(e). This satisfies both the condition that the reference target pointer information is any of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs, and the reference target pointer information jumps to the jump destination, "u+1". This ends the first expected performance at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 46(d), and starts the second expected performance as shown in FIG. 46(a).

In this way, if the sixth trigger occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance starts when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). This makes it possible to ensure that the execution period of the first expected performance lasts at least a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). As already explained, the fifth trigger occurs when the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is turned on, and the sixth trigger occurs when the stop button 42-44 is turned off. In addition, the first expected performance starts when the middle stop performance that starts based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger ends. If the second expected performance is started only on the condition of the occurrence of the sixth trigger, there is a risk that the second expected performance will start before the first expected performance, and the execution period of the first expected performance will be so short that the content of the performance cannot be understood. In addition, in a configuration in which the first expectation performance indicates the expectation of a bonus win and the second expectation performance indicates the expectation of a BB win in the event of a bonus win, if the order of the first expectation performance and the second expectation performance are reversed, it may confuse the player. In contrast, in this embodiment, at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second) is secured as the execution period of the first expectation performance. This makes it possible to execute two expectation performances in the order of the first expectation performance → the second expectation performance, and to start the second expectation performance after executing the first expectation performance for a period (specifically, one second) that allows the performance content to be understood. By executing both the first expectation performance and the second expectation performance in a manner that allows the performance content to be understood, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Next, the performance execution process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 47. The performance execution process is a process for executing various performances and various notifications based on the data tables read into each layer LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 11) of the read area 94a, and is executed by interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in the performance side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

In the performance execution process, first, it is determined whether it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901). As already explained, the timing to update the pointer information occurs at 40 millisecond intervals. If it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901: YES), a pointer update process is executed to update the pointer information of the data table read into the read area 94a (step S1902). Details of the pointer update process will be described later.

Then, the value of the target layer counter 114 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the read area 94a of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1903). The target layer counter 114 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the current target layer that is being set among the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11 in the read area 94a. By clearing the value of the target layer counter 114 to "0" in step S1903, the current target layer becomes the 0th layer LY0. Then, the light emission setting area 111 in the production side RAM 94 and the base area 112a, production area 112b, and notification area 112c in the sound output setting area 112 are cleared (step S1904).

Then, the current target layer is identified based on the value of the target layer counter 114, and it is determined whether a data table has been read into the identified current target layer (step S1905). If a data table has been read into the target layer (step S1905: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S1906).

In the data setting process in step S1906, if light emission data is set for the currently referenced pointer information, the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(b)) is cleared and then the light emission data is set in the light emission setting area 111. As already explained, the light emission setting area 111 can set only one light emission data. The larger the number ("n") and the later the layer LYn is in the order of being the target layer, the more likely it is that the light emission data of the data table read into the layer LYn will become the light emission data finally set in the light emission setting area 111. As already explained, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed based on the light emission data finally set in the light emission setting area 111. The larger the number ("n") of the layer LYn, the higher the priority of the light emission data. For this reason, the priority of the light emission data for various effects is higher than the priority of the light emission data for normal base effects, and the priority of the light emission data for notification is higher than the priority of the light emission data for various effects.

In the data setting process in step S1906, if sound data is set for the pointer information of the current reference target, the sound data is set in the areas 112a to 112c in the sound output setting area 112 (FIG. 42(b)) corresponding to the value of the target layer counter 114. Specifically, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "0", the base area 112a is cleared and then the sound data is set in the base area 112a. If the value of the target layer counter 114 is any of "1" to "8", the performance area 112b is cleared and then the sound data is set in the performance area 112b. If the value of the target layer counter 114 is any of "9" to "10", the notification area 112c is cleared and then the sound data is set in the notification area 112c. As already explained, the 11th layer LY11 is the layer from which the driving table of the role object 75 is read, so no sound data is set in the 11th layer LY11.

As already explained, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time. When sound data is set only in the base area 112a (Fig. 42(b)), only the sound of the normal bass music is output. When sound data is set in the base area 112a and the performance area 112b (Fig. 42(b)), the sound of the normal bass music and the sound for the performance are output simultaneously. On the other hand, when sound data is set in the notification area 112c (Fig. 42(b)), sound output based on the sound data set in the base area 112a and the performance area 112b is not performed, and only the notification sound set in the notification area 112c is output.

As already explained, only one sound data can be set in each of the areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112. In the range of n=1 to 8, the larger the layer LYn number ("n") and the later the layer LYn is in the target layer order, the more likely it is that the sound data of the performance table read into that layer LYn will become the sound data finally set in the performance area 112b and that the sound data will be output from the speaker 62. In addition, in the range of n=9 to 10, the larger the layer LYn number ("n") and the later the layer LYn is in the target layer order, the more likely it is that the sound data of the notification table read into that layer LYn will become the sound data finally set in the notification area 112c and that the sound data will be output from the speaker 62.

In the data setting process in step S1906, if the address information and setting destination information of the display data are set for the pointer information of the current reference target, the areas 113a to 113h specified by the setting destination information in the display setting area 113 (Figure 42 (c)) are cleared. Then, the display data stored in the performance side ROM 93 is identified based on the address information, and the identified display data is set in the areas 113a to 113h specified by the setting destination information. Therefore, in each area 113a to 113h, the display data set in the performance table read later (the performance table read into the layer LYn with the larger number ("n")) is set preferentially over the display data set in the performance table read earlier (the performance table read into the layer LYn with the smaller number ("n")). As already explained, the display setting area 113 includes a background area 113a, first to fifth performance areas 113b to 113f, and first to second notification areas 113g to 113h. An image is set in the background display layer 101 based on the display data set in the background area 113a, an image is set in the first to fifth performance display layers 102 to 106 based on the display data set in the first to fifth performance areas 113b to 113f, and an image is set in the first to second notification display layers 107 to 108 based on the display data set in the first to second notification areas 113g to 113h. Then, by stacking and combining these display layers 101 to 108, display data for displaying one frame of a picture on the image display device 63 is created.

After the data setting process is performed in step S1906, the reel drive setting process (FIG. 76(a)) is executed (step S1907). In the reel drive setting process, if the address information of the drive table of the reel 75 is set for the referenced pointer information, the drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11, provided that the readable state described below is available. The reel drive setting process (FIG. 76(a)) will be described in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1905, or if the processing of step S1907 is performed, it is judged whether the value of the target layer counter 114 is "10" or not (step S1908). If the value of the target layer counter 114 is not "10" (step S1908: NO), the target layer is updated by adding 1 to the value of the target layer counter 114 (step S1909), and the processing returns to step S1905. Then, the processing of steps S1905 to S1909 is repeated until a positive judgment is made in step S1908. This allows the data setting processing (step S1906) and the role drive setting processing (step S1907) to be performed on the data table read out to the 0th to 10th layers LY0 to LY10 while updating the target layer in the order of the 0th layer LY0 → the 1st layer LY1 → ... → the 10th layer LY10. As already explained, data tables in which at least one of the light emission data, sound data, address information and setting destination information of the display data, and address information of the drive table of the reel 75 is set are read out to the 0th layer LY0 to the 10th layer LY10, while only the drive table of the reel 75 is read out to the 11th layer LY11. Therefore, the processing of steps S1905 to S1909 is executed until the value of the target layer counter 114 becomes "10", and when the value of the target layer counter 114 becomes "10" (step S1908: YES), the process proceeds to step S1910. Note that the process for controlling the drive of the reel 75 based on the drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11 (reel drive control process) is performed in step S1915.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or if a positive determination is made in step S1908, it is determined whether or not the calculation completion flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1910). The calculation completion flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to identify that various calculation processes (background calculation process in step S2107, performance calculation process in step S2110, and notification calculation process in step S2113) for creating a drawing list in the display control process (FIG. 49) described later have been executed once each. If the calculation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1910: YES), the calculation completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S1911). On the other hand, if the calculation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1910: NO), the delay flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1912). The delayed flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that this interrupt processing has occurred before the completion of various calculation processes (background calculation process in step S2107, production calculation process in step S2110, and notification calculation process in step S2113) for creating a drawing list in the display control process (Figure 49) described below.

After the processing of step S1911 or step S1912 is performed, a light emission control process is executed (step S1913). In the light emission control process, light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed based on the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111. The light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed based on one piece of light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111.

Then, a sound output control process is executed (step S1914). In the sound output control process, it is determined whether sound data is set in the notification area 112c in the sound output setting area 112, and if sound data is set in the notification area 112c, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed so that only the sound based on the sound data set in the notification area 112c is output from the speaker 62. On the other hand, if sound data is not set in the notification area 112c and sound data is set in both the base area 112a and the performance area 112b, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed so that sounds based on the two sound data are output from the speaker 62 simultaneously. Also, if sound data is not set in the notification area 112c and sound data is set in only one of the base area 112a and the performance area 112b, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed so that only the sound based on the sound data is output from the speaker 62.

Then, the reel drive control process (Figure 76 (b)) described below is executed (step S1915), and the performance execution process ends.

Next, the pointer update process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48. Note that the pointer update process is executed in step S1902 of the performance execution process (FIG. 47) when it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901: YES). As already explained, the timing to update the pointer information occurs at 40 millisecond intervals.

In the pointer update process, first, the value of the target layer counter 114 in the read area 94a of the production-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2001). This sets the target layer to the 0th layer LY0. After that, if a data table has been read into the current target layer (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether the currently referenced pointer information is the final pointer information (step S2003).

If a positive determination is made in step S2003, it is determined whether or not repeat information is set for the final pointer information, which instructs the referenced pointer information to be returned to specified numerical information (step S2004). The repeat information includes numerical information indicating the pointer information of the repeat start position. If repeat information is set for the final pointer information (step S2004: YES), repeat-compatible processing is executed (step S2005). In the repeat-compatible processing, numerical information indicating the pointer information of the repeat start position is set in the pointer counter PCn (Figure 42 (a)) of the target layer based on the repeat information. This returns the referenced pointer information to the repeat start position.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2004 that the repeat information has not been set, a flag clear process (FIG. 66(a)) described below is executed (step S2006), and the current target layer is cleared (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the expansion area REn and pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the target layer are cleared.

If it is determined in step S2003 that the referenced pointer information has not been updated to the final pointer information, it is determined whether a jump condition is set for the referenced pointer information (step S2009). If a jump condition is set (step S2009: YES), it is determined whether the jump condition is satisfied (step S2010). Then, if the jump condition is satisfied (step S2010: YES), a setting process for the pointer counter PCn is executed (step S2011).

In the setting process of the pointer counter PCn in step S2011, the pointer information of the jump destination set in the data table corresponding to the jump condition is set in the pointer counter PCn. As a result, the pointer information of the reference target in the data table jumps to the jump destination value in one processing of this pointer update process (Figure 48).

For example, in the second composite performance table shown in FIG. 45, if the condition that the referenced pointer information is any one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are met, then in the current processing of this pointer update process (FIG. 48), the referenced pointer information jumps to the jump destination, "u+1". This makes it possible to start the second expected performance based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger when the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second).

If it is determined in step S2009 that a jump condition is not set for the referenced pointer information, or if it is determined in step S2010 that the jump condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether an update condition is set for the referenced pointer information (step S2012). If an update condition is set (step S2012: YES), it is determined whether the update condition is satisfied (step S2013).

If it is determined in step S2012 that an update condition has not been set, or if it is determined in step S2013 that an update condition has been satisfied, the pointer information of the reference target is updated by incrementing the value of the pointer counter PCn in the target layer by 1 (step S2014). On the other hand, if an update condition has been set in the pointer information of the reference target (step S2012: YES) but the update condition has not been satisfied (step S2013: NO), the process of step S2014 incrementing the value of the pointer counter PCn by 1 is not performed.

For example, in the second composite performance table shown in FIG. 45, if the third trigger does not occur and the update condition set for the pointer information is not satisfied when the pointer information of the reference target is "q", the pointer information of the reference target will not be updated to "q+1" until the update condition is satisfied. This prevents the left stop performance from starting before the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop are turned on.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2002, if the processing of step S2005 is performed, if the processing of step S2008 is performed, if the processing of step S2011 is performed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2013, or if the processing of step S2014 is performed, it is judged whether the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S2015). If the value of the target layer counter 114 is not "11" (step S2015: NO), the target layer is updated by adding 1 to the value of the target layer counter 114 (step S2016), and the process returns to step S2002. Then, the processing of steps S2002 to S2016 is repeatedly executed until a positive judgment is made in step S2015. As a result, the pointer information of the reference target of each data table read out to the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11 can be updated while updating the target layer in the read area 94a in the order of the 0th layer LY0 → the 1st layer LY1 → ... → the 11th layer LY11. In addition, when the pointer information to be referenced in the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11 has been updated to the final pointer information and repeat information has not been set for the final pointer information, the layer LYn from which the data table is being read can be cleared.

On the other hand, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S2015: YES), this means that the process for updating the pointer information for all layers LY0 to LY11 has been completed, and this pointer update process is terminated.

Next, the display control process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 49. Note that the display control process is executed at the end of an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 milliseconds).

In the display control process, first, it is determined whether the output standby flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2101). The output standby flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the creation of the drawing list has been completed and the production side MPU 92 is waiting for the output of the drawing list to the VDP 95 before receiving an image update completion signal indicating that the output of one frame's worth of image signals has been completed from the VDP 95. When outputting one frame's worth of image signals to the image display device 63, the VDP 95 starts outputting image signals from a dot in the upper left corner of the display surface of the image display device 63, outputs image signals sequentially to dots arranged on a horizontal line including the dot at one end, and outputs image signals to dots from left to right in order from the top to the bottom of each horizontal line. Then, it finally outputs an image signal to a dot in the lower right corner of the display surface. In this case, the VDP 95 outputs an image update completion signal to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of outputting the image signal to the last dot, thereby making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the update of one frame's image has been completed.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the output standby flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the delay flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2102). In the display control process, various calculation processes such as background calculation process (step S2107), performance calculation process (step S2110), and notification calculation process (step S2113) described later are executed. In this case, the period required for execution of various calculation processes varies depending on the number of individual images to be displayed on the image display device 63, the type of individual image, and the display mode of the individual image. Note that an individual image is a still image defined by still image data such as background data, or a sprite defined by sprite data such as pattern sprite data. As a result of the variation in the period required for execution of various calculation processes, it may occur that the timing for starting the next processing round of the interrupt process is reached before the execution of all calculation processes is completed in the display control process. In the slot machine 10, when the timing for starting the next round of interrupt processing arrives while the display control processing is being executed, the display control processing is not continued as is, but a new round of interrupt processing is started. However, when a new round of interrupt processing is started, the calculation results of the display control processing at that time are stored and held, and the calculation processing is resumed from the middle of the calculation in the display control processing in the interrupt processing of the new processing round, so that the calculation processing for one update timing is not left unexecuted. When the delay flag is set to "1", it means that the execution of various calculation processes in the display control processing (the processing of steps S2107, S2110, and S2113) is temporarily suspended and delayed as described above.

If the delay flag is not set to "1" (step S2102: NO), a setting process for starting control is executed (step S2103). In the setting process for starting control, first, based on the display data set in the display setting area 113 in the production side RAM 94, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image that is to be the subject of control start in this processing round. If there is, a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image is searched for in the production side RAM 94, and a free buffer area is secured so that it corresponds one-to-one with the individual image that is recognized as the subject of control start. Furthermore, an initialization process is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set in the initialized free buffer areas.

In the next step S2104, a control object update process is executed. In the control object update process, individual images for which the setting process for starting control in step S2103 has been completed and which will be included in one frame of pictures from the current processing round onwards are recognized as control objects. In the control object update process, individual images to be deleted among the individual images recognized as control objects are excluded from the control objects based on the display data set in the display setting area 113. Then, an initialization process is executed on the buffer area secured for the excluded individual images.

After that, in step S2105, new interrupt processing is permitted, and immediately thereafter, in step S2106, new interrupt processing is prohibited, and then background calculation processing is executed (step S2107). In the background calculation processing, parameter information required for setting information about the image of the background display layer 101 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list is calculated and derived. Specifically, based on the display data set in the background area 113a of the display setting area 113, the current control update target is determined from among the backmost still images and background sprites that will constitute the background image in each game state. In addition, for the determined control update target, various parameter information required for creating a drawing list, such as coordinates in a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, and transparency information, is calculated and derived. Then, the various derived parameter information is written to areas secured in the performance side RAM 94 corresponding to each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

After that, in step S2108, new interrupt processing is permitted, and immediately thereafter in step S2109, new interrupt processing is prohibited, and then the performance calculation process is executed (step S2110). In the performance calculation process, parameter information required for setting information about the images of the first performance display layer 102 to the fifth performance display layer 106 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list is calculated and derived. Specifically, based on the display data set in the first performance area 113b to the fifth performance area 113f of the display setting area 113, the current control update target among the performance sprites constituting the images of the first performance display layer 102 to the fifth performance display layer 106 is identified, and the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the control update target. Then, the derived various parameter information is written to the areas secured in the performance side RAM 94 corresponding to each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

After that, in step S2111, new startup of interrupt processing is permitted, and immediately thereafter in step S2112, new startup of interrupt processing is prohibited, and then the notification calculation process is executed (step S2113). In the notification calculation process, parameter information required for setting information about the images of the first notification display layer 107 to the second notification display layer 108 (Figure 38) in the drawing list is calculated and derived. Specifically, based on the display data set in the first notification area 113g to the second notification area 113h of the display setting area 113, notification sprites for displaying the notification images of the first notification display layer 107 to the second notification display layer 108 and various parameter information to be applied to the notification sprites are derived.

Then, the calculation completion flag in the production-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2114). As already explained, the calculation completion flag is a flag that the production-side MPU 92 uses to identify that each of the various calculation processes for creating the drawing list (the background calculation process in step S2107, the performance calculation process in step S2110, and the notification calculation process in step S2113) has been executed once.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2101, or if the processing of step S2114 is performed, it is determined whether or not an image update completion signal has been received from the VDP95 (step S2115). If an image update completion signal has been received (step S2115: YES), a drawing list output process is executed (step S2116). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of an image is created, and the created drawing list is sent to the VDP95. As already explained, the VDP 95 creates display data for one composite image generated in such a manner that the images of the display layers 101 to 108 are sequentially superimposed from the back of the screen to the front of the screen in the order of the image of the background display layer 101, the image of the first performance display layer 102, the image of the second performance display layer 103, the image of the third performance display layer 104, the image of the fourth performance display layer 105, the image of the fifth performance display layer 106, the image of the first notification display layer 107, and the image of the second notification display layer 108, according to the drawing list. The display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96. As already explained, the video RAM 96 is provided with two frame areas, and the display data is created alternately in the two frame areas. The VDP 95 outputs one frame of image signals corresponding to the display data created in the frame areas to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data. As a result, a single composite image is generated in which the image of the background display layer 101, the image of the first performance display layer 102, the image of the second performance display layer 103, the image of the third performance display layer 104, the image of the fourth performance display layer 105, the image of the fifth performance display layer 106, the image of the first notification display layer 107, and the image of the second notification display layer 108 are sequentially superimposed from the back of the screen to the front of the screen, and this composite image is displayed on the image display device 63 as one frame of a picture.

After executing the drawing list output process in step S2116, the output standby flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2117), and this display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2115 that the image update completion signal has not been received, the output standby flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2118), and this display control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2102 that the delay flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1", the delay flag is cleared to "0" (step S2119), and then address data is read from the interruption address area in the presentation side RAM 94, and a jump is made to the process that was being executed immediately before a new round of interrupt processing was started in the previous display control process (step S2120). This makes it possible to resume execution of the process from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous display control process.

Next, the bonus notification process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 50. Note that the bonus notification process is executed in step S614 of the reel control process (FIG. 24).

In the bonus notification process, first, it is determined whether or not the game is a bonus winning game in which any of the bonuses (1st to 4th BB winnings and 1st to 2nd RB winnings) has occurred in the lottery process (FIG. 14) (step S2201). If a positive determination is made in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning has been established in the winning determination process (step S613 of the reel control process (FIG. 24)) (step S2202). If a positive determination is made in step S2202, the bonus notification process is terminated without executing the process for executing the bonus notification effect and the process for executing the re-changing effect (steps S2203 to S2206). In this way, if a bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning is established in a game in which a bonus winning has occurred, the bonus notification effect and the re-changing effect are not executed. In this case, as already explained, a positive determination is made in step S1501 of the bonus process (FIG. 34), and a bonus start command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 in step S1510.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus announcement process (FIG. 50), if it is determined in step S2202 that a bonus win has not been achieved, it is determined whether or not the bonus announcement winning flag stored in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2203). The bonus announcement winning flag is a flag that enables the master MPU 72 to determine that a bonus announcement performance has been won in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)) described below. The bonus announcement winning flag is set to "1" in step S2313 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51) described below.

If the bonus announcement winning flag is set to "1" (step S2203: YES), a freeze setting process for the announcement performance is executed (step S2204). In the freeze setting process for the announcement performance, numerical information corresponding to the total execution period (specifically, 5.5 seconds) of the first expectation performance and the bonus announcement performance is set to the freeze counter in the main RAM 74. As already explained, the execution period of the first expectation performance is 1.5 seconds. Also, the execution period of the bonus announcement performance is 4 seconds. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for the announcement performance (step S2204), the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is put into a waiting state, so that the first expectation performance and the bonus announcement performance can be executed to the end even if the start lever 41 is operated during the execution of the first expectation performance and the bonus announcement performance. In this way, by preventing the bonus announcement from being overlooked, it is possible to reliably inform the player that a bonus has been won. After that, the bonus announcement win flag is cleared to "0" (step S2205), and the bonus announcement process ends.

On the other hand, if the bonus announcement winning flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2203: NO), this means that the re-changing presentation has been won in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the presentation content determination process (Figure 51)) described later, so the number of games played counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "6" corresponding to 6 games (step S2206), and this bonus announcement presentation is terminated. The number of games played counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp whether or not a game is a target game for the re-changing presentation. As already explained, if a bonus announcement presentation is not performed in a game in which a bonus has been won, and then 5 games have been played without the corresponding bonus winning being established, the next game to be started will be the target game for the re-changing presentation. The value of the number of games played counter is decremented by 1 in step S2303 of the presentation content setting process (Figure 51) described later. If five games are played without a bonus win, the value of the number of games played counter is decremented by one to "0" in step S2303 of the presentation content setting process (FIG. 51) for the next game, and that game becomes the target game for executing the re-variation presentation. As already explained, if a bonus win is achieved before the re-variation presentation is executed, the re-variation presentation is canceled.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the re-change performance flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2207). The re-change performance flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to determine that the game is a target game for executing a re-change performance. If a bonus announcement performance is not performed in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, and then five games are played without a corresponding bonus win, making the game a target game for executing a re-change performance, the re-change performance flag is set to "1" in step S2305 of the performance content determination process (Figure 51) described below.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2207, it is judged whether or not a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win carried over in the winning judgment process (step S613 of the reel control process (FIG. 24)) has been achieved (step S2208). If a negative judgment is made in step S2208, the bonus notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2208, that is, if a bonus win has been achieved in the game in which the re-variation performance is to be executed, the re-variation performance flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and the value of the timer counter for the main performance in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2209), and the bonus notification process is terminated. As already explained, the timer counter for the main performance is a timer counter that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expectation performance in the game in which the second expectation performance or the re-variation performance is to be executed. By clearing the re-variation performance flag and the timer counter for the main performance to "0" in step S2209, the re-variation performance is no longer performed. In this way, if a bonus win corresponding to the carried-over bonus win occurs in the game in which the re-changing effect is to be executed, the re-changing effect will be canceled.

Next, the performance content determination process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 51. Note that the performance content determination process is executed in step S415 of the role selection process (FIG. 14).

In the presentation content determination process, if the bonus internal state is ST2 (step S2301: YES), it is determined whether the value of the played games counter in the main RAM 74 is "1" or more (step S2302). If a positive determination is made in step S2302, the value of the played games counter is decremented by 1 (step S2303), and it is determined whether the value of the played games counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2304). In a game (a game for which a re-variation presentation is executed) in which a bonus winning has occurred and a bonus announcement presentation is not performed and five games have been played without a corresponding bonus winning, the value of the played games counter is decremented by 1 in step S2303, so that the value of the played games counter becomes "0". If a positive determination is made in step S2304, the re-variation presentation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2305). This makes the current game a game for which a re-variation presentation is executed.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2301, it is judged whether or not the game is in the normal game state ST1 (step S2306), and if it is in the normal game state ST1 (step S2306: YES), it is judged whether or not the game is a bonus winning game in which any of the bonuses (1st to 4th BB and 1st to 2nd RB winnings) occurred in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 14) (step S2307). If a negative judgment is made in step S2307, the main side second expected performance lottery process is executed (step S2308). In this way, the main side second expected performance lottery process is executed in a game in which no bonus winning occurred in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 14). In the main side second expected performance lottery process in step S2308, the main side second expected performance lottery table is read from the main side ROM 73. The main side second expected performance lottery table has lottery results that win the second expected performance and lottery results that do not win the second expected performance set, and numerical information for determining whether or not these lottery results are wins is set. In the main side second expected performance lottery table, the probability of winning the second expected performance in the main side second expected performance lottery is set to 1/20, and the probability of not winning the second expected performance in the main side second expected performance lottery is set to 19/20. After that, the main side MPU 72 reads out the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated, and compares the read numerical information with the main side second expected performance lottery table that was read out. Then, the lottery result (either the lottery result that wins the second expected performance or the lottery result that does not win the second expected performance) for which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified.

If the second expected performance is won in the host second expected performance lottery process in step S2308 (step S2309: YES), the second expected performance flag provided in the host RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2310). The second expected performance flag is a flag that allows the host MPU 72 to grasp that the game is the target game for the second expected performance. As already explained, if the bonus announcement performance is not performed in the game in which the bonus is won and five games are played without a bonus winning, the next game to be started in that state becomes the target game for the re-variation performance. In the target game for the re-variation performance, the re-variation performance is executed after the second expected performance ends. On the other hand, in the target game for the second expected performance that is executed by winning the second expected performance in the host second expected performance lottery process in step S2308, the second expected performance is executed, but the re-variation performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if a bonus win occurs in the lottery process (FIG. 14) (step S2307: YES), the announcement lottery process is executed (step S2311). In the announcement lottery process, the announcement lottery table is read from the main ROM 73. The lottery results for winning the bonus announcement effect and the lottery results for winning the re-changing effect are set in the announcement lottery table, and numerical information is set for determining whether or not these lottery results are a win. In the announcement effect table, the probability of winning the bonus announcement effect and the probability of winning the re-changing effect in the announcement effect lottery are each set to 1/2. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated by the main MPU 72, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the announcement lottery table that was read. Then, it is determined that the effect (either the bonus announcement effect or the re-changing effect) in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set has been won.

If the bonus announcement effect is won in the announcement lottery process in step S2311 (step S2312: YES), the bonus announcement winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2313). This allows the main MPU 72 to know that the bonus announcement effect has been won.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2302, if a negative judgment is made in step S2304, if the processing of step S2305 is performed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2306, if a negative judgment is made in step S2309, if the processing of step S2310 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2312, or if the processing of step S2313 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2314) and this performance content determination processing is terminated. In the other processing in step S2314, the general content of the performance is determined by lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, current game section, and the results of the lottery processing of roles (Figure 14).

Next, steps S718 to S723 of the stop operation response process (FIG. 25) will be described. In the stop operation response process, after sending an OFF operation command to the performance side MPU 92 in step S717, it is determined whether the second expected performance flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S718).

If a positive judgment is made in step S718, this means that the game is the target for execution of the second expected performance, so a freeze setting process for the second expected performance is executed (step S719). In this freeze setting process, numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the second expected performance is set in the freeze counter in the main RAM 74. As already explained, the main RAM 74 is provided with a timer counter for the main performance that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance, and in step S709 of the stop operation response process (FIG. 25), numerical information corresponding to the total period (specifically, 2.5 seconds) of the execution period of the middle stop performance (specifically, 1 second) and the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is set in the timer counter for the main performance. Since the value of the timer counter for the main performance is subtracted by 1 each time the timer subtraction process (step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12)) is performed, when the middle stop performance or the first expected performance is being executed, it is possible to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance based on the value of the timer counter for the main performance. Also, when the middle stop performance and the first expected performance have ended, it is possible to grasp that there is no remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance based on the value of the timer counter for the main performance being "0". In the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance is grasped based on the value of the timer counter for the main performance. If the remaining execution period is 0.5 seconds or more, it means that the second expected performance will start when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), so numerical information corresponding to the total period of the remaining execution period minus 0.5 seconds and the execution period of the second expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter. On the other hand, if the remaining execution period is less than 0.5 seconds, this means that the execution period of the first expected performance has already reached the specified period (specifically, 1 second) and the second expected performance will immediately start, so numerical information corresponding only to the execution period of the second expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter. In the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), after the numerical information is set in the freeze counter, the value of the timer counter for the main performance is cleared to "0".

The numerical information set in the freeze counter in step S719 is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As already explained, when the sixth trigger occurs (when the performance side MPU 92 receives an OFF operation command) in a situation where the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance is started at the timing when the sixth trigger occurs, while when the sixth trigger occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance is started at the timing when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). In the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), by setting the numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the second expected performance in the freeze counter, it is possible to execute the second expected performance to the end even if the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period. Also, as already explained, in the normal performance (FIG. 13), if the second expected performance flag is set to "1", the configuration is such that the second expected performance flag waits in step S312 until it is cleared to "0", and the second expected performance flag is cleared to "0" in step S720 described later. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game before the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719) is executed, the game will not be started based on the operation. Specifically, even if the start lever 41 is operated while the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are pressed and held, the game will not be started based on the operation.

After that, the second expected performance flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S720), and this stop operation response process is terminated. As described above, by clearing the second expected performance flag to "0", a negative judgment is made in step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13), and the process from step S313 onwards is executed. After the negative judgment is made in step S312, a negative judgment is made in step S314 of the normal process (FIG. 13) until the numerical information set in the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 in the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719) becomes "0". Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated before the second expected performance ends, the game will not start based on that operation. This makes it possible to execute the second expected performance to the end.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S718, it is judged whether the re-variation performance flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S721). If a positive judgment is made in step S721, it means that the game is a target for re-variation performance, so a freeze setting process for the re-variation performance is executed (step S722). In the freeze setting process, numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the re-variation performance is set in the freeze counter in the main RAM 74. As already explained in the freeze setting process for the second expectation performance (step S719), the main RAM 74 is provided with a timer counter for the main performance that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expectation performance, and when the middle stop performance or the first expectation performance is being executed, it is possible to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expectation performance based on the value of the timer counter for the main performance. In addition, when the middle stop performance and the first expected performance have ended, it is possible to know that there is no remaining execution period for the middle stop performance and the first expected performance based on the fact that the value of the timer counter for the main performance is "0". In the freeze setting process for the re-variable performance (step S722), the remaining execution period for the middle stop performance and the first expected performance is known based on the value of the timer counter for the main performance. If the remaining execution period is 0.5 seconds or more, it means that the second expected performance will start when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), so numerical information corresponding to the total period of the remaining execution period minus 0.5 seconds, the execution period of the second expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds), and the execution period of the re-variable performance (specifically, 4 seconds) is set in the freeze counter. On the other hand, if the remaining execution period is less than 0.5 seconds, this means that the execution period of the first expected performance has already reached the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the second expected performance will immediately start, so numerical information corresponding to the total period of the execution period of the second expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) and the execution period of the re-variable performance (specifically, 4 seconds) is set in the freeze counter. In the freeze setting process for the re-variable performance (step S722), after the numerical information is set in the freeze counter, the value of the timer counter for the main performance is cleared to "0".

The numerical information set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for the re-changing performance (step S722) is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for the re-changing performance (step S722), the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As already explained, when the sixth trigger occurs (when the performance side MPU 92 receives an OFF operation command) in a situation where the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance is started at the timing when the sixth trigger occurs, while when the sixth trigger occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance is started at the timing when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). In the freeze setting process for the re-changing performance (step S722), by setting the numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the re-changing performance in the freeze counter, it is possible to execute the re-changing performance to the end even if the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). Also, as already explained, in the normal performance (FIG. 13), if the re-changing performance flag is set to "1", the configuration is such that the re-changing performance flag waits in step S313 until it is cleared to "0", and the re-changing performance flag is cleared to "0" in step S723 described later. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game before the freeze setting process for the re-changing performance (step S722) is executed, the game will not be started based on the operation. Specifically, even if the start lever 41 is operated while the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are pressed and held, the game will not be started based on the operation.

Then, the re-change performance flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S723), and this stop operation response process is terminated. As described above, by clearing the re-change performance flag to "0", a negative judgment is made in step S313 of the normal process (FIG. 13), and the process from step S314 onwards is executed. After a negative judgment is made in step S313, a negative judgment is made in step S314 of the normal process (FIG. 13) until the numerical information set in the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 in the freeze setting process for the re-change performance (step S722) becomes "0". For this reason, even if the start lever 41 is operated before the end of the re-change performance, the game will not be started based on that operation. This makes it possible to execute the re-change performance to the end.

Next, the normal performance control process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 52. Note that the normal performance control process is executed by the performance side MPU 92 as an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

In the normal presentation control process, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state ST1 or the bonus internal state ST2 (step S2401). If a positive determination is made in step S2401, it is determined whether a bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2402). If a bonus start command has been received (step S2402: YES), the presentation setting process at the start of the bonus, which will be described later, is executed (step S2403), and the normal presentation control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2404). If a positive determination is made in step S2404, the winning result response process described below is executed (step S2405), and the normal presentation control process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2404, it is judged whether any of the type notification effect flags provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2406). The type notification effect flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that a type notification effect should be executed and the type of type notification effect to be executed. In this slot machine 10, after the bonus notification effect or the re-variation effect is executed, in the game executed until a bonus winning corresponding to the generated bonus win (any of the first to fourth BB wins and the first to second RB wins) is established, a type notification effect corresponding to the type of the bonus winning is executed. In the type notification effect, a bonus type notification image showing the combination of symbols that establishes the bonus winning corresponding to the currently generated bonus win is displayed on the image display device 63. For example, if the type of the currently generated bonus win is the first BB win, the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image of "red 7, red 7, red 7" corresponding to the combination of symbols that establishes the first BB win. The combination of symbols that will result in a bonus win is displayed on the image display device 63, allowing the player to operate the stop buttons 42-44 after understanding the combination of symbols. The presentation RAM 94 has type announcement effect flags in one-to-one correspondence with the types of bonus wins. The presentation MPU 92 determines that this is a game in which a type announcement effect should be executed based on whether any of the type announcement effect flags are set to "1," and determines the type of type announcement effect to be executed based on the type of type announcement effect flag that is set to "1." The type announcement effect flag is set to "1" in step S2608 of the second effect information setting process (FIG. 54) described below.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2406, the type announcement presentation process is executed (step S2407), and the normal presentation control process is terminated. In the type announcement presentation process in step S2407, based on the reception of the game start command, a type announcement presentation table for executing a type announcement presentation corresponding to the type announcement presentation flag set to "1" is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. The type announcement presentation table is read into the 0th layer LY0. The type announcement presentation is executed by the presentation side MPU 92 controlling the execution of the presentation according to the read type announcement presentation table.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2406, it is judged whether or not a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2408). If a game start command has been received (step S2408: YES), that is, if the first trigger has occurred, a clear process at the start of the game is executed (step S2409). In the clear process at the start of the game, the 0th to 8th layers LY0 to LY8 in the read area 94a are cleared. This clears the data tables read into the 0th to 8th layers LY0 to LY8 to execute the performance of the previous game. In addition, in the clear process at the start of the game in step S2409, the first composition flag and the second composition flag provided in the performance RAM 94 are cleared to "0". The first composition flag is a flag that allows the performance MPU 92 to recognize that a first composition performance table should be created, and the second composition flag is a flag that allows the performance MPU 92 to recognize that a second composition performance table should be generated.

Then, a first effect information setting process is executed to set information on various effects in the normal game state ST1 (step S2410). Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the first effect information setting process.

In the first effect information setting process, first, a normal base effect type setting process is executed (step S2501). In the normal base effect type setting process, a normal base effect lottery is first performed to determine the normal base effect table to be executed. In the normal base effect lottery, the normal base effect lottery table is read from the effect side ROM 93. As already explained, in the normal base effect table storage area 93a (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect side ROM 93, six types of normal base effect tables are stored as effect tables for performing normal base effects corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The normal base effect lottery table has type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 6) of the six types of normal base effect tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not the type information of each normal base effect table is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read normal base effect lottery table. Then, the normal base effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the read target. After that, the type information of the specified normal base effect table is set in the base effect information counter 115 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94. The base effect information counter 115 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the normal base effect table specified as the read target in the normal base effect lottery. As already explained, since there is only one type of pattern change effect table stored in the pattern change effect table storage area 93b of the performance side ROM 93 and there is only one type of valid notification effect table stored in the valid notification effect table storage area 93c of the performance side ROM 93, the process for setting the type information of the pattern change effect and the valid notification effect is not executed.

After that, the left stop performance type setting process is executed (step S2502). In the left stop performance type setting process, first, a left stop performance lottery is performed to determine the left stop performance table to be executed. In the left stop performance lottery, the left stop performance lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, nine types of left stop performance tables are stored in the left stop performance table storage area 93d (FIG. 41 (a)) of the performance side ROM 93 as performance tables for performing left stop performance. The left stop performance lottery table has type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) of the nine types of left stop performance tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not the type information of each left stop performance table is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read left stop performance lottery table. Then, the left stop performance table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the read target. Then, the type information of the identified left stop performance table is set in the left stop performance information counter 116 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94. The left stop performance information counter 116 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the left stop performance table identified as the target for reading in the left stop performance lottery.

After that, in the lottery process for this role (FIG. 14), it is determined whether or not any of the bonus roles (1st BB role to 4th BB role and 1st RB role to 2nd RB role) has been won (step S2503). If a negative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the game is a target game for execution of the second expected performance or the re-changing performance based on the information set in the game start command received from the master MPU 72 (step S2504). In step S2504, a positive determination is made if the second expected performance is won in the master second expected performance lottery process (step S2308 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)) (step S2309: YES), and if the re-changing performance is won in the game in which the bonus has been won and the game becomes a target game for execution of the re-changing performance after five games have been played without a bonus winning. If a negative determination is made in step S2504, a right stop performance type setting process is executed (step S2505).

In the right stop performance type setting process in step S2505, first, a right stop performance lottery is performed to determine the right stop performance table to be executed. In the right stop performance lottery, the right stop performance lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, nine types of right stop performance tables are stored in the right stop performance table storage area 93e (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93 as performance tables for performing right stop performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The right stop performance lottery table has type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) of the nine types of right stop performance tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not the type information of each right stop performance table is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read right stop performance lottery table. Then, the right stop performance table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the read target. Then, the type information of the identified right stop performance table is set in the right stop performance information counter 117 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94. The right stop performance information counter 117 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the right stop performance table identified as the execution target. The performance side MPU 92 identifies the right stop performance table to be read based on the value of the right stop performance information counter 117.

After that, the middle stop performance type setting process is executed (step S2506). In the middle stop performance type setting process, first, a middle stop performance lottery is performed to determine the middle stop performance table to be executed. In the middle stop performance lottery, the middle stop performance lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, nine types of middle stop performance tables are stored in the middle stop performance table storage area 93h (FIG. 41 (a)) of the performance side ROM 93 as performance tables for performing middle stop performance. The middle stop performance lottery table has type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) of the nine types of middle stop performance tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not the type information of each middle stop performance table is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read middle stop performance lottery table. Then, the middle stop performance table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the read target. Then, the type information of the identified middle stop performance table is set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94. The middle stop performance information counter 118 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the middle stop performance table identified as the execution target.

After that, it is determined whether or not a reach state will occur (step S2507). Specifically, it is determined that a reach state will occur if the type information (any of numerical information from 1 to 9) set in the left stop performance information counter 116 in step S2502 and the type information (any of numerical information from 1 to 9) set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in step S2505 are the same value. If it is determined in step S2507 that a reach state will not occur, this performance information setting process is terminated. As already explained, if a reach state does not occur, the performance for one game ends when the middle stop performance ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2507 that a reach state occurs, a middle symbol adjustment process is executed (step S2508). In the middle symbol adjustment process, if the type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 in step S2506 is the same value as the type information set in the left stop performance information counter 116 in step S2502 and the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in step S2505, a process is executed to shift the numerical information set in the middle stop performance information counter 118. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the middle stop performance information counter 118, and if the numerical information after the subtraction is "0", the numerical information of "9" is set in the middle stop performance information counter 118. This prevents the numbers indicated by the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6, and the middle pattern image G7 in the image display device 63 from all matching, even if the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 14) is a miss.

After that, the first expected performance lottery process for the loss is executed (step S2509). As already explained, in this embodiment, the first expected performance may be executed even if no bonus win occurs in the role lottery process (FIG. 14). In the first expected performance lottery process for the loss in step S2509, the first expected performance lottery table for the loss is first read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, there are five types of first expected performances, namely, a performance in which a bubble image G8 is displayed on the image display device 63, a performance in which a water flow image G9 is displayed, a performance in which a whirlpool image G10 is displayed, a performance in which a school of fish image G11 is displayed, and a performance in which a giant character image G12 is displayed, and five types of first expected performance tables are stored in the first expected performance table storage area 93i (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93. The type information (any of numerical information 1 to 5) of the five types of first expected performance tables is set in the first expected performance lottery table for the loss, and the type information of each first expected performance table is set with a numerical range for determining whether or not the winning combination is a winning combination. In the first expected performance lottery table when the player loses, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the water flow image G9, which indicate that the expectation of winning the bonus is low, is set to 1/5, the winning probability of the whirlpool image G10 and the school of fish image G11, which indicate that the expectation of winning the bonus is high, is set to 1/10, the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which indicates that the expectation of winning the bonus is very high, is set to 1/20, and the probability of not winning any of the first expected performances is set to 7/20. In this way, the higher the expectation performance image is for the bonus win, the lower the winning probability in the first expected performance lottery when the player loses. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read first expected performance lottery table when the player loses. This identifies the presence or absence of the first expected performance, and the type of the first expected performance table when the first expected performance is executed.

If any of the first expected performances is won in the first expected performance lottery process (step S2509) when a loss occurs (step S2510: YES), the type information of the first expected performance identified in the first expected performance lottery process when a loss occurs is set in the first expected performance information counter 119 (Figure 41 (b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2511). The first expected performance information counter 119 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the first expected performance table identified as the execution target.

Then, the notification effect lottery process is executed (step S2512). In the notification effect lottery process, first, a notification effect lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to determine the type of notification effect to be executed this time, either the reach notification effect or the long press notification effect. In the notification effect lottery table, the probability of winning the reach notification effect lottery is set to 1/2, and the probability of winning the long press notification effect is also set to 1/2. Then, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared against the read notification effect lottery table. As a result, either the reach notification effect or the long press notification effect is identified as the notification effect to be executed.

If the reach notification effect is won in the notification effect lottery process (step S2512) (step S2513: YES), the reach notification effect flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2514), and this first presentation information setting process is terminated. The reach notification effect flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that a reach notification effect should be executed. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2513, that is, if the long press notification effect is won in the notification effect lottery process (step S2512), the long press notification effect flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2515), and this first presentation information setting process is terminated. The long press notification effect flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that a long press notification effect should be executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2503, that is, if it is judged that the game is a game in which any of the bonus wins (1st to 4th BB wins and 1st to 2nd RB wins) has occurred in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 14), the corresponding win flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2516). The presentation side RAM 94 is provided with a 1st BB win flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a 1st BB win has occurred, a 2nd BB win flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a 2nd BB win has occurred, a 3rd BB win flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a 3rd BB win has occurred, a 4th BB win flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a 4th BB win has occurred, a 1st RB win flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a 1st RB win has occurred, and a 2nd RB win flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a 2nd RB win has occurred. In step S2516, the win flag corresponding to the currently occurring bonus win is set to "1".

Then, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the bonus announcement effect has been won in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the presentation content determination process (FIG. 51)) (step S2517). If the bonus announcement effect has not been won (step S2517: NO), the process proceeds to step S2505, and the processes of steps S2505 to S2515 already described are executed. In this way, if the bonus announcement effect is not won in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the presentation content determination process (FIG. 51)) in a game in which a bonus has been won, but the re-change effect is won, the second expectation effect and the re-change effect are not executed. In this case, as already described, the game that is started when five games have been played without a bonus winning is the game for which the re-change effect is executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2504, or if a positive judgment is made in step S2517, the second performance information setting process is executed (step S2518), and the first performance information setting process is terminated. Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the second performance information setting process.

In the second performance information setting process, the same type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) as the type information set in the left stop performance information counter 116 in the performance side RAM 94 is set in the right stop performance information counter 117 (step S2601). As a result, the number indicated by the right pattern image G6 that stops in the right area of the image display device 63 in the right stop performance matches the number indicated by the left pattern image G5 that stops in the left area of the image display device 63 in the left stop performance, resulting in a reach state.

Then, the type information corresponding to the type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) set in the left stop performance information counter 116 is set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2602). Specifically, the type information set in the left stop performance information counter 116 is read, and 1 is added to the read type information. Then, if the numerical information after the 1 addition does not exceed the maximum value of "9", the numerical information after the 1 addition is set in the middle stop performance information counter 118, and if the numerical information after the 1 addition exceeds the maximum value of "9", the numerical information of "1" is set in the middle stop performance information counter 118. As a result, the middle pattern image G7 showing the number one before the number shown by the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 is stopped in the central area of the image display device 63.

Then, the first expected performance lottery process at the time of winning is executed (step S2603). In the first expected performance lottery process at the time of winning, the first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning is first read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained with reference to FIG. 40(a) to FIG. 40(e), there are five types of first expected performances, namely, a performance in which a bubble image G8 is displayed on the image display device 63, a performance in which a water flow image G9 is displayed, a performance in which a whirlpool image G10 is displayed, a performance in which a school of fish image G11 is displayed, and a performance in which a giant character image G12 is displayed, and five types of first expected performance tables are stored in the first expected performance table storage area 93i (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93. The type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 5) of the five types of first expected performance tables is set in the first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning, and a numerical range for determining whether or not the first expected performance table is won is set in the type information of each first expected performance table. In the first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the water flow image G9, which notify the low expectation of winning the bonus, is set to 1/10, the winning probability of the whirlpool image G10 and the school of fish image G11, which notify the high expectation of winning the bonus, is set to 1/5, and the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which notifies the very high expectation of winning the bonus, is set to 2/5. In this way, the higher the expectation performance image is, the higher the winning probability in the first expected performance lottery at the time of winning is set. In the first expected performance lottery at the time of winning, one of the first expected performances is always won. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning. This identifies the type of the first expected performance table to be read.

Then, the type information of the first expected performance identified in the first expected performance lottery process (step S2603) when a prize is won (numerical information of any one of "1" to "5") is set in the first expected performance information counter 119 (Figure 41 (b)) in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2604).

Then, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether the current game is a target game for executing the second expectation effect or the re-change effect (step S2605). As already explained, the second expectation effect is an effect executed in either the target game for executing the second expectation effect or the target game for executing the re-change effect. In the target game for executing the re-change effect, the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect are executed, and the re-change effect is executed after the end of the second expectation effect. Also, as already explained, in the game in which the second expectation effect is executed (the target game for executing the second expectation effect or the re-change effect), the long press notification effect is executed based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, and in the target game for executing the bonus notification effect, the reach notification effect is executed based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger. In step S2605, if the game is not a game in which a bonus win has occurred, a positive determination is made because the game is a target game for executing the second expectation effect or the re-change effect. Furthermore, in step S2605, if the game is one in which a bonus has been won and the bonus announcement effect has been won in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)), a negative determination is made so that the second expectation effect and the re-variation effect will not be executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2605, this means that the game is one in which the second expectation effect will not be executed, so the reach notification effect flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2606), and the bonus announcement effect flag 122 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2607). The bonus announcement effect flag 122 is a flag that enables the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a bonus announcement effect should be executed.

Then, the type notification effect flag corresponding to the type of the current bonus win is set to "1" (step S2608), and the second effect information setting process is terminated. As already explained, the effect RAM 94 has type notification effect flags in one-to-one correspondence with the types of bonus wins. Also, as already explained, when a bonus win occurs, the win flag corresponding to that type of bonus win is set to "1" in step S2516 of the first effect information setting process (FIG. 53). In step S2608, the type of bonus win that has occurred is determined based on the type of win flag that is set to "1", and the type notification effect flag corresponding to that type of bonus win is set to "1". As a result, in the next game and onwards, a type notification effect corresponding to the type of bonus win carried over will be executed.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2605, the second expected performance lottery process on the production side is executed (step S2609). In the second expected performance lottery process on the production side, first, the second expected performance lottery table corresponding to the occurrence status of the bonus win is read from the production side ROM 93. Specifically, if the game is a target game for the re-variable performance and a BB win has occurred, the second expected performance lottery table at the time of the BB win is read from the production side ROM 93, and if the game is a target game for the re-variable performance and a RB win has occurred, the second expected performance lottery table at the time of the RB win is read from the production side ROM 93. Also, if the game is a target game for the second expected performance, the second expected performance lottery table at the time of the miss is read from the production side ROM 93. As already explained with reference to FIG. 40(a) to FIG. 40(e), there are five types of second expected performances: a performance in which a bubble image G8 is displayed on the image display device 63, a performance in which a water current image G9 is displayed, a performance in which a whirlpool image G10 is displayed, a performance in which a school of fish image G11 is displayed, and a performance in which a giant character image G12 is displayed. Five types of second expected performance tables are stored in the second expected performance table storage area 93k (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93. The second expected performance lottery table when BB is won, the second expected performance lottery table when RB is won, and the second expected performance lottery table when no win is won are set with type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 5) of the five types of second expected performance tables, and the type information of each second expected performance table is set with a numerical range for determining whether or not the winning or losing is determined.

In the second expected performance lottery process (step S2609) on the performance side, one of the second expected performances is always won. In the second expected performance lottery table when the BB is won, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the whirlpool image G10, which notify the player that the expectation of winning the BB is low when the bonus is won, is set to 1/10, the winning probability of the water current image G9 and the school of fish image G11, which notify the player that the expectation of winning the BB is high when the bonus is won, is set to 1/5, and the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which notifies the player that the expectation of winning the BB is very high when the bonus is won, is set to 2/5. In this way, in the second expected performance lottery table when the BB is won, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the whirlpool image G10, which have a low expectation of winning the BB when the bonus is won, is set to the lowest, and the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which has the highest expectation of winning the BB when the bonus is won, is set to the highest.

In the second expected performance selection table when the RB is won, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the whirlpool image G10, which notify the player that the expectation of the BB win is low when a bonus win occurs, is set to 3/8, the winning probability of the water current image G9 and the school of fish image G11, which notify the player that the expectation of the BB win is high when a bonus win occurs, is set to 1/10, and the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which notifies the player that the expectation of the BB win is very high when a bonus win occurs, is set to 1/20. In this way, in the second expected performance selection table when the RB is won, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the whirlpool image G10, which notify the player that the expectation of the BB win is low when a bonus win occurs, is set to high, and the winning probability of the water current image G9 and the school of fish image G11, which notify the player that the expectation of the BB win is high when a bonus win occurs, is set to low. And the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which notifies the player that the expectation of the BB win is very high when a bonus win occurs, is set to the lowest.

In the second expected performance lottery table when a winning combination is lost, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the whirlpool image G10, which notify the player that the expectation of winning the BB is low when a bonus win occurs, is set to 17/40, the winning probability of the water current image G9 and the school of fish image G11, which notify the player that the expectation of winning the BB is high when a bonus win occurs, is set to 1/20, and the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which notifies the player that the expectation of winning the BB is very high when a bonus win occurs, is set to 1/20. In this way, in the second expected performance lottery table when a winning combination is lost, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the whirlpool image G10, which notify the player that the expectation of winning the BB is low when a bonus win occurs, is set to high, and the winning probability of the water current image G9 and the school of fish image G11, which notify the player that the expectation of winning the BB is high when a bonus win occurs, is set to low. And the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which notifies the player that the expectation of winning the BB is very high when a bonus win occurs, is set to the lowest.

The probability of winning each expected performance image in the second expected performance selection table when a BB is won, the second expected performance selection table when a RB is won, and the second expected performance selection table when a loss is made are set as described above, so that a bubble image G8 or a whirlpool image G10 is displayed in the second expected performance to indicate that the likelihood of winning a BB is low if a bonus is won, a water current image G9 or a school of fish image G11 is displayed in the second expected performance to indicate that the likelihood of winning a BB is high if a bonus is won, and a giant character image G12 is displayed in the second expected performance to indicate that the likelihood of winning a BB is very high if a bonus is won.

In the production side second expected performance lottery process in step S2609, the second expected performance lottery table corresponding to the bonus winning situation is read from the production side ROM 93, and then the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read second expected performance lottery table. This identifies the type of the second expected performance table.

Then, the type information of the second expected performance identified in the performance side second expected performance lottery process (step S2609) is set in the second expected performance information counter 121 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2610). The second expected performance information counter 121 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the second expected performance table identified as the execution target. Then, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main side MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the current game is the execution target game for the re-variable performance (step S2611). If a negative determination is made in step S2611, the first synthesis flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2612), and this second performance information setting process is terminated. As already explained, the first synthesis flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that a first synthesis performance table should be created.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is a target game for executing the re-changing performance (step S2611: YES), a process for setting the type of the re-changing performance is executed (step S2613). In the process for setting the type of the re-changing performance, type information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the middle stop performance information counter 118 in the performance side RAM 94 is set in the re-changing performance information counter 123 provided in the performance side RAM 94. The re-changing performance information counter 123 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the re-changing performance table that is the target of reading. Specifically, the numerical information set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 is read, and the numerical information is subtracted by 1. Then, if the numerical information after the subtraction of 1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value "1", the numerical information after the subtraction of 1 is set in the re-changing performance information counter 123, and if the numerical information after the subtraction of 1 is below the minimum value "1", the numerical information of the maximum value "9" is set in the re-changing performance information counter 123.

Then, the second synthesis flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2614). As already explained, the second synthesis flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that a second synthesis presentation table should be generated. Then, the type notification presentation flag corresponding to the type of the carried-over bonus win is set to "1" (step S2615), and the second presentation information setting process is terminated. As already explained, when a bonus win occurs, the win flag corresponding to the type of the bonus win is set to "1" in step S2516 of the first presentation information setting process (FIG. 53). In step S2615, as in step S2608 already explained, the type of the carried-over bonus win is identified based on the type of the win flag set to "1", and the type notification presentation flag corresponding to the type of the bonus win is set to "1". As a result, in the next game and thereafter, the type notification presentation corresponding to the type of the carried-over bonus win is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the normal performance control process (FIG. 52), after the first performance information setting process is executed in step S2410, a normal base performance table read process is executed (step S2411). In the normal base performance table read process, the normal base performance table corresponding to the type information set in the base performance information counter 115 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the normal base performance table storage area 93a of the performance side ROM 93. The normal base performance table is read into the 0th layer LY0 of the read area 94a. The base performance information counter 115 is then cleared to "0".

After executing the read process of the normal base performance table in step S2411, it is determined whether or not the first synthesis flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2412). If the first synthesis flag is set to "1" (step S2412: YES), the first synthesis table is read from the synthesis table storage area 93n of the performance side ROM 93 (step S2413), and the first synthesis process is executed to generate the first synthesis performance table (step S2414).

In the first synthesis process in step S2414, the symbol change effect table is read from the symbol change effect table storage area 93b of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the symbol change effect table is set to the pointer information "0" to "p" of the first synthesis table read in step S2413. After that, the valid notification effect table is read from the valid notification effect table storage area 93c of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the valid notification effect table is set to the pointer information "p+1" to "q" of the first synthesis table. After that, the left stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the left stop effect table storage area 93d of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the left stop effect table is set to the pointer information "q+1" to "r" of the first synthesis table. Then, the right stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in the performance RAM 94 is read from the right stop performance table storage area 93e of the performance ROM 93, and address information and setting destination information of the display data among the performance data set in the right stop performance table are set to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the first synthesis table. Also, the reach notification performance table is read from the reach notification performance table storage area 93f of the performance ROM 93, and the sound data set in the reach notification performance table is set to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the first synthesis table. As a result, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the reach notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop performance. Then, the middle stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 in the performance RAM 94 is read from the middle stop performance table storage area 93h of the performance ROM 93, and the performance data set in the middle stop performance table is set to the pointer information of "s+1" to "t" of the first synthesis table. Then, the first expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the first expected performance information counter 119 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the performance execution area of the first expected performance table is set to the pointer information of "t+1" to "u" of the first synthesis table. Then, the second expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the second expected performance information counter 121 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the second expected performance table storage area 93k of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the second expected performance table is set to the pointer information of "u+1" to "v" of the first synthesis table. This generates the first synthesis table. Then, the left stop performance information counter 116, the right stop performance information counter 117, the center stop performance information counter 118, the first expected performance information counter 119, and the second expected performance information counter 121 in the performance side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

Then, the first composite performance table is read (step S2415), and the normal performance control process is terminated. In the first composite performance table read process in step S2415, the first composite performance table generated in step S2414 is read into the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2412 that the first synthesis flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the second synthesis flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2416). If the second synthesis flag is set to "1" (step S2416: YES), the second synthesis table is read from the synthesis table storage area 93n of the performance side ROM 93 (step S2417), and a second synthesis process is executed to generate a second synthesis performance table (step S2418).

In the second synthesis process in step S2418, the symbol change effect table is read from the symbol change effect table storage area 93b of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the symbol change effect table is set to the pointer information "0" to "p" of the second synthesis table read in step S2417. After that, the valid notification effect table is read from the valid notification effect table storage area 93c of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the valid notification effect table is set to the pointer information "p+1" to "q" of the second synthesis table. After that, the left stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the left stop effect table storage area 93d of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the left stop effect table is set to the pointer information "q+1" to "r" of the second synthesis table. Then, the right stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the right stop performance table storage area 93e of the performance side ROM 93, and the address information and the setting destination information of the display data among the performance data set in the right stop performance table are set to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the second synthesis table. Also, the long press notification performance table is read from the long press notification performance table storage area 93g of the performance side ROM 93, and the sound data set in the long press performance table is set to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the second synthesis table. As a result, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that a long press notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop performance. Then, the middle stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the middle stop performance table storage area 93h of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the middle stop performance table is set to the pointer information of "s+1" to "t" of the second synthesis table. Then, the first expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the first expected performance information counter 119 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the performance execution area of the first expected performance table is set to the pointer information of "t+1" to "u" of the second synthesis table. Then, the second expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the second expected performance information counter 121 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the second expected performance table storage area 93k of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the second expected performance table is set to the pointer information of "u+1" to "v" of the second synthesis table. Then, the re-variable performance table corresponding to the type information set in the re-variable performance information counter 123 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the re-variable performance table storage area 93m of the performance side ROM 93, and the performance data set in the performance execution area of the re-variable performance table is set to the pointer information of "v+1" to "w" of the second synthesis table. This generates the second synthesis table. After that, the left stop performance information counter 116, the right stop performance information counter 117, the center stop performance information counter 118, the first expected performance information counter 119, the second expected performance information counter 121, and the re-change performance information counter 123 in the performance side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

Then, the read process of the second composite performance table is executed (step S2419), and the normal performance control process is terminated. In the read process of the second composite performance table in step S2419, the second composite performance table generated in step S2418 is read into the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a.

On the other hand, if neither the first composition flag nor the second composition flag is set to "1" (step S2412: NO, step S2416: NO), the process of reading the pattern change performance table is executed (step S2420), and the normal performance control process is terminated. In the process of reading the pattern change performance table, the pattern change performance table stored in the pattern change performance table storage area 93b of the performance side ROM 93 is read into the first layer LY1 of the read area 94a.

If it is determined in step S2408 that a game start command has not been received, the read process is executed (step S2421), and the normal presentation control process is terminated. Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the read process.

In the read process, it is first determined whether either the first or second composite flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2701). If either the first or second composite flag is set to "1" (step S2701: YES), this means that the first or second composite performance table has been read into the first layer LY1 of the read area 94a. In this case, since there is no need to read out the corresponding performance table based on the occurrence of the second to fifth triggers, the read process ends without executing the processes from step S2702 onwards.

On the other hand, if neither the first composition flag nor the second composition flag is set to "1" (step S2701: NO), it is determined whether or not a constant speed rotation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2702). If a constant speed rotation start command has been received (step S2702: YES), i.e., if the second trigger has occurred, a read process of the valid notification performance table is executed (step S2703), and this read process is terminated. In the read process of the valid notification performance table, the valid notification performance table stored in the valid notification performance table storage area 93c of the performance side ROM 93 is read into the second layer LY2 of the read area 94a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2702, it is judged whether or not a stop command has been received from the main MPU 72, in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop have been turned on is set (step S2704). If a positive judgment is made in step S2704, that is, if the third trigger has occurred, the left stop performance table read process is executed (step S2705), and this read process is terminated. In the left stop performance table read process, the left stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the left stop performance information counter 116 of the performance RAM 94 is identified from the nine types of left stop performance tables stored in the left stop performance table storage area 93d of the performance side ROM 93. Then, the identified left stop performance table is read into the third layer LY3 in the read area 94a. Then, the left stop performance information counter 116 is cleared to "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S2704, it is judged whether or not a stop command has been received from the main MPU 72, in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the second stop have been turned on is set (step S2706). If a positive judgment is made in step S2706, that is, if the fourth trigger has occurred, a read process of the right stop performance table is executed (step S2707). In the read process of the right stop performance table, a right stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 of the performance RAM 94 is identified from the nine types of right stop performance tables stored in the right stop performance table storage area 93e of the performance side ROM 93. Then, the identified right stop performance table is read into the fourth layer LY4 in the read area 94a. Then, the right stop performance information counter 117 is cleared to "0".

Then, it is determined whether the reach notification effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2708). If the reach notification effect flag is set to "1" (step S2708: YES), a read process of the reach notification effect table is executed (step S2709), and this read process is terminated. In the read process of the reach notification effect table, the reach notification effect table stored in the reach notification effect table storage area 93f of the effect side ROM 93 is read into the fifth layer LY5 in the read area 94a. Then, the reach notification effect flag is cleared to "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S2708, it is judged whether or not the long press notification performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2710). If the long press notification performance flag is set to "1" (step S2710: YES), a read process of the long press notification performance table is executed (step S2711), and this read process is terminated. In the read process of the long press notification performance table, the reach notification performance table stored in the long press notification performance table storage area 93g of the performance side ROM 93 is read into the fifth layer LY5 in the read area 94a. Then, the long press notification performance flag is cleared to "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S2706, it is judged whether or not a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned on has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2712). If a negative judgment is made in step S2712, the read process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2712, that is, if the fifth trigger occurs, a read process of the middle stop performance table is executed (step S2713). In the read process of the middle stop performance table, a middle stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 of the performance side RAM 94 is identified from among the nine types of middle stop performance tables stored in the middle stop performance table storage area 93h of the performance side ROM 93. Then, the identified middle stop performance table is read into the read area 94a. Specifically, if a data table (reach notification effect table) has already been read into the fifth layer LY5, the middle stop effect table is read into the sixth layer LY6, and if a data table has not been read into the fifth layer LY5, the middle stop effect table is read into the fifth layer LY5. After that, the middle stop effect information counter 118 is cleared to "0".

After that, a process of reading the first expected performance table is executed (step S2714). In the process of reading the first expected performance table, if the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 in the performance side RAM 94 is "1" or more, the first expected performance table corresponding to the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 is identified from the five types of first expected performance tables stored in the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM 93. Then, the identified first expected performance table is read into the seventh layer LY7 of the read area 94a. Then, the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 is "0", the first expected performance table is not read.

After that, the process of reading the bonus announcement effect table is executed (step S2715), and this read process is terminated. In the process of reading the bonus announcement effect table, if the bonus announcement effect flag 122 in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", the bonus announcement effect table stored in the bonus announcement effect table storage area 93j of the effect side ROM 93 is read into the eighth layer LY8 of the read area 94a. Then, the value of the bonus announcement effect flag 122 is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if the bonus announcement effect flag 122 is not set to "1", the bonus announcement effect table is not read.

Next, the winning result response process executed by the presentation side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56(a). Note that the winning result response process is executed in step S2405 of the normal presentation control process (FIG. 52).

In the winning result response process, first, based on the winning result command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning corresponding to the occurring bonus winning has been established (step S2801). If a positive determination is made in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game for which a bonus announcement effect is to be executed (step S2802). Specifically, if the bonus announcement effect flag 122 (FIG. 41(b)) in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", it is determined that the current game is a game for which a bonus announcement effect is to be executed. If the current game is a game for which a bonus announcement effect is to be executed (step S2802: YES), a bonus announcement effect cancellation process is executed (step S2803). In the bonus announcement effect cancellation process, the eighth layer LY8 in which the bonus announcement effect table is read in the read area 94a is cleared. This cancels the bonus announcement effect. In addition, in the bonus announcement effect cancellation process (step S2803), the bonus announcement effect flag 122 is cleared to "0". In this way, if a bonus win corresponding to the currently occurring bonus win occurs in the game in which the bonus announcement effect is executed, the bonus announcement effect is canceled.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2802, it is judged whether the current game is a game to be executed for the re-changing performance (step S2804). Specifically, if the second synthesis flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", it is judged to be a game to be executed for the re-changing performance. If it is a game to be executed for the re-changing performance (step S2804: YES), a process to stop the re-changing performance is executed (step S2805). In the process to stop the re-changing performance, the performance data set in the range of the pointer information from "v+1" to "w" in the second synthesis performance table read out to the first layer LY1 of the read area 94a is deleted. As already explained with reference to FIG. 45, the address information and setting destination information of the display data for executing the re-changing performance, the sound data, the light emission data, and the address information of the drive table are set in the range of the pointer information from "v+1" to "w" in the second synthesis performance table. By deleting these performance data, the re-changing performance is canceled. In this way, if a bonus win corresponding to the carried-over bonus win occurs in the game in which the re-changing effect is to be executed, the re-changing effect will be canceled.

As already explained, in the reel control process (Fig. 24), after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning (step S611: YES), a winning result command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the performance MPU 92 in step S615. Then, in the normal performance control process (Fig. 52), if the performance MPU 92 receives a winning result command (step S2404: YES), a winning result response process (Fig. 56(a)) is executed in step S2405. The time required from when the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is turned on until the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop and all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped is maximum when a four-frame slip occurs, and is a maximum of 190 milliseconds. On the other hand, in the game in which the re-changing performance is to be executed, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned on, the middle stop performance is executed, and the first expected performance is executed after the middle stop performance ends. As already explained, the execution period of the middle stop performance is one second, which is longer than 190 milliseconds. Also, as already explained, when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned off are satisfied, the second expected performance is executed, and the re-changing performance is executed after the second expected performance ends. The time required from the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop to the execution of the re-changing performance cancellation process (step S2805) is shorter than the time required from the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop to the start of the re-changing performance, so that the re-changing performance cancellation process (step S2805) can be executed at a timing before the re-changing performance starts to cancel the execution of the re-changing performance. This prevents the re-changing performance from being stopped in the middle of its execution.

If the processing of step S2803 is performed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2804, or if the processing of step S2805 is performed, the bonus winning combination setting process (FIG. 78) described below is executed (step S2806), and this winning result response process is terminated.

Next, the effect setting process at the start of a bonus executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56(b). Note that the effect setting process at the start of a bonus is executed in step S2403 of the normal effect control process (FIG. 52) when the effect side MPU 92 receives a bonus start command from the main side MPU 72.

In the effect setting process at the start of a bonus, first, the effect end process is executed (step S2901). In the effect end process, the 0th layer LY0 from which the base effect table is read in the read area 94a, and the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8 from which various effect tables are read are cleared. In addition, the display data for the normal base effect and the display data for various effects set in the display setting area 113 are cleared. This ends the normal base effect and the various effects that have been executed in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

Then, the type of bonus start effect corresponding to the bonus start command received from the main MPU 72 is identified (step S2902), and a bonus start effect table for executing the identified bonus start effect is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a (step S2903). The bonus start effect table is read into the 0th layer LY0. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 in accordance with the read bonus start effect table, and the bonus start effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. Then, the type announcement effect flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2904), and the effect setting process at the start of this bonus is completed. By clearing the type announcement effect flag to "0" in step S2904, the type announcement effect will not be executed in the next game and thereafter.

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, multiple effects are executed in parallel based on the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers during one game. The combinations of the multiple effects are huge, and if the effect tables corresponding to all the combinations of the multiple effects are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables will increase. In contrast, when the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table are not generated, various effect tables for executing various effects are individually read out to different layers LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 11) of the read area 94a, and various effects are executed in parallel according to the various effect tables. In addition, when the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out to the 0th layer LY0 and the various effects executed according to the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table read out to the first layer LY1 are executed in parallel. This makes it possible to increase the variety of possible combinations of effects while preventing an increase in the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables.

When the second composite effect table is generated, the effect data of the symbol change effect table, the valid notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, the second expected effect table, and the re-change effect table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). As already explained, the read area 94a is provided with a layer (0th layer LY0) from which the normal base effect table is read out, layers (1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8) from which various effect tables are read out, layers (9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10) from which various notification tables are read out, and a layer (11th layer LY11) from which the driving table of the role 75 is read out. If the normal base effect table and the above nine types of effect tables are configured to be read out to different layers LYn in the game in which the re-change effect is executed, the number of layers LYn to be provided in the read area 94a to make these effect tables readable increases. In contrast, in a game in which a re-variable effect is executed, a second composite effect table is generated and read into the first layer LY1, thereby reducing the maximum number of effect tables read into the read area 94a to execute various effects in one game. This reduces the number of layers LYn in the read area 94a.

The presentation side ROM 93 stores one type of first synthesis table, and the first synthesis table is created by setting the presentation data set for each presentation table to be executed in each game to the one type of first synthesis table. The presentation side ROM 93 stores one type of second synthesis table, and the second synthesis table is created by setting the presentation data set for each presentation table to be executed in each game to the one type of second synthesis table. Since the presentation side ROM 93 stores only one type of first synthesis table and one type of second synthesis table in advance to generate the first synthesis table and the second synthesis table, the storage capacity of the presentation side ROM 93 for storing the synthesis tables can be reduced.

The normal base performance table for executing the normal base performance is read into the 0th layer LY0, which is different from the first layer LY1 from which the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table is read. Therefore, even if the pointer information of the reference target in the first layer LY1 jumps, it does not affect the pointer information of the reference target in the 0th layer LY0. This makes it possible to start various performances in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers while continuously displaying the background image G4 in the normal base performance and outputting the normal base music.

By combining five types of first expected performance tables stored in the performance side ROM 93 with five types of second expected performance tables to generate a second composite performance table, it is possible to increase the variety of combinations of the first expected performances and the second expected performances while preventing an increase in the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance tables, compared to a configuration in which performance tables corresponding to all combinations (specifically 25 types) are stored in advance.

The second expected performance is started based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs. If the second expected performance is started based only on the occurrence of the sixth trigger, the second expected performance will start before the first expected performance if the sixth trigger occurs during the execution of the middle stop performance. In a configuration in which the expected probability of winning a bonus is notified in the first expected performance and the expected probability of winning a BB in the case of a bonus win is notified in the second expected performance, if the order of the first expected performance and the second expected performance are reversed, there is a risk of confusing the player. In contrast, by configuring the second expected performance to start based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs, it is possible to execute the first expected performance and the second expected performance in the order of the first expected performance → the second expected performance, and the order of the first expected performance and the second expected performance is prevented from being reversed.

Even if the period between the ON operation and the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is short and the sixth trigger occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches the specified period, the specified period (specifically, one second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected performance. This makes it possible to prevent the execution period of the first expected performance from becoming so short that the content of the first expected performance cannot be understood.

If the period between the ON operation and the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is long and the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected performance can be started without delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44. This makes it possible to associate the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected performance in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, thereby enhancing the player's sense of participation. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

By ensuring that the first expected performance is performed for a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second), while the second expected performance is started without delay when the sixth trigger occurs, the player can feel that the second expected performance has started as a result of turning off the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop. Therefore, after pressing and holding the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop, the player will turn off the stop button 42-44 in anticipation of the second expected performance occurring. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In a game in which the second expected performance is performed, a first composite performance table or a second composite performance table containing performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance is generated, and the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table is read out to one layer (specifically, the first layer LY1). If the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table are configured to be read out to different layers LYn, it would be necessary to provide a configuration in which the performance side MPU 92 determines whether the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second) when the second expected performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger. In contrast, by configuring the first layer LY1 to read out the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table including performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance, the performance side MPU 92 does not have a configuration for determining whether the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), but the second expected performance can be started when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for ensuring the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) as the execution period of the first expected performance.

When both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are met, the display data for the second expected performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113. In this case, if the display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e, the display data is deleted and the display data for the second expected performance is set. In the display setting area 113, the same area (fourth performance area 113e) as the area in which the display data for the first expected performance is set is set as the area in which the display data for the second expected performance is set, so that the performance side MPU 92 can start the second expected performance without having to grasp the progress of the first expected performance.

The layer LYn from which the middle stop effect table is read in the read area 94a varies depending on the presence or absence of the reach notification effect. In addition, the layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) from which the effect table including the effect data of the pattern change effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the left stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the right stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the reach notification effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the long press notification effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the middle stop effect table, and the effect table including the effect data of the first expected effect table are read varies depending on the presence or absence of the generation of the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table. In these effect tables, the setting destination information of the display data is set in correspondence with the address information of the display data. As a result, even if the read destination of these effect tables changes, it is possible to prevent the setting destination in the display setting area 113 of the display data from changing, and to prevent the anteroposterior relationship of the image displayed on the image display device 63 from changing.

A blank area where no performance data is set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and a performance execution area where performance data for performing the first expected performance is set is provided after the blank area. This makes it possible to prevent the first expected performance from being performed while the middle stop performance is being performed, while reading out the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, in a game in which the second expected performance is not performed. In a game in which the second expected performance is performed, the performance execution area excluding the blank area of the first expected performance table is set to the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table. This makes it possible to start the first expected performance without causing a delay at the end timing of the middle stop performance.

<Configuration for executing the performance in ART state ST6>
Next, various effects executed in the ART state ST6 will be described. In the ART state ST6, when the effect side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72, the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are started. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART base effect and the ART normal effect.

In the ART base performance, as shown in FIG. 57, a background image G16 is displayed on the image display device 63, and ART base music is output from the speaker 62. In the ART normal performance, as shown in FIG. 57, a moving image is displayed on the image display device 63, and sound effects for performance are output from the speaker 62 in accordance with the progress of the moving image display. The ART normal performance is executed simultaneously with the ART base performance. The background image G16 is set in the background display layer 101 (FIG. 38), and the ART character image G17 is set in the first performance display layer 102 (FIG. 38). As already explained, in the display data that the VDP 95 creates in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the image of the first performance display layer 102 is set to the front side of the screen than the image of the background display layer 101. Therefore, the ART character image G17 is displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G16.

In the ART state ST6, the number of games to be continued is displayed. When displaying the number of games to be continued, as shown in FIG. 57, a number of games to be continued image G18 indicating the number of games remaining to be continued in the ART state ST6 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63. The number of games indicated by the number of games to be continued image G18 is decremented by one each time one game is played. The number of games to be continued image G18 is set in the third presentation display layer 104 (FIG. 38), and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

In the ART state ST6, the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect are started simultaneously based on the fact that the effect side MPU 92 has received an ART-in-ART add-on command from the main side MPU 72. The add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect are executed only when an add-on win occurs. As already explained, in this embodiment, there is a first add-on win in which the number of add-on games is "50", and a second add-on win in which the number of add-on games is "100". The add-on main effect is an effect that suggests the number of add-on games for the current add-on win. Figures 58(a) to 58(c) and Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect in the ART state ST6.

In the main add-on performance, as shown in FIG. 58(a), a video display is performed in which the first add-on character image G20 and the second add-on character image G21 are displayed for a predetermined period (specifically, 3 seconds) in the central display area 132, which is a central part of the image display device 63. The video is a performance content that suggests the number of add-on games, and the video ends with either the first add-on character image G20 or the second add-on character image G21 displayed. The end of the video with only the first add-on character image G20 displayed suggests that a first add-on win has occurred with the number of add-on games being "50", and the end of the video with only the second add-on character image G21 displayed suggests that a second add-on win has occurred with the number of add-on games being "100". The player can grasp the number of add-on games by checking the type of the add-on character images G20 and G21 displayed at the end of the video. The added character images G20 and G21 are set on the second performance display layer 103 (Figure 38) and are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

As shown in Figures 57 and 58(a), a sub-display area 131 for executing the added sub-performance is provided at the bottom of the image display device 63, and a gauge frame image G19 is displayed in the sub-display area 131 from when the ART state ST6 is started to when it is ended. The gauge frame image G19 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular gauge display section G19a in which the gauge is displayed, and an outer frame section G19b that is displayed around the gauge display section G19a. The gauge frame image G19 is set in the fourth performance display layer 105 (Figure 38), and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

In the top-up sub-performance, as shown in FIG. 58(a), a gauge flashing display is performed in which the unit gauge image G22 is flashed on the gauge display section G19a, and as shown in FIG. 58(b) and FIG. 58(c), after the gauge flashing display ends, a gauge increase display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated stepwise. The gauge flashing display starts at the same time as the top-up main performance and is performed for a predetermined period (specifically, 3 seconds) during which the top-up main performance is performed. The gauge increase display is performed in a manner that notifies the number of top-up games that have been generated this time. When the first top-up character image G20 is displayed last in the video of the top-up main performance, the gauge increase display is performed in a manner that notifies the number of top-up games that is "50", and when the second top-up character image G21 is displayed last in the video of the top-up main performance, the gauge increase display is performed in a manner that notifies the number of top-up games that is "100".

In the add-on sub-performance, the number of added games is indicated by the number and color of unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a. As shown in FIG. 58(b), the unit gauge image G22 is a vertically long rectangular image, and the gauge display section G19a can display 30 unit gauge images G22 arranged horizontally. The unit gauge images G22 are set in the fifth performance display layer 106, and are displayed closer to the screen than the gauge display section G19a.

A state in which "n" yellow unit gauge images G22 (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up horizontally on the gauge display section G19a corresponds to a state in which the number of added games is "n x 10", a state in which "n" red unit gauge images G22 (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up horizontally corresponds to a state in which the number of added games is "n x 10 + 300", a state in which "n" purple unit gauge images G22 (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up horizontally corresponds to a state in which the number of added games is "n x 10 + 600", a state in which "n" silver unit gauge images G22 (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up horizontally corresponds to a state in which the number of added games is "n x 10 + 900", and a state in which "n" gold unit gauge images G22 (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up horizontally corresponds to a state in which the number of added games is "n x 10 + 1200". The gauge display section G19a is set to gray, making it easy to distinguish the unit gauge images G22 of each color that are displayed in front of the gauge display section G19a.

If the number of added games were indicated solely by the number of unit gauge images G22, the maximum number of unit gauge images G22 that could be displayed on the gauge display section G19a would increase, making it necessary to set the horizontal dimension of the unit gauge images G22 small. In this configuration, the gauge increase display would be difficult to see if the number of added games in an added win is small. In contrast, in this embodiment, the number of added games is indicated by the number and color of unit gauge images G22, making it possible to make the gauge increase display easy to see both when the number of added games is small and when the number of added games is large.

In the gauge blinking display when the performance side MPU 92 receives an ART-time add-on command in a situation where the add-on sub-performance is not being executed, as shown in FIG. 58(a), one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed at the left end of the gauge display section G19a, and the unit gauge image G22 is blinked. In this case, in the gauge increase display performed after the gauge blinking display ends, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the number and color of the unit gauge image G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are gradually updated until the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of added games in the current add-on win (for example, "50") is displayed on the gauge display section G19a. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(c), after the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of added games in the current add-on win ("50" in FIG. 58(c)) is displayed on the gauge display section G19a, the unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. This will show the player that the number of additional games for the current additional win is "50."

Then, the unit gauge image G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a disappears, and the added-on sub-performance ends. Although not shown in the figure, the end of the added-on sub-performance leaves only the gauge frame image G19 displayed in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63. In addition, the number of continued games "50" displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 at the end of the added-on sub-performance is updated to "100" by adding "50", which is the number of added games.

The gauge enlargement display includes a high-speed display in which the number and color of unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are updated at 200 millisecond intervals, and a low-speed display in which the number and color of unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are updated at 400 millisecond intervals. In the high-speed display, a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is added to the right of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22 at intervals of one every 200 milliseconds, as shown in FIG. 58(b) and FIG. 58(c). In the low-speed display, a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is added to the right of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22 at intervals of one every 400 milliseconds, as shown in FIG. 58(b) and FIG. 58(c). In this way, the gauge enlargement display shows the entire gauge increasing in horizontal dimension to the right, starting from the left end of the gauge display section G19a.

The execution period of the gauge enlargement display varies depending on the number of added games, and the execution period of the gauge enlargement display becomes longer as the number of added games increases. When the number of added games is "50", in the high-speed display, the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of added games or the total number of added games up to this time is displayed 800 milliseconds after the gauge enlargement display starts, and the gauge enlargement display ends after this state continues for one second. On the other hand, in the low-speed display, it takes 1.6 seconds from the start of the gauge enlargement display until the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of added games or the total number of added games up to this time is displayed. Also, when the number of added games is "100", in the high-speed display, the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of added games or the total number of added games up to this time is displayed 1.8 seconds after the gauge enlargement display starts, and the gauge enlargement display ends after this state continues for one second. On the other hand, in the slow display, it takes 1.6 seconds from when the gauge increase display starts until the unit gauge image G22 with the number and color corresponding to the current number of added games or the total number of added games up to this point is displayed.

While the added main performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the image display device 63 is in a state where the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, the added main performance, and the gauge flashing display in the added sub performance are being executed simultaneously. After that, when the gauge increase display in the added sub performance is started, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the image display device 63 is in a state where the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, and the gauge increase display are being executed simultaneously.

The value of the number of games to be continued, displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63, is updated to a value after the number of games to be added in the additional win that triggered the additional sub-effect is added when the gauge increase display in the additional sub-effect ends. Until the gauge increase display ends, the player cannot tell the current number of games to be added by looking at the number of games to be continued image G18, so the player focuses on the gauge increase display, which increases attention to the gauge increase display.

The main MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 at the start of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 in the middle of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance. If the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game during the execution of the top-up main performance, the performance side MPU 92 will receive a game start command during the execution of the top-up main performance. In this case, in the image display device 63, the top-up main performance that was being executed in the central display area 132 (FIG. 58 (a)) ends in the middle, and a new ART base performance and ART normal performance corresponding to the operation of the start lever 41 are started. In this case, since it is not possible to confirm the type of the top-up character image G20, G21 that is displayed last in the video of the top-up main performance, it is not possible to grasp the number of top-up games based on the top-up main performance. On the other hand, the top-up sub performance executed in the sub display area 131 (FIG. 58 (a)) continues to be executed. Even if the start lever 41 is operated to end the ongoing main add-on performance, the add-on sub-performance continues to be displayed in parallel with the newly started ART base performance and ART normal performance, making it possible to confirm not only the result of the add-on win but also part of the performance related to the add-on win (specifically the add-on sub-performance).

If the presentation side MPU 92 does not receive a game start command while the added main performance is being executed, the animated display of the added main performance is continued to the end without being terminated midway. As already explained, if the animated display of the added main performance is continued to the end, the number of added games can be ascertained based on the type of added character images G20, G21 displayed at the end of the animation. In this case, a high-speed display is performed in which the number and color of unit gauge images G22 are updated at 200 millisecond intervals. In this way, the gauge increase display that is performed after the number of added games is suggested is a high-speed display. This shortens the execution period of the gauge increase display.

On the other hand, if the presentation side MPU 92 receives a game start command while the added main performance is being executed, the video display of the added main performance will end midway without being completed. If the video display of the added main performance ends midway, the gauge increase display will be performed without the number of added games being indicated. In this case, a slow display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated at 400 millisecond intervals. In this way, the gauge increase display that is performed without the number of added games being indicated is a slow display. This extends the display period of the gauge increase display, which the viewer will view while hoping for a large number of added games, and can increase attention to the gauge increase display.

When the production side MPU 92 receives an ART-in-add command while the add-on sub-performance is being executed, that is, when two or more add-on wins occur in a continuous manner without interruption of the add-on sub-performance, the add-on sub-performance that was being executed ends, and a new add-on main performance and add-on sub-performance corresponding to the current add-on win are started. In the flashing gauge display of the newly started add-on sub-performance, a unit gauge image G22 of a color and number corresponding to the final state of the add-on sub-performance that ended in the middle of execution is flashed. Specifically, in the flashing gauge display of the add-on sub-performance corresponding to the second consecutive add-on win, a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the number of add-on games in the first add-on win is flashed, and in the flashing gauge display of the add-on sub-performance corresponding to the third consecutive add-on win, a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the total number of add-on games, which is the sum of the number of add-on games in the first add-on win and the number of add-on games in the second add-on win, is flashed. This allows a player who is watching an added sub-performance that ended midway through execution to be shown the final display state of the unit gauge image G22 in that added sub-performance.

If the performance side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command while an add-on sub-performance is being executed, and the performance side MPU 92 waits to start the add-on main performance and the add-on sub-performance based on the reception of the ART add-on command until the execution of the add-on sub-performance ends, a delay occurs between the reception of the ART add-on command and the start of the add-on main performance and the add-on sub-performance. In this configuration, if add-on wins occur consecutively and delays accumulate, there is a risk that a situation will occur in which the add-on main performance and the add-on sub-performance corresponding to the add-on win cannot be started during the game in which the add-on win occurred. In contrast, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the add-on main performance and the add-on sub-performance are started without delay based on the reception of the ART add-on command. This makes it possible to eliminate the possibility of a situation occurring in which the add-on main performance and the add-on sub-performance corresponding to the add-on win cannot be started during the game in which the add-on win occurred, even if add-on wins occur consecutively.

When the additional wins occur continuously in an uninterrupted manner in the additional sub-performance, the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are gradually updated in the gauge enlargement display that is performed after the gauge flashing display ends, from a state in which a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games of the additional wins that occurred continuously before the current additional win is displayed, to a state in which a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the total number of games in all the additional wins that occurred continuously, including the current additional win, is displayed. Then, after the unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games in all the additional wins that occurred continuously, including the current additional win, is displayed in the gauge display section G19a, the unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. As a result, the total number of additional games in the additional wins that occurred continuously in an uninterrupted manner in the additional sub-performance is shown to the player. The unit gauge image G22 that was continuously displayed for one second is then no longer displayed. After the gauge enlargement display ends, only the gauge frame image G19 is displayed in the sub-display area 131.

Specifically, in the case where the total number of added games in the consecutive added wins that occurred before the current added win is "250" and the total number of added games in the current added win is "100", as shown in FIG. 59(a), the gauge display section G19a first displays 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of added games of "250", and these 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 are flashed for a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds). After that, as shown in FIG. 59(b), new yellow unit gauge images G22 are added to the right of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22 at predetermined time intervals until the gauge display section G19a displays 30 yellow unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of added games of "300". Then, at the next update timing when 30 yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed on the gauge display section G19a, one red unit gauge image G22 corresponding to the number of added games of "310" is displayed on the left edge of the gauge display section G19a. After that, a new red unit gauge image G22 is added to the right of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(c), five red unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of added games of "350" are displayed on the gauge display section G19a, and these five red unit gauge images G22 are continuously displayed for one second. This indicates to the player that the total number of added games due to the consecutive added wins that have occurred in an uninterrupted manner with the added sub-effects has reached "350".

Then, the unit gauge image G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a disappears, and the add-on sub-performance ends. Although not shown in the figure, the end of the add-on sub-performance leaves only the gauge frame image G19 displayed in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63. In addition, the total number of add-on games for all consecutive add-on wins, "350", is added to the number of continued games "50" displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 at the end of the add-on sub-performance, and the total is updated to "400".

In this way, when consecutive additional wins occur without interruption in the additional win sub-effects, the value of the number of games to continue displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated all at once at the end of the additional win sub-effect of the last consecutive additional win. By configuring the value of the number of games to continue displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 not to be updated until the additional win sub-effect of the last additional win ends, the number of games to be added can be grasped first in the additional win main effect or additional win sub-effect, which can increase attention to the additional win main effect and additional win sub-effect.

Even in a situation where additional wins are occurring consecutively, the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time the game is started. If the value of the number of continued games to be displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 becomes a value of "0" or less before the total number of added games from the consecutive added wins is finally added together, "?" is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 instead of the value of "0" or less. Therefore, the ART state ST6 does not continue in a state where a value of "0" or less is displayed as the number of continued games in the upper left corner of the image display device 63. In a situation where additional wins are occurring consecutively, after the value of the number of continued games to be displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less, when the additional sub-performance of the last added win ends, the total number of added games from the consecutive added wins is added to the value of "0" or less, and the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the production side ROM 93 and production side RAM 94 for executing various performances in ART state ST6. Figure 60 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side ROM 93, and Figure 60 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side RAM 94.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the performance side ROM 93 is provided with an ART base performance table memory area 133a, an ART normal performance table memory area 133b, an added main performance table memory area 133c, a high-speed first added sub-performance table memory area 133d, a high-speed second added sub-performance table memory area 133e, a low-speed first added sub-performance table memory area 133f, and a low-speed second added sub-performance table memory area 133g.

In this slot machine 10, there are 16 types of ART base effects that are executed in the ART state ST6, and the ART base effect table memory area 133a of the effect side ROM 93 stores 16 types of ART base effect tables for executing the 16 types of ART base effects. In addition, there are 16 types of ART normal effects that are executed in the ART state ST6, and the ART normal effect table memory area 133b of the effect side ROM 93 stores 16 types of ART normal effect tables for executing the 16 types of ART normal effects.

As already explained, there are two numbers of added games for an added win that occurs in ART state ST6: "50" and "100". There are eight types of added main effects that are executed in ART state ST6, and the added main effect table memory area 133c of the effect side ROM 93 stores four types of added main effect tables for executing an added main effect corresponding to the added game number of "50" and four types of added main effect tables for executing an added main effect corresponding to the added game number of "100".

As already explained, there are slow and fast gauge increase displays in the add-on sub-effects. The high-speed first add-on sub-effect table memory area 133d of the effect side ROM 93 stores a high-speed first add-on sub-effect table for executing a high-speed gauge increase display when the number of add-on games is "50", and the high-speed second add-on sub-effect table memory area 133e of the effect side ROM 93 stores a high-speed second add-on sub-effect table for executing a high-speed gauge increase display when the number of add-on games is "100". In addition, the slow-speed first-addition sub-performance table memory area 133f of the performance side ROM 93 stores a slow-speed first-addition sub-performance table for executing a slow-speed gauge increase display when the number of added games is "50", and the slow-speed second-addition sub-performance table memory area 133g of the performance side ROM 93 stores a slow-speed second-addition sub-performance table for executing a slow-speed gauge increase display when the number of added games is "100".

The ART base performance table contains address information and setting destination information for display data for displaying the background image G16 on the image display device 63, and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that the above-mentioned ART base music is output. The ART base performance table is read into the 0th layer LY0 in the read area 94a.

The ART normal performance table contains address information and setting destination information for display data for performing a moving image display in which the ART character image G17 is displayed on the image display device 63, and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that the above-mentioned performance sound effects are output. The ART normal performance table is read out to the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a.

In the added main performance table, address information and setting destination information of display data for performing a moving image display in which the added character images G20 and G21 are displayed in the central display area 132 of the image display device 63, sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a sound corresponding to the moving image display is output, light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61 so that the upper lamp 61 emits light in a manner corresponding to the moving image display, and address information of a drive table for executing a reel operation performance in which the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 moves up and down are set. The address information of the drive table is set for the final pointer information in the added main performance table, and the reel operation performance starts when the remaining execution period of the added main performance is 1 second. The added main performance table is read out to the second layer LY2 in the read area 94a. Details of the reel operation performance will be described later.

The add-on sub-performance tables (first high-speed add-on sub-performance table, second high-speed add-on sub-performance table, first low-speed add-on sub-performance table, and second low-speed add-on sub-performance table) contain address information and setting destination information for display data for executing a gauge flashing display in which one yellow unit gauge image G22 is flashed in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63, and address information and setting destination information for display data for executing a gauge increase display. The add-on sub-performance tables are read out to the third layer LY3.

The add-on main performance is executed according to the add-on main performance table read out to the second layer LY2, and the add-on sub performance is executed according to the add-on sub performance table read out to the third layer LY3 (first high-speed add-on sub performance table, second high-speed add-on sub performance table, first low-speed add-on sub performance table, or second low-speed add-on sub performance table). In this way, the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance proceed in parallel according to the add-on main performance table and the add-on sub performance table read out to different layers LYn of the read area 94a.

The data structure of the add-on sub-performance table will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in Figure 61, using the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table as an example. Figure 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table.

In the range of pointer information "0" to "74" in the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table, performance data for displaying a flashing gauge is set. Specifically, in the pointer information of "0", "25", and "50" in the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table, address information (AD10 (1)) of display data for displaying one yellow unit gauge image G22 in the gauge display section G19a and setting destination information specifying the fifth performance area 113f (FIG. 42 (c)) of the display setting area 113 as the setting destination of the display data are set. In addition, in the pointer information of "15", "40", and "65" in the add-on sub-performance table, erasure data for clearing the fifth performance area 113f of the display setting area 113 and setting destination information indicating the fifth performance area 113f as the setting destination information of the erasure data are set. When erasure data is set for the pointer information to be referenced, the fifth performance area 113f is cleared and the unit gauge image G22 is no longer displayed. The gauge flashes as the setting of display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 and the erasure of that display data are repeated alternately.

When the pointer information of the reference target is "0", display data is set in the fifth performance area 113f of the display setting area 113. As a result, one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed in the gauge display section G19a. The one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information of the reference target is updated from "0" to "15", for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information of the reference target is updated from "25" to "40", and for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information of the reference target is updated from "50" to "65", while it is not displayed for 0.4 seconds until the pointer information of the reference target is updated from "15" to "25", for 0.4 seconds until the pointer information of the reference target is updated from "40" to "50", and for 0.4 seconds until the pointer information of the reference target is updated from "65" to "75". Therefore, in the gauge flashing display, one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed flashing.

In the range of "75" to "120" of the pointer information in the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table (Figure 61), address information and setting destination information of the display data are set for performing a gauge increase display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are gradually updated to the number and color corresponding to the number of added games. Specifically, address information (AD10(1)) of display data for displaying one yellow unit gauge image G22 for pointer information of "75" in the high-speed first added sub-performance table is set, address information (AD10(2)) of display data for displaying two yellow unit gauge images G22 for pointer information of "80" is set, address information (AD10(3)) of display data for displaying three yellow unit gauge images G22 for pointer information of "85" is set, address information (AD10(4)) of display data for displaying four yellow unit gauge images G22 for pointer information of "90" is set, and address information (AD10(5)) of display data for displaying five yellow unit gauge images G22 for pointer information of "95" is set. In addition, setting destination information indicating the fifth performance area 113f of the display setting area 113 is set for these address information of display data. Display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth performance area 113f, and the unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth performance display layer 106. As shown in FIG. 61, the pointer information for "120" in the first added sub-performance table is set with erase data for clearing the fifth performance area 113f.

When the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table is read out, in the gauge increase display, one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "75" to "80", two yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "80" to "85", three yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "85" to "90", four yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "90" to "95", and five yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 1 second until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "95" to "120".

When consecutive add-on wins occur, the address information of the display data set in the add-on sub-performance tables (high-speed first add-on sub-performance table, high-speed second add-on sub-performance table, low-speed first add-on sub-performance table, and low-speed second add-on sub-performance table) is rewritten to address information of the display data for displaying the gauge flashing and the gauge increasing in a manner corresponding to the total number of add-on games in the consecutive add-on wins that occurred before the current add-on win. In this embodiment, consecutive add-on wins refer to a case where the performance side MPU 92 receives a new mid-ART add-on command while the add-on sub-performance is being executed, and multiple add-on wins occur without interruption in the add-on sub-performance.

Specifically, in a situation where the total number of added games in consecutive added wins is "n" (n is an integer equal to or greater than "50"), if an added win occurs with an added game count of "50" with the added sub-effects continuing uninterrupted, the address information (AD10(1)) of the display data set to "0", "25", and "50" in the high-speed first added sub-effect table (FIG. 61) is rewritten to address information of display data for displaying a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the added game count of "n". In addition, the address information of the display data set to pointer information of "75", "80", "85", "90", and "95" in the high-speed first added sub-effect table (FIG. 61) is rewritten to address information of display data for displaying a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the added game count of "n+10", "n+20", "n+30", "n+40", and "n+50". For example, when "n" is "200", the gauge display section G19a performs an expanding gauge display in which a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is added to the right of the rightmost unit gauge image G22 at intervals of one every 200 milliseconds, until the state in which 20 yellow unit gauge images G22 are lined up changes to a state in which 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 are lined up.

In this way, when consecutive additional wins occur without interruption in the additional sub-effects, the address information of the display data set in the additional sub-effect tables (high-speed first additional sub-effect table, high-speed second additional sub-effect table, low-speed first additional sub-effect table, and low-speed second additional sub-effect table) is rewritten. As a result, the gauge expansion display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated at a predetermined time interval (specifically, at 200 millisecond intervals) from a state in which a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games in the additional wins that occurred consecutively before the occurrence of the additional win that triggered the reading of the additional sub-effect table is displayed to a state in which a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games obtained by adding the number of additional games in the current additional win to the total number of additional games is displayed.

If the start lever 41 is operated before the main overlay performance ends and the main overlay performance ends midway, the overlay sub-performance table for slow display (the slow first overlay sub-performance table or the slow second overlay sub-performance table) corresponding to the overlay sub-performance table for fast display (the fast first overlay sub-performance table or the fast second overlay sub-performance table) that was read into the third layer LY3 is read out. Specifically, if the fast first overlay sub-performance table is read out into the third layer LY3, the slow first overlay sub-performance table is read out into the third layer LY3, and if the fast second overlay sub-performance table is read out into the third layer LY3, the slow second overlay sub-performance table is read out into the third layer LY3.

When the slow-speed add-on sub-performance table is read instead of the fast-speed add-on sub-performance table, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is carried over without being cleared. In this case, the display data for the add-on sub-performance set in the fifth performance area 113f (FIG. 42(f)) of the display setting area 113 is not cleared. Therefore, the gauge blinking display is executed from the continuation of the gauge blinking display that was executed halfway. Also, if the data of the fast-speed add-on sub-performance table read out to the third layer LY3 has been rewritten, the rewritten data set for each pointer information of the fast-speed add-on sub-performance table is set to the corresponding pointer information in the slow-speed add-on sub-performance table read out to the third layer LY3. As a result, in a situation where the add-on wins are occurring consecutively, the gauge blinking display and the gauge increase display in the add-on sub-performance can be executed in a manner corresponding to the total add-on games of the add-on wins that occurred consecutively before the current add-on win occurred.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), the presentation side RAM 94 is provided with a display counter 134, an added game number counter 135, and a flashing display counter 136. The display counter 134 is a counter that is decremented by 1 by the presentation side MPU 92 each time a game is executed in the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6, the value set in the display counter 134 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6.

The additional game number counter 135 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of additional games generated by an additional win. The flashing display counter 136 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games generated by consecutive additional wins that occurred before the current additional win when additional wins occur consecutively. As already explained, in this embodiment, consecutive additional wins occur when the production side MPU 92 receives a new mid-ART additional command while an additional sub-performance is being executed, and multiple additional wins occur without interruption to the additional sub-performance.

Next, the processing configuration in the presentation side MPU 92 for enabling the execution of various presentations in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the non-normal presentation control processing executed by the presentation side MPU 92. Note that the non-normal presentation control processing is executed by interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds) in the presentation side MPU 92 when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST5, or ART state ST6.

In the non-normal performance control process, if an ending end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3001: YES), the performance side ending performance flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3002). The performance side ending performance flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to identify that the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is being executed. Then, the ending end process is executed (step S3003). In the ending end process, a process for executing the ending end performance is performed as a performance corresponding to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2. The ending end performance is executed in the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. In addition, in the ending end process (step S3003), numerical information is set in the performance side performance timer counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 to enable the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the end timing of the ending end performance. The value of the production-side production timer counter is updated in step S5705 of the history image management process (Figure 95) described below.

Then, the ART in progress flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3004). The ART in progress flag is a flag that enables the presentation side MPU 92 to know whether the game state is the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 transitioned from the ART state ST6, the bonus state transitioned from the ART state ST6, or the preparation state ST5 transitioned to after the end of the bonus state. The ART in progress flag is set to "1" when the presentation side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72. The ART in progress flag is cleared to "0" when the presentation side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main side MPU 72.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3001, it is judged whether or not an ending performance command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3005), and if an ending performance command has been received (step S3005: YES), the performance side ending performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3006).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3005, or if the processing of step S3006 is performed, it is judged whether or not the production side ending performance flag is set to "1" (step S3007), and if the production side ending performance flag is set to "1" (step S3007: YES), the ending performance processing is executed (step S3008). In the ending performance processing, processing for executing the ending performance is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3007, it is judged whether or not an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3009). As already explained, the ART start command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the ART state ST6 is started. If an ART start command has been received (step S3009: YES), the performance setting process at the start of ART is executed (step S3010). Figure 63 (a) is a flowchart showing the performance setting process at the start of ART.

In the presentation setting process at the start of ART, it is determined whether the transition to the ART state ST6 this time corresponds to a return to the ART state ST6 based on the information set in the ART start command received from the master MPU 72 (step S3101). If it does not correspond to a return to the ART state ST6 (step S3101: NO), the start game number (specifically, 50 games) corresponding to the new start of the ART state ST6 set in the ART start command is added to the display counter 134 of the presentation RAM 94 (step S3102). In this case, if there is no addition of the number of continued games in the ART state ST6 in the bonus state and preparation state ST5 before the start of the ART state ST6, the value of the display counter 134 becomes "50", which corresponds to the start game number. On the other hand, if the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST6 is added in the bonus state and preparation state ST5 before ART state ST6 is started, the total value of the number of games generated by this addition and the starting number of games ("50") is set in the display counter 134.

When a positive judgment is made in step S3101, or when the processing of step S3102 is performed, a process for starting the display of the number of continued games is executed (step S3103). In the process for starting the display of the number of continued games, display data for displaying the number of continued games image G18 corresponding to the current value of the display counter 134 is read from the performance side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the third performance area 113d (FIG. 42 (c)) of the display setting area 113. By performing display control of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the number of continued games image G18 (FIG. 57) corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63. In this way, the number of continued games image G18 indicating the value of the display counter 134 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6 is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63. In addition, if the previous display data is set in the third performance area 113d of the display setting area 113, the current display data is set after the third performance area 113d is cleared. As a result, the number of games to be played image G18 displayed on the image display device 63 is updated to a value corresponding to the updated value of the display counter 134.

After that, a process to start the gauge frame display is executed (step S3104). In the process to start the gauge frame display, display data for displaying a gauge frame image G19 (FIG. 57) in the sub-display area 131 (FIG. 57) of the image display device 63 is read from the performance-side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the fourth performance area 113e (FIG. 42(b)) of the display setting area 113. Display control of the image display device 63 is performed based on the display data, and the display of the gauge frame image G19 begins in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63.

After that, the ART start performance lottery process is executed (step S3105). In the ART start performance lottery process, the ART start performance lottery table is first read from the performance side ROM 93. There are 16 types of ART start performances in this slot machine 10, and the performance side ROM 93 stores 16 types of ART start performance tables for executing the 16 types of ART start performances. The ART start performance lottery table has information of the 16 types of ART start performance tables set, and the information of each ART start performance table has a numerical range set for determining whether or not it is a hit. Then, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read ART start performance lottery table. This identifies the ART start performance table to be read this time. Specifically, the ART start performance table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is identified as the read target.

Then, a process for setting type information for the ART start performance is executed (step S3106). In the process for setting type information for the ART start performance, if the mode is the history storage mode described below, the type information for the ART start performance (numerical information of any one of 1 to 16) corresponding to the ART start performance table identified in the ART start performance lottery process (step S3105) is set in the eighth history storage area RA8 in the history storage area 94b (step S3106). The history storage mode and the eighth history storage area RA8 will be described later.

Then, the ART start performance table identified in the ART start performance lottery process in step S3105 is read into the read area 94a (step S3107), and the performance setting process at the start of this ART is terminated. The ART start performance table is read into the 0th layer LY0. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART start performance table read in step S3107, and the ART start performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal presentation control process (FIG. 62), after a negative judgment is made in step S3009, it is judged whether or not the current game state is the ART state ST6 (step S3012). If the current game state is not the ART state ST6 (step S3012: NO), other presentation processes are executed (step S3013), and the non-normal presentation control process is terminated. In the other presentation processes (step S3013), a process is executed to control the execution of the presentation when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, or the preparation state ST5. In addition, in the other presentation processes (step S3013), when the presentation side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established in the bonus internal state ST2 or the preparation state ST5 is set, a bonus winning role setting process (FIG. 78) is executed, which will be described later.

If the current game state is ART state ST6 (step S3012: YES), it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3014). If a game start command has been received (step S3014: YES), processing for starting a game during ART is executed (step S3015), and this non-normal presentation control processing is terminated. Figure 63 (b) is a flowchart showing processing for starting a game during ART.

In the process for starting a game during ART, it is determined whether the main performance in progress flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3201). The main performance in progress flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that an additional main performance is being executed. The main performance in progress flag is set to "1" in step S3404 of the additional performance processing (FIG. 65) described later. In addition, the main performance in progress flag is cleared to "0" in the end processing of the additional main performance (step S3202) described later and in step S3503 of the flag clear processing (FIG. 66(a)) described later.

When it is determined in step S3201 that the main performance in progress flag is set to "1", this means that a game start command has been received during the execution of the added main performance, and therefore the end process of the added main performance is executed (step S3202). In the end process of the added main performance, the second layer LY2 in the read area 94a is cleared. As already explained, the second layer LY2 is the layer from which the added main performance table is read. By clearing the second layer LY2 from which the added main performance table was read, the sound output control based on the sound data set in the added main performance table and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 based on the light emission data set in the added main performance table are no longer performed. As already explained, the address information of the drive table of the role 75 is set in the pointer information at the end of the added main performance table (pointer information indicating that the execution period of the added main performance is 1 second remaining). By clearing the second layer LY2 from which the added main performance table was read, the drive table is no longer read, and the role operation performance based on the drive table is canceled. The details of the role operation performance will be described later. In addition, in the end process of the added main performance (step S3202), the second performance area 113c (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113 is cleared. As already explained, the second performance area 113c is an area in which display data for executing the added main performance is set. When the added main performance is being executed, the display data for executing the added main performance is cleared. This ends the display of the added main performance performed on the image display device 63. In the read area 94a, the layer LYn from which the added main performance table and the added sub performance table are read is different, and the setting destination of the display data for executing the added main performance and the display data for executing the added sub performance is also different. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ending the added main performance while continuing the added sub performance. Furthermore, in the end process of the added main performance (step S3202), the main performance in progress flag is cleared to "0". This allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the additional main performance has ended.

After that, the update process of the added sub-performance table is executed (step S3203). In this update process, instead of the added sub-performance table for high-speed display read out to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a, the corresponding added sub-performance table for low-speed display is read out to the third layer LY3. Specifically, if the high-speed first added sub-performance table is read out to the third layer LY3, the low-speed first added sub-performance table is read out, and if the high-speed second added sub-performance table is read out to the third layer LY3, the low-speed second added sub-performance table is read out. As already explained, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is carried over without being cleared. In addition, in the update process of the added sub-performance table (step S3203), the fifth performance area 113f of the display setting area 113 in which the display data for the added sub-performance is set is not cleared. Therefore, the gauge display unit G19a displays the continuation of the gauge flashing display.

In the process of updating the add-on sub-performance table in step S3203, if the data of the add-on sub-performance table for high-speed display read out to the third layer LY3 has been rewritten, the rewritten data set for each pointer information of the add-on sub-performance table for high-speed display is set to the corresponding pointer information in the add-on sub-performance table for low-speed display read out to the third layer LY3. This makes it possible to execute the gauge flashing display and gauge enlargement display in the add-on sub-performance in a manner corresponding to the total number of add-on games of the add-on wins that occurred consecutively before the current add-on win occurred, in a situation where add-on wins are occurring consecutively.

After that, the base performance lottery process for ART is executed (step S3204). In the base performance lottery process for ART, first, the ART base performance lottery table for selecting the ART base performance is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, 16 types of ART base performance tables are stored in the ART base performance table storage area 133a of the performance side ROM 93. The ART base performance lottery table has type information (numerical information of 1 to 16) of the 16 types of ART base performance tables set, and the various types of information have numerical ranges set for determining whether or not the result is correct. Then, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read ART base performance lottery table. This identifies the ART base performance table to be read this time. Specifically, the ART base performance table to be read is identified as the one to be read, in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set.

Then, the ART base performance table is read (step S3205). In the read process, the 0th layer LY0 in the read area 94a is cleared, and the ART base performance table identified in step S3204 is read from the ART base performance table storage area 133a of the performance side ROM 93 to the 0th layer LY0 of the read area 94a. The ART base performance is executed in the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the performance according to the ART base performance table. Specifically, the address information and setting destination information of the display data for executing the ART base performance in the image display device 63 are set in the pointer information of "0" in the ART base performance table. The display data is set in the background area 113a (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113. If the previous display data is set in the background area 113a, the background area 113a is cleared and then the current display data is set. This will end the previous ART base performance and start the current ART base performance.

After that, the ART normal performance lottery process is executed (step S3206). In the ART normal performance lottery process, first, the ART normal performance lottery table for selecting the ART normal performance is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, 16 types of ART normal performance tables are stored in the ART normal performance table storage area 133b of the performance side ROM 93. The ART normal performance lottery table has type information (numerical information of 1 to 16) of the 16 types of ART normal performance tables set, and the various types of information have numerical ranges set for determining whether or not the result is a hit. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read ART normal performance lottery table. This identifies the ART normal performance table to be read this time. Specifically, the ART normal performance table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is identified as the read target.

Then, the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a is cleared, and the ART normal performance table identified as the read target in the ART normal performance lottery process in step S3206 is read from the ART normal performance table storage area 133b of the performance side ROM 93 (step S3207). As described above, the ART normal performance table is read into the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a. The ART normal performance is executed by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the performance according to the ART normal performance table. The ART base performance and the ART normal performance are executed in parallel based on the ART base performance table and the ART normal performance table read into different layers LYn in the read area 94a.

After that, the value of the display counter 134 in the presentation side RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S3208), the process of updating the display of the number of continued games is executed (step S3209), and the process for starting the game in this ART is terminated. In the process of updating the display of the number of continued games in step S3209, if the value of the display counter 134 after decrementing by 1 in step S3208 is a value of "1" or more, display data for displaying the number of continued games image G18 corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 is read from the presentation side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the third presentation area 113d of the display setting area 113. As already explained, if display data has already been set in the third presentation area 113d, the third presentation area 113d is cleared to "0" and then the current display data is set. The display control of the image display device 63 is performed based on the display data, and the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after decrementing by 1. In addition, in the process of updating the display of the number of continued games in step S3209, if the value of the display counter 134 after subtracting 1 in step S3208 is a value of "0" or less, display data for displaying "?" in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 instead of the value of "0" or less is read from the presentation side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the third presentation area 113d of the display setting area 113. As already explained, even in a situation where additional wins are occurring consecutively, the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is started. The value of the number of continued games to be displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 may become a value of "0" or less until the total number of additional games in the consecutive additional wins is finally added together. In this case, "?" is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 instead of the value of "0" or less, so that the ART state ST6 does not continue in a state where a value of "0" or less is displayed as the number of continued games in the upper left corner of the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62), if a negative judgment is made in step S3014, it is judged whether or not an ART-in-progress add-on command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3016). If an ART-in-progress add-on command has been received (step S3016: YES), a performance adjustment process is executed (step S3017). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the performance adjustment process.

In the performance adjustment process, it is determined whether the sub performance in progress flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3301). The sub performance in progress flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that an additional sub performance is being executed. The sub performance in progress flag is set to "1" in step S3411 of the additional performance processing (Figure 65) described later. In addition, the sub performance in progress flag is cleared to "0" in step S3506 of the flag clear processing (Figure 66 (a)) described later.

When it is determined in step S3301 that the sub-performance in progress flag is set to "1", this means that an ART-in-ART command has been received during the execution of the added sub-performance, so the end process of the added sub-performance is executed (step S3302). In the end process of the added sub-performance, the third layer LY3 in the read area 94a is cleared, and the fifth performance area 113f (FIG. 42 (c)) in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As already explained, the third layer LY3 is a layer in which the added sub-performance table (high-speed first added sub-performance table, high-speed second added sub-performance table, low-speed first added sub-performance table, or low-speed second added sub-performance table) is read, and the fifth performance area 113f is an area in which display data for the added sub-performance is set. By clearing the fifth performance area 113f, the added sub-performance performed in the image display device 63 is ended. Additionally, by clearing the third layer LY3, it is possible to prevent new display data for the added sub-performance from being set in the fifth performance area 113f, thereby ending the added sub-performance.

Then, the continuous top-up flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3303). The continuous top-up flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp that a top-up win has occurred two or more times in a row with the top-up sub-presentation being uninterrupted.

After that, an addition process is executed for the blinking display counter 136 (step S3304). In the addition process for the blinking display counter 136, the number of added games in the added sub-effect that was ended in step S3302 is determined by referring to the added game number counter 135 in the presentation side RAM 94, and the determined number of added games is added to the value of the blinking display counter 136 in the presentation side RAM 94. This causes the blinking display counter 136 to be set with the total number of added games for the consecutive added wins that occurred before the current added win.

When the addition process of the blinking display counter 136 is executed in step S3304, the value of the added game number counter 135 is cleared to "0" (step S3305), and this effect adjustment process is terminated. Note that the added game number counter 135 is set to the added game number for this added win in step S3401 of the added effect process (Figure 65) described later.

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62), after the performance adjustment process (FIG. 64) is executed in step S3017, the additional performance process is executed (step S3018). FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the additional performance process.

In the process for the additional performance, the number of additional games is determined based on the information set in the currently received ART additional command, and the determined number of additional games is set in the additional game number counter 135 in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3401). As a result, if additional wins occur consecutively with the additional sub-performance being uninterrupted, the number of additional games in the current additional win is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the total number of additional games in the consecutive additional wins that occurred before the current additional win is set in the blinking display counter 136. Also, if additional wins do not occur consecutively, the number of additional games in the current additional win is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the value of the blinking display counter 136 is set to "0".

After that, the add-on main performance lottery process is executed (step S3402). In the add-on main performance lottery process, first, the add-on main performance lottery table for selecting the add-on main performance is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, the add-on main performance table storage area 133c (FIG. 60(a)) of the performance side ROM 93 stores four types of add-on main performance tables for executing the add-on main performance corresponding to the number of add-on games of "50" and four types of add-on main performance tables for executing the add-on main performance corresponding to the number of add-on games of "100". The first add-on main performance lottery table has type information of four types of add-on main performance tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not each type of information is correct is set. In addition, the second add-on main performance lottery table has type information of four types of add-on main performance tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not each type of information is correct is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read additional main performance lottery table. This identifies the additional main performance table to be read this time. Specifically, the additional main performance table to be read is identified as the table to be read, which has a numerical range set that includes the numerical information read from the random number counter.

After that, the second layer LY2 of the read area 94a is cleared, and the added main performance table identified in the added main performance lottery process in step S3402 is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a (step S3403). As already explained, the added main performance table is read to the second layer LY2. The performance execution control is performed according to the added main performance table, and the added main performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In addition, the driving table of the role 75 set for the pointer information at the end of the added main performance table (pointer information indicating that the execution period of the added main performance is 1 second remaining) is read, and a role operation performance in which the spherical performance part 77b of the role 75 moves up and down is executed. Details of the role operation performance will be described later. After that, the main performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3404). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the added main performance is being executed.

Then, the add-on sub-effect table corresponding to the current number of added games is identified (step S3405). Specifically, if the number of added games set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "50", the high-speed first add-on sub-effect table stored in the high-speed first add-on sub-effect table memory area 133d of the effect side ROM 93 is identified, and if the number of added games set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "100", the high-speed second add-on sub-effect table stored in the high-speed second add-on sub-effect table memory area 133e of the effect side ROM 93 is identified.

After that, it is determined whether the continuous top-up flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3406). As already explained, the continuous top-up flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp a situation in which the top-up win has occurred two or more times in a row with the top-up sub-presentation being uninterrupted. If the continuous top-up flag is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), the top-up sub-presentation table identified in step S3405 is read into the read area 94a (step S3407). As already explained, the top-up sub-presentation table is read into the third layer LY3. The presentation is controlled according to the top-up sub-presentation table, and the top-up sub-presentation including the high-speed gauge increase display is executed on the image display device 63.

On the other hand, if the consecutive addition flag is set to "1" (step S3406: YES), a table rewrite process is executed (step S3408). In the table rewrite process, the value of the blinking display counter 136 in the performance side RAM 94 is first grasped. If the current additional win is the second consecutive additional win, the blinking display counter 136 is set to the number of additional games in the previous additional win. In addition, if the current additional win occurs in succession after two or more consecutive additional wins have occurred, that is, if the current additional win is the third or more consecutive additional win, the blinking display counter 136 is set to the total number of additional games in the consecutive additional wins that occurred before the current additional win. After that, the address information of the display data for blinking the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the grasped total number of additional games is specified. Then, instead of the address information of the display data set for the pointer information of "0", "25", and "50" of the added-on sub-performance table (high-speed first added-on sub-performance table or high-speed second added-on sub-performance table) specified in step S3405, the address information of the specified display data is set. Also, if the table specified in step S3405 is the high-speed first added-on sub-performance table (FIG. 61), instead of the address information of the display data for performing the gauge increase display set to "75", "80", "85", "90", and "95", the address information of the display data for performing the gauge increase display in a manner corresponding to the total number of added games in the added-on wins that occurred consecutively before the current added-on win is set. On the other hand, if the table identified in step S3405 is the high-speed second add-on sub-performance table, instead of the address information of the display data for displaying the gauge increase set to "75", "80", "85", "90", "95", "100", "105", "110", "115" and "120", the address information of the display data for displaying the gauge increase in a manner corresponding to the total number of added games in the consecutive add-on wins that occurred before the current add-on win is set.

Then, the third layer LY3 of the read area 94a is cleared, and the add-on sub-performance table (high-speed first add-on sub-performance table or high-speed second add-on sub-performance table) after the table rewrite process in step S3408 is read into the read area 94a (step S3409). The rewritten add-on sub-performance table is read into the third layer LY3, just as in the case where rewriting is not performed. The execution control of the performance is performed according to the rewritten add-on sub-performance table, and the add-on sub-performance is executed on the image display device 63. Then, the continuous add-on flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3410).

When step S3407 has been processed, or when step S3410 has been processed, the sub-performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3411). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the additional performance is being executed. After that, the additional display standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3412), and the additional performance processing ends. The additional display standby flag is a flag that allows the performance side RAM 94 to know that the process of adding the number of additional games for the current additional win to the display counter 134 is in a standby state until the execution period of the additional performance ends.

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62), if a negative judgment is made in step S3016, it is judged whether or not an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3019). If a positive judgment is made in step S3019, ART end processing is executed (step S3020). In the ART end processing, processing is performed to execute an ART end performance as a performance corresponding to the end of the ART state ST6. The ART end performance is executed in the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. In addition, in the ART end processing (step S3020), numerical information is set in the performance side performance timer counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 so that the performance side MPU 92 can grasp the end timing of the ART end performance. The value of the performance side performance timer counter is updated in step S5705 of the history image management processing (FIG. 95) described later. After that, the ART in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3021), and the non-normal performance control process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3019, a process for updating the number of games is executed (step S3022), and the non-normal presentation control process is terminated. In the process for updating the number of games (step S3022), on the condition that the additional sub-presentation has ended, a process for updating the number of continued games image G18 displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is executed.

Before describing the game count update process (FIG. 66(b)), the flag clear process executed by the presentation side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 66(a). Note that the flag clear process is executed in step S2006 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) when the referenced pointer information has been updated to the final pointer information and repeat information has not been set in the final pointer information.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 in the read area 94a is "2" (step S3501: YES) and the main performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3502: YES), the main performance in progress flag is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the added main performance has ended.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 in the read area 94a is "3" (step S3504: YES) and the sub-performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3505: YES), the sub-performance in progress flag is cleared to "0" (step S3506). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the added sub-performance has ended.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S3507: YES), the reel flag setting process described below is executed (step S3508), and the flag clearing process ends.

Next, the game count update process executed by the presentation side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 66(b). Note that the game count update process is executed in step S3022 of the non-normal presentation control process (FIG. 62).

In the game count update process, it is first determined whether the additional display waiting flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3601). If the additional display waiting flag is set to "1" (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether the sub-presentation in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3602).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3602, it means that the added sub-performance that was being executed has ended. In this case, an addition process is executed for the display counter 134 (step S3603). In the addition process for the display counter 134, the value of the added game number counter 135 in the performance side RAM 94 and the value of the blinking display counter 136 are added to the value of the display counter 134. If the added performance is not occurring consecutively, the added game number counter 135 is set to the number of added games in the added sub-performance that has just ended, and the value of the blinking display counter 136 is set to "0". In this case, in the addition process for the display counter 134 (step S3603), the number of added games in the added sub-performance that has just ended is added to the value of the display counter 134. In addition, if the additional effects occur continuously without interruption, the number of additional games in the currently ended additional sub-effect is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the total number of additional games in the consecutive additional wins that occurred before the last additional win is set in the blinking display counter 136. In this case, in the addition process (step S3603) of the display counter 134, the total number of additional games in all consecutive additional wins is added to the value of the display counter 134.

After that, the process of updating the display of the number of continued games is executed (step S3604). In the process of updating the display of the number of continued games, display data for displaying the image G18 of the number of continued games corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 after the addition process in step S3603 is read from the presentation side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the third presentation area 113d (FIG. 42 (c)) of the display setting area 113. The display control of the image display device 63 is performed based on the display data, and the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition process of the display counter 134 in step S3603. Specifically, if the addition performance has not occurred continuously, the value is updated to the value after the addition of the number of added games in the added sub-performance that has ended this time. Also, if the addition performance has occurred continuously in an uninterrupted manner, the value is updated to the value after the total number of added games in the added wins that occurred continuously.

Then, the value of the additional game number counter 135 in the presentation side RAM 94 and the value of the blinking display counter 136 are cleared to "0" (step S3605), the additional display waiting flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3606), and this game number update process is terminated.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 67, we will explain how the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance are executed in ART state ST6. Figure 67(a) shows the execution period of the add-on main performance, Figure 67(b) shows the execution period of the gauge flashing display in the add-on sub performance, Figure 67(c) shows the execution period of the gauge increase display in the add-on sub performance, Figure 67(d) shows the start timing of the ART base performance and the ART normal performance, Figure 67(e) shows the update timing of the continued game count display, Figure 67(f) shows the timing when the performance side MPU 92 receives an add-on command during ART, and Figure 67(g) shows the timing when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command.

First, we will explain the case where the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command after the added main performance and added sub performance have ended.

When the performance side MPU92 receives an ART-in-ART add-on command at timing t1 in ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 67(f), the main add-on performance starts at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 67(a), and the flashing gauge display in the add-on sub-performance starts, as shown in FIG. 67(b).

After that, when the added main performance ends at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 67(a), the flashing gauge display ends at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 67(b), and the gauge enlargement display in the added sub-performance begins as shown in FIG. 67(c). Because the video display of the added main performance was executed to the end without being terminated midway, the gauge enlargement display becomes a high-speed display in which the number and color of unit gauge images G22 in the gauge display section G19a are updated at 200 millisecond intervals.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(c), when the gauge increase display in the additional sub-effect ends at the timing of t3, the number of additional games in the additional win that triggered the ended additional sub-effect is added to the value of the display counter 134. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 at the timing of t3 is updated to the value after the addition of the number of additional games.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(g), when the presentation side MPU 92 receives a game start command at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 67(d), a new ART base presentation and ART normal presentation are started at the timing of t4, and the value of the display counter 134 is decremented by 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 at the timing of t4 is updated to the value after decrementing by 1.

As already explained, if the video display of the added main performance is executed to the end without being terminated midway, the number of added games will be suggested at the end of the video display. In this case, the player will see the gauge increase display while knowing the number of added games. Because the gauge increase display is displayed at high speed, the period during which the ART base performance and ART normal performance, which are started based on the reception of a game start command, and the gauge increase display are executed in parallel is short, allowing the player's interest to be quickly returned to the ART normal performance.

Next, we will explain the case where the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command while the added main performance is being executed, and then receives an added during ART command while the gauge increase display is being executed.

At timing t5 in ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 67(f), when the performance side MPU92 receives an ART-in-ART add-on command, the add-on main performance starts at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 67(a), and the flashing gauge display in the add-on sub-performance starts as shown in FIG. 67(b).

After that, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command at the timing of t6, which is a timing before the end of the execution period of the added main performance (specifically, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 67(g), the added main performance that was being executed halfway at the timing of t6 ends as shown in FIG. 67(a). At the timing of t6, instead of the high-speed first added sub-performance table that was read out to the third layer LY3, the low-speed first added performance table is read out to the third layer LY3. As already explained, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is carried over without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the gauge flashing display in the added sub-performance continues. Also, as shown in FIG. 67(d), at the timing of t6, the ART base performance and the ART normal performance start, and the process of decrementing the value of the display counter 134 by 1 is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t6, the value of the number of games to be continued displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after subtracting 1.

In this way, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command during the execution of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance, the main performance that was being executed ends, and the ART base performance and the ART normal performance start based on the reception of the game start command. In addition, the low-speed first top-up sub performance table is read out instead of the high-speed first top-up sub performance table, so that the gauge increase display in the top-up sub performance is switched from a high-speed display to a low-speed display. This makes it possible to start the ART base performance and the ART normal performance without causing a delay based on the reception of the game start command, while making it possible to confirm not only the result of the top-up win but also the top-up sub performance corresponding to the top-up win. Since the video display of the top-up main performance ends midway without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display starts without suggesting the number of top-up games. In this case, the player watches the gauge increase display while hoping that the number and color update mode of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a will correspond to the number of top-up games of "100". By switching the gauge growth display from a high speed to a low speed, the display period for the highly interesting gauge growth display can be extended, making the game more entertaining.

After that, at timing t7, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the flashing gauge display in the added sub-performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 67(c), the gauge increase display in the added sub-performance begins. As a result, the image display device 63 is in a state where the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, and the gauge increase display in the added sub-performance are being executed simultaneously. As already explained, if the video display of the added main performance ends midway without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display in the added sub-performance will be a slow display in which the number and color of unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are updated at 400 millisecond intervals.

After that, when the performance side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command at the timing of t8, which is the timing before the end of the execution period of the gauge increase display, as shown in FIG. 67(f), the gauge increase display that was being executed halfway at the timing of t8 ends as shown in FIG. 67(c). Also, as shown in FIG. 67(a) and FIG. 67(b), the main add-on performance corresponding to the ART add-on command received this time at the timing of t8 and the flashing gauge display in the add-on sub performance start. As a result, the image display device 63 is in a state where the base performance for ART, the normal performance for ART, the main add-on performance, and the flashing gauge display in the add-on sub performance are being executed simultaneously. In the flashing gauge display, the flashing gauge display is performed in a manner corresponding to the total number of added games in the consecutive add-on wins that occurred before the current add-on win occurred. Therefore, it is possible to know the total number of added games in the consecutive added wins that occurred before the current added win occurred based on the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 that are displayed flashing, and it is possible to start the added main performance and added sub performance based on the received ART added command without any delay after receiving the ART added command.

After that, at the timing of t9, the added main performance ends as shown in FIG. 67(a), and the flashing gauge display in the added sub-performance ends as shown in FIG. 67(b). Then, at the timing of t9, the gauge enlargement display in the added sub-performance begins as shown in FIG. 67(c). Because the video display of the added main performance was executed to the end without being terminated midway, the gauge enlargement display becomes a high-speed display in which the number and color of unit gauge images G22 in the gauge display section G19a are updated at 200 millisecond intervals.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(c), at the timing of t10, the gauge increase display in the additional sub-performance ends, and a process is performed to add the total number of additional games for the two consecutive additional wins to the display counter 134. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing of t10, the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition of the total number of additional games.

As described above, the master MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the master RAM 74 at the start of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 in the middle of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance. If the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command during the execution of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance, the top-up main performance that was being executed ends, and the ART base performance and the ART normal performance start based on the reception of the game start command. In addition, the gauge increase display in the top-up sub performance is switched from a high-speed display to a low-speed display, and the display of the top-up sub performance continues. This makes it possible to start the ART base performance and the ART normal performance without delay based on the reception of the game start command, while being able to check not only the result of the top-up win but also the top-up sub performance corresponding to the top-up win. After the ART base performance and ART normal performance are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the added sub performance continues to be executed in parallel with these performances, so that the entire added sub performance can be displayed even to players who have skipped the added main performance and rushed ahead. This can increase the interest of the game.

The number of games to be added is suggested by the video display of the main performance being executed to the end without being terminated halfway. When the main performance is executed to the end and the number of games to be added is suggested, the gauge increase display is displayed at high speed. This shortens the execution period of the gauge increase display that is performed after the number of games to be added is suggested, and the player's interest can be shifted to the next game sooner. On the other hand, when the video display of the main performance is terminated halfway without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display is displayed at low speed. When the gauge increase display is started without the number of games to be added being suggested, the player watches the gauge increase display while hoping that the number and color update mode of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a will correspond to the number of games to be "100". By switching the gauge increase display from high speed to low speed, the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, can be extended, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the performance side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command while an add-on sub performance is being executed, the executed add-on sub performance ends, and a new add-on main performance and add-on sub performance based on the reception of the ART add-on command are started. If the configuration is such that the start of the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance based on the reception of the ART add-on command is awaited until the execution of the executed add-on sub performance ends, a delay occurs between the reception of the ART add-on command and the start of the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance. In this configuration, if add-on wins occur consecutively and delays accumulate, there is a risk that a situation will occur in which the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance corresponding to the add-on win cannot be started during the game in which the add-on win occurred. In contrast, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance are started without delay based on the reception of the ART add-on command. This makes it possible to eliminate the possibility of a situation occurring in which the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance corresponding to the add-on win cannot be started during the game in which the add-on win occurred, even if add-on wins occur consecutively.

When the production side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command while an add-on sub-performance is being executed, the add-on sub-performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the total number of add-on games that have occurred in succession before the current add-on win. Therefore, when an ART add-on command is received, the gauge display unit G19a flashes the unit gauge image G22 of the final number and color in the executed add-on sub-performance. This allows the add-on sub-performance to have continuity, and also gives a special feeling that the add-on wins are occurring consecutively. This increases the interest in the game. In addition, the final state of the add-on sub-performance that was being executed can be displayed to the player who was watching the executed add-on sub-performance. In this way, in a configuration in which the executed add-on sub-performance is terminated and the added main performance and the added sub-performance are started without delay based on the reception of an ART add-on command, the final state of the added sub-performance can be displayed to the player who was watching the executed add-on sub-performance.

When consecutive additional wins occur without interruption in the additional sub-effects, the address information for the display data set in the additional sub-effect table is replaced with address information for the display data for flashing the gauge and increasing the gauge in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games for the consecutive additional wins that occurred before the current additional win occurred. This makes it possible to reduce the number of additional sub-effect tables that are pre-stored in the effect side ROM 93, and reduces the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the additional sub-effect tables.

If no additional wins occur consecutively, the number of games to be added image G18 displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated when the additional game sub-performance ends. By making it impossible to know the number of games to be added based on the number of games to be added image G18 until the additional game sub-performance ends, interest in the additional game main performance that suggests the number of games to be added and the additional game sub-performance that shows the number of games to be added can be increased.

When consecutive additional wins occur without interruption in the additional win sub-effects, the display of the number of continued games is updated at the end of the additional win sub-effect of the last additional win in the consecutive additional wins. By not updating the number of continued games image G18 until the additional win sub-effect of the last additional win ends, interest in the additional main effect suggesting the number of added games and the additional sub-effect showing the number of added games can be increased. Also, by setting the number of added games added at one time to the display counter 134 in the effect side RAM 94 to a large value, it is possible to give the impression that the number of continued games in ART state ST6 has increased significantly due to the consecutive additional wins.

In the ART state ST6, the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, the added main performance, and the added sub performance are executed. There are multiple types of each of these performances, and the combinations of these performances are enormous. These performances are executed by reading out the ART base performance table, the ART normal performance table, the added main performance table, and the added sub performance table into different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to 3rd layer LY3) in the read area 94a, and executing and controlling the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables. As a result, compared to a configuration in which performance tables for all combinations of these performances are stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, it is possible to increase the variety of combinations of these performances while suppressing the increase in the data capacity of the performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93. In addition, when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART-in-ART add-on command while the ART base performance and ART normal performance are being executed, the processing for starting the add-on main performance and add-on sub performance while continuing the currently executed ART base performance and ART normal performance has been simplified.

There are four types of add-on main performance tables that are read out when an add-on win occurs in which the number of add-on games is "50", and there are two types of add-on sub-performance tables (the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table and the low-speed first add-on sub-performance table). In addition, there are four types of add-on main performance tables that are read out when an add-on win occurs in which the number of add-on games is "100", and there are two types of add-on sub-performance tables (the high-speed second add-on sub-performance table and the low-speed second add-on sub-performance table). The performance side ROM 93 stores an added main performance table and an added sub performance table, and the added main performance and the added sub performance are executed according to these performance tables read into different layers LYn (n = 2, 3) of the read area 94a. This configuration reduces the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance tables for executing the added main performance and the added sub performance, compared to a configuration in which one performance table containing performance data for executing the added main performance and performance data for executing the added sub performance is stored in the performance side ROM 93.

<Configuration for executing role object movement performance>
Next, a configuration for executing the role action performance will be described. In the slot machine 10, origin detection is performed to determine whether or not the spherical performance part 77b (FIG. 1) of the role 75 is staying at the origin, with one condition being that the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72. If it is determined in the origin detection that the spherical performance part 77b is not staying at the origin, a correction operation is performed to return the spherical performance part 77b to the origin. The origin of the spherical performance part 77b in the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus state transitioned from the normal game state ST1, and the preparation state ST5 is the initial position detected by the initial position sensor 75a (FIG. 1). On the other hand, the origin of the spherical performance part 77b in the ART state ST6 and the bonus state transitioned from the ART state ST6 is the displacement position detected by the displacement position sensor 75b (FIG. 1).

As described above, the reel action effects are performed in the bonus announcement effect, the re-variation effect, and the added main effect. The reel action effects are also performed in each game in the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4. In these reel action effects, the spherical effect portion 77b (Figure 1) of the reel 75 moves up and down.

In the bonus announcement performance, the reel operation performance starts with the bonus announcement image G13 (Figure 39 (g)) displayed on the image display device 63. In the re-variation performance, the reel operation performance starts after the re-variation of the middle symbol starts on the image display device 63. In the reel operation performance in the bonus announcement performance and the re-variation performance, the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 staying in the initial position moves downward for one second and stops for one second at an intermediate position close to the displacement position. After that, the spherical performance part 77b moves upward for one second and returns to the initial position. The reel operation performance in the bonus announcement performance ends when the execution period of the bonus announcement performance ends, and the reel operation performance in the re-variation performance ends when the execution period of the re-variation performance ends.

In the main performance of the added-on effect, the reel action performance starts when the execution period of the main performance of the added-on effect is 1 second remaining. In the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4), the reel action performance starts based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving a game start command from the main side MPU 72. In the reel action performance in the bonus state transitioned from the main performance of the added-on effect and the ART state ST6, the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 staying at the displacement position moves upward for 0.5 seconds and stops at a midway position lower than the initial position for 0.5 seconds. After that, the spherical performance part 77b moves downward for 0.5 seconds and returns to the displacement position. In the bonus state transitioned from the normal game state ST1, the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 staying at the initial position moves downward for 0.5 seconds and stops at a midway position higher than the displacement position for 0.5 seconds. After that, the spherical performance part 77b moves upward for 0.5 seconds and returns to its initial position.

In the bonus announcement and re-change performances, the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is set, and the performance side MPU 92 does not receive a game start command until the freeze counter value becomes "0". Therefore, when a reel action performance is executed in the bonus announcement and re-change performances, the performance side MPU 92 does not receive a game start command during the execution of the reel action performance. Also, in the bonus state, the reel action performance starts at the start of the game. The execution period of the reel action performance in the bonus state is 1.5 seconds, which is shorter than the wait time (specifically, 4.1 seconds) during which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are awaited to start rotating from the time when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R started rotating in the previous game until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can start rotating next time. Therefore, even when a reel action performance is executed in the bonus state, the performance side MPU 92 does not receive a game start command during the execution of the reel action performance.

On the other hand, in the added main performance and added sub performance in the ART state ST6, the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is not set. For this reason, it is possible that the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command in the middle of the execution of the reel operation performance that started at the end of the added main performance (when there is 1 second left in the execution period of the added main performance). In this case, the reel operation performance that was being executed ends midway based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving the game start command. Then, the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 returns to the origin (specifically, the displacement position). As already explained, if the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command before the reel operation performance starts in the added main performance, the added main performance ends. In this case, the reel operation performance is canceled.

As shown in FIG. 41B, the presentation-side RAM 94 is provided with a reel management area 94d in which management information for the reel 75 is set. The reel management area 94d is provided with a correction execution counter 141 that allows the presentation-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation is performed. Each time it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin in the origin detection, the correction operation of the reel 75 is performed and "1" is added to the value of the correction execution counter 141. However, even if it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b is not at the origin in the origin detection performed by the presentation-side MPU 92 receiving a game start command during the execution of the reel operation performance, "1" is not added to the value of the correction execution counter 141. If it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", the origin detection and the correction operation are not performed. In this case, the correction operation standby state is set. The correction operation standby state is released when a predetermined period (specifically, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the correction operation standby state was started, when the number of games played since the correction operation standby state was started reaches a predetermined number (specifically, 30 times), when the performance side MPU 92 receives a role initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or when the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command from the main side MPU 72 in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established is set. As already explained, the role initialization command is sent in step S102 of the main processing (FIG. 11) when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started. When the correction operation standby state is released, a correction operation is performed to return the role 75 to the origin. The correction operation performed when the correction operation standby state is released is not counted by the correction execution counter 141.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the role management area 94d is provided with a standby execution counter 142 that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation standby state has been set, a standby time counter 143 that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the time that has elapsed since the start of the correction operation standby state, and a standby game number counter 144 that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games that have been executed since the start of the correction operation standby state. The value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1 each time the correction operation standby state is set.

When the value of the standby execution counter 142 and the correction execution counter 141 is "3", if it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin in the origin detection performed, the reel is set to a reel error state, provided that the origin detection is not performed during the reel operation performance. In the reel error state, as in the correction operation standby state, the origin detection and correction operation are not performed. The reel error state is released when the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command from the main side MPU 72 containing information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, or when the performance side MPU 92 receives a reel initialization command from the main side MPU 72. When the reel error state is released, a correction operation is performed to return the spherical performance part 77b to the origin. The correction operation performed when the reel error state is released is not counted in the correction execution counter 141.

Next, the reel management process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 68. Note that the reel management process is executed by the production side MPU 92 as an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

In the reel management process, the reel initialization process is first executed (step S3701). Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the reel initialization process.

In the reel initialization process, it is first determined whether a reel initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3801). As already explained, the reel initialization command is sent to the performance MPU 92 in step S102 of the main process (Figure 11) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 has started.

If a reel initialization command is received (step S3801: YES), the reel initialization process is executed (step S3802). In the reel initialization process, the values of various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (reel initialization flag, initialization end flag, reel error flag, error release flag, correction operation standby flag, standby release flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, reel operation flag, origin displacement flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag, and return operation in progress flag) provided in the reel management area 94d (FIG. 41 (b)) of the performance side RAM 94 are cleared to "0". As a result, if a reel error state was present before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 was cut off, the reel error state is released, and if a correction operation standby state was present before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 was cut off, the correction operation standby state is released. In addition, in the initial setting process for the reel (step S3802), the 11th layer LY11 in the read area 94a is cleared. This causes the read area 94a to enter a state in which the drive table for executing drive control of the reel 75 has not been read out.

Then, it is determined whether the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3803). If the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3803: YES), the spherical performance unit 77b is already in the initial position, so the reel initialization process ends without performing the process for starting the return of the reel 75 to its initial position (steps S3804 to S3805).

On the other hand, if the initial position sensor 75a is not ON (step S3803: NO), a process (steps S3804 to S3805) is executed to start the return to the initial position for returning the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 to the initial position. Specifically, the reel initialization table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the 11th layer LY11 in the read area 94a (step S3804). In the reel initialization table, numerical information from "0" to "60" is arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and the first drive data for moving the spherical performance part 77b to the initial position side (upward) is set for all the pointer information. The pointer information of the reel initialization table read to the 11th layer LY11 is updated in step S2014 of the pointer update process (Figure 48). As already explained, the update period of the pointer information is 40 milliseconds. Each time the pointer information in the reel initialization table is updated, the first drive data is output to the reel driver 78 (FIG. 1), and the spherical performance unit 77b moves toward the initial position. The number of times the first drive data is required to move the spherical performance unit 77b, which is staying at the displacement position farthest from the initial position, to the initial position is 30 times. In contrast, the reel initialization table is set with 60 times of first drive data, which exceeds the number of times required to return the spherical performance unit 77b, which is staying at the displacement position, to the initial position. Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b is temporarily hindered during the return of the spherical performance unit 77b to its initial position, the possibility that the spherical performance unit 77b cannot return to its initial position and a reel error state occurs is reduced. The time required for the initial position return is a maximum of 2.4 seconds. As already explained, if the spherical performance unit 77b is in a state of staying at the initial position, the output of the first drive data thereafter is canceled.

After reading the reel initialization table in step S3804, the reel initialization flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3805), and the reel initialization process is terminated. The reel initialization flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the reel 75 is being initialized.

If it is determined in step S3801 that the reel initialization command has not been received, it is determined whether the reel initialization flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3806). If the reel initialization flag is set to "1" (step S3806: YES), it is determined whether the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3807). If the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3807: YES), the return of the reel 75 to its initial position is completed, so the 11th layer LY11 from which the reel initialization table is read in the read area 94a is cleared (step S3808). As a result, the first drive data set in the reel initialization table is no longer output. After that, the reel initialization flag is cleared to "0" (step S3809), and this reel initialization process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3807 that the initial position sensor 75a is not ON, it is determined whether the initialization end flag provided in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3810). The initialization end flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the pointer information in the reel initialization table read out to the 11th layer LY11 has been updated to the final pointer information. The initialization end flag is set to "1" in step S4602 of the reel flag setting process (Figure 77) described later.

If the initialization end flag is set to "1" (step S3810: YES), this means that the spherical performance section 77b of the reel 75 has not returned to its initial position even though the first drive data has been output 60 times, so processing is performed to set the reel error state (processing of steps S3811 to S3814). Specifically, the reel initialization in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3811), and the initialization end flag in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3812).

Then, the reel error flag provided in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3813). The reel error flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that a reel error state has occurred. By setting the reel error flag to "1", the process of newly reading out the drive table of the reel 75 into the readout area 94a is prohibited.

Then, the notification setting process for the reel error state is executed (step S3814), and the reel initialization process is terminated. In the notification setting process, a reel error notification table for executing the reel error notification is read from the production side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. The reel error notification table is read to the 9th layer LY9 of the read area 94a. In the reel error notification table, address information and setting destination information of the display data for executing a reel error display indicating that the reel error state is in the image display device 63, sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a reel error notification sound that notifies that the reel error state is in the reel error state is output, and light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61 in a manner that notifies that the reel error state is in the reel error state are set. The setting destination information of the display data for executing the reel error display is information that specifies the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of notifications according to the reel error notification table read into the ninth layer LY9, and the reel error notification is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

As described above, if the spherical performance unit 77b does not return to its initial position even though the first drive data has been output 60 times to the performance unit drive unit 78 according to the performance unit initialization table, the performance unit is set to a performance unit error state without going through a correction operation standby state. This reduces the possibility that the manager of the amusement hall will overlook the fact that the spherical performance unit 77b has not returned to its initial position even though the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 has started.

Returning to the explanation of the reel management process (Figure 68), after executing the reel initialization process in step S3701, it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3702), and if a game start command has been received (step S3702: YES), it is determined whether or not the correction operation completion flag provided in the reel management area 94d has been set to "1" (step S3703). The correction operation completion flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the correction operation of the reel 75 has been completed. The correction operation completion flag is set to "1" when the correction operation of the reel 75 has been completed.

If the correction operation completion flag is set to "1" (step S3703: YES), the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S3704). In this way, the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" when a game start command is received. The production side MPU 92 does not execute a reel operation performance in which the spherical production unit 77b operates when the correction operation completion flag is set to "1". Therefore, if the correction operation of the reel 75 is completed in the middle of a game and the correction operation completion flag is set to "1", the reel operation performance will not be executed until the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" at the start of the next game.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3703, or if the processing of step S3704 is performed, it is judged whether or not the reel error flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3705). If the reel error flag is set to "1" (step S3705: YES), it is not the timing to perform the correction operation of the reel 75 and the reel operation performance, so the processing proceeds to step S3715 without executing the processing of steps S3706 to S3714.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3705 that the reel error flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the return operation in progress flag provided in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3706). The return operation in progress flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the return operation of the reel 75 is being performed to move the spherical performance part 77b to the changed origin based on the change in the origin of the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75. If the return operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S3706: YES), the spherical performance part 77b can be returned to the changed origin without performing a correction operation of the reel 75, so proceed to step S3715 without performing a correction operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3706, it is judged whether or not the correction operation standby flag provided in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3707). The correction operation standby flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the correction operation standby state is in progress. If the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S3707: YES), the value of the standby game number counter 144 provided in the reel management area 94d is decremented by 1 (step S3708), and it is judged whether or not the value of the standby game number counter 144 after the decrement has become "0" (step S3709). As already explained, the standby game number counter 144 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to know the number of games that have been played since the start of the standby state for the correction operation.

When the value of the waiting game number counter 144 becomes "0" (step S3709: YES), a process for canceling the correction operation waiting state (processing of steps S3710 to S3712) is executed. Specifically, the correction operation waiting flag and the waiting timing counter 143 are cleared to "0" (step S3710), and a correction operation waiting state notification cancel process is executed (step S3711). In the notification cancel process, a process for canceling the state in which the correction operation waiting state is being notified is executed. Notification of the correction operation waiting state is started by reading out a notification table for the correction operation waiting state into the ninth layer LY9 of the read area 94a. The notification table is read out by executing a notification setting process for the correction operation waiting state in step S4207 of the waiting setting process (FIG. 73 (a)) described later. In the notification table for the correction operation standby state, address information and setting destination information of display data for performing a correction operation standby display on the image display device 63 indicating that the correction operation is in standby, and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a standby state notification sound for notifying that the correction operation is in standby are set. The setting destination information of the display data for performing the correction operation standby display is information for specifying the first notification area 113g (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113. The output of the standby state notification sound is terminated after being executed for a predetermined time (specifically, one second). In addition, at the timing when the output of the standby state notification sound is terminated, the pointer information of the reference target in the notification table for the correction operation standby state is updated to the final pointer, and the ninth layer LY9 is cleared. For this reason, at the timing when the notification release process of the correction operation standby state is executed in step S3711, the notification table for the correction operation standby state does not remain in the ninth layer LY9. In the correction operation standby state notification cancellation process in step S3711, the first notification area 113g in which display data for performing the correction operation standby display is set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. This ends the correction operation standby display being performed on the image display device 63.

Then, the standby release flag provided in the role management area 94d of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3712). The standby release flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that an opportunity to release the correction operation standby state has occurred. By setting the standby release flag to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) described below, and processing for ending the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4104 to S4108) is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3707, origin detection is performed to judge whether the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin (step S3713). The role management area 94d is provided with an origin displacement flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin is set to the displacement position. If the value of the origin displacement flag is "0", it means that the origin is set to the initial position, and if the value of the origin displacement flag is "1", it means that the origin is set to the displacement position. In step S3713, if the value of the origin displacement flag is "0", it is judged that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin if the initial position sensor 75a is ON, and it is judged that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin if the initial position sensor 75a is OFF. Also, in step S3713, if the value of the origin displacement flag is "1", it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin if the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, and it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin if the displacement position sensor 75b is OFF.

When the processing of step S3712 is executed, or when it is determined in step S3713 that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin, a correction operation start setting process is executed (step S3714). In the correction operation start setting process, processing is performed to execute a correction operation that returns the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin. Details of the correction operation start setting process (step S3714) will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3702, a positive judgment is made in step S3705, a positive judgment is made in step S3706, a negative judgment is made in step S3709, a positive judgment is made in step S3713, or the processing of step S3714 is executed, an origin setting process is executed to change the origin of the reel 75 based on a command received from the main MPU 72 (step S3715). After that, a standby management process is executed to manage the correction operation standby state (step S3716), and this reel management process is terminated. Details of the origin setting process in step S3715 (Figure 70) and the standby management process in step S3716 (Figure 73 (b)) will be described later.

As described above, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72, it executes origin detection to determine whether the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin, provided that it is not in any of the states of a reel error state, a correction operation standby state, and a state in which a return to the origin is being performed due to a change in the origin of the spherical performance unit 77b, and executes a correction operation to return the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin if the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin. In a configuration in which the spherical performance unit 77b can be moved by touching it, a trigger for executing a correction operation occurs every time a game start command is received, so that if a position shift occurs in the spherical performance unit 77b, the spherical performance unit 77b can be returned to the origin early. As described above, even if origin detection is performed during the execution of the reel operation performance and it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin, a correction operation is executed, but in this case, the correction operation is not counted by the correction execution counter 141.

Next, the origin setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 70. The origin setting process is executed in step S3715 of the reel management process (FIG. 68).

In the origin setting process, when an ART start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901: YES), the origin displacement flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3902). As a result, when the game state transitions to the ART state ST6, the origin of the reel 75 is set to the displacement position.

After that, if neither the reel error flag nor the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3903: NO), it is determined whether the correction operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3904). The correction operation in progress flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the reel 75 is in a correction operation. The correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" in step S4105 of the correction operation start setting process (Figure 72) described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3904, the displacement position drive table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a (step S3905). The displacement position drive table is read to the 11th layer LY11. In the displacement position drive table, numerical information from "0" to "35" is arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and second drive data for moving the spherical performance unit 77b downward toward the displacement position is set for all of the pointer information. The number of times the second drive data is output that is required to move the spherical performance unit 77b staying at the initial position farthest from the displacement position to the displacement position is "30", and 35 pieces of second drive data, which is more than "30", are set in the displacement position drive table. Therefore, by executing the drive control of the role 75 according to the displacement position drive table read into the read area 94a, it is possible to move the spherical performance unit 77b to the displacement position even if the spherical performance unit 77b stays at the initial position farthest from the origin. As already explained, the second drive data is output on the condition that the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state. Therefore, when the drive control of the gadget 75 is performed according to the displacement position drive table, the spherical performance unit 77b moves to the displacement position and stops. If the second drive data is set for the remaining pointer information in the displacement position drive table, the output of the second drive data is canceled based on the displacement position sensor 75b being in the ON state. In this case, the reference target pointer information is updated at 40 millisecond intervals without the output of the second drive data. Then, after the reference target pointer information has been updated to the final pointer, the 11th layer LY11 from which the displacement position drive table was read is cleared.

After reading out the displacement position drive table in step S3905, the return operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3906), and the origin setting process is terminated. This allows the production side MPU 92 to understand that the return operation of the reel 75 based on the change in the origin is being performed.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3904, that is, if it is judged that the correction operation of the reel 75 is being performed, the second origin standby flag provided in the reel management area 94d of the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3907), and this origin setting process is terminated. The second origin standby flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to a displacement position and the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin (displacement position) is on hold. If the return of the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin is on hold because the correction operation of the reel 75 is being performed, the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin is started after the correction operation is completed, based on the fact that the second origin standby flag is set to "1".

If a negative judgment is made in step S3901, it is judged whether or not an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3908). If an ART end command has been received (step S3908: YES), the origin displacement flag in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3909). As a result, when the ART state ST6 ends, the origin of the reel 75 is set to the initial position.

Then, it is determined whether the reel error flag or the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3910). If a negative determination is made in step S3910, this means that the reel error state and the correction operation standby state are not in effect, so it is determined whether the correction operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3911).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3911, the initial position drive table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a (step S3912). The initial position drive table is read to the 11th layer LY11. In the initial position drive table, numerical information from "0" to "35" is arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and the first drive data for moving the spherical performance unit 77b upward toward the initial position is set for all of the pointer information. As already explained, the number of times the first drive data is output that is required to move the spherical performance unit 77b that is staying at the displacement position farthest from the initial position to the initial position is "30", and 35 pieces of first drive data, which is more than "30", are set in the initial position drive table. Therefore, by executing the drive control of the role 75 according to the initial position drive table read to the read area 94a, it is possible to move the spherical performance unit 77b to the initial position even if the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the displacement position farthest from the origin. As already explained, the first drive data is output on the condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. Therefore, when the drive control of the reel 75 is performed according to the initial position drive table, the spherical performance unit 77b moves to the initial position and stops. When the first drive data is set for the remaining pointer information in the initial position drive table, the output of the first drive data is canceled based on the initial position sensor 75a being in the ON state. In this case, the referenced pointer information is updated at 40 millisecond intervals without the output of the first drive data. Then, after the referenced pointer information has been updated to the final pointer, the 11th layer LY11 from which the initial position drive table was read is cleared.

After reading out the initial position drive table in step S3912, the return operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3913), and the origin setting process ends. This allows the production side MPU 92 to understand that the return operation of the reel 75 based on the change in the origin is being performed.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3911, that is, if it is judged that the correction operation of the reel 75 is being performed, the first origin standby flag provided in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3914), and this origin setting process is terminated. The first origin standby flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to the initial position and the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin (initial position) is on hold. If the return of the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin is on hold because the correction operation of the reel 75 is being performed, the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin is started after the correction operation is completed, based on the fact that the first origin standby flag is set to "1".

As described above, the origin of the reel 75 is set to the displaced position when the ART state ST6 is started, and is set to the initial position when the ART state ST6 is ended. If the origin of the reel 75 is changed in a state other than the reel error state, the correction operation standby state, and the state in which the correction operation of the reel 75 is being performed, the spherical performance unit 77b moves to the changed origin. This allows the spherical performance unit 77b to be moved to the changed origin at an early timing before the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command. On the other hand, if the origin of the reel 75 is changed in a state in which the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is in effect, the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin is executed at the timing when the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released. In addition, if the origin of the reel 75 is changed while the reel 75 is performing a correction operation, the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin is put on hold, and the spherical performance unit 77b moves to the changed origin when the correction operation of the reel 75 that was being performed ends.

Next, the origin return process for the reel performed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 71. The origin return process for the reel is executed in step S2008 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) when the reference target pointer information in the target layer is updated to the final pointer and the target layer is cleared. As already explained, the origin return process for the reel (step S2008) in the pointer update process (FIG. 48) is executed when the reference pointer information of the data table read into the target layer is the final pointer information (step S2003: YES) and repeat information is not set for the final pointer information (step S2004: NO), i.e., when the reference target pointer information is updated to the final pointer information and the data table is cleared.

In the origin return process for the reel, first, it is determined whether the value of the target layer counter 114 in the read area 94a is "11" (step S4001). If a positive determination is made in step S4001, that is, when the pointer information of the reference target in the drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11 is updated to the final pointer information and the 11th layer LY11 is cleared, it is determined whether the first origin standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4002). If a positive determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether the readout state is available (step S4003). In step S4003, if "1" is not set in any of the reel error flag, correction operation standby flag, reel initialization flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, return operation in progress flag, and reel operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d, it is determined that the drive table is in a readable state in which it can be read out to the 11th layer LY11. The reel operation flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that a reel operation performance is being performed. The reel operation flag is set to "1" in step S4405 of the reel drive setting process (Figure 76 (a)) described later.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the data is in a readable state, the first origin standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4004), and it is determined whether the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin (step S4005). As already explained, the first origin standby flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to the initial position and that the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin (initial position) is on hold. In step S4005, if the initial position sensor 75a is ON, it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin, and if the initial position sensor 75a is OFF, it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin.

If the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin (step S4005: NO), the initial position drive table already described is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a (step S4006). The initial position drive table is read to the 11th layer LY11. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the reel 75 according to the initial position drive table read to the read area 94a, causing the spherical performance unit 77b to move to the initial position, which is the new origin.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4002, it is judged whether or not the second origin standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4007). If the second origin standby flag is set to "1" (step S4007: YES), it is judged whether or not it is in a readable state (step S4008). In step S4008, as in the case of step S4003, if none of the reel error flag, correction operation standby flag, reel initialization flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, return operation in progress flag, and reel operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1", it is judged that the drive table is in a readable state in which it can be read.

If it is determined in step S4008 that the data is in a readable state, the second origin waiting flag is cleared to "0" (step S4009), and it is determined whether the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin (step S4010). As already explained, the second origin waiting flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to the displacement position and the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin (displacement position) is on hold. In step S4010, if the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin, and if the displacement position sensor 75b is OFF, it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin. If the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4010: NO), the already explained displacement position drive table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a (step S4011). The displacement position drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the reel 75 according to the read displacement position drive table, so that the spherical performance part 77b moves to the displacement position that is the new origin.

When the processing of step S4006 has been executed, or when the processing of step S4011 has been executed, the return operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4012), and the reel origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, if the origin of the reel 75 is changed and the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin is put on hold while the initialization of the reel 75 is being performed, a correction operation is being performed, or a reel operation performance is being performed, the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin is started at the timing when the initialization of the reel 75, the correction operation, or the reel operation performance that was being performed ends. This makes it possible to start the movement of the spherical performance unit 77b to the changed origin early without waiting for the performance side MPU 92 to receive a game start command.

Next, the start setting process of the correction operation executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 72. The start setting process of the correction operation is executed in step S3714 of the reel management process (FIG. 68) and in step S4706 of the reel setting process when a bonus is won (FIG. 78), which will be described later.

In the correction operation start setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the reel management area 94d is "3" (step S4101). If the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (step S4101: YES), it is determined whether the error release flag or the standby release flag provided in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4102). The error release flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that an opportunity to release the reel error state has occurred. As already explained, the standby release flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that an opportunity to release the correction operation standby state has occurred. If a negative judgment is made in step S4102, it is determined whether the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4103).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4101, if a positive judgment is made in step S4102, or if a positive judgment is made in step S4103, a read process for the correction operation is executed (step S4104). In this read process, after clearing the 11th layer LY11 in the read area 94a, the drive table corresponding to the current origin among the initial position drive table and the displacement position drive table already described is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. Specifically, if the origin displacement flag in the role management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, the initial position drive table is read to the 11th layer LY11, and if the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displacement position, the displacement position drive table is read to the 11th layer LY11. According to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read into the 11th layer LY11, the performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the reel 75, causing the spherical performance unit 77b to move to the origin (initial position or displacement position). The 11th layer LY11 is cleared before the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table is read out. Therefore, if it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin in the origin detection performed during the performance of the reel operation performance, the reel operation performance that was being performed is terminated midway, and the correction operation of the reel 75 is started.

Then, the correction operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4105). This allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the reel 75 is in the correction operation. Then, if the standby release flag is set to "1" (step S4106: YES), that is, if the correction operation of the reel 75 is started based on the occurrence of an opportunity to release the correction operation standby state, the first clear process of the reel management information is executed (step S4107). In the first clear process of the reel management information, the standby release flag, the correction operation standby flag, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the reel management area 94d are cleared to "0". The correction operation standby state is released by clearing the correction operation standby flag to "0". In addition, the number of times the correction operation of the reel 75 has been executed, which was counted by the production side MPU 92, is reset by clearing the value of the correction execution counter 141 to "0". On the other hand, in the first clearing process of the reel management information (step S4107), the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the reel management area 94d is not cleared to "0."

After that, a process for canceling the notification of the correction operation standby state is executed (step S4108), and the process for setting the start of this correction operation is terminated. In step S4108, a process similar to the process for canceling the notification of the correction operation standby state in step S3711 of the role management process (FIG. 68) already described is executed. In the process for canceling the notification of the correction operation standby state in step S4108, specifically, the first notification area 113g in which display data for performing the correction operation standby display is set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. This ends the correction operation standby display executed in the image display device 63.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S4106, it is judged whether the error release flag is set to "1" (step S4109). If the error release flag is set to "1" (step S4109: YES), a second clear process of the reel management information is executed (step S4110). In the second clear process of the reel management information, the values of the various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (specifically, the reel initialization flag, the initialization end flag, the reel error flag, the error release flag, the correction operation standby flag, the standby release flag, the correction operation completion flag, the reel operation flag, the first origin standby flag, the second origin standby flag, and the return operation flag) except for the correction operation flag and the origin displacement flag in the reel management area 94d are cleared to "0". As a result, the management information of the reel 75 except for the information on the correction operation flag and the origin displacement flag is cleared. By executing the second clear process (step S4110) of the reel management information, the value of the reel error flag is cleared to "0" and the reel error state is released. In addition, the number of times the correction operation standby state was set, which was counted by the standby execution counter 142, is cleared to "0," and the number of times the correction operation of the reel 75 was executed, which was counted by the correction execution counter 141, is cleared to "0."

After that, the reel error state notification cancellation process is executed (step S4111), and the start setting process of this correction operation is terminated. In the reel error state notification cancellation process, the ninth layer LY9 in which the notification table for the reel error state is read out in the read area 94a is cleared, and the first notification area 113g in which the display data for displaying the reel error is set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. When the ninth layer LY9 is cleared, the reel error notification performed by the upper lamp 61 and speaker 62 is terminated. Furthermore, when the first notification area 113g is cleared, the reel error display performed by the image display device 63 is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4109, it is judged whether the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4112). If a positive judgment is made in step S4112, the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4113). A positive judgment is made in step S4112 when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command during the execution of the reel operation performance, detects the origin, and judges that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not staying at the origin. As already explained, in the added main performance and the added sub performance in the ART state ST6, the freeze counter is not set in the main RAM 74. For this reason, it is possible that the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command during the execution of the reel operation performance that started at the end of the added main performance (the timing when the execution period of the added main performance is 1 second remaining). As already explained, in the reel management process (FIG. 68), if the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command while the reel operation performance is being executed (step S3702: YES), negative judgments are made in steps S3705, S3706, and S3707, and origin detection (judgment process in step S3713) is performed. Then, if it is judged that the reel is not staying at the origin (step S3713: NO), the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed in step S3714.

Returning to the explanation of the correction operation start setting process (Figure 72), if the reel operation in progress flag is cleared to "0" in step S4113, the correction operation start setting process is terminated without executing the process of incrementing the value of the correction execution counter 141 by 1 (step S4114). In this way, if it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed during the execution of the reel operation performance, the reel operation performance that was being executed is terminated midway and the correction operation of the reel 75 is started. The correction operation in question is not counted by the correction execution counter 141.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4112, the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the reel management area 94d is incremented by 1 (step S4114), and the start setting process for this correction operation is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in steps S4102 and S4103, the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)) is executed (step S4115), and the start setting process for this correction operation is terminated. Details of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)) will be described later.

As described above, when the reel error state and the correction operation standby state are released, a correction operation is performed to return the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin. This reduces the possibility that the spherical performance unit 77b is determined to be not at the origin in the first origin detection of the reel 75 performed after the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released. In addition, the correction operation performed when the correction operation standby state and the reel error state are released is not counted by the correction execution counter 141. This reduces the frequency of occurrence of the correction operation standby state.

As already explained, the initial position drive table has 35 pieces of first drive data, and the displacement position drive table has 35 pieces of second drive data. The pointer information of the reference object in these drive tables is updated at 40 millisecond intervals. The time required for the correction operation of the reel 75 is a maximum of 1.4 seconds, which is shorter than the wait time (specifically 4.1 seconds) during which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are awaited to start rotating from the time when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can start rotating next time. Therefore, when the spherical performance unit 77b is determined not to be staying at the origin in the origin detection performed based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving a game start command and the correction operation of the reel 75 is started, the correction operation ends at a timing before the performance side MPU 92 receives the next game start command. This eliminates the possibility that the next origin detection will be performed during the execution of the correction operation of the reel 75 in this case.

Next, the standby setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73(a). Note that the standby setting process is executed in step S4115 of the start setting process for the correction operation (FIG. 72).

In the standby setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the reel management area 94d is "3" (step S4201). As already explained, the standby execution counter 142 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation standby state has been set. If the value of the standby execution counter 142 is not "3" (step S4201: NO), the process for setting the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4202 to S4207) is executed. Specifically, the value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1 (step S4202), and the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4203). This resets the number of times the correction operation of the reel 75 has been executed, which was counted by the production side MPU 92.

Then, the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4204). As already explained, the correction operation standby flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the correction operation standby state is in progress. By setting the correction operation standby flag to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S3707 of the reel management process (FIG. 68), and the origin detection of the reel 75 at the start of the game (the judgment process of step S3713 in the reel management process (FIG. 68)) is not performed. Therefore, in the correction operation standby state, the correction operation of the reel 75 is not executed even if the spherical performance unit 77b was not at the origin at the start of the game.

Then, the standby game number counter 144 in the role management area 94d is set to "30" (step S4205), and the standby time counter 143 in the role management area 94d is set to numerical information corresponding to "5 minutes" (step S4206). The value of the standby game number counter 144 is decremented by 1 each time a game start command is received from the main MPU 72. The value of the standby time counter 143 is updated each time an interrupt process, which is performed at a 4 millisecond cycle, is executed. As already explained, the correction operation standby state is released when the value of the standby time counter 143 becomes "0", when the value of the standby game number counter 144 becomes "0", when the performance side MPU 92 receives a role initialization command from the main MPU 72, or when the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command from the main MPU 72 in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set.

Then, the notification setting process for the correction operation standby state is executed (step S4207), and this standby setting process is terminated. In the notification setting process for the correction operation standby state, the notification table for the correction operation standby state is read from the production side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. The notification table for the correction operation standby state is read to the ninth layer LY9. As already explained, the notification table for the correction operation standby state contains address information and setting destination information for display data for performing a correction operation standby display on the image display device 63 indicating that the correction operation is standby, and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a standby state notification sound is output to notify that the correction operation is standby. The setting destination information for the display data for performing the correction operation standby display is information that specifies the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the notification according to the notification table for the correction operation standby state read out to the ninth layer LY9, so that a standby state notification sound is output from the speaker 62 for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), and a correction operation standby display is displayed on the image display device 63. In the correction operation standby display, a correction operation standby image called "Correction Operation Standby State" is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 63. The correction operation standby image is set in the first notification display layer 107, and is displayed on the front side of the screen relative to the background image and various performance images. The correction operation standby display continues until the correction operation standby state notification cancellation process (step S3711 of the reel management process (Figure 68)) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4201 that the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3", the reel error flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4208), the reel error state notification setting process is executed (step S4209), and this standby setting process is terminated. In the reel error state notification setting process, the notification table for the reel error state is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. The notification table for the reel error state is read to the ninth layer LY9. As already explained, the reel error notification table contains address information and setting destination information of the display data for executing a reel error display indicating that the reel error state is in the image display device 63, sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a reel error notification sound is output to notify that the reel error state is in the reel error state, and light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61 in a manner to notify that the reel error state is in the reel error state. The setting destination information for the display data for executing the reel error display is information that specifies the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the notification according to the reel error notification table read out to the ninth layer LY9, and the reel error notification is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

As described above, when the value of the standby execution counter 142 is equal to or less than "2" (step S4201: NO) and the value of the correction execution counter 141 is equal to "3" (step S4101: YES in the correction operation start setting process (Figure 72)), the spherical performance unit 77b is determined to be not at the origin in the origin detection performed, and neither the error release flag nor the standby release flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4102: NO), and the reel operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is also not set to "1" (step S4103: NO), the correction operation standby state is entered. In addition, when the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3" (step S4201: YES) and the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (step S4101: YES in the start setting process of the correction operation (FIG. 72)), it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed, and neither the error release flag nor the standby release flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4102: NO), and the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d is also not set to "1" (step S4103: NO), a reel error state is entered. As already explained, when the return operation flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" in the reel management process (FIG. 68) (step S3706: YES), origin detection (determination process of step S3713) is not performed. Therefore, the correction operation standby state and the reel error state are set in a situation where no drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11 and drive control of the reel 75 is not being performed.

Next, the standby management process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73(b). Note that the standby management process is executed in step S3716 of the reel management process (FIG. 68).

In the standby management process, first, it is determined whether the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4301). As already explained, the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" in step S4204 of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)). If a positive determination is made in step S4301, the standby timing counter 143 in the reel management area 94d is updated (step S4302). Specifically, the value of the standby timing counter 143 is decremented by 1. Then, if the updated value of the standby timing counter 143 is not "0" (step S4303: NO), the reel management process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the standby timer counter 143 after updating in step S4302 becomes "0" (step S4303: YES), this means that 5 minutes have passed since the correction operation standby state was set, and therefore processing for canceling the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4304 to S4305) is executed. Specifically, the standby game number counter 144 in the role management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4304), the standby release flag in the role management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4305), and this role management processing is terminated. By setting the standby release flag to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting processing (FIG. 72), and processing for ending the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4104 to S4108) is executed.

Next, the manner in which the correction operation standby state and the reel error state are set will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 74. FIG. 74(a) shows the state of the reel error flag in the reel management area 94d, FIG. 74(b) shows the state of the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d, FIG. 74(c) shows the execution period of the correction operation of the reel 75, FIG. 74(d) shows the timing when "1" is added to the correction execution counter 141 in the reel management area 94d, FIG. 74(e) shows the timing when "1" is added to the standby execution counter 142 in the reel management area 94d, and FIG. 74(f) shows the timing when the origin detection of the reel 75 (determination process in step S3713 of the reel management process (FIG. 68)) is performed.

First, we will explain how the correction operation standby state is set.

At the timings of t1, t3, t5, and t7, the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72, and the origin of the reel 75 is detected as shown in Fig. 74(f). As already explained, in the reel management process (Fig. 68), the origin of the reel 75 (determination process of step S3713) is detected when none of the reel error flag, correction operation standby flag, and return operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1" (step S3705: NO, step S3706: NO, step S3707: NO). When it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin in the origin detection of the reel 75 performed at the timing of t1 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "0", the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) adds "1" to the value of the correction execution counter 141 as shown in FIG. 74(d) on the condition that none of the error release flag, the standby release flag, and the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1" (step S4106: NO, step S4109: NO, step S4112: NO). As a result, the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correction operation of the reel 75 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. As already explained, the time required for the correction operation of the reels 75 is a maximum of 1.4 seconds, which is shorter than the wait time (specifically, 4.1 seconds) during which reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are awaited to start rotating from the time that reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started to rotate in the previous game until the next time that reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can start rotating.

If it is determined that the reel 75 is not at the origin in the origin detection of the reel 75 performed at the timing of t3 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "1", the value of the correction execution counter 141 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 74(d) and the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "2", provided that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correction operation of the reel 75 is performed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. Furthermore, if it is determined that the reel 75 is not at the origin in the origin detection of the reel 75 performed at the timing of t5 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "2", then, provided that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1", the value of the correction execution counter 141 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 74(d), and the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "3". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correction operation of the reel 75 is performed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6.

After that, at the timing of t7 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", if the origin detection of the reel 75 is performed as shown in FIG. 74(f) and it is determined that the reel 75 is not at the origin, then, on the condition that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1", the value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 74(e) and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1", and the correction operation standby state is entered from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8. As already explained, the correction operation standby state is released when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the correction operation standby state was initiated, when the number of games played since the correction operation standby state was initiated reaches a predetermined number of times (specifically, 30 times), when the presentation side MPU 92 receives a role initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or when the presentation side MPU 92 receives a winning result command from the main side MPU 72 that contains information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved.

As described above, when origin detection of the reel 75 is performed with the value of the correction execution counter 141 at "3", if it is determined in the origin detection that the reel 75 is not at the origin, the reel goes into a correction operation standby state, provided that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1". Compared to a configuration in which, when it is determined in the origin detection of the reel 75 that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin, the correction operation standby state is immediately set without counting the number of times that the spherical performance part 77b is determined not to be at the origin, the frequency with which the correction operation standby state is set can be reduced.

Next, we will explain how the reel error state is set.

When the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "1" at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the origin detection of the reel 75 is performed and it is determined that the reel 75 is not at the origin, on the condition that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1", the value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by "1" as shown in FIG. 74(e), and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "2". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" at the timing of t9, and the correction operation standby state is established from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. The conditions for releasing the correction operation standby state are as already explained, and for example, the correction operation standby state is released at the timing of t10 when the number of games executed in the correction operation standby state becomes "30".

After that, when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "2" at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the origin detection of the reel 75 is performed and it is determined that the reel 75 is not at the origin, on the condition that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1", the value of the standby execution counter 142 is added by "1" as shown in FIG. 74(e), and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "3". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" at the timing of t11, and the correction operation standby state is set from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. The conditions for releasing the correction operation standby state are as already explained, and for example, when the number of games executed in the correction operation standby state becomes "30", the correction operation standby state is released at the timing of t12.

After that, at timing t13 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3", if origin detection of the reel 75 is performed as shown in FIG. 74(f) and it is determined that the reel 75 is not at the origin, the reel error flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 74(a) and a reel error state is entered, provided that none of the standby release flag, error release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1".

As described above, when the origin detection of the reel 75 is performed with the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 at "3", if it is determined in the origin detection that the reel 75 is not at the origin, a reel error state is entered, provided that none of the standby release flag, error release flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1". Compared to a configuration in which the reel error state is immediately set without counting the number of times the reel 75 has been set to the standby state for correction operation when it is determined in the origin detection of the reel 75 that the spherical performance section 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin, the frequency with which the reel error state is set can be reduced.

Next, prior to explaining the setting process for driving the reels (FIG. 76(a)) executed by the performance side MPU 92, the data configuration of the drive table for the reels 75 will be explained using the bonus announcement drive table TB for executing the reels operation performance in the bonus announcement performance as an example. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the bonus announcement drive table TB.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the bonus notification drive table TB, pointer information from "0" to "79" is set to be consecutive numbers. Second drive data is set for pointer information from "0" to "24" to move the spherical performance unit 77b downward toward the displacement position, and first drive data is set for pointer information from "50" to "79" to move the spherical performance unit 77b upward toward the initial position. No drive data is set for pointer information from "25" to "49".

The bonus notification drive table TB is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 in the read area 94a. As already explained, the pointer information of the reference target in the data table read out to the read area 94a is updated at a 40 millisecond cycle. The second drive data set for the pointer information of "0" to "24" in the bonus notification drive table TB is output to the gadget drive unit 78, so that the spherical performance unit 77b moves downward from the initial position for one second and moves to an intermediate position above the displacement position. After that, the spherical performance unit 77b stops at the intermediate position until the reference pointer information in the bonus notification drive table TB is updated to "50". After that, the first drive data set for the pointer information of "50" to "79" in the bonus notification drive table TB is output to the gadget drive unit 78, so that the spherical performance unit 77b moves upward from the intermediate position where it was stopped for one second and returns to the initial position.

In the bonus notification drive table TB, the number of first drive data (specifically 30) for moving the spherical performance unit 77b upward and returning it to the initial position is greater than the number of second drive data (specifically 25) for moving the spherical performance unit 77b downward. This increases the possibility that the spherical performance unit 77b will return to its initial position even if an external force is applied to the spherical performance unit 77b, and reduces the possibility that the spherical performance unit 77b will be determined not to be at the origin in the origin detection of the reel 75. As already explained, the first drive data is output to the reel drive unit 78 on the condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. Therefore, when the spherical performance unit 77b returns to its initial position, the output of the first drive data set for the subsequent pointer information to the reel drive unit 78 is canceled.

Next, the setting process for driving the reels executed by the production-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 76(a). Note that the setting process for driving the reels is executed in step S1907 of the production execution process (FIG. 47) when it is determined that a data table has been read out for the current target layer in the read-out area 94a (step S1905: YES).

In the setting process for driving the reel, first, it is determined whether or not the address information of the driving table of the reel 75 is set to the reference pointer information in the data table read into the current target layer (step S4401). If a positive determination is made in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the reading is possible (step S4402). In step S4402, as in the case of step S4003 in the reel origin return process (Figure 71) already described, if none of the reel error flag, correction operation waiting flag, reel initialization flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, return operation in progress flag, and reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1", it is determined that the driving table is in a readable state in which it can be read into the 11th layer LY11.

If it is determined in step S4402 that the data is in a readable state, it is determined whether the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin (step S4403). Specifically, if the origin displacement flag in the reel management area 94d is not set to "1", i.e., if the origin is the initial position, and the initial position sensor 75a is ON, it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin. Also, if the origin displacement flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1", i.e., if the origin is the displacement position, and the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4403, a drive table read process is executed (step S4404). In this read process, the drive table of the reel 75 corresponding to the address information set for the referenced pointer information is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the 11th layer LY11 of the read area 94a. After that, the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4405), and this reel drive setting process is terminated. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the reel 75 according to the drive table read to the 11th layer LY11, thereby executing a reel operation performance in which the spherical performance section 77b moves up and down.

As described above, the drive table of the reel 75 is read out to the 11th layer LY11 on the condition that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin in a readable state. If the reel is not in a readable state and if the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin, the reading of the drive table is canceled. By canceling the reading of the drive table when the reel is not in a readable state, the drive table of the reel 75 is prevented from being read out to the 11th layer LY11 and the reel operation performance being started in a reel error state, a correction operation standby state, a state in which a correction operation is being performed, a state in which a game in which a correction operation has been performed has not ended, a state in which the return operation of the reel 75 is being performed, and a state in which a reel operation performance is being performed.

If the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin, the reading of the drive table is canceled. For example, when transitioning from the normal game state ST1 to the bonus state, the origin is the initial position of the spherical performance unit 77b detected by the initial position sensor 75a. In this case, if a role-play operation performance is executed while the spherical performance unit 77b is at the displacement position detected by the displacement position sensor 75b, the movement of moving the spherical performance unit 77b downward is canceled. In contrast, the reading of the drive table is canceled when the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin, which prevents the spherical performance unit 77b from moving differently from the movement envisaged at the design stage.

Next, the reel drive control process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 76(b). Note that the reel drive control process is executed in step S1915 of the performance execution process (FIG. 47).

In the reel drive control process, if any drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11 in the read area 94a (step S4501: YES), it is determined whether or not the first drive data is set for the pointer information to be referenced in the drive table (step S4502). If the first drive data is set (step S4502: YES), it is determined whether or not the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state (step S4503), and if the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state (step S4503: YES), the first drive data is output to the reel drive unit 78 (step S4504), and the reel drive process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S4503: NO), the first drive data is not output and the main role drive control process ends. In this way, if the spherical performance unit 77b is already staying in the initial position, the output of the first drive data is canceled.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4502, it is judged whether or not second drive data is set for the reference pointer information in the drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11 (step S4505). If the second drive data is set (step S4505: YES), it is judged whether or not the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state (step S4506), and if the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state (step S4506: YES), the second drive data is output to the role drive unit 78 (step S4507), and the role drive processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the displacement position sensor 75b is ON (step S4506: NO), the second drive data is not output and the main role drive control process ends. In this way, if the spherical performance unit 77b is already staying at the displacement position, the output of the second drive data is canceled.

Next, the reel flag setting process executed by the production side MPU92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 77. Note that the reel flag setting process is executed in step S3508 of the flag clear process (FIG. 66(a)), in which the pointer information to be referenced in the drive table read into the 11th layer LY11 is updated until it becomes the final pointer information, and repeat information is not set for the final pointer information.

In the reel flag setting process, if the reel initialization flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4601: YES), this means that the initialization operation of the reel 75 based on the reel initialization table has ended, so the initialization end flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4602).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4601, it is judged whether the correction operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4603). If the correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES), this means that the correction operation of the reel 75 based on the drive table for the correction operation has ended, so the correction operation in progress flag is cleared to "0" (step S4604) and the correction operation completion flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4605).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4603, it is judged whether or not the return operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4606). If the return operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4606: YES), this means that the return operation of the reel 75 that moves the spherical performance part 77b to the changed origin has ended, so the return operation in progress flag is cleared to "0" (step S4607), and the reel flag clearing process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4606, this means that the pointer information of the reference target in the driving table for the performance has been updated to the final pointer information and the reel operation performance has ended, so the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4608), and the reel flag setting process is terminated.

Next, the bonus winning combination setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. As already described, in the normal game state ST1 or the bonus internal state ST2 transitioned from the normal game state ST1, the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command, and the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 56 (a)) is executed. The bonus winning combination setting process (FIG. 78) is executed in step S2806 when it is determined in the winning result corresponding process that a bonus winning has been established based on the winning result command received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2801: YES). The bonus winning combination setting process (FIG. 78) is also executed when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set in other production processes (step S3013 of the non-normal production control process (FIG. 62)). For this reason, the device setting process (Figure 78) when a bonus is won is also executed in the preparation state ST5, the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 transitioned to from the preparation state ST5, and the bonus internal state ST2 transitioned to from the ART state ST6.

In the reel setting process when a bonus is won, first it is determined whether the reel error flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4701). If the reel error flag is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), the error release flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4702). As a result, a positive determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for releasing the reel error state (the processes in steps S4104 to S4106 and steps S4109 to S4111) is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4701, it is judged whether or not the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4703). If the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S4703: YES), the standby release flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4704). As a result, a positive judgment is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for releasing the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4104 to S4108) is executed. After that, the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4705). As a result, the number of times the correction operation standby state was set, which was counted in the standby execution counter 142, is cleared.

If the processing of step S4702 or step S4705 has been performed, the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed (step S4706), and the role setting process when the main bonus is won is terminated. The processing contents of the correction operation start setting process have already been explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4703, the 11th layer LY11 in the read area 94a is cleared (step S4707). As already explained, the 11th layer LY11 is the layer from which the drive table of the reel 75 is read out. By clearing the 11th layer LY11 in step S4707, even if the drive table has been read out in the 11th layer LY11, drive data is no longer output to the reel drive unit 78. Specifically, if a correction operation is being performed, the correction operation is terminated midway.

Then, the third clear process of the reel management information is executed (step S4708). In the third clear process of the reel management information (step S4708), the values of the various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (specifically, the reel initialization flag, the initialization end flag, the reel error flag, the error release flag, the correction operation standby flag, the standby release flag, the correction operation in progress flag, the correction operation completion flag, the reel operation flag, the standby flag for the first origin, the standby flag for the second origin, and the return operation in progress flag) in the reel management area 94d, except for the origin displacement flag, are cleared to "0". This clears the management information of the reel 75, except for the information of the origin displacement flag. By executing the third clear process of the reel management information (step S4708), the number of times the standby execution counter 142 has been set to the correction operation standby state is cleared to "0", and the number of times the correction operation of the reel 75 has been executed is cleared to "0" counted by the standby execution counter 142.

Then, it is determined whether the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is staying at the origin (step S4709). In step S4709, if the origin displacement flag in the reel management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b is staying at the origin if the initial position sensor 75a is ON, and if the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displaced position, it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b is staying at the origin if the displacement position sensor 75b is ON. As already explained, if the opportunity for the current bonus winning occurs in the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST5, the origin of the reel 75 is set to the initial position. On the other hand, if the opportunity for the current bonus winning occurs in the ART state ST6, the origin of the reel 75 is set to the displaced position.

If the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin (step S4709: YES), the process for executing the correction operation of the reel 75 (steps S4710 to S4711) is not executed, and the reel setting process at the time of winning the bonus is terminated. On the other hand, if the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4709: NO), the process for executing the correction operation of the reel 75 (steps S4710 to S4711) is executed. Specifically, first, a read process for the correction operation is executed (step S4710). In step S4710, as in step S4104 of the start setting process of the correction operation (Figure 72), the drive table corresponding to the current origin among the drive tables for the initial position and the drive tables for the displacement position already described is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. Specifically, if the origin displacement flag in the prop management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, the initial position drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11, and if the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displaced position, the displaced position drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the prop 75 according to the initial position drive table or displaced position drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11, causing the spherical performance unit 77b to move to the origin (initial position or displaced position).

Then, the correction operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4711), and the reel setting process when the bonus is won is terminated. The correction operation of the reel 75 that is started by reading out the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table to the 11th layer LY11 in step S4710 is not counted by the correction execution counter 141 in the reel management area 94d. In this way, the correction operation of the reel 75 that is executed when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command that contains information indicating that a bonus has been won is not counted by the correction execution counter 141.

As described above, when the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is present, the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released based on the reception of a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus win has occurred, and the reel 75 performs a correction operation. The time required for the correction operation of the reel 75 is a maximum of 1.4 seconds, which is shorter than the execution period of the bonus start performance (specifically, 5 seconds). In addition, the correction operation of the reel 75 is started before the bonus start performance. Therefore, the correction operation of the reel 75 can be ended before the bonus start performance ends, making it possible to execute the reel operation performance in the first game of BB state ST3 or RB state ST4.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred in a state other than the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is set, the 11th layer LY11 is cleared and the third clear process of the reel management information is executed. By clearing the 11th layer LY11, if the correction operation of the reel 75 is being executed, the drive data is no longer output to the reel drive unit 78, and the correction operation is terminated. In addition, by executing the third clear process of the reel management information, the values of the various counters 141 to 144 and various flags except the origin displacement flag in the reel management area 94d are cleared to "0". As a result, the number of times the correction operation standby state was set, which was counted by the standby execution counter 142, is cleared to "0", and the number of times the correction operation of the reel 75 was executed, which was counted by the correction execution counter 141, is cleared to "0". Therefore, the possibility of being set to the correction operation standby state or the reel error state during the bonus state can be reduced, and the opportunity for the reel operation performance to be executed can be increased.

As already explained, in the normal game state ST1 or the bonus internal state ST2 transitioned from the normal game state ST1, the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the presentation content determination process (FIG. 51)) is performed based on the occurrence of a bonus win (any of the first to fourth BB and first to second RB wins) in the role lottery process (FIG. 14). If the bonus announcement performance is won in the announcement lottery process, the bonus announcement performance is executed in the game in which the bonus win occurred. If the bonus unit error state and the correction operation standby state are not in effect, the bonus unit operation performance is executed in the bonus announcement performance. However, as already explained, if a bonus win is established in the game in which the bonus win occurred, the bonus announcement performance is canceled. Also, if the re-variation performance is won in the announcement lottery process, the game for which the re-variation performance is to be executed is executed if five games have been played without the corresponding bonus win after the game in which the bonus win occurred. If the bonus unit error state and the correction operation standby state are not in effect, the re-variation performance is executed in the re-variation performance. However, as already explained, if the corresponding bonus win occurs before five games have been played, or if a bonus win occurs in the game for which the re-change effect is to be executed, the re-change effect will be canceled.

If the bonus notification performance is configured to release the reel error state or the correction operation standby state when a trigger for starting the reel operation performance occurs, the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) will start without releasing the reel error state or the correction operation standby state if the bonus notification performance is canceled. In this case, the reel operation performance cannot be executed in the first game of the bonus state. Also, if the bonus notification performance is configured to release the reel error state or the correction operation standby state when a trigger for starting the reel operation performance occurs in the re-variation performance, the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) will start without releasing the reel error state or the correction operation standby state if the re-variation performance is canceled. In this case, the bonus state cannot be executed in the first game of the bonus state. In contrast, in this embodiment, the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is set. The event in which the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is an event that always occurs before the start of the bonus state. This makes it possible to execute the action of the reel from the first game in the bonus state, regardless of whether or not there is a bonus announcement or a re-changing effect.

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 79, we will explain how the reel error state is released and the reel operation performance is executed. FIG. 79(a) shows the execution period of the reel operation performance, FIG. 79(b) shows the execution period of the correction operation of the reel 75, FIG. 79(c) shows the state of the reel error flag in the reel management area 94d, FIG. 79(d) shows the execution period of the middle stop performance, FIG. 79(e) shows the execution period of the first expectation performance, FIG. 79(f) shows the execution period of the bonus start performance, FIG. 79(g) shows the timing when the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning result command, FIG. 79(h) shows the timing when the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command, and FIG. 79(i) shows the occurrence timing of the fifth opportunity.

As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, when the fifth trigger occurs, that is, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned on, the middle stop effect is started. Also, as already explained, when a bonus win (either the first to fourth BB wins or the first to second RB wins) occurs in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 14) and the bonus announcement effect is won in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)), the first expected effect is executed after the middle stop effect ends. When the fifth trigger occurs at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 79(i), the middle stop effect is started as shown in FIG. 79(d). As already explained, the middle stop effect is executed for one second. As shown in FIG. 79(c), the role error flag in the role management area 94d is set to "1" at the timing of t1.

After that, at the timing of t2 during the middle stop performance, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning result command. The time required from the occurrence of the fifth trigger until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop is a maximum of 190 milliseconds, which is shorter than the time required from the occurrence of the fifth trigger until the end of the middle stop performance (specifically, 1 second). The main side MPU 72 transmits the winning result command when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. If the winning result command is set to information indicating that a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win that occurred this time has been established, the bonus notification performance is canceled by receiving the winning result command. At the timing of t2, the reel error flag in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 79(c). This releases the reel error state. Also, at the timing of t2, the correction operation of the reel 75 is started as shown in FIG. 79(b). As already explained, the correction operation of the reel 75 is carried out for a maximum of 1.4 seconds.

After that, at the timing of t3, the middle stop performance ends as shown in FIG. 79(d), and the first expected performance starts as shown in FIG. 79(e). The first expected performance is executed for 1.5 seconds. After that, at the timing of t4 during the execution of the first expected performance, the correction operation of the reel 75 ends as shown in FIG. 79(b). The execution period of the correction operation of the reel 75 is a maximum of 1.4 seconds, which is shorter than the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds). In addition, the correction operation of the reel 75 starts at a timing (specifically, at t2) before the timing at which the first expected performance starts (specifically, at t3). Therefore, the timing at which the correction operation of the reel 75 ends at t4 is earlier than the timing at which the first expected performance ends at t5.

Then, at the timing t5, which is later than the timing t4, the first expectation effect ends as shown in FIG. 79(e). As already explained, a bonus win occurs in the game in which the bonus announcement effect is to be executed, and so the bonus announcement effect is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79(f), the bonus start effect starts at the timing t5. This bonus start effect is executed for 5 seconds until the timing t6.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(h), at the timing of t7, the production side MPU 92 receives the first game start command from the main side MPU 72 after the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has started. At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 79(c), the reel error state has been released, and as shown in FIG. 79(b), the correction operation of the reel 75 has ended. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the reel operation presentation starts as shown in FIG. 79(a). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the reel operation presentation ends at the timing of t8, which is 1.5 seconds after the timing of t7.

As described above, when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, the reel error state is released and the reel 75 starts its correction operation. The execution period of the correction operation of the reel 75 is a maximum of 1.4 seconds, which is shorter than the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds). The correction operation of the reel 75 starts before the first expected performance starts. Therefore, the correction operation of the reel 75 ends before the first expected performance ends. This allows the spherical performance section 77b to stay at the origin when the bonus start performance ends, and allows the reel operation performance to be executed in the first game after the bonus state starts.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, the device error state is released and the device 75 is corrected. Therefore, even if a bonus win is achieved in a game in which a bonus win has occurred and the bonus announcement effect is canceled, the device error state can be released and the spherical effect unit 77b can remain at the origin prior to the start of the first game in the bonus state. This makes it possible to execute the device operation effect in the first game that is played after the bonus state has started. In this way, the frequency with which the device operation effect is canceled in the bonus state can be reduced, thereby improving the excitement of the game.

If the configuration is such that the device error state or correction operation standby state is released and the device 75's operation performance is executed based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command containing information indicating that a bonus win has occurred, the correction operation can be terminated before the transition to the bonus state, but even if the bonus announcement performance is not won in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, the device error state or correction operation standby state is released and the device 75's correction operation is executed, so the player will know that a bonus win has occurred based on the execution of the correction operation. In contrast, by using a configuration in which the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been established and the device error state or correction operation standby state is released and the device 75's correction operation is executed, the device operation performance can be started from the first game in the bonus state while preventing the player from knowing that a bonus win has occurred based on the correction operation of the device 75.

<Configuration for Executing Historical Image Display>
Next, a configuration for executing the history image display on the image display device 63 will be described. As described above, in the slot machine 10, a history image display that allows the game history to be confirmed is performed. FIG. 80(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the history image G23 displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 80(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the generation trigger of the history configuration data and the type of image included in the history image G23. As described above, the history configuration data is data that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the type of multiple images that constitute the history image G23, and the history configuration data includes multiple designation data that designates the multiple images that constitute the history image G23. The performance side MPU 92 generates display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the history image G23 is composed of a plurality of images. As shown in FIG. 80(b), the images that compose the history image G23 include a background plate image G24, a first wording image G25, a second wording image G26, a third wording image G27, a character image G28, an ending image G29, a history point image G30, a rank image G31, a base plate image, and a common background plate image.

The history configuration data is generated when the ART state ST6 ends, when the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 ends, when the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"), and when the player selects to generate the history image G23 midway. The number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 is the number of game media awarded during the period from when the ART in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" until the value of the ART in progress flag is cleared to "0". As already explained, the ART in progress flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp whether the game state is the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 transitioned from the ART state ST6, the bonus state transitioned from the ART state ST6, or the preparation state ST5 transitioned to after the bonus state ends. The ART in progress flag is set to "1" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the master MPU 72. The ART in progress flag is cleared to "0" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the master MPU 72. The type of image included in the history image G23 differs depending on the type of trigger for generating the history configuration data for displaying the history image G23.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), the first to third text images G25 to G27, the character image G28, the history point image G30, and the rank image G31 are basic images that are always included in the history image G23, regardless of the type of trigger for generating the history configuration data. The history image G23 of the first pattern, in which the history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ART state ST6, includes the background plate image G24 and these basic images. The history image G23 of the second pattern, in which the history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, includes the background plate image G24, the ending image G29, and these basic images. The history image G23 of the third pattern, in which the history configuration data is generated upon the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaching a predetermined division number, or upon the selection of mid-stage generation by the player's operation, includes the base plate image, the common background plate image, and these basic images.

80(a), when the second pattern history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63, the background plate image G24 is arranged at the back, and the first to third wording images G25 to G27, the character image G28, the ending image G29, the history point image G30, and the rank image G31 are arranged in front of the background plate image G24. Also, although not shown, when the first pattern history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63, the background plate image G24 is arranged at the back, and the wording images G25 to G27, the character image G28, the history point image G30, and the rank image G31 are arranged in front of the background plate image G24. Also, although not shown, when the third pattern history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63, the base plate image is placed at the back, a common background plate image is placed in front of the base plate image, and text images G25 to G27, character image G28, history point image G30, and rank image G31 are placed in front of the base plate image and common background plate image.

The first to third text images G25 to G27 are images that display text corresponding to the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b, and the content of the text in the first to third text images G25 to G27 changes depending on the content of the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b.

In the history image display, the background plate image G24 (Figure 80 (a)) or the common background plate image is displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 63. There are multiple types of background plate images G24, and the type of background plate image G24 to be displayed is specified in the plate lottery process (step S5505 of the plate setting process (Figure 92)) described later. The type of background plate image G24 that is likely to be displayed in the plate lottery process differs depending on the current setting value. For this reason, the player can predict the current setting value based on the type of background plate image G24 displayed on the image display device 63. On the other hand, there is only one type of common background plate image, and it is commonly displayed when the background plate image G24 is not displayed, regardless of the current setting value. When the common background plate image is displayed, the base plate image is displayed on the back side of the screen than the common background plate image. There are multiple types of colors of the base plate image, and the color of the base plate image changes depending on the net increase in the number of game media after transition to the ART state ST6. The common background plate image contains semi-transparent areas through which the base plate image placed at the back can be seen.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), a first heading range 151 is set in the upper left corner of the image display device 63, in which the first wording image G25, which has the highest priority, is arranged. A second heading range 152 is set in the right corner of the image display device 63, in which the second wording image G26, which has the second highest priority, is arranged, and a third heading range 153 is set in the lower left corner of the image display device 63, in which the third wording image G27, which has the lowest priority, is arranged.

The first heading range 151 is set larger than the second heading range 152 and the third heading range 153, and the first wording image G25 displayed in the first heading range 151 is more likely to attract attention than the second wording image G26 and the third wording image G27 displayed in the second heading range 152 and the third heading range 153. Also, in the image display device 63, the second heading range 152 is set larger than the third heading range 153, and the second wording image G26 displayed in the second heading range 152 is more likely to attract attention than the third wording image G27 displayed in the third heading range 153.

The production side ROM 93 stores a selection condition table for selecting the text images G25 to G27 to be displayed. In the selection condition table, a plurality of text designation data for designating the text images G25 to G27 are set, and display priority data and selection conditions are set for each text designation data. The text designation data becomes a candidate for the display target when the set selection conditions are satisfied. Whether or not the selection conditions are satisfied is determined based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The display priority data is data indicating the display priority of the text designation data, and the higher the display priority of the text designation data, the more difficult it is to satisfy the selection conditions. For example, the display priority (specifically, "5") of the text data for which the selection condition "the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 400 or more" is set is set higher than the display priority (specifically, "1") for which the selection condition "the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 200 or more" is set. This makes it possible to later confirm that difficult selection conditions have been achieved based on the history image G23. Details of the selection condition table will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), a character image area 154 in which a character image G28 is displayed is set in the center of the image display device 63. A plurality of character images G28 corresponding to the wording data are stored in the production-side ROM 93, and among the plurality of character images G28, the character image G28 corresponding to the first wording image G25 displayed in the first heading area 151 is selected as the character image G28 to be displayed in the character image area 154.

An ending image range 155 is set in the upper right-hand portion of the image display device 63 in which an ending image G29 is displayed, indicating that the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 has been performed. As already explained, the ending image G29 is displayed only in the second pattern history image G23 in which history configuration data is generated upon the completion of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2. When the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 has been performed, the ending image G29 is always set in the history configuration data.

Specifically, when the 15th history memory area RA15 of the history storage area 94b is set to "1" at the time when the history configuration data is generated, that is, when the execution data for the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is set, the ending image data for displaying the ending image G29 is reliably set in the history configuration data. The details of the 15th history memory area RA15 will be described later.

If the configuration is such that the execution history of the ending performance in the advantageous zone SC2 cannot be confirmed, a player who wants to leave a record of the fact that the ending performance has been executed must leave a record of the execution history of the ending performance themselves using a camera, etc., and will not be able to enjoy the ending performance at their own pace. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the ending image G29 is not displayed depending on the lottery results or the relationship with other game history even if the ending performance in the advantageous zone SC2 is executed, a player who wants to leave a record of the fact that the ending performance has been executed must leave a record of the execution history of the ending performance themselves using a camera, etc., in case the ending image G29 is not displayed, and will not be able to enjoy the ending performance at their own pace.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, if execution data for the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is set in the history storage area 94b at the time the history configuration data is generated, the ending image data is reliably set in the history configuration data. Therefore, even if the player does not leave a record of these performances with a camera or the like while the ending performance is being executed, the player can later check the record of the ending performance by displaying the history image. This makes it possible for the player to take a good look at the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2.

A rank display range 156 in which a rank image G31 is displayed is set in the upper center of the image display device 63. In addition, a history point display range 157 in which a history point image G30 is displayed is set below the rank display range 156 and above the character image range 154. When history configuration data is generated, a history point is calculated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b and the display priority data of the first to third wording images G25 to G27 selected as the display targets, and a history point image G30 indicating the calculated history point is displayed in the history point display range 157. In addition, the history image G23 is ranked based on the history point, and a rank image G31 corresponding to the history image G23 is displayed in the rank display range 156.

Figure 81 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the presentation-side RAM 94 for displaying history images. As already explained, the presentation-side RAM 94 is provided with a history storage area 94b in which game history data is stored, and an image playback storage area 94c in which history configuration data is stored.

This slot machine 10 has a history storage mode in which game history data is stored for displaying a history image. Storing game history data in the history storage area 94b is performed on the condition that the history storage mode is in effect. If the history storage mode setting is canceled, game history data is not stored in the history storage area 94b.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the presentation RAM 94 is provided with a history storage flag 158 that allows the presentation MPU 92 to know that the presentation mode is in history storage mode. The history storage flag 158 is set to "1" when the player operates the presentation operation device 64 (FIG. 1) to select the game history mode setting. The history storage flag 158 is cleared to "0" when the player operates the presentation operation device 64 to select the cancellation of the game history mode, and when a period during which the presentation MPU 92 has not received a game start command since the last time it received a game start command from the main MPU 72 in the normal game state ST1 continues for a predetermined period (specifically, 10 minutes). When the history storage flag 158 is cleared to "0" and the game history mode ends, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of times ART wins have occurred.

The game history mode can be set and released based on the operation of the presentation operation device 64, so that a history image can be displayed if the player wishes to check the game history at a later time.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the history storage area 94b is provided with the 0th history storage area RA0 to the 15th history storage area RA15. The 0th history storage area RA0 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games played before the transition to the ART state ST6. The 0th history storage area RA0 is made up of 2 bytes and can measure the number of games up to an upper limit of "65535". The value of the 0th history storage area RA0 is incremented by 1 under the condition that the game is in the game history mode when a game is played in a state in which the value of the ART in progress flag in the production side RAM 94 is "0". As already explained, the ART in progress flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp whether the game state is the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 transitioned from the ART state ST6, the bonus state transitioned from the ART state ST6, or the preparation state ST5 transitioned to after the bonus state ends. The ART in progress flag is set to "1" when the presentation side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72. The ART in progress flag is cleared to "0" when the presentation side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main side MPU 72. The value of the 0th history memory area RA0 is cleared to "0" when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The first history memory area RA1 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games until either the bonus state or the ART state ST6 is started. The first history memory area RA1 consists of 2 bytes and can measure the number of games up to an upper limit of "65535". The value of the first history memory area RA1 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the game is in the game history mode when the game is played with the value of the ART in progress flag in the production side RAM 94 being "0". In addition, the value of the first history memory area RA1 is cleared to "0" when the production side MPU 92 receives a bonus end command, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released. As already explained, the bonus end command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 when the bonus state end condition is met in the bonus state process (step S1514 of the bonus process (Figure 34)).

The second history memory area RA2 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media that has decreased before transitioning to the ART state ST6. The second history memory area RA2 consists of 2 bytes and can measure the number of game media from "-32767" to "32767". In the game history mode, the value of the second history memory area RA2 is subtracted by the number of game media bet (specifically "3") except in the case of a game that was started by an automatic bet after a replay win occurred when the value of the ART in-progress flag in the production side RAM 94 is "0", and the number of game media awarded when a small winning occurs is added. The value of the second history memory area RA2 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The third history memory area RA3 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of game media that has decreased during the period until the transition to the ART state ST6. The third history memory area RA3 is made up of 2 bytes and is capable of measuring the number of game media between "-32767" and "0". In the game history mode, the value of the second history memory area RA2 is set in the third history memory area RA3 when the value of the second history memory area RA2 is smaller than the value of the third history memory area RA3. The value of the third history memory area RA3 is cleared to "0" when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The fourth history memory area RA4 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the number of times that the BB state ST3 has occurred. The fourth history memory area RA4 consists of 1 byte and is capable of measuring the number of times that the BB state ST3 has occurred with an upper limit of "255". In the game history mode, the value of the fourth history memory area RA4 is incremented by 1 when the BB state ST3 has occurred. In addition, the value of the fourth history memory area RA4 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending production of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The fifth history memory area RA5 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times that the RB state ST4 has occurred. The fifth history memory area RA5 consists of 1 byte and is capable of measuring the number of times that the RB state ST4 has occurred, with an upper limit of "255". In the game history mode, the value of the fifth history memory area RA5 is incremented by 1 when the RB state ST4 has occurred. In addition, the value of the fifth history memory area RA5 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The sixth history memory area RA6 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times that an ART win has occurred. The sixth history memory area RA6 is composed of 3 bytes and can measure the number of times that an ART win has occurred with an upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of "256". In the game history mode, the value of the sixth history memory area RA6 is incremented by 1 each time an ART win occurs, and is cleared to "0" when the value after the increment exceeds the upper limit. The value of the sixth history memory area RA6 is not cleared to "0" even when the history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2, or when the game history mode is released. Note that the number of times that an ART win has occurred counted in the sixth history memory area RA6 does not include the number of times that a bonus win has occurred in the ART state ST6, and then the game returns to the ART state ST6 via the bonus state and preparation state ST5.

The seventh history memory area RA7 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the role that triggers the ART win. The seventh history memory area RA7 is made up of 4 bits and can store the type information of the role that triggers the ART win with an upper limit of "15". In the game history mode, the seventh history memory area RA7 is set with the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the role in the game in which the ART win occurred. Specifically, the seventh history memory area RA7 is set with any of the numerical information "4", "6", "8" and "15". The value of the seventh history memory area RA7 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6 as a trigger, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 as a trigger, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The eighth history memory area RA8 is a counter that allows the type information of the ART start performance to be grasped by the performance side MPU 92. The eighth history memory area RA8 is made up of 5 bits and can store type information of the ART start performance with an upper limit of "31". As already explained, there are 16 types of ART start performance in this slot machine 10, and in the game history mode, the winning number ("1" to "16") in the ART start performance lottery table specified in the ART start performance lottery process (step S3105 of the performance setting process at the start of ART (FIG. 63 (a))) is set as type information in the eighth history memory area RA8. The eighth history memory area RA8 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The ninth history memory area RA9 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU92 to grasp the number of games that have been played after transitioning to the ART state ST6. The ninth history memory area RA9 is made up of 2 bytes and can measure the number of games up to an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the ninth history memory area RA9 is incremented by 1 when a game is played with the ART in progress flag in the presentation side RAM94 set to "1". In addition, the value of the ninth history memory area RA9 is cleared to "0" when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The tenth history memory area RA10 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media awarded after transition to the ART state ST6. The tenth history memory area RA10 is made up of 16 bits and can measure the number of game media from "0" to "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the tenth history memory area RA10 is added with the number of game media awarded when a small winning combination occurs while the ART in progress flag is set to "1". The value of the tenth history memory area RA10 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The eleventh history memory area RA11 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after transition to the ART state ST6. The eleventh history memory area RA11 is made up of 18 bits and can measure the number of game media from "-131072" to "131072". In the game history mode, the value of the eleventh history memory area RA11 is subtracted by the number of game media bet (specifically "3") except for the case where the game is started after an automatic bet is made after a replay win occurs when the ART in progress flag is set to "1", and the number of game media awarded when a small winning occurs is added. The value of the eleventh history memory area RA11 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The twelfth history memory area RA12 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the total number of added games in the ART state ST6. The twelfth history memory area RA12 consists of 2 bytes and can measure the number of added games up to an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, when the production side MPU92 receives an ART add-on command, the value of the twelfth history memory area RA12 is added with the number of added games set in the ART add-on command. The value of the twelfth history memory area RA12 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The thirteenth history memory area RA13 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of added games in the preparation state ST5. The thirteenth history memory area RA13 is made up of two bytes and can measure the number of added games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, when the presentation side MPU 92 receives a preparation add-on command, the value of the thirteenth history memory area RA13 is added with the number of added games set in the preparation add-on command. The value of the thirteenth history memory area RA13 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The 14th history memory area RA14 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of added games in the bonus state. The 14th history memory area RA14 is made up of 2 bytes and can measure the number of added games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, when the production side MPU 92 receives a bonus add-on command, the value of the 14th history memory area RA14 is added with the number of added games set in the bonus add-on command. The value of the 14th history memory area RA14 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

The fifteenth history memory area RA15 is a flag that enables the performance side MPU92 to know whether the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. The fifteenth history memory area RA15 consists of one bit. In the game history mode, the fifteenth history memory area RA15 is set to "1" when the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. The value of the fifteenth history memory area RA15 is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game history mode setting is released.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the history storage area 94b is provided with a configuration data storage area 161 in which the history configuration data being generated is set. FIG. 81(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the configuration data storage area 161. The configuration data storage area 161 stores background plate image designation data that designates the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image, base plate image designation data that designates the base plate image, first wording designation data that designates the first wording image G25, second wording designation data that designates the second wording image G26, third wording designation data that designates the third wording image G27, and rank image designation data that designates the rank image G31. As already explained, the type of the character image G28 displayed in the history image G23 corresponds to the type of the first wording image G25. Therefore, the production side MPU 92 grasps the types of the first wording image G25 and the character image G28 that are to be displayed based on the first wording designation data. In addition to the various designation data described above, the configuration data storage area 161 also stores data indicating the presence or absence of an ending image G29, data indicating a history point, date and time data indicating the date and time when the history configuration data was generated, and generation trigger data indicating the type of trigger for generating the history configuration data.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), the configuration data memory area 161 includes a first wording counter 161a, a second wording counter 161b, a third wording counter 161c, an ending image flag 161d, a history point counter 161e, a rank counter 161f, a background plate counter 161g, a base plate counter 161h, a date and time data counter 161j, and a generation trigger counter 161k.

The first wording counter 161a is a counter in which the first wording designation data specifying the first wording image G25 and the display priority data corresponding to the first wording designation data are stored, the second wording counter 161b is a counter in which the second wording designation data specifying the second wording image G26 and the display priority data corresponding to the second wording designation data are stored, and the third wording counter 161c is a counter in which the third wording designation data specifying the third wording image G27 and the display priority data corresponding to the third wording designation data are stored. The first to third wording designation data are numerical information that enables the wording images G25 to G27 to be identified, and are not address data of the wording images G25 to G27 in the character ROM. As already explained, the display priority data is data that indicates the display priority of the wording designation data.

There are 324 types of wordings to be displayed in the history image G23, and the character ROM stores 324 types of wording image data for displaying the 324 types of wordings vertically and 324 types of wording image data for displaying the 324 types of wordings horizontally. The wording designation data is 9-bit numerical information indicating any one of "1" to "324", and the wording designation data and the wording image data correspond one-to-one. The data amount of the first to third wording designation data is smaller than the data amount of the address data of the wording image data. The production side ROM 93 stores a wording correspondence table in which the wording designation data and the address data of the wording image data in the character ROM are set. Because the configuration stores the wording designation data, the storage capacity of the production side RAM 94 for making it possible to grasp the types of the wording images G25 to 27 included in the history image G23 is reduced compared to the configuration storing the address data of the wording image data.

The first to third wording counters 161a to 161c each have a storage capacity of 13 bits, with the most significant 7 bits storing wording designation data and the next 4 bits storing display priority data (4-bit numerical information indicating one of "0" to "8").

In the first heading range 151, a text image for horizontal writing is set at a magnification of 100%, in the second heading range 152, a text image for vertical writing is set at a magnification of 100%, and in the third heading range 153, a text image for horizontal writing is set at a magnification of 50%. The text images for horizontal writing set in the first heading range 151 and the third heading range 153 are common, but have different magnifications.

As already explained, the production-side MPU 92 generates display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data. When generating display data, the production-side MPU 92 checks the first wording designation data against the wording correspondence table to grasp address data of the horizontally written wording image corresponding to the first wording designation data and sets the grasped address data to the display data, checks the second wording designation data against the wording correspondence table to grasp address data of the vertically written wording image corresponding to the second wording designation data and sets the grasped address data to the display data, and checks the third wording designation data against the wording correspondence table to grasp address data of the horizontally written wording image corresponding to the third wording designation data and sets the grasped address data to the display data.

The production-side ROM 93 stores a history image generation table in which parameters of various images included in the history image G23 are set. The production-side MPU 92 sets parameters (position coordinate information, magnification ratio, transparency information, color information) of the first to third wording images G25 to G27 in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table. The position coordinate information is information for specifying the coordinates on the image display device 63 where the image should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the image. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the image is displayed enlarged, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the image is displayed reduced. The transparency information is for specifying the transparency of the entire image. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the image to be displayed. As already explained, the magnification ratio of the first wording image G25 and the second wording image G26 is set to 100%, and the magnification ratio of the third wording image G27 is set to 50%.

As already explained, the type of character image G28 included in the history image G23 is determined based on the first wording designation data. 324 types of character image data are stored in the character ROM, and the character image data have a one-to-one correspondence with the wording designation data. The production-side ROM 93 stores a character image correspondence table in which the correspondence between the wording designation data and the address data of the character image data in the character ROM is set. Because the type of character image G28 is determined based on the first wording designation data, the storage capacity of the production-side RAM 94 for making it possible to determine the type of character image G28 included in the history image G23 is reduced compared to a configuration in which data for determining the type of character image G28 is stored separately from the first wording designation data.

When the production-side MPU 92 generates display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, it compares the first wording designation data with the character image correspondence table to determine the address data of the character image data corresponding to the first wording designation data, and sets the determined address data to the display data. In addition, the production-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, magnification ratio, transparency information, color information) of the character image G28 to the display data for the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The ending image flag 161d is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to determine whether or not to display the ending image G29 in the history image G23. A state in which the ending image flag 161d is set to "1" corresponds to a state in which the ending image G29 is to be displayed, and a state in which the ending image flag 161d is not set to "1" corresponds to a state in which the ending image G29 is not to be displayed.

When the production-side MPU 92 generates display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, it sets the address data of the ending image data in the character ROM to the display data based on the ending image flag 161d being set to "1". In addition, the production-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, magnification ratio, transparency information, color information) of the ending image G29 to the display data for the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The history point counter 161e is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the history point of the history image G23. The history point is 16-bit numerical information that corresponds to any of "0" to "65535".

The character ROM stores numeric image data and alphabet image data for displaying each number image and the alphabet image of "P" in the history point image G30. The performance side ROM 93 stores a history point correspondence table in which the correspondence between each digit of the history point and each number image in the character ROM is set. The history point correspondence table also stores address data of the alphabet image data for displaying the alphabet image of "P".

When generating display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the production-side MPU 92 checks each digit of the history point data against the history point correspondence table to determine the address data for each number image included in the history point image G30, and also determines the address data for the alphabet image data of "P" stored in the history correspondence table. The production-side MPU 92 then sets the determined address data in the display data. In addition, the production-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, magnification ratio, transparency information, color information) of these number images and alphabet images in the display data for the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The rank counter 161f is a counter in which rank image designation data that designates the rank image G31 is stored. The rank image designation data is numerical information that allows the rank image G31 to be specified, and is not address data of the rank image data in the character ROM. Five types of rank image data corresponding to "C rank", "B rank", "A rank", "S rank", and "SS rank" are stored in the character ROM. The rank image designation data is three-bit numerical information indicating one of "0" to "6". The state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "1" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "C rank" is the display target, the state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "2" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "B rank" is the display target, the state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "3" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "A rank" is the display target, the state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "4" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "S rank" is the display target, and the state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "5" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "SS rank" is the display target. The amount of data for the rank image designation data is smaller than the amount of data for the address data for rank image G31.

The character ROM stores multiple rank image data (specifically, six types) for the history image G23. The production side ROM 93 stores a rank correspondence table that sets the correspondence between rank image designation data and address data of the rank image data in the character ROM.

When the production-side MPU 92 generates display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, it checks the rank image designation data against the rank correspondence table to determine the address data of the rank image data corresponding to the rank image designation data, and sets the determined address data to the display data. In addition, the production-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, magnification ratio, transparency information, color information) of the rank image G31 to the display data for the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The background plate counter 161g is a counter in which background plate image designation data that designates the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image is stored. The background plate image designation data is numerical information that allows the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image to be specified, and is not address data of the background plate image data or the common background plate image data in the character ROM. Five types of background plate images G24, namely, a white plate image, a copper plate image, a silver plate image, a gold plate image, and a rainbow plate image, and one type of common background plate image are stored in the character ROM. A state in which the background plate image designation data is "1" corresponds to a state in which a white plate image is the display target, a state in which the background plate image designation data is "2" corresponds to a state in which a copper plate image is the display target, a state in which the background plate image designation data is "3" corresponds to a state in which a silver plate image is the display target, a state in which the background plate image designation data is "4" corresponds to a state in which a gold plate image is the display target, and a state in which the background plate image designation data is "5" corresponds to a state in which a rainbow plate image is the display target. Additionally, a state in which the background plate image designation data is "0" corresponds to a state in which the common background plate image is to be displayed. The data amount of the background plate image designation data is smaller than the data amount of the background plate image data or the common background plate image data.

The character ROM stores multiple types of background plate image data, as well as one type of common background plate image data. The production side ROM 93 stores a background plate correspondence table that sets the correspondence between background plate image designation data and address data of the background plate image data and common background plate image data in the character ROM.

When the production side MPU 92 generates display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, it compares the background plate image designation data with the background plate correspondence table to determine the address data of the background plate image data or common background plate image data corresponding to the background plate image designation data, and sets the determined address data to the display data. Specifically, when the value of the background plate image designation data is "0", it sets the address data of the common background plate image data to the display data, and when the value of the background plate image designation data is "1" or greater, it sets the address data of the background plate image data corresponding to that value to the display data. In addition, the production side MPU 92 sets parameters (position coordinate information, magnification ratio, transparency information, color information) of the background plate image G24 or common background plate image to the display data for the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The base plate counter 161h is a counter in which base plate image designation data that designates a base plate image is stored. The base plate image designation data is numerical information that enables the base plate image to be specified, and is not address data of the base plate image data in the character ROM. Seven types of base plate images are normally stored in the character ROM: color, black, blue, green, red, silver, and gold. The base plate image designation data is three-bit numerical information that corresponds to any one of "0" to "7." A state in which the base plate image designation data is "1" corresponds to a state in which a normal color base plate image is to be displayed, a state in which the base plate image designation data is "2" corresponds to a state in which a black base plate image is to be displayed, a state in which the base plate image designation data is "3" corresponds to a state in which a blue base plate image is to be displayed, a state in which the base plate image designation data is "4" corresponds to a state in which a green base plate image is to be displayed, a state in which the base plate image designation data is "5" corresponds to a state in which a red base plate image is to be displayed, a state in which the base plate image designation data is "6" corresponds to a state in which a silver base plate image is to be displayed, and a state in which the base plate image designation data is "7" corresponds to a state in which a gold base plate image is to be displayed. The data amount of the base plate image designation data is smaller than the data amount of the base plate image data.

The character ROM stores multiple types of base plate image data (specifically, seven types). The production side ROM 93 stores a base plate correspondence table that sets the correspondence between base plate image designation data and address data of the base plate image data in the character ROM.

When the production-side MPU 92 generates display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, it compares the base plate image designation data with the base plate correspondence table to determine the address data of the base plate image data corresponding to the base plate image designation data, and sets the determined address data to the display data. In addition, the production-side MPU 92 sets the parameters of the base plate image (position coordinate information, magnification ratio, transparency information, color information) in the display data for the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The date and time data counter 161j is a counter that stores date and time data that allows the date and time when the history configuration data was generated to be known. The performance control board 91 is provided with an RTC that updates the date and time data. The RTC is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and is configured to be able to output the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to instructions from the performance side MPU 92. When generating history configuration data, the performance side MPU 92 obtains date and time data from the RTC in the performance control board 91. The RTC is provided with a backup power supply, making it possible to measure date information and time information even when the slot machine 10 is powered off.

The generation trigger counter 161k is a counter in which generation trigger data indicating the type of generation trigger for the history configuration data is stored. In the generation trigger counter 161k, one of the numerical information "1" to "6" corresponding to the type of generation trigger for the history configuration data is set. In the generation trigger counter 161k, "1" is set when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaching 1000, "2" is set when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the number of game media given reaching 2000, "3" is set when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the number of game media given reaching 3000, "4" is set when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the end of the ART state ST6, "5" is set when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and "6" is set when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the operation of mid-way generation.

As already explained with reference to FIG. 80(b), the history image G23 of the first pattern, in which history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ART state ST6, does not include the ending image G29, the base plate image, and the common background plate image. In this case, the values of the ending image flag 161d, the background plate counter 161g, and the base plate counter 161h are "0". As already explained, the history image G23 of the second pattern, in which history configuration data is generated upon the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, does not include the base plate image and the common background plate image. In this case, the values of the background plate counter 161g and the base plate counter 161h are "0". As already explained, the history image G23 of the third pattern, in which history configuration data is generated upon the number of game media awarded in the ART state ST6 reaching a predetermined division number, or upon selection of mid-way generation, does not include the background plate image G24 and the ending image G29. In this case, the values of the ending image flag 161d and the background plate counter 161g are "0".

While the display data of the history image G23 is set in the display setting area 113 of the production side RAM 94, the production side MPU 92 creates a drawing list for one frame based on the display data and outputs the drawing list to the VDP 95. The VDP 95 reads various image data (background plate image data, first to third wording image data, character image data, ending image data, history point image data, rank image data, base plate image data, and common background plate image data) from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in one of the two frame areas in the video RAM 96 using the various image data read out. The VDP 95 then outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display the history image G23 corresponding to the display data.

Next, the image reproduction memory area 94c will be described. The image reproduction memory area 94c is a memory area to which backup power is supplied after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. Even if the power supply of the slot machine 10 to the performance side MPU 92 is stopped because the power supply of the slot machine 10 is OFF, backup power is supplied from the power supply unit in the power supply device 54 to the image reproduction memory area 94c of the performance side RAM 94 as power for memory retention. As a result, even if the power supply of the slot machine 10 to the performance side MPU 92 is stopped because the power supply of the slot machine 10 is OFF, information is stored and retained in the image reproduction memory area 94c. Therefore, the image reproduction memory area 94c also stores history configuration data generated on or before the previous day.

As described above, the image playback memory area 94c can store history configuration data corresponding to a maximum of 32 history images G23. As shown in FIG. 81(a), the image playback memory area 94c is provided with the 0th playback memory area RD0 to the 31st playback memory area RD31 as memory areas in which history configuration data corresponding to the history images G23 are stored. Each playback memory area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) is provided with a first wording counter, a second wording counter, a third wording counter, an ending image flag, a history point counter, a rank counter, a background plate counter, a base plate counter, a date and time data counter, and a generation trigger counter, similar to the configuration data memory area 161 (FIG. 81(b)) already described. Each playback memory area RDn stores history configuration data corresponding to one history image G23. In addition, each playback memory area RDn is provided with a display enable flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to determine whether or not the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in that playback memory area RDn can be displayed on the image display device 63. The display enable flag will be described in detail later.

When the generation of the history configuration data is completed, the history configuration data set in the configuration data storage area 161 is transferred to the image playback storage area 94c. As shown in FIG. 81(a), the performance-side RAM 94 is provided with a write pointer 162. The write pointer 162 is a pointer counter that allows the performance-side MPU 92 to grasp the playback storage area RDn in which the history configuration data is written in the image playback storage area 94c. The write pointer 162 is set with any of numerical information "0" to "30". When newly generated history configuration data is stored in the image playback storage area 94c, the playback storage area RDn corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared, and the newly generated history configuration data is stored in the cleared playback storage area RDn. The value of the write pointer 162 is then updated. The 31st playback storage area RD31 is a storage area in which the history configuration data generated when the player selects mid-play generation is stored. For this reason, the maximum value of the write pointer 162 is "30". Details of the 31st playback memory area RD31 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the production side RAM 94 is provided with a first protected object counter 163 and a second protected object counter 164 that can grasp the playback memory area RDn that is excluded from deletion. The first protected object counter 163 is a counter that can grasp the playback memory area RDn in which the history configuration data with the highest history points is stored in the image playback memory area 94c, and the history point data included in that history configuration data. The second protected object counter 164 is a counter that can grasp the playback memory area RDn in which the history configuration data with the second highest history points is stored in the image playback memory area 94c, and the history point data included in that history configuration data.

The first protected counter 163 and the second protected counter 164 have a storage capacity of 13 bits, with the upper 5 bits storing area data indicating the playback memory area RDn and the lower 8 bits storing history point data. The area data is numerical information ranging from "0" to "30" corresponding to the 0th to 30th playback memory areas RD0 to RD30.

If the history point in the history configuration data newly stored in the image playback memory area 94c is equal to or greater than the history point in the first protected counter 163, the data in the first protected counter 163 is overwritten in the second protected counter 164. Then, the upper 5 bits of the first protected counter 163 store area data corresponding to the playback memory area RDn in which the new history configuration data is stored, and the lower 8 bits of the first protected counter 163 store history point data of the new history configuration data.

As a result, the playback memory area RDn in which the history configuration data with the second highest history point is stored is removed from the protection target, and the playback memory area RDn in which new history configuration data is stored is set as the protection target. If the history point in the first protection target counter 163 and the history point in the newly stored history configuration data are the same value, the newer history configuration data is given priority in protection.

In addition, if the history point in the history configuration data newly stored in the image playback memory area 94c is equal to or greater than the history point in the second protected counter 164 and is less than the history point in the first protected counter 163, the second protected counter 164 is cleared to "0". Then, the upper 5 bits of the second protected counter 164 store area data corresponding to the playback memory area RDn in which the new history configuration data is stored, and the lower 8 bits of the second protected counter 164 store history point data of the new history configuration data.

As a result, the playback memory area RDn in which the history configuration data with the second highest history point is stored is removed from the protection target, and the playback memory area RDn in which new history configuration data is stored is set as the protection target. If the history point in the second protection target counter 164 and the history point in the newly stored history configuration data are the same value, the newer history configuration data is given priority in protection.

When newly generated history configuration data is stored in the image playback memory area 94c, the value of the write pointer 162 is added by 1, and the playback memory area RDn to be written is updated. In this case, if the playback memory area RDn corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 is set as a protected area, the value of the write pointer 162 is further added by 1, and the playback memory area RDn to be written is updated. If the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 162, "30", the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared to "0". In this way, the playback memory area RDn set as a protected area is excluded from the write target. As a result, history configuration data whose history point value is a predetermined rank or higher (specifically, second place or higher) is protected without being erased.

If the configuration is such that the history configuration data is erased unconditionally in order from the oldest to the newest, it is not possible to leave behind history configuration data with high history points and high value. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the history configuration data is erased in order from the lowest to the newest, there is a possibility that the history configuration data generated on the same day will be overwritten by the history configuration data generated next, making it impossible to confirm. In contrast, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the history configuration data is erased in order from the oldest, provided that the history configuration data does not have a history point ranking of a predetermined rank (specifically, the top two) or higher. This makes it possible to prevent the erasure of history configuration data with high history points and high value, and also reduces the possibility that history configuration data generated on the same day will be erased on the same day.

The 31st playback memory area RD31 is a memory area in which history configuration data generated in response to the selection of mid-game generation by the player is stored. Mid-game generation can be selected at any time. For this reason, if a common configuration is used for the memory area in which the history configuration data generated in response to the selection of mid-game generation is stored and the memory area in which normal history configuration data generated in response to an event other than the selection of mid-game generation is stored, there is a risk that much of the normal history configuration data will be overwritten if mid-game generation is repeatedly selected in a short period of time. In contrast, in this embodiment, the playback memory area RD31 for storing the history configuration data generated in response to the selection of mid-game generation is separated from the playback memory areas RD0 to RD30 in which normal history configuration data is stored, thereby preventing the normal history configuration data from being overwritten by the history configuration data generated in response to mid-game generation. This allows the normal history configuration data to be properly preserved.

Next, the processing configuration for displaying history images will be described. First, the history image processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 82. Note that the history image processing is executed by interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in the production side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds).

In the history image processing, it is first determined whether the history storage flag 158 in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4801). If the history storage flag 158 is set to "1" (step S4801: YES), this means that the history storage mode is set, and so the history information storage processing is executed (step S4802). Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the history information storage processing.

In the history information storage process, if a game start command is received from the master MPU 72 (step S4901: YES), the game count information update process is executed (step S4902), and the history information storage process is terminated. In the game count information update process, if the ART in progress flag in the presentation RAM 94 is not set to "1", the value of the 0th history memory area RA0 is incremented by 1. In addition, in the game count information update process (step S4902), if the ART in progress flag is not set to "1" and the bonus state is not in effect, the value of the 1st history memory area RA1 is incremented by 1. Furthermore, in the game count information update process (step S4902), if the ART in progress flag is set to "1", the value of the 9th history memory area RA9 is incremented by 1.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4901, it is judged whether or not an ART winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4903). If an ART winning command has been received (step S4903: YES), an update process for the ART winning count information is executed (step S4904). In the update process for the ART winning count information, the value of the sixth history memory area RA6 in the history memory area 94b is incremented by 1.

Then, a process for storing the trigger role information is executed (step S4905). In the process for storing the trigger role information, information on the winning role in the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the role in the current game in which the ART win occurred is stored in the seventh history memory area RA7 as trigger role information for the ART win.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4903, it is judged whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4906). If a winning result command has been received (step S4906: YES), the number information storage process is executed (step S4907). Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the number information update process.

The process of updating the number of coins information first determines whether the replay flag stored in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5001). The replay flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that a replay win occurred in the previous game. The replay flag is set to "1" in step S5015, which will be described later. If the replay flag is set to "1" (step S5001: YES), the replay flag is cleared to "0" (step S5002).

On the other hand, if the replay flag is not set to "1" (step S5001: NO), it is determined whether the ART in progress flag in the presentation side RAM94 is set to "1" (step S5003), and if the ART in progress flag is set to "1" (step S5003: YES), the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the value of the eleventh history memory area RA11 (step S5004). As already explained, the eleventh history memory area RA11 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU92 to grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media after the transition to the ART state ST6.

On the other hand, if the ART in progress flag is not set to "1" (step S5003: NO), the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the value of the second history memory area RA2 (step S5005). As already explained, the second history memory area RA2 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of gaming media that has decreased before transitioning to the ART state ST6. Then, it is determined whether the value of the second history memory area RA2 is smaller than the value of the third history memory area RA3 (step S5006). If a positive determination is made in step S5006, this means that the maximum number of gaming media that has decreased during the period until transitioning to the ART state ST6 has been updated, so the value of the second history memory area RA2 is set to the third history memory area RA3 (step S5007). As already explained, the third history memory area RA3 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of game media that has decreased during the period up until the transition to the ART state ST6.

When the processing of step S5002 is executed, when the processing of step S5004 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S5006, or when the processing of step S5007 is executed, it is determined whether or not a small prize has been won based on the winning result command received this time (step S5008). When a small prize has been won (step S5008: YES), it is determined whether or not the ART in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5009). When a positive judgment is made in step S5009, the number of game media awarded set for the small prize is added to the 10th history storage area RA10 and the 11th history storage area RA11 (step S5010). As already explained, the tenth history memory area RA10 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media awarded after the transition to ART state ST6, and the eleventh history memory area RA11 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to ART state ST6.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the 10th history memory area RA10 after the number of game media awarded in step S5010 has reached a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000") (step S5011). If a positive determination is made in step S5011, it means that the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached the predetermined division number, so the division generation flags 176a to 176c corresponding to the current division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000") among the division generation flags 176a to 176c provided in the performance side RAM 94 are set to "1" (step S5012), and the update process of this number information is terminated. The performance side RAM 94 is provided with a first division generation flag 176a, a second division generation flag 176b, and a third division generation flag 176c. The first division generation flag 176a is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of gaming media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 (the number of gaming media awarded during the period from when the ART flag is set to "1" to when the ART flag is cleared to "0") has reached 1,000, the second division generation flag 176b is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of gaming media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached 2,000, and the third division generation flag 176c is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of gaming media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached 3,000. In step S5012, if the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches 1000, the first division generation flag 176a is set to "1", if the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches 2000, the second division generation flag 176b is set to "1", and if the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches 3000, the third division generation flag 176c is set to "1". By setting any of the first to third division generation flags 176a to 176c to "1", a positive determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85) described later, and history configuration data is generated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5009, the number of game media awarded that is set for the small winning combination that has just been established is added to the value in the second history memory area RA2 (step S5013), and the process of updating the number information is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5008, it is determined whether or not a replay win has occurred based on the currently received winning result command (step S5014). If a replay win has occurred (step S5014: YES), the replay flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5015), and the process of updating the number of coins information is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the history information storage process (Figure 83), after executing the update process of the number information in step S4907, it is determined whether or not any BB win has occurred based on the winning result command received this time (step S4908), and if any BB win has occurred (step S4908: YES), the update process of the BB win information is executed (step S4909). In the update process of the BB win information, the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 is incremented by 1.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4908, it is judged whether or not any RB win has occurred based on the winning result command received this time (step S4910), and if any RB win has occurred (step S4910: YES), an update process for the RB win information is executed (step S4911). In the update process for the RB win information, the value of the fifth history memory area RA5 is incremented by 1.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4906, it is judged whether or not any of the bonus add-on command, preparation add-on command, and ART add-on command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4912), and if any of the add-on commands has been received (step S4912: YES), an update process for the add-on game number information is executed (step S4913). In the update process for the add-on game number information, if a bonus add-on command is received, the add-on game number set in the bonus add-on command is added to the 14th history memory area RA14. In addition, if a preparation add-on command is received, the add-on game number set in the preparation add-on command is added to the 13th history memory area RA13, and if an ART add-on command is received, the add-on game number set in the ART add-on command is added to the 12th history memory area RA12.

If an ending end command is received from the main MPU 72 after a negative determination is made in step S4912 (step S4914: YES), execution information for the ending performance is stored (step S4915). Specifically, the 15th history storage area RA15 is set to "1".

If a negative judgment is made in step S4914 and a bonus end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4916: YES), the first history memory area RA1 is cleared to "0" (step S4917), and this history information storage process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the history image processing (FIG. 82), if a negative judgment is made in step S4801, or if the history information storage processing is executed in step S4802, it is judged whether or not a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4803), and if a game start command has been received (step S4803: YES), the game start corresponding processing described below is executed (step S4804).

If a negative determination is made in step S4803, or if the processing of step S4804 is performed, the history image management processing described below is executed (step S4805), and the display operation response processing described below is executed (step S4806). After that, the history configuration data generation processing is executed (step S4807). The processing of steps S4808 to S4813 will be described later. Figure 85 is a flowchart showing the history configuration data generation processing in step S4807.

In the history configuration data generation process, first, it is determined whether any of the multiple generation flags provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5101). The performance side RAM 94 is provided with the ART end generation flag 174, the ending end generation flag 175, the midway generation flag 177, and the above-mentioned first to third division generation flags 176a to 176c as generation flags that enable the occurrence of a history configuration data generation trigger. The ART end generation flag 174 is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to understand that the ART state ST6 has ended and that history configuration data for displaying the first pattern of the history image G23 should be generated. The ending end generation flag 175 is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to understand that the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 has ended and that history configuration data for displaying the second pattern of the history image G23 should be generated. The midway generation flag 177 is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the midway generation of the history image G23 has been selected by the player's operation, and that history configuration data for displaying the third pattern of the history image G23 should be generated. As already described, the first division generation flag 176a is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 (the number of game media given during the period from when the ART flag is set to "1" until the ART flag is cleared to "0") has reached 1000, the second division generation flag 176b is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached 2000, and the third division generation flag 176c is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached 3000. In step S5101, if any of these six types of generation flags is set to "1", a positive determination is made. If a positive determination is made in step S5101, a wording selection process is executed to select wording data to be set in the first to third heading ranges 151 to 153 (step S5102). The wording selection process is executed using the first to third selection condition tables stored in the main ROM 73.

Before describing the text selection process (Figure 88) executed by the production side MPU 92, we will now explain the first to third selection condition tables and the configuration for determining the text images G25 to G27 to be displayed in the heading ranges 151 to 153 in the production side RAM 94.

As already explained, the first to third wording images G25 to G27 are set in the history image G23 (Figure 80 (a)). The director's ROM 93 stores a selection condition table for selecting wording designation data that designates the wording images G25 to G27 to be set in the history image G23. Figure 86 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the types of selection condition tables and the wording designation data set in the selection condition tables.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the presentation side ROM 93 stores the first to third selection condition tables before ART as selection condition tables that are read out when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs in the game state before transitioning to ART state ST6 (a state in which the ART flag is not set to "1"). The first to third selection condition tables before ART are read out when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs during the period from the end of ART state ST6 to the start of the next ART state ST6. The presentation side ROM 93 stores the first to third selection condition tables of the first period as selection condition tables to be read out when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs when the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 0 to 999, the first to third selection condition tables of the second period as selection condition tables to be read out when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs when the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 1000 to 1999, the first to third selection condition tables of the third period as selection condition tables to be read out when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs when the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 2000 to 2999, and the first to third selection condition tables of the fourth period as selection condition tables to be read out when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs when the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 3000 or more. In addition, the presentation side RAM 94 stores the first to third selection condition tables at the end of the ART as selection condition tables that are read out at the end of the ART state ST6, and stores the first to third selection condition tables at the end of the ending as selection condition tables that are read out at the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous section SC2.

Each selection condition table has 18 pieces of text designation data set, and display priority data and selection conditions are set corresponding to each piece of text designation data. As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first to third selection condition tables before ART have text designation data of "1" to "18", "19 to 36", and "37 to 54", and these text designation data include text designation data that specifies a text image (for example, a text image of "BB won twice") indicating the number of bonus wins (first to fourth BB wins and first to second RB wins). The first to third selection condition tables for the first period have text designation data of "55" to "72", "73 to 90", and "91 to 108", and these text designation data include text designation data that specifies a text image (for example, a text image of "500 coins acquired") corresponding to the number of game media awarded in the ART state ST6 being "0" to "999". The first to third selection condition tables for the second period are set with text designation data of "109" to "126", "127 to 144", and "145 to 162", and these text designation data include text designation data that designates a text image corresponding to the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 being "1000" to "1999" (for example, a text image of "More than 1000 pieces obtained!"). The first to third selection condition tables for the third period are set with text designation data of "163" to "180", "181 to 198", and "199 to 216", and these text designation data include text designation data that designates a text image corresponding to the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 being "2000" to "2999" (for example, a text image of "More than 2000 pieces obtained!"). The first to third selection condition tables for the fourth period are set with text designation data of "217" to "234", "235 to 252", and "253 to 270", and these text designation data include text designation data that designates a text image corresponding to the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 being "3000" or more (for example, a text image of "more than 3000 pieces obtained!"). The first to third selection condition tables at the end of the ART are set with text designation data of "271" to "288", "289 to 306", and "307 to 324", and these text designation data include text designation data that designates a text image corresponding to various ranges of the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 (the range of "0" to "999", the range of "1000" to "1999", the range of "2000" to "2999", and the range of "3000" or more). The first to third selection condition tables at the end of the ending have text designation data set to "325" to "342", "343 to 360", and "361 to 378", and these text designation data include text designation data that designates text images corresponding to various ranges of the number of game media awarded in ART state ST6 (the range of "0" to "999", the range of "1000" to "1999", the range of "2000" to "2999", and the range of "3000" or more).

The first to third selection condition tables corresponding to the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b are read out, and each selection condition table contains wording designation data that designates a wording image containing numbers corresponding to the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. This makes it possible to display a wording image containing numbers corresponding to the game history.

When an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs, the three corresponding selection condition tables (first selection condition table, second selection condition table, and third selection condition table) are read out, and one piece of wording designation data is selected from each of the three selection condition tables, totaling three pieces of wording designation data. Then, from the three selected wording designation data, the first wording designation data corresponding to the first wording image G25 set in the first heading range 151, the second wording designation data corresponding to the second wording image G26 set in the second heading range 152, and the third wording designation data corresponding to the third wording image G27 set in the third heading range 153 are determined.

Figure 86 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the history memory area RAn set as a reference in each selection condition table. As shown in Figure 86 (b), the 0th history memory area RA0 and the 1st history memory area RA1 are set as references in the first selection condition table before ART, which is read when a generation trigger occurs in a game state before transition to ART state ST6 (a state in which the ART flag is not set to "1"). As already explained, the 0th history memory area RA0 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games before transition to ART state ST6, and the 1st history memory area RA1 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games until either the bonus state or the ART state ST6 is started. The first selection condition table before ART is set with wording designation data that designates a wording image related to the number of games.

The second history memory area RA2 and the third history memory area RA3 are set as references in the second selection condition table before ART, which is read out when a generation trigger occurs in the game state before transitioning to ART state ST6. As already explained, the second history memory area RA2 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media that has decreased before transitioning to ART state ST6, and the third history memory area RA3 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of game media that has decreased during the period until transitioning to ART state ST6. The second selection condition table before ART has text designation data set therein that designates a text image related to the number of game media.

The third selection condition table before ART, which is read out when a generation trigger occurs in the game state before transitioning to ART state ST6, has the fourth history memory area RA4 and the fifth history memory area RA5 set as references. As already explained, the fourth history memory area RA4 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the BB state ST3 has occurred, and the fifth history memory area RA5 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the RB state ST4 has occurred. The third selection condition table before ART has wording designation data set that designates a wording image related to the number of times the bonus state (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4) has occurred.

The first selection condition table (specifically, the first selection condition table for the first to fourth periods, the first selection condition table at the end of the ART, and the first selection condition table at the end of the ending) that is read out when a generation trigger occurs after the transition to the ART state ST6 has the 0th history memory area RA0, the 2nd history memory area RA2, the 3rd history memory area RA3, and the 6th history memory area RA6 to the 8th history memory area RA8 set as references. As already explained, the 6th history memory area RA6 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times an ART win has occurred, the 7th history memory area RA7 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the role that triggers an ART win, and the 8th history memory area RA8 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the ART start performance. The first selection condition table contains text designation data that designates text images that correspond to the game history data before the transition to ART state ST6 and at the time of the transition to ART state ST6.

The second selection condition table (specifically, the second selection condition table for the first to fourth periods, the second selection condition table at the end of the ART, and the second selection condition table at the end of the ending) which is read out when a generation trigger occurs after the transition to the ART state ST6 has the fourth history memory area RA4, the fifth history memory area RA5, and the ninth history memory area RA9 to the eleventh history memory area RA11 set as reference areas. As already explained, the fourth history memory area RA4 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the BB state ST3 has occurred, the fifth history memory area RA5 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the RB state ST4 has occurred, the ninth history memory area RA9 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games played after the transition to the ART state ST6, the tenth history memory area RA10 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6, and the eleventh history memory area RA11 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6. The second selection condition table is set with wording designation data that designates a wording image related to the number of times the bonus state (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4) has occurred and the number of games and the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6.

The twelfth history memory area RA12 to the fourteenth history memory area RA14 are set as references in the third selection condition table (specifically, the third selection condition table for the first to fourth periods, the third selection condition table at the end of the ART, and the third selection condition table at the end of the ending) that is read out when a generation trigger occurs after the transition to the ART state ST6. As already explained, the twelfth history memory area RA12 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of added games in the ART state ST6, the thirteenth history memory area RA13 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of added games in the preparation state ST5, and the fourteenth history memory area RA14 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of added games in the bonus state. The third selection condition table is set with wording designation data that designates a wording image related to the number of added games.

If 54 pieces of text designation data are set in one selection condition table and three pieces of text designation data with high display priority are selected from among the pieces of text designation data that satisfy the selection conditions in the selection condition table, the types of text to be displayed are likely to overlap. For example, when the net increase in the number of sheets in the ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, the words "Net increase in the number of sheets exceeds 1200!", which is selected on the condition that the net increase in the number of sheets in the ART state ST6 is 1200 or more, and "Net increase in the number of sheets exceeds 1500!!", which is selected on the condition that the net increase in the number of sheets in the ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, may be selected simultaneously. In contrast, in this embodiment, three selection condition tables in which 18 pieces of text designation data are set are read out, and one piece of text designation data is selected from one selection condition table, thereby selecting a total of three pieces of text designation data. This prevents the contents of the text set in the history image G23 from overlapping or becoming unnatural.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, one wording designation data is selected from one selection condition table as the wording designation data to be displayed. When an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs, the selection of the wording designation data is performed based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b at the time the opportunity to generate the history configuration data occurs.

When one piece of text designation data to be displayed is selected from each selection condition table, the text designation data with the highest display priority among the text designation data whose selection conditions are satisfied in the target selection condition table is first selected as a candidate to be displayed. Each selection condition table stores up to three pieces of text designation data with the same display priority. If there is only one piece of text designation data with the highest display priority among the text designation data whose selection conditions are satisfied in the selection condition table, the one piece of text designation data is selected as a candidate to be displayed. Then, the text designation data is selected as the text designation data to be displayed. On the other hand, if there are multiple pieces of text designation data (specifically, two or three pieces) with the highest display priority among the text designation data whose selection conditions are satisfied in the selection condition table, the multiple pieces of text designation data are selected as candidates to be displayed. Then, a lottery is held to select one piece of text designation data to be displayed from the multiple pieces of text designation data (specifically, two or three pieces) selected as candidates to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the production side RAM 94 is provided with a first candidate area 171, a second candidate area 172, and a third candidate area 173. As described above, up to three pieces of wording designation data are selected as candidates for display from one selection condition table. The first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 are storage areas that store the wording designation data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as candidates for display and the display priority data of the wording designation data (3-bit numerical information from 0 to 8). Each of the candidate areas 171 to 173 has a storage capacity of 10 bits, with the wording designation data stored in the upper 7 bits and the display priority data corresponding to the wording designation data stored in the lower 3 bits.

As described above, in each selection condition table, the same display priority data is set for a maximum of three pieces of wording designation data. In the candidate areas 171 to 173, the wording designation data with the highest display priority data among the wording designation data for which the selection conditions are satisfied in the target selection condition table, and the display priority data corresponding to that wording designation data are set. If there are multiple pieces of wording designation data for which the selection conditions are satisfied and the same display priority data is set, a maximum of three combinations of wording designation data and display priority data are set in the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173.

When two or more pieces of designated wording data are set in the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173, a lottery is held to determine one piece of designated wording data that will actually be displayed from among the candidate pieces of designated wording data. In this way, because there may be multiple pieces of designated wording data that are candidates for display based on the game history data set in the history storage area 94b, the content of the history image G23 may differ even for the same game history. By increasing the variety of the history image G23, the possibility of the same history image G23 being generated is reduced, making the game more interesting.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the production side RAM 94 is provided with a first selection area 165, a second selection area 166, and a third selection area 167. The first selection area 165 is a storage area in which one wording designation data (7-bit numerical information of 1 to 96) selected as a display target from the first selection condition table and the display priority data (3-bit numerical information of 0 to 8) of the wording designation data are stored. The second selection area 166 is a storage area in which one wording designation data (7-bit numerical information of 1 to 96) selected as a display target from the second selection condition table and the display priority data (3-bit numerical information of 0 to 8) of the wording designation data are stored. The third selection area 167 is a storage area in which one wording designation data (7-bit numerical information of 1 to 96) selected as a display target from the third selection condition table and the display priority data (3-bit numerical information of 0 to 8) of the wording designation data are stored. Each selection area 165-167 has a storage capacity of 10 bits, with the upper 7 bits storing text designation data and the lower 3 bits storing display priority data corresponding to that text designation data.

Here, the selection condition table will be explained using as an example the second selection condition table at the end of ART, which is read out at the end of ART state ST6. Figure 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second selection condition table at the end of ART.

As shown in FIG. 87, the second selection condition table at the end of ART has multiple (specifically, 18) pieces of text designation data "289" to "306" set, and nine levels of display priority data and selection conditions are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of these pieces of text designation data. Specifically, each piece of text designation data is set with display priority data of one of "0" to "8," and the higher the value of the display priority data, the higher the display priority.

In the second selection condition table at the end of ART, three pieces of wording designation data with display priority data of "8", "7", and "6" are set, two pieces of wording designation data with display priority data of "5", "4", and "3" are set, and one piece of wording designation data with display priority data of "2", "1", and "0" is set. In this way, by setting many pieces of wording designation data with high display priority data values, a greater variety of words are displayed in the history image G23 when difficult-to-achieve selection conditions are met. This increases the likelihood that words the player has never seen before will be displayed when difficult selection conditions are met.

In each selection condition table, the wording designation data is set in descending order of the display priority data value. Then, the wording designation data with the largest display priority data value is set as the wording designation data to be judged, and it is judged whether the selection condition is satisfied. If it is judged that the selection condition is not satisfied, the judgment target is updated to the next wording designation data. On the other hand, if it is judged that the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data currently to be judged becomes a candidate to be displayed. If there is other wording designation data with the same display priority data as the relevant wording designation data, the wording designation data with the same display priority data is set as the judgment target, and it is judged whether the selection condition is satisfied. Then, if it is judged that the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data with the same display priority data is also a candidate to be displayed. In this way, multiple wording designation data may become candidates to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 87, specifically, regarding the second selection condition table at the end of ART, if the value of the tenth history memory area RA10 is "3000" or more, i.e., if the number of game media awarded after the transition to ART state ST6 is 3000 or more, the wording designation data of "289" with display priority data of "8" becomes a candidate for the display target. In this case, the wording designation data of "289" and the display priority data of "8" are set in the first candidate area 171.

In the second selection condition table (FIG. 87) at the end of ART, the wording designation data "290" also exists as the wording designation data with display priority data of "8". Therefore, when the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data "290" with priority data of "8" also becomes a candidate for display. Specifically, when the value of the eleventh history memory area RA11 is "1500" or more, that is, when the net increase in the number of coins after the transition to ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, the wording designation data "290" also becomes a candidate for display. In this case, the wording designation data "290" and the display priority data of "8" are set in the second candidate area 172.

In the second selection condition table (FIG. 87) at the end of ART, the wording designation data "291" also exists as the wording designation data with the display priority data of "8". Therefore, when the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data "291" with the priority data of "8" also becomes a candidate for display. Specifically, when the value of the fourth history memory area RA4 is "5" or more, that is, when the number of occurrences of BB winning is 5 or more, the wording designation data "291" also becomes a candidate for display. In this case, the wording designation data "291" and the display priority data of "8" are set in the third candidate area 173. Then, a lottery is held to select one wording designation data to be displayed from these three wording designation data (wording designation data "289" to "291"), and the wording designation data that is selected in the lottery becomes the wording designation data selected from the second selection condition table at the end of ART. Then, the selected text designation data and the display priority data of "8" corresponding to the selected text designation data are set in the second selection area 166 corresponding to the second selection condition table.

In the selection condition table, there is text designation data for which multiple selection conditions are set. That is, there is text designation data that becomes a display candidate when multiple selection conditions are satisfied. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, the text designation data for "299" in the second selection condition table at the end of ART has a selection condition that the number of game media awarded after the transition to ART state ST6 is "1000" or more, and a selection condition that the number of BB wins occurring in ART state ST6 is "2" or more. As a result, in a configuration in which the total number of text designation images G25 to G27 that can be displayed in the history image G23 is limited and the text designation data selected as a display target is limited to one among the text designation data set in one selection condition table, it is possible to display the text images G25 to G27 reflecting the contents of multiple game history data. By making it possible to display the history image G23 in which the contents of the game history data are reflected in detail, the interest of the player in the history image G23 can be increased, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Even if the result is the same for one parameter, the content of the display candidate wording can be changed by the result being different for the other parameters. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, in the second selection condition table at the end of ART, if the number of occurrences of the parameter "number of BB wins" (value of the fourth history storage area RA4) is "2" or more, if the number of awards of the parameter "number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6" (value of the tenth history storage area RA10) is "1000" or more, the wording designation data of "299" becomes a display candidate, and if the number of awards is less than "1000", the wording designation data of "300" becomes a display candidate. In this way, by setting the selection conditions for a combination of multiple parameters, it is possible to reflect the content of the game history in detail in the history image G23.

By configuring multiple thresholds for each parameter, and changing the content of the candidate display text depending on whether or not each threshold is exceeded, it is possible to make the content of the history image G23 more detailed while suppressing an increase in the number of parameters to be stored. This makes it possible to heighten the player's interest in the history image G23.

Next, the text selection process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 88. Note that the text selection process is executed in step S5102 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85).

In the text selection process, the current game state is grasped (step S5201), and the first selection condition table corresponding to the grasped game state is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S5202). Specifically, if the ART in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is not set to "1", the first selection condition table before ART is read. Also, if the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 0 to 999, the first selection condition table for the first period is read, if the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 1000 to 1999, the first selection condition table for the second period is read, if the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 2000 to 2999, the first selection condition table for the third period is read, and if the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 3000 or more, the first selection condition table for the fourth period is read. Furthermore, when the ART state ST6 ends, the first selection condition table at the end of the ART is read, and when the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 ends, the first selection condition table at the end of the ending is read.

Then, the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 in the presentation side RAM 94 are cleared (step S5203), and one piece of wording designation data is set as the judgment target from among the wording designation data set in the selection condition table read into the presentation side RAM 94 (step S5204). In step S5204, the wording designation data is set as the judgment target in order from the wording designation data with the highest display priority in the selection condition table. Then, a wording determination process is executed for the wording designation data set as the judgment target in step S5204 (step S5205). In the wording determination process, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b of the presentation side RAM 94 is compared against the selection condition table read into the presentation side RAM 94 to determine whether or not the selection conditions set for the judgment target wording data are satisfied.

If the selection conditions set in the wording data to be judged are not satisfied (step S5206: NO), it is judged whether or not the wording designation data is set in the first candidate area 171 in the production side RAM 94 (step S5207), and if the wording designation data is not set (step S5207: NO), the process returns to step S5204. Then, the wording designation data to be judged is updated in the selection condition table read out to the production side RAM 94. Then, the process of steps S5204 to S5207 is repeatedly executed until a positive judgment is made in step S5206. In each selection condition table, the wording designation data with the lowest display priority data of "0" and no selection condition set is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, the second selection condition table at the end of ART has the wording designation data of "306" with the display priority data of "0" and no selection condition set. Therefore, if none of the selection conditions set in the selection condition table are satisfied, the processes in steps S5204 to S5207 are repeated, and ultimately the text-designated data for which no selection conditions are set is set as the object of judgment, and a positive judgment is made in step S5206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5206 that the selection conditions set in the target text designation data are satisfied, the target text designation data and the display priority data corresponding to the target text designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5208). In step S5208, if text designation data has already been set in the first candidate area 171, the target text designation data and the display priority data corresponding to the target text designation data are set in the second candidate area 172. Also, if text designation data has already been set in the first candidate area 171 and the second candidate area 172, the target text designation data and the display priority data corresponding to the target text designation data are set in the third candidate area 173. As described above, text designation data for which no selection conditions are set is set in each selection condition table, and if none of the selection conditions set in the selection condition table are satisfied, the text designation data for which no selection conditions are set is selected as a candidate for the display target. For this reason, any text designation data and display priority data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173.

If it is determined in step S5207 that wording designation data is set in the first candidate area 171, or if wording designation data and display priority data are set in the candidate areas 171-173 in step S5208, it is determined whether there is other wording designation data in the selection condition table that has the same display priority data as the set wording designation data and has not yet been determined (step S5209). If a positive determination is made in step S5209, the process returns to step S5204, and the other wording designation data that has the same display priority as the wording data set in the first candidate area 171 is set as the determination target (step S5204), and wording determination processing is performed on the other wording designation data (step S5205).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5209, it is judged whether or not multiple pieces of wording designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5210). If multiple pieces of wording designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5210: YES), a lottery process for wording designation data is executed to select one piece of wording designation data to be set in the selection areas 165 to 167 of the production side RAM 94 from the multiple pieces of wording designation data (step S5211).

In the lottery process for the wording designation data (step S5211), a lottery table for wording designation corresponding to the number of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is read from the production-side ROM 93. The production-side ROM 93 stores a lottery table for first wording designation that is read when the number of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "2", and a lottery table for second wording designation that is read when the number of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "3". In these lottery tables for wording designation, the winning probability is set so that the winning probability of each wording designation data is the same or approximately the same. After that, a random number updated in the production-side RAM 94 is obtained. Then, the obtained random number is compared with the lottery table for wording to identify one wording designation data to be selected as a display target from the current selection condition table.

Then, by referring to the image reproduction memory area 94c, it is determined whether the text designation data selected in the lottery process (step S5211) of the text designation data is the same as the text designation data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past (step S5212). In step S5212, it is determined whether the text designation data (any numerical information of "1" to "378") specified in the lottery process (step S5211) of the text designation data is included in the history configuration data stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction memory area 94c, and a positive determination is made if the text designation data is included in the history configuration data stored in any of the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31. Since the text designation data is a serial number of "1" to "378", the process of determining whether the text designation data specified in the lottery process (step S5211) of the text designation data is included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past is simplified.

If a positive determination is made in step S5212, a process for changing the designated text data is executed (step S5213). In the process for changing the designated text data, a different text data from the text data that was selected in the text data selection lottery table (first text data selection lottery table or second text data selection lottery table) used in the text data selection lottery process (step S5211) is selected as the text data to be displayed. Specifically, when the first text data selection lottery table is read in the text data selection lottery process (step S5211), if the text data that was selected is the text data set in the first candidate area 171, the text data set in the second candidate area 172 is selected as the text data to be displayed, and if the text data that was selected is the text data set in the second candidate area 172, the text data set in the first candidate area 171 is selected as the text data to be displayed. In addition, when the lottery table for second text designation is read out in the lottery process for text designation data (step S5211), if the winning text designation data is the text designation data set in the first candidate area 171, the text designation data set in the second candidate area 172 is reselected as the text designation data to be displayed, if the winning text designation data is the text designation data set in the second candidate area 172, the text designation data set in the third candidate area 173 is reselected as the text designation data to be displayed, and if the winning text designation data is the text designation data set in the third candidate area 173, the text designation data set in the first candidate area 171 is reselected as the text designation data to be displayed.

Then, it is determined whether the text designation data selected in step S5213 is the same as the text designation data included in the history configuration data previously generated and stored (step S5214). In step S5214, it is determined whether the text designation data (any of numerical information "1" to "378") selected in the text designation data change process (step S5213) is included in the history configuration data stored in the 0th to 31st playback memory areas RD0 to RD31 of the image playback memory area 94c, and a positive determination is made if the text designation data is included in the history configuration data stored in any of the 0th to 31st playback memory areas RD0 to RD31. If a negative determination is made in step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5217. In this case, the text designation data selected in the text designation data change process (step S5213) becomes the text designation data to be displayed.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S5214, it is judged whether there is other wording designation data that has not been judged as to whether it is identical to the wording designation data included in the history configuration data previously generated and stored in the wording designation lottery table used in the lottery process for the wording designation data (step S5211) (step S5215). If the number of wording designation data selected as candidates to be displayed from the selection condition table is two, a negative judgment is made in step S5215, and if the number of wording designation data selected as candidates to be displayed is three, a positive judgment is made in step S5215.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5215, the process returns to step S5213, and the processes of steps S5213 to S5215 are repeated. In this case, in the change process of the designated text data (step S5213), if the designated text data set in the first candidate area 171 is selected as the display target, the designated text data set in the second candidate area 172 is reselected as the display target, if the designated text data set in the second candidate area 172 is selected as the display target, the designated text data set in the third candidate area 173 is reselected as the display target, and if the designated text data set in the third candidate area 173 is selected as the display target, the designated text data set in the first candidate area 171 is reselected as the display target. Thereafter, it is judged whether the designated text data selected in step S5213 is the same as the designated text data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past (step S5214). If a negative judgment is made in step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5217. In this case, the third text designation data selected in the text designation data change process (step S5213) becomes the text designation data to be displayed. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5215.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5215, the text designation data that was initially selected in the text designation data lottery process (step S5211) is reselected as the text designation data to be displayed (step S5216), and the process proceeds to step S5217.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5210, if a negative judgment is made in step S5212, if a negative judgment is made in step S5214, or if the processing of step S5216 is performed, the wording designation data selected as the wording designation data to be set in the history configuration data and the display priority data of the wording designation data are stored in the selection areas 165 to 167 corresponding to the current selection condition table (step S5217). Specifically, if the current selection condition table is the first selection condition table, the wording designation data and the display priority data are stored in the first selection area 165, if the current selection condition table is the second selection condition table, they are stored in the second selection area 166, and if the current selection condition table is the third selection condition table, they are stored in the third selection area 167.

After that, if the current selection condition table is not the third selection condition table (step S5218: NO), the selection condition table is updated (step S5219) and the process returns to step S5203. In step S5219, the selection condition tables read into the production side RAM 94 are cleared in the order of the first selection condition table → the second selection condition table → the third selection condition table, and the next selection condition table is read.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5218 that the current selection condition table is any of the third selection condition tables, this means that the selection of the three wording designation data to be set in the history configuration data has been completed, so the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 are cleared (step S5220), and the main text selection process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the history configuration data generation process (Figure 85), after the text selection process is performed in step S5102, a heading setting process is executed (step S5103) in which the three text designation data selected in the text selection process are placed in the first to third heading ranges 151 to 153 (Figure 80 (a)) of the history image G23. Figure 89 is a flowchart showing the heading setting process.

In the heading setting process, the maximum of the three display priority data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167 is first identified (step S5301), and the combination of text designation data and display priority data including the identified maximum display priority data is set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 in the production side RAM 94 (step S5302). In step S5302, if there is one combination of text data and display priority data including the maximum display priority data, the combination is set in the first candidate area 171, if there are two combinations of text data and display priority data including the maximum display priority data, the two combinations are set in the first candidate area 171 and the second candidate area 172, and if there are three combinations of text data and display priority data including the maximum display priority data, the three combinations are set in the first candidate area 171, the second candidate area 172, and the third candidate area 173.

Then, the priority adjustment process is executed (step S5303). In the priority adjustment process, when multiple pieces of text designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173, the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction memory area 94c are referenced to grasp the text designation data that is the same as the text designation data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past among the multiple pieces of text designation data. Then, when a part of the text designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is the same as the text designation data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, the combination of the text designation data and the display priority data that includes the same text designation data is deleted from the candidate areas 171 to 173. As a result, when multiple pieces of text designation data having the same display priority exist in the candidate areas 171 to 173, it is possible to preferentially set the text designation data that is not included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past to the top heading ranges 151 to 153. On the other hand, in the priority adjustment process (step S5303), if all of the multiple pieces of text designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 are not included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, and if all of the multiple pieces of text designation data are included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, the combinations of text designation data and display priority data are not deleted. Therefore, all of the combinations of text designation data and display priority data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 are not deleted.

After that, if there are multiple pieces of text designation data in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5304: YES), a lottery process for the text designation data is executed (step S5305). In step S5305, the same process as the lottery process for the text designation data in step S5211 of the text selection process (FIG. 88) already described is executed. Specifically, a lottery table for designating text corresponding to the number of pieces of text designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is read from the production-side ROM 93. Specifically, if the number of pieces of text designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "2", a lottery table for designating first text is read, and if the number of pieces of text designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "3", a lottery table for designating second text is read. As already described, the winning probabilities are set in these lottery tables for designating text so that the winning probabilities of each piece of text designation data are the same or approximately the same. Then, the random number updated in the production-side RAM 94 is obtained. The acquired random number is then compared against a lottery table for designating text, thereby identifying one piece of text designation data from among the multiple pieces of text designation data set in candidate areas 171-173. After that, combinations of text designation data and display priority data other than the combination of text designation data and display priority data that includes the identified text designation data are deleted from candidate areas 171-173. As a result, only one combination of text designation data and display priority data is set in candidate areas 171-173.

When a negative judgment is made in step S5304, or when the process of step S5305 is executed, a combination of a set of wording designation data and display priority data set in the candidate areas 171-173 is set in the highest available counter among the first to third wording counters 161a-161c in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5306). Specifically, the combination of wording designation data and display priority data is set in the first wording counter 161a when no data is set in any of the first to third wording counters 161a-161c, is set in the second wording counter 161b when data is set only in the first wording counter 161a, and is set in the third wording counter 161c when data is set in the first wording counter 161a and the second wording counter 161b.

Then, the selection areas 165 to 167 in which the combination of text designation data and display priority data set in the configuration data storage area 161 in step S5306 was set are cleared (step S5307), and the candidate areas 171 to 173 are cleared (step S5308).

Then, it is determined whether or not the wording designation data and the display priority data are set in the third wording counter 161c in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5309). If a negative determination is made in step S5309, the process returns to step S5301, and steps S5301 to S5308 are repeated until a positive determination is made in step S5309. As a result, the three wording designation data and the display priority data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167 are stored in the first to third wording counters 161a to 161c in the configuration data storage area 161. If a positive determination is made in step S5309, the heading setting process is terminated.

As already explained, the type of character image G28 displayed in the history image G23 corresponds to the type of the first text image G25, and the production-side MPU 92 determines the types of the first text image G25 and character image G28 to be displayed based on the first text designation data. Therefore, by storing text designation data in the first text counter 161a of the configuration data storage area 161 in the heading setting process (FIG. 89), the type of the first text image G25 included in the history image G23 is determined, and the type of the character image G28 included in the history image G23 is also determined. Since the type of the character image G28 is determined based on the first text designation data, the storage capacity of the production-side RAM 94 for making it possible to determine the type of the character image G28 included in the history image G23 is reduced compared to a configuration in which data for determining the type of the character image G28 is stored separately from the first text designation data.

Returning to the explanation of the history configuration data generation process (Figure 85), after the heading setting process is performed in step S5103, it is determined whether the value of the 15th history memory area RA15 is "1" (step S5104). If the value of the 15th history memory area RA15 is "1" (step S5104: YES), this means that the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 has been executed, so the ending image setting process is executed (step S5105). In the ending image setting process, the ending image flag 161d in the configuration data memory area 161 is set to "1". As a result, the ending image G29 is included in the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data.

In this way, when the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 is executed, the ending image flag 161d is set to "1" without a lottery or the like being held. Therefore, the player can confirm at any time that the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 has been executed by displaying the history image, without having to record the ending performance with a camera or the like while the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 is being executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5104, or if the processing of step S5105 is performed, a point calculation process is executed (step S5106) to calculate the total of history points corresponding to the wording designation data set in the first to third wording counters 161a to 161c in the configuration data storage area 161 and the game history data set in the history storage area 94b of the presentation side RAM 94. Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the point calculation process.

In the point calculation process, first, the heading point table is read from the production-side ROM 93 (step S5401). Figure 91 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the heading point table. As shown in Figure 91 (a), in the heading point table, history points are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the display priority data from "0" to "8."

Returning to the explanation of the point calculation process (FIG. 90), after reading the heading point table in step S5401, the history point setting process is executed (step S5402). In the history point setting process, the display priority data set in the first wording counter 161a of the configuration data storage area 161 is collated with the heading point table read in step S5401 to identify the history point corresponding to the first wording designation data, and the identified history point is set in the history point counter 161e in the configuration data storage area 161. As already explained, the history point counter 161e is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the history point of the history image G23. In addition, in the history point setting process (step S5402), the display priority data set in the second wording counter 161b is collated with the heading point table to identify the history point corresponding to the second wording designation data, and the display priority data set in the third wording counter 161c is collated with the heading point table to identify the history point corresponding to the third wording designation data. Then, the two identified history points are added to the value of the history point counter 161e. As a result, the total value of the history points corresponding to the first wording designation data, the second wording designation data, and the third wording designation data is set in the history point counter 161e.

After that, it is determined whether the ART in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5403). If the ART in progress flag is set to "1" (step S5403: YES), this means that the trigger for generating the current history configuration data occurred after the transition to the ART state ST6, so the additional point table is read from the presentation side ROM 93 (step S5404). Figure 91 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional point table. As shown in Figure 91 (b), the additional point table has the following set: "number of games played in ART state ST6 x 1", "number of bonus wins x 500", and "total number of added games in ART state ST6 x 10".

Returning to the explanation of the point calculation process (FIG. 90), after reading the additional point table in step S5404, the additional point addition process is executed (step S5405), and this point calculation process is terminated. In the additional point addition process, the number of games played in ART state ST6 is grasped by referring to the ninth history memory area RA9 of the history memory area 94b, and the additional points of "number of games played in ART state ST6 x 1" are added to the history point counter 161e in the configuration data memory area 161. In addition, after calculating the sum of the value of the fourth history memory area RA4 (number of times BB wins occurred) and the value of the fifth history memory area RA5 (number of times RB wins occurred) in the history memory area 94b, the additional points of "number of times bonus wins occurred x 500" are calculated and added to the history point counter 161e. Furthermore, the total number of added games in ART state ST6 is determined by referring to the 12th history memory area RA12 of the history memory area 94b, and the additional points of "total number of added games in ART state ST6 x 10" are calculated and added to the history point counter 161e. This results in the history points of the history image G23 being set in the history point counter 161e.

Returning to the explanation of the history configuration data generation process (Figure 85), after the point calculation process is executed in step S5106, a process for ranking the history image G23 (steps S5107 to S5108) is performed. Specifically, a rank correspondence table is read from the production-side ROM 93 (step S5107). In the rank correspondence table, multiple ranks are set for the history image G23, and the range of history points corresponding to each rank is set.

Then, a rank setting process is executed (step S5108). In the rank setting process, the rank corresponding to the current history image G23 is identified by comparing the history points calculated in the point calculation process in step S5106 with the rank correspondence table read out in step S5107. Then, the rank image designation data corresponding to the identified rank is set in the rank counter 161f in the configuration data storage area 161.

In the rank setting process in step S5108, specifically, if the history point counter 161e in the configuration data storage area 161 is set to any of the history points "0" to "2499", the rank counter 161f is set to rank image designation data corresponding to "C rank". If the history point counter 161e is set to any of the history points "2500" to "5999", the rank counter 161f is set to rank image designation data corresponding to "B rank". If the history point counter 161e is set to any of the history points "6000" to "9999", the rank counter 161f is set to rank image designation data corresponding to "A rank". If the history point counter 161e is set to any of the history points "10000" to "14999", the rank counter 161f is set to rank image designation data corresponding to "S rank". If the history point counter 161e is set to any of the history points "15000" or more, the rank counter 161f is set to rank image designation data corresponding to "SS rank".

After that, a plate setting process is executed to set the background plate image G24, the base plate image, and the common background plate image (step S5109). Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the plate setting process.

In the plate setting process, it is first determined whether the ART end generation flag 174 or the ending end generation flag 175 in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5501). If a positive determination is made in step S5501, the total number of games played from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6 is calculated (step S5502). Specifically, the total number of games is calculated by calculating the sum of the value of the 0th history memory area RA0 (the number of games played until the start of ART state ST6) and the value of the 9th history memory area RA9 (the number of games played in ART state ST6).

Then, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is identified (step S5503), and a plate lottery table corresponding to the combination of the total number of games calculated in step S5502 and the setting value identified in step S5503 is read from the presentation-side ROM 93 (step S5504). As already explained, the presentation-side MPU 92 grasps the current setting value based on the numerical information set in the setting end command received from the main-side MPU 72. The setting end command is sent in the winning probability setting process (step S106 of the main process (Figure 11)).

Figure 93(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6 that are read out when the total number of games played from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6 is between "0" and "1000", Figure 93(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of plate lottery tables PB1 to PB6 that are read out when the total number of games is between "1001" and "2000", and Figure 93(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of plate lottery tables PD1 to PD6 that are read out when the total number of games is "2001" or more.

In the presentation side ROM 93, 18 plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6, PB1 to PB6, PD1 to PD6 are stored in one-to-one correspondence with each of the 18 combinations of total game count ranges (0 to 1000 games, 1001 to 2000 games, and 2001 or more games) and setting values (Setting 1 to Setting 6).

If the total number of games is between "0" and "1000", the plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6 corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are read out, if the total number of games is between "1001" and "2000", the plate lottery tables PB1 to PB6 corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are read out, and if the total number of games is "2001" or more, the plate lottery tables PD1 to PD6 corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are read out.

In this slot machine 10, as background plate images G24 (FIG. 80(a)) of the history image G23, there are a white plate image that can be displayed in the cases of "setting 1", "setting 3" and "setting 5", a copper plate image that can be displayed in the cases of "setting 2", "setting 4" and "setting 6", a silver plate image that can be displayed in the cases of "setting 4" to "setting 6", a gold plate image that can be displayed in the cases of "setting 5" and "setting 6", and a rainbow plate image that can be displayed in the case of "setting 6". When a white plate image is displayed, it is possible to know that the setting value is an odd number, when a copper plate image is displayed, it is possible to know that the setting value is an even number, when a silver plate image is displayed, it is possible to know that the setting value is "4" or more, when a gold plate image is displayed, it is possible to know that the setting value is "5" or more, and when a rainbow plate image is displayed, it is possible to know that the setting value is "6".

The higher the total number of games in a section, the lower the probability of winning any of the background plate images G24 when the setting value is low, and the higher the probability of winning any of the background plate images G24 when the setting value is high. Specifically, the probability of winning any of the background plate images G24 in "Setting 1" and "Setting 2" is set to the highest in the first section, the second highest in the second section, and the lowest in the third section. The probability of winning any of the background plate images G24 in "Setting 3" and "Setting 4" is set to be the same in the first to third sections. The probability of winning any of the background plate images G24 in "Setting 5" and "Setting 6" is set to the lowest in the first section, the second highest in the second section, and the highest in the third section.

When a white plate image is displayed in the first section, there is an approximately 36% probability of "setting 1", an approximately 36% probability of "setting 3", and an approximately 27% probability of "setting 5". When a white plate image is displayed in the second section, there is an approximately 9% probability of "setting 1", an approximately 36% probability of "setting 3", and an approximately 55% probability of "setting 5". When a white plate image is displayed in the third section, there is an approximately 2% probability of "setting 1", an approximately 30% probability of "setting 3", and an approximately 68% probability of "setting 5". When a copper plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a 40% probability of "setting 2", an approximately 30% probability of "setting 4", and an approximately 30% probability of "setting 6". When a copper plate image is displayed in the second section, there is an approximately 8% probability of "setting 2", an approximately 23% probability of "setting 4", and an approximately 69% probability of "setting 6". When a copper plate image is displayed in the third section, there is a probability of about 1% for "setting 2", about 16% for "setting 4", and about 82% for "setting 6". When a silver plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a probability of about 33% for "setting 4", about 33% for "setting 5", and about 33% for "setting 6". When a silver plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a probability of about 16% for "setting 4", about 33% for "setting 5", and about 50% for "setting 6". When a silver plate image is displayed in the third section, there is a probability of about 11% for "setting 4", about 33% for "setting 5", and about 56% for "setting 6". When a gold plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a probability of about 50% for "setting 5", and about 50% for "setting 6". If a gold plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a 40% probability that it is "Setting 5" and a 60% probability that it is "Setting 6." If a gold plate image is displayed in the third section, there is an approximately 38% probability that it is "Setting 5" and an approximately 63% probability that it is "Setting 6."

For the white plate image, copper plate image, silver plate image, and gold plate image, in the section where the total number of games is small, the probability of the setting value corresponding to the background plate image G24 being on the lower side is high, and in the section where the total number of games is large, the probability of the setting value being on the higher side is high. Therefore, when these background plate images G24 are displayed in the history image G23, the player can predict the setting value of the slot machine 10 from the combination of the type of the displayed background plate image G24 and the total number of games. By presenting information suggesting the setting value, the player can guess the setting value, which increases the interest of the game. Also, when a rainbow plate image is displayed, the player can be sure that the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "6". In this case, the player can play while being sure that the setting value is advantageous to the player.

Returning to the explanation of the plate setting process (FIG. 92), after reading out one of the plate lottery tables PA1-PA6, PB1-PB6, or PD1-PD6 in step S5504, the plate lottery process is executed (step S5505). In the plate lottery process, a random number updated in the production side RAM 94 is obtained, and the random number is compared with the plate lottery table read out in step S5504 to determine whether the background plate image G24 has been selected and the type of the selected background plate image G24. If any background plate image G24 has been selected in the plate lottery process (step S5506: YES), the background plate image designation data corresponding to the selected background plate image G24 is set in the background plate counter 161g in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5507), and the plate setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the trigger for generating the current history configuration data does not occur at the end of the ART state ST6 or at the end of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 (step S5501: NO), the plate lottery is not performed. If a negative judgment is made in step S5501, a net increase in number grasping process is executed to grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media after the transition to the ART state ST6 (step S5508). In the net increase in number grasping process, the net increase in the number of gaming media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is grasped by referring to the 11th history memory area RA11. If it is before the transition to the ART state ST6 (if the ART in progress flag in the performance side RAM94 is not set to "1"), the net increase in the number of gaming media is set to "0" in the net increase in number grasping process (step S5508).

Then, a base data table in which base plate image designation data is set corresponding to the range of net increase in number is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S5509). The base data table is then compared with the net increase in the number of game media determined in step S5508 to identify the base plate image designation data (step S5510), and the identified base plate image designation data is set in the base plate counter 161h in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5511), terminating this plate setting process. In the base data table, the net increase in number of coins is divided into the following ranges: "0-499 coins", "500-1000 coins", "1001-1499 coins", "1500-1999 coins", "2000-2499 coins", "2500-2999 coins", and "3000 coins or more", and the base plate image designation data is set so that as the number of coins acquired increases, the color of the base plate image changes in the following order: normal color, black, blue, green, red, silver, and gold.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501, or if a negative determination is made in step S5506, the value of the background plate counter 161g in the configuration data storage area 161 becomes "0". As already explained, if the value of the background plate counter 161g is "0", the history image G23 contains a common background plate image.

Returning to the explanation of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after the plate setting process is performed in step S5109, the current date and time data (specifically, date information and time information) is obtained from the RTC (not shown) in the performance control board 91, and the date and time data is set in the date and time data counter 161j in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5110). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know the date and time when the history image G23 was generated.

Then, a process for setting the generation trigger data is executed (step S5111). In the process for setting the generation trigger data, the generation trigger data corresponding to the type of generation trigger of the history configuration data is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k (Figure 81 (b)) of the configuration data storage area 161. Specifically, if the first segment generation flag 176a in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1", the generation trigger counter 161k stores "1", if the second segment generation flag 176b is set to "1", the generation trigger counter 161k stores "2", if the third segment generation flag 176c is set to "1", the generation trigger counter 161k stores "3", if the ART end generation flag 174 is set to "1", the generation trigger counter 161k stores "4", if the ending end generation flag 175 is set to "1", the generation trigger counter 161k stores "5", and if the mid-way generation flag 177 is set to "1", the generation trigger counter 161k stores "6".

After that, a setting process for history configuration data is performed (step S5112). In the setting process for history configuration data, the history configuration data generated this time is stored in the image playback memory area 94c. In step S5112, if "1" is set in any of the ART end generation flag 174, the ending end generation flag 175, and the first to third delimiter generation flags 176a to 176c in the performance side RAM 94, the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 30) corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared in the image playback memory area 94c, and the history configuration data set in the configuration data memory area 161 is set in the playback memory area RDn. As already explained, each playback memory area RDn is provided with a display enable flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp whether the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the playback memory area RDn can be displayed on the image display device 63. When history configuration data is stored in the playback memory area RDn, the display enable flag of the playback memory area RDn is set to "1." This makes it possible to display the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the playback memory area RDn on the image display device 63.

As already explained with reference to FIG. 81(a), the production side RAM 94 is provided with a first protected object counter 163 and a second protected object counter 164 that enable the determination of the playback memory area RDn that is to be excluded from deletion. If the history point of the history configuration data stored in the playback memory area RDn in step S5112 is equal to or greater than the history point in the second protected object counter 164, the playback memory area RDn in which the history configuration data with the second highest history point is stored is removed from the protection target, and the playback memory area RDn in which the current history configuration data is stored is set as the protection target.

In the process of setting the history configuration data (step S5112), the value of the write pointer 162 is then updated by adding 1. If the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 corresponds to the playback storage area RDn to be protected, the value of the write pointer 162 is further updated. Furthermore, if the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 162, "30", the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared to "0". In the process of setting the history configuration data (step S5112), after the value of the write pointer 162 is updated, the configuration data storage area 161 is cleared.

In the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), if the mid-generation flag 177 in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1", the 31st playback memory area RD31 in the image playback memory area 94c is cleared, and the history configuration data set in the configuration data memory area 161 is set to the 31st playback memory area RD31. After that, the configuration data memory area 161 is cleared.

In the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after executing the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), it is determined whether the ART end generation flag 174 or the ending end generation flag 175 in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5113). If a positive determination is made in step S5113, a game history data clearing process is executed (step S5114). In the game history data clearing process (step S5114), the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are cleared. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of times an ART win has occurred.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5113, it is determined whether the mid-generation in progress flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5115). If a positive determination is made in step S5115, the mid-generation end flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5116). The mid-generation end flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the generation of the history configuration data, which was started in response to an operation to mid-generate the history image G23, has ended.

If the processing of step S5114 is performed, if a negative judgment is made in step S5115, or if the processing of step S5116 is performed, the corresponding generation flag is cleared to "0" (step S5117), and the generation processing of this history configuration data is terminated. In step S5117, if the ART end generation flag 174 is set to "1", the ART end generation flag 174 is cleared to "0", if the ending end generation flag 175 is set to "1", the ending end generation flag 175 is cleared to "0", if the midway generation flag 177 is set to "1", the midway generation flag 177 is cleared to "0", and if any of the first to third segment generation flags 176a to 176c is set to "1", the segment generation flag 176a to 176c to which the "1" is set is cleared to "0".

Next, the game start response processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 94. Note that the game start response processing is executed in step S4804 of the history image processing (FIG. 82) when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the master side MPU 72.

In the game start response process, first, it is determined whether or not a history display is being executed (step S5601). In step S5601, a positive determination is made if the image display device 63 is displaying any of the history image G23, the history menu screen described later, the mode selection screen, the heading list, and the ranking screen. The production side RAM 94 is provided with a history image display flag, a mode selection flag, a heading list display flag, and a ranking display flag. The history image display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63, the mode selection flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the mode selection screen is being displayed on the image display device 63, the heading list display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the heading list display is being performed on the image display device 63, and the ranking display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the ranking screen is being displayed on the image display device 63. In step S5601, if any of these flags are set to "1", a positive determination is made.

If a positive determination is made in step S5601, a process for terminating the history display is executed (step S5602). In the process for terminating the history display, the display data for displaying the history image G23 set in the display setting area 113, the history menu screen, the mode selection screen, the heading list, or the ranking screen described below is cleared. This ends the display of the history image G23, the history menu screen, the mode selection screen, the heading list, or the ranking screen that has been performed on the image display device 63.

Then, a flag clear process for the history display is executed (step S5603). In the flag clear process for the history display, the flags in the production side RAM 94 that are set to "1" among the history image display flag, the mode selection flag, the headline list display flag, and the ranking display flag are cleared to "0". Then, the history operation valid flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5604). The history operation valid flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that a state in which various selections can be made for displaying a history image based on the operation of the production operation device 64 is possible. The state in which the history operation valid flag is set to "1" corresponds to a state in which various selections can be made for displaying a history image based on the operation of the production operation device 64. By clearing the history operation valid flag to "0" based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, it is possible to make it impossible to make various selections for displaying a history image during the production of a game.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5601, or if the processing of step S5604 is performed, it is judged whether or not the value of the pop display counter provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is "1" or more (step S5605). In this slot machine 10, when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the end of the ending presentation of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data is generated triggered by the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaching a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"), a pop image indicating that a new history image G23 can be displayed is displayed on the image display device 63. Specifically, a pop image including the words "History image can now be displayed" is displayed on the lower right side of the image display device 63. This allows the player to recognize that a new history image G23 can now be displayed. The pop display ends when the corresponding history image display is performed. The pop display also ends when three games have been played without the corresponding history image display being performed. The pop-up counter is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to know whether or not three games have been played since the pop-up display started. The pop-up counter is set to "3" when the pop-up display starts.

If a positive determination is made in step S5605, the value of the pop display counter is decremented by 1 (step S5606). Then, if the value of the pop display counter after decrementing by 1 becomes "0" (step S5607: YES), a process for terminating the pop display is executed (step S5608). In this process, the display data for the pop display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. This terminates the pop display performed on the image display device 63.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5605, if a negative judgment is made in step S5607, or if the processing of step S5608 is performed, it is judged whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (step S5609). If a positive judgment is made in step S5609, date and time data (specifically, date information and time information) is obtained from the RTC in the performance control board 91 (step S5610), the obtained date and time data is set in a reference time counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S5611), and the game start corresponding processing is terminated. In this slot machine 10, when 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1 without the performance side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and it is predicted that the player will leave the seat, the setting of the history storage mode is released. The performance side MPU 92 uses the date and time data set in the reference time counter in step S5611 to judge whether or not 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1.

Next, the history image management process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 95. Note that the history image management process is executed in step S4805 of the history image process (FIG. 82).

In the history image management process, it is first determined whether or not an OFF operation command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5701). As already explained, the OFF operation command is sent when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned OFF. If a positive determination is made in step S5701, the history operation valid flag in the performance RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5702). This makes it possible to make various selections for displaying history images based on the operation of the performance operation device 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S5701, or if the processing of step S5702 is performed, end performance response processing is executed (step S5703). Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the end performance response processing.

In the end performance response process, first, it is determined whether or not an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5801). If a positive determination is made in step S5801, the ART end generation flag 174 provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5802). As a result, a positive determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation process (Figure 85) already described, and history configuration data is generated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5801, it is judged whether or not an ending end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5803). If a positive judgment is made in step S5803, the ending end generation flag 175 provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5804). As a result, a positive judgment is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation process (Figure 85) already described, and history configuration data is generated.

When the process of step S5802 or step S5804 is performed, a notice pop display start process is executed (step S5805). In this slot machine 10, while the end performance of the ART state ST6 or the ending end performance is being executed, a notice pop display is performed on the image display device 63 to notify the player that a new history image G23 will be able to be displayed after the end of these end performances. In the notice pop display, a notice pop image including the text "History image preparation" is displayed on the lower right side of the image display device 63. In the notice pop display start process (step S5805), display data for displaying the notice pop image on the image display device 63 is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, the notice pop image is displayed on the lower right side of the image display device 63. By performing the notice pop display, the player is made aware that the history image G23 will be able to be displayed after the end performance of the ART state ST6 or the ending end performance is completed, and the possibility of performing an operation to display the history image G23 corresponding to the newly generated history configuration data can be increased.

Then, the preview display flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5806). The preview display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that a preview pop display is being executed. Then, the history operation valid flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5807), and this end production response process is terminated. By clearing the history operation valid flag to "0", it becomes impossible to make various selections for displaying history images based on the operation of the production operation device 64.

Returning to the explanation of the history image management process (Figure 95), after executing the end performance response process in step S5703, it is determined whether the preview display flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5704). If a positive determination is made in step S5704, this means that the image display device 63 is in a state where the ART state ST6 end performance or ending end performance and the preview pop display are being performed, so the value of the performance side performance timer counter in the performance side RAM 94 is updated by subtracting 1 (step S5705).

After that, it is determined whether the value of the production-side timer counter after being updated in step S5705 has become "0" (step S5706), and if the value of the production-side timer counter has become "0" (step S5706: YES), an end process for the preview pop display is executed (step S5707). In this end process, the display data for the preview pop display set in the display setting area 113 is deleted. As a result, the preview pop image is no longer displayed on the image display device 63, and the preview pop display ends. After that, the preview display in progress flag in the production-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5708), and the history operation valid flag in the production-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5709). This makes it possible to make various selections for displaying the history image based on the operation of the production operation device 64.

After that, a pop-up display start process is executed (step S5710). In this start process, display data for displaying a pop-up image on the image display device 63 is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, a pop-up image containing the text "History images can now be displayed" is displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the image display device 63, and the pop-up display starts. After that, the pop-up counter in the production-side RAM 94 is set to "3" (step S5711).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5704, if a negative judgment is made in step S5706, or if the processing of step S5711 is performed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (step S5712). If a positive judgment is made in step S5712, the current date and time data (specifically, date information and time information) is obtained from the RTC (not shown) in the performance control board 91 (step S5713), and based on the obtained date and time data and the date and time data set in the reference time counter in the performance side RAM 94, it is determined whether or not 10 minutes have passed since the start lever 41 was last operated (step S5714).

If a positive determination is made in step S5714, a clear process of the displayable flags is executed (step S5715). In this clear process, all displayable flags set to "1" among the displayable flags provided in each of the reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction memory area 94c are cleared to "0". As a result, it becomes impossible to select and display on the image display device 63 the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31 so far. In the normal game state ST1, if 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 and the performance side MPU 92 has not received a game start command, and it becomes possible to predict that the player will leave his/her seat, it becomes impossible to select and display on the image display device 63 the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the state and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31. This makes it possible to prevent the act of guessing the setting value by referring to the past history images G23 of players other than the player himself/herself.

When it is predicted that the player will leave the seat, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed, but the history configuration data stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31 remains without being deleted. As already explained, the image reproduction memory area 94c is a memory area to which backup power is supplied after the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off, so even if the power supply to the performance side MPU 92 is stopped because the power supply to the slot machine 10 is OFF, information is stored and retained in the image reproduction memory area 94c. Therefore, when new history configuration data is generated, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the same wording designation data as the wording designation data contained in these history configuration data will be selected. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a history image G23 containing wording images G25 to G27 that have never been seen before will be displayed.

After that, a game history data clearing process is executed (step S5716). In the game history data clearing process, the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are cleared in the same manner as the game history data clearing process in step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85). In this way, when 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command and it is predicted that the player will leave his/her seat, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0" except for the game history data indicating the number of ART wins. This makes it possible to prevent the game history data of the next player to sit down from being mixed with the game history data of the player who sat down before that player. After that, the history storage flag 158 in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). This will exit the game history mode.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the pop display counter in the presentation side RAM 94 is "1" or greater (step S5118), and if the value of the pop display counter is "1" or greater (step S5118: YES), a pop display termination process is executed (step S5119). In this termination process, the display data for the pop display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared, similar to step S5608 of the game start process (Figure 94). This ends the pop display performed on the image display device 63. Then, the pop display counter in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5720), and this history image management process is terminated.

Next, before explaining the display operation response process (Figure 98) executed by the production side MPU 92, we will explain the history menu screen displayed on the image display device 63. The history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63 when the center button 64a of the production operation device 64 is operated while the production operation valid flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1".

Figure 97 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the history menu screen displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in Figure 97, the history menu screen displays six item images G32 to G37 and a cursor image G38 that allows the item images G32 to G37 to be selected. The presentation side RAM 94 is provided with a cursor position counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the item selected by the cursor on the image display device 63. The value of the cursor position counter corresponds one-to-one with the items displayed on the image display device 63, and is updated based on the operation of the up button 64b or the down button 64c of the presentation operation device 64. The player can change the item selected by the cursor image G38 on the image display device 63 by operating the up button 64b or the down button 64c of the presentation operation device 64, and can confirm the selection of the item by operating the center button 64a. Note that when the screen displayed on the image display device 63 is switched, the maximum value of the cursor position counter is changed to match the number of items displayed on the image display device 63.

When the history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63, the cursor position counter value of "0" corresponds to the selection of the item "mode selection", the cursor position counter value of "1" corresponds to the selection of the item "display latest history image", the cursor position counter value of "2" corresponds to the selection of the item "display past history image", the cursor position counter value of "3" corresponds to the selection of the item "intermediate generation of history image", the cursor position counter value of "4" corresponds to the selection of the item "ranking display", and the cursor position counter value of "5" corresponds to the selection of the item "close history menu". When the history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63, the selection of each item is confirmed by operating the center button 64a.

Next, the display operation response processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 98. Note that the display operation response processing is executed in step S4806 for displaying history images (FIG. 82).

In the display operation response process, first, it is determined whether the history operation valid flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5901). If a negative determination is made in step S5901, the display operation response process is terminated without executing the process corresponding to the operation of the production operation device 64.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the menu display flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5902). The menu display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the history menu screen (Figure 97) is being displayed on the image display device 63. If a positive determination is made in step S5902, a selection response process is executed (step S5903), and this display operation response process is terminated. Figure 99 is a flowchart showing the selection response process.

In the selection response process, first, a cursor update process is executed (step S6001). In the cursor update process, when operation of the up button 64b or the down button 64c on the performance operation device 64 is detected, the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is updated, and the display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at a position corresponding to the updated cursor position counter value.

It is then determined whether or not operation of the center button 64a on the performance operation device 64 has been detected (step S6002). If a positive determination is made in step S6002, this means that the selection of one of the items on the history menu screen (Figure 97) has been confirmed, and therefore a process to terminate the history menu display is executed (step S6003). In this termination process, the display data for displaying the history menu screen set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the history menu screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63.

Then, the menu display flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6004). This allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that the display of the history menu screen has ended. Then, if the value of the cursor position counter in the presentation side RAM 94 is "0" (step S6005: YES), a process for starting mode selection is executed (step S6006), and this selection response process is terminated.

In the mode selection start process (step S6006), a process is performed to display a mode selection screen on the image display device 63 for selecting whether to set or cancel the history storage mode. Specifically, display data for displaying the mode selection screen is set in the display setting area 113. This causes the mode selection screen to be displayed on the image display device 63. Two items, "Set history storage mode" and "Cancel history storage mode", are selectable on the mode selection screen. In addition, in the mode selection start process (step S6006), the mode selection flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the mode selection flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the mode selection screen is being displayed on the image display device 63. By setting the mode selection flag to "1", a positive determination is made in step S5904 of the display operation response process (FIG. 98), and the mode selection process (step S5905) is executed. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the mode selection process.

In the mode selection process, first, a cursor update process is executed (step S6101). In the cursor update process, similar to the cursor update process in step S6001 of the selection response process (Fig. 99), when operation of the up button 64b or the down button 64c on the performance operation device 64 is detected, the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is updated, and the display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at a position corresponding to the updated cursor position counter value.

Then, it is determined whether or not an operation to select the history storage mode has been performed (step S6102). If a positive determination is made in step S6102, the history storage flag 158 in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6103). This sets the game history mode, and the game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6102, it is determined whether or not an operation to cancel the history storage mode has been performed (step S6104). If a positive determination is made in step S6104, the history storage flag 158 is cleared to "0" (step S6105). This cancels the game history mode setting, and no game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b.

After that, a game history data clearing process is executed (step S6106). In the game history data clearing process, the 0th to 5th history memory areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history memory areas RA7 to RA15 in the history memory area 94b are cleared, similar to the game history data clearing process in step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85). In this way, when the history storage mode is released, the game history data stored up to that point in the history storage area 94b is cleared, except for the game history data indicating the number of times ART wins have occurred.

When the processing of step S6103 has been performed, or when the processing of step S6106 has been performed, a process for terminating the display of the mode selection screen is executed (step S6107). In this process, the display data for displaying the mode selection screen set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the mode selection screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63. After that, the mode selection flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6108), and this mode selection process is terminated. This allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the display of the mode selection screen on the image display device 63 has ended.

Returning to the explanation of the selection response process (Fig. 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6005, it is determined whether the value of the cursor position counter in the production side RAM 94 is "1" (step S6007). If a positive determination is made in step S6007, this means that the item "Display latest history image" has been selected on the history menu screen (Fig. 97), and the latest history configuration data is identified from the 32 history configuration data stored in the image playback memory area 94c (step S6008). In step S6008, the date and time data set in the history configuration data stored in each playback memory area RD0 to RD31 is compared, and the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31) in which the latest date and time data is set is identified.

Then, it is determined whether the display enable flag in the playback memory area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31) identified in step S6008 is set to "1" (step S6009). As already explained, after the history configuration data is stored in the playback memory area RDn, if 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command and it is predicted that the player will leave his/her seat, the display enable flag in each playback memory area RDn is cleared to "0". If a negative determination is made in step S6009, this selection response process is terminated without executing the process (the process of steps S6010 to S6012) for displaying the latest history image G23 on the image display device 63.

In this way, after the history configuration data is stored in the playback memory area RDn, if 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and it is predicted that the player will leave his/her seat, it will no longer be possible to select the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in each playback memory area RDn and display it on the image display device 63.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S6009, display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the history configuration data grasped in step S6008 (step S6010). The generated display data is then set in the display setting area 113 (step S6011). This causes the history image G23 to be displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the history image display flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6012), and this selection response process is terminated. This allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S6007, it is determined whether the value of the cursor position counter in the production side RAM 94 is "2" (step S6013). If a positive determination is made in step S6013, this means that the item "Display past history images" has been selected on the history menu screen (Figure 97), so a process to start past history selection is executed (step S6014).

In the past history selection start process (step S6014), first, a headline list generation process is executed. In this slot machine 10, when the item "display past history images" is selected on the history menu screen (Figure 97), a headline list of history images G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 is displayed on the image display device 63. As already explained, the history images G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 are history images G23 that correspond to the history configuration data that have been generated in the past and stored in the playback memory areas RD0 to RD31 of the image playback memory area 94c and whose displayable flags are set to "1". The headline list is a list of the first wording and the generation date and time in the history configuration data. In the headline list generation process, display data is generated for displaying the headline list on the image display device 63 and a cursor image G38 for selecting a headline in the headline list. After that, the display data for the generated headline list is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, the headline list and the cursor image G38 are displayed on the image display device 63. After that, the headline list display flag stored in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the headline list display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the headline list display is being performed on the image display device 63. By setting the headline list display flag to "1", a positive determination is made in step S5906 of the display operation response process (Figure 98), and the past history selection process (step S5907) is executed. Figure 101 is a flowchart showing the past history selection process.

In the past history selection process, first, a cursor update process is executed (step S6201). In the cursor update process, similar to the cursor update process in step S6001 of the selection response process (FIG. 99), when operation of the up button 64b or the down button 64c on the performance operation device 64 is detected, the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is updated, and the display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at a position corresponding to the updated cursor position counter value.

Then, it is determined whether or not operation of the center button 64a on the performance operation device 64 has been detected (step S6202). If a positive determination is made in step S6202, this means that an operation has been performed to confirm one of the selections on the image display device 63, and therefore processing to end the headline list display is executed (step S6203). In this end processing, the display data for headline list display and the display data for cursor image display set in the display setting area 113 are deleted. As a result, the headline list and cursor image G38 are no longer displayed on the image display device 63. Then, the headline list display flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6204). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the headline list display has ended.

Then, it is determined whether or not any heading has been selected based on the value of the cursor position counter in the production side RAM 94 (step S6205). In step S6205, a positive determination is made if a heading corresponding to any past history configuration data has been selected, and a negative determination is made if a selection has been made to return to the history menu screen. If a negative determination is made in step S6205, the processing of steps S5913 to S5916 of the display operation response processing (Figure 98) is executed. The content of the processing of steps S5913 to S5916 will be described later.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S6205, the heading selected based on the value of the cursor position counter is identified (step S6206), and the history configuration data corresponding to the identified heading is identified (step S6207). Specifically, in step S6207, the playback memory areas RD0 to RD31 in which the history configuration data corresponding to the heading identified in step S6206 is stored in the image playback memory area 94c are identified.

After that, display data is generated for displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data grasped in step S6207 on the image display device 63 (step S6208). The generated display data is then set in the display setting area 113 (step S6209). As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the currently selected past history configuration data is displayed on the image display device 63.

Then, the history image display flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6210), and the past history selection process is terminated. This allows the production side MPU 92 to understand that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the selection response process (FIG. 99), if a negative judgment is made in step S6013, it is judged whether the value of the cursor position counter in the production side RAM 94 is "3" or not (step S6015). If a positive judgment is made in step S6015, it means that the item "Intermediate generation of history image" has been selected, so the intermediate generation flag 177 in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6016), and this selection response process is terminated. By setting the intermediate generation flag 177 to "1", an affirmative judgment is made in step S5101 of the already explained generation process of the history configuration data (FIG. 85), and the history configuration data is generated. As already explained, in the generation process of the history configuration data (FIG. 85), if the history configuration data is generated based on the intermediate generation flag 177 in the production side RAM 94 being set to "1", a negative judgment is made in step S5113 and an affirmative judgment is made in step S5115, and the intermediate generation end flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5116).

Returning to the explanation of the history image processing (FIG. 82), after executing the history configuration data generation processing in step S4807, it is determined whether or not the midway generation end flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4808). As already explained, the midway generation end flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the generation of the history configuration data that was started as a result of the operation for midway generation of the history image G23 has ended. If a positive judgment is made in step S4808, the midway generation history image display processing (processing of steps S4809 to S4813) is executed. Specifically, first, the history configuration data stored in the 31st playback storage area RD31 is grasped (step S4809). As already explained, the 31st playback storage area RD31 is an area in which the history configuration data generated based on the selection of the item "midway generation of history image" is set.

Then, based on the history configuration data grasped in step S4809, display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated (step S4810). The generated display data is then set in the display setting area 113 (step S4811). This causes the history image G23 to be displayed on the image display device 63. Then, the history image display flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4812). This allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63. Then, the intermediate generation end flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4813), and this history image processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the selection response process (Figure 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6015, it is determined whether the value of the cursor position counter in the production side RAM 94 is "4" (step S6017). If a negative determination is made in step S6017, the value of the cursor position counter is "5" which means that the item "Close history menu" has been selected on the history menu screen (Figure 97), so this selection response process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step 6017, this means that the item "Ranking Display" has been selected on the history menu screen (Figure 97), and so a ranking generation process is executed (step S6018). In this slot machine 10, when the item "Ranking Display" is selected, a ranking screen is displayed in which the information on the 32 history configuration data stored in the image playback memory area 94c is arranged in descending order of history points. The ranking screen displays the first wording of each history configuration data, the history points, the rank, and the generation date and time. In the ranking generation process (step S6018), display data is generated for displaying the ranking screen on the image display device 63.

After that, the ranking display start process is executed (step S6019). In this start process, the display data generated in step S6018 is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, the ranking screen is displayed on the image display device 63. After that, the ranking display flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6020), and this selection response process is terminated. As already explained, the ranking display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the ranking screen is being displayed on the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the display operation response process (FIG. 98), after a negative determination is made in step S5906, it is determined whether or not the ranking display in progress flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5908). If a positive determination is made in step S5908, a ranking display in progress process is executed (step S5909). In the ranking display in progress process, it is determined whether or not an operation of the center button 64a in the production operation device 64 is detected, and if an operation of the center button 64a is detected, a process for ending the ranking display in the image display device 63 is executed. Specifically, the display data for displaying the ranking screen set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the ranking screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63. After that, the ranking display in progress flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible for the production side MPU 92 to know that the ranking display has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S5908, it is determined whether the value of the pop-up display counter in the production-side RAM 94 is equal to or greater than "1" (step S5910). If a positive determination is made in step S5910, i.e., if a pop-up display is being performed on the image display device 63, it is determined whether operation of the down button 64c on the production operation device 64 has been detected (step S5911).

If a negative determination is made in step S5910, or if a negative determination is made in step S5911, it is determined whether or not operation of the center button 64a on the performance operation device 64 has been detected (step S5912). If a positive determination is made in step S5912, processing is executed (steps S5913 to S5916) for displaying the history menu screen (Figure 97) on the image display device 63. As already explained, the processing of steps S5913 to S5916 is also executed if a negative determination is made in step S6205 of the past history selection processing (Figure 101).

Specifically, first, the value of the cursor position counter in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5913). After that, the numerical information of "5" is set to the cursor maximum value counter in the production side RAM 94 (step S5914). As a result, the value of the cursor position counter becomes "5".

After that, the start process of the history menu display is executed (step S5915). In this start process, display data for displaying the history menu screen on the image display device 63 and display data for displaying the cursor image G38 are read from the production side ROM 93 and set in the display setting area 113. As a result, the history menu screen and cursor image G38 are displayed on the image display device 63. After that, the menu display flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5916), and this display operation response process is terminated. By setting the menu display flag to "1", the production side MPU 92 can determine that the history menu screen (Figure 97) is being displayed on the image display device 63.

If a positive determination is made in step S5911, i.e., if operation of the down button 64c on the performance operation device 64 is detected while a pop-up display is being displayed on the image display device 63 (step S5911: YES), a pop-up display termination process is executed (step S5917). In this termination process, the display data for the pop-up display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared, similar to step S5608 in the game start corresponding process (Figure 94). This ends the pop-up display being displayed on the image display device 63.

After that, the pop display counter in the presentation RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5918), and the process proceeds to step S6008 of the selection response process (Figure 99), where steps S6008 to S6012 are executed. As already explained, if the displayable flag in the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31) in which the latest history configuration data is stored is set to "1" (step S6009: YES), the history image G23 corresponding to the latest history configuration data is displayed on the image display device 63. As already explained, the displayable flag is cleared (step S5715 of the history image management process (Figure 95)) when 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 without the presentation MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and it is predicted that the player will leave his seat. Therefore, after the down button 64c is operated while a pop-up display is being displayed on the image display device 63, the display enable flag in the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31) in which the latest history configuration data is stored is not cleared to "0" until the processing of steps S6008 to S6012 is performed.

In this way, when the down button 64c is operated while a pop-up display is being displayed on the image display device 63, the latest history image G23 can be displayed on the image display device 63 without the need to select the item "Display latest history image" on the history menu screen (Figure 97). By simplifying the operation for checking the latest history image G23, the possibility of checking the history image G23 is increased.

<Regarding game history management>
Next, the management process executed by the master MPU 72 to manage the game history and notify the management results will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 102. The management process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 12).

When one new game is played (step S6301: YES), the value of the total game number counter 74a provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is incremented by 1 (step S6302). The total game number counter 74a is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of the game status and game period. The total game number counter 74a is made up of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games up to a maximum value of 256 cubed minus 1. The value of the total game number counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless the clear process of step S105 is executed in the main process (FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played in the game hall over multiple business days.

When one game is newly executed (step S6301: YES) and the advantageous section SC2 is selected (step S6303: YES), not only is the value of the total game counter 74a incremented by 1, but the value of the advantageous game counter 74b provided in the presentation RAM 94 is incremented by 1 (step S6304). The advantageous game counter 74b is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the presentation RAM 94, and the advantageous game counter 74b is not cleared to "0" even if the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is performed. Therefore, when the advantageous section SC2 occurs multiple times with the normal section SC1 in between, the total number of games consumed in the multiple advantageous sections SC2 can be measured by the advantageous game counter 74b. The advantageous game counter 74b is made up of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games up to a maximum value of 256 cubed minus 1. In addition, the value of the advantageous game counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless the clear process of step S105 is performed in the main process (FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 over multiple business days at the amusement hall.

When a negative judgment is made in step S6301, when a negative judgment is made in step S6303, or when the processing of step S6304 is executed, it is judged whether or not the gaming history management results are being displayed (step S6305). When the gaming history management results are not being displayed (step S6305: NO), it is judged whether or not an instruction to display the gaming history management results has been issued (step S6306). Specifically, it is judged whether or not the front door 12 has been opened and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 has been operated when the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied. As already explained, when the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started while the reset button 56 is being operated, the clear processing of step S105 is executed in the main processing (FIG. 11), but when the reset button 56 is operated when the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied, an instruction to display the gaming history management results has been issued.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the results of the game history management has been issued (step S6306: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S6307). In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of the advantageous game number counter 74b" / "value of the total game number counter 74a".

Then, the display start process is executed (step S6308). In the display start process, the display of the calculation result of step S6307 on the ratio display 85 (FIG. 9) is started. In this case, the identifier "7U." indicating that the value displayed on the ratio display unit 87 is the favorable zone stay ratio is displayed on the identifier display unit 86. Specifically, the display control of the identifier display unit 86 is performed so that "7" is displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 86a of the identifier display unit 86, "U" is displayed on the right 7-segment display unit 86b of the identifier display unit 86, and the auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier is turned on. In addition, the display control of the ratio display unit 87 is performed so that the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S6307 by 100 is displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 87a of the ratio display unit 87, and the ones digit is displayed on the right 7-segment display unit 87b. The above calculation result is notified as a percentage. Specifically, if the result of the above calculation is multiplied by 100 to give "35", the 7-segment display 87a on the left side of the ratio display unit 87 will show "3", and the 7-segment display 87b on the right side will show "5".

However, when the ratio display unit 87 uses only the two seven-segment displays 87a and 87b to display the result, the display content on the ratio display unit 87 will be the same when the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "100" and when the result is "0". Therefore, when the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "100", not only will "0" be displayed on each of the left seven-segment display unit 87a and the right seven-segment display unit 87b in the ratio display unit 87, but the auxiliary display unit 87c will be turned on, and when the result of the calculation multiplied by 100 is "0", not only will "0" be displayed on each of the left seven-segment display unit 87a and the right seven-segment display unit 87b in the ratio display unit 87, but the auxiliary display unit 87c will be turned off.

On the other hand, if the game history management result is displayed (step S6305: YES), it is determined whether an ON signal has been received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and settlement detection sensor 51a (step S6309). If an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, if an ON signal indicating that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are being pressed is received from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, if an ON signal indicating that a medal has been inserted is received from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, if an ON signal indicating that any of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are being pressed is received from any of the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, or if an ON signal indicating that the settlement button 51 is being pressed is received from the settlement detection sensor 51a, a positive determination is made in step S6309. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether each ON signal occurs during the valid period.

In other words, a positive determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, a positive determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a triggers the stop of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, a positive determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is subject to bet setting or credit increase. Also, a positive determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is subject to bet setting. Also, a positive determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a triggers the settlement of credited virtual medals.

If the determination in step S6309 is affirmative, a display termination process is executed (step S6310). In the display termination process, the display of the calculation result on the ratio display 85 is terminated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In the normal game state ST1, multiple effects are executed in parallel based on the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers during one game. The combinations of the multiple effects are huge, and if the effect tables corresponding to all the combinations of the multiple effects are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables will increase. In contrast, if the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table are not generated, various effect tables for executing various effects are individually read out to different layers LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 11) of the read area 94a, and various effects are executed in parallel according to the various effect tables. In addition, when the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out to the 0th layer LY0 and the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table read out to the first layer LY1 are executed. This makes it possible to increase the variety of possible combinations of effects while preventing an increase in the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables.

When the first composite effect table is generated, the effect data of the symbol change effect table, the valid notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the reach notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table is read into one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). When the second composite effect table is generated, the effect data of the symbol change effect table, the valid notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, the second expected effect table, and the re-change effect table is read into one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). This reduces the maximum number of effect tables read in one game, and reduces the number of layers LYn in the read area 94a.

The presentation side ROM 93 stores one type of first synthesis table, and the first synthesis table is created by setting the presentation data set for each presentation table to be executed in each game to the one type of first synthesis table. The presentation side ROM 93 stores one type of second synthesis table, and the second synthesis table is created by setting the presentation data set for each presentation table to be executed in each game to the one type of second synthesis table. Since the presentation side ROM 93 stores only one type of first synthesis table and one type of second synthesis table in advance to generate the first synthesis table and the second synthesis table, the storage capacity of the presentation side ROM 93 for storing the synthesis tables can be reduced.

The normal base performance table for executing the normal base performance is read into the 0th layer LY0, which is different from the first layer LY1 from which the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table is read. Therefore, even if the pointer information of the reference target in the first layer LY1 jumps, it does not affect the pointer information of the reference target in the 0th layer LY0. This makes it possible to start various performances in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers while continuously displaying the background image G4 in the normal base performance and outputting the normal base music.

By combining five types of first expected performance tables stored in the performance side ROM 93 with five types of second expected performance tables to generate a second composite performance table, it is possible to increase the variety of combinations of the first expected performances and the second expected performances while preventing an increase in the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance tables, compared to a configuration in which performance tables corresponding to all combinations (specifically 25 types) are stored in advance.

The second expected performance is started based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs. If the second expected performance is started based only on the occurrence of the sixth trigger, the second expected performance will start before the first expected performance if the sixth trigger occurs during the execution of the middle stop performance. In a configuration in which the expected probability of winning a bonus is notified in the first expected performance and the expected probability of winning a BB in the case of a bonus win is notified in the second expected performance, if the order of the first expected performance and the second expected performance are reversed, there is a risk of confusing the player. In contrast, by configuring the second expected performance to start based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs, it is possible to execute the first expected performance and the second expected performance in the order of the first expected performance → the second expected performance, and the order of the first expected performance and the second expected performance is prevented from being reversed.

Even if the period between turning on and off the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is short and the sixth trigger occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches the specified period, the specified period (specifically, one second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected performance. This makes it possible to prevent the execution period of the first expected performance from becoming so short that the content of the first expected performance cannot be understood.

If the period between the ON operation and the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop is long and the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected performance can be started without delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44. This makes it possible to associate the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected performance in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, thereby enhancing the player's sense of participation. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

By ensuring that the first expected performance is performed for a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second), while the second expected performance is started without delay when the sixth trigger occurs, the player can feel that the second expected performance has started as a result of the OFF operation of the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop. Therefore, after pressing and holding the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the third stop, the player will turn off the stop button 42-44 in anticipation of the second expected performance occurring. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In a game in which the second expected performance is performed, a first composite performance table or a second composite performance table containing performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance is generated, and the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table is read out to one layer (specifically, the first layer LY1). If the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table are configured to be read out to different layers LYn, it would be necessary to provide a configuration in which the performance side MPU 92 determines whether the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second) when the second expected performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger. In contrast, by configuring the first layer LY1 to read out the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table including performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance, the performance side MPU 92 does not have a configuration for determining whether the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), but the second expected performance can be started when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for ensuring the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) as the execution period of the first expected performance.

When both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are met, the display data for the second expected performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113. In this case, if the display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e, the display data is deleted and the display data for the second expected performance is set. In the display setting area 113, the same area (fourth performance area 113e) as the area in which the display data for the first expected performance is set is set as the area in which the display data for the second expected performance is set, so that the performance side MPU 92 can start the second expected performance without having to grasp the progress of the first expected performance.

The layer LYn from which the middle stop effect table is read in the read area 94a varies depending on the presence or absence of the reach notification effect. In addition, the layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) from which the effect table including the effect data of the pattern change effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the left stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the right stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the reach notification effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the long press notification effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the middle stop effect table, and the effect table including the effect data of the first expected effect table are read varies depending on the presence or absence of the generation of the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table. In these effect tables, the setting destination information of the display data is set in correspondence with the address information of the display data. As a result, even if the read destination of these effect tables changes, it is possible to prevent the setting destination in the display setting area 113 of the display data from changing, and to prevent the anteroposterior relationship of the image displayed on the image display device 63 from changing.

A blank area where no performance data is set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and a performance execution area where performance data for performing the first expected performance is set is provided after the blank area. This makes it possible to prevent the first expected performance from being performed while the middle stop performance is being performed, while reading out the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, in a game in which the second expected performance is not performed. In a game in which the second expected performance is performed, the performance execution area excluding the blank area of the first expected performance table is set to the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table. This makes it possible to start the first expected performance without causing a delay at the end timing of the middle stop performance.

The master MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the master RAM 74 at the start of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 in the middle of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance. If the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command during the execution of the top-up main performance and the top-up sub performance, the top-up main performance that was being executed ends, and the ART base performance and the ART normal performance start based on the reception of the game start command. In addition, the gauge increase display in the top-up sub performance is switched from a high-speed display to a low-speed display, and the display of the top-up sub performance continues. This makes it possible to start the ART base performance and the ART normal performance without delay based on the reception of the game start command, while being able to check not only the result of the top-up win but also the top-up sub performance corresponding to the top-up win. After the ART base performance and ART normal performance are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the added sub performance continues to be executed in parallel with these performances, so that the entire added sub performance can be displayed even to players who have skipped the added main performance and rushed ahead. This can increase the interest of the game.

The number of games to be added is suggested by the video display of the main performance being executed to the end without being terminated halfway. When the main performance is executed to the end and the number of games to be added is suggested, the gauge increase display is displayed at high speed. This shortens the execution period of the gauge increase display that is performed after the number of games to be added is suggested, and the player's interest can be shifted to the next game sooner. On the other hand, when the video display of the main performance is terminated halfway without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display is displayed at low speed. When the gauge increase display is started without the number of games to be added being suggested, the player watches the gauge increase display while hoping that the number and color update mode of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a will correspond to the number of games to be "100". By switching the gauge increase display from high speed to low speed, the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, can be extended, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the performance side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command while an add-on sub performance is being executed, the executed add-on sub performance ends, and a new add-on main performance and add-on sub performance based on the reception of the ART add-on command are started. If the configuration is such that the start of the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance based on the reception of the ART add-on command is awaited until the execution of the executed add-on sub performance ends, a delay occurs between the reception of the ART add-on command and the start of the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance. In this configuration, if add-on wins occur consecutively and delays accumulate, there is a risk that a situation will occur in which the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance corresponding to the add-on win cannot be started during the game in which the add-on win occurred. In contrast, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance are started without delay based on the reception of the ART add-on command. This makes it possible to eliminate the possibility of a situation occurring in which the add-on main performance and the add-on sub performance corresponding to the add-on win cannot be started during the game in which the add-on win occurred, even if add-on wins occur consecutively.

When the production side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command while an add-on sub-performance is being executed, the add-on sub-performance is executed in a manner corresponding to the total number of add-on games that have occurred in succession before the current add-on win. Therefore, when an ART add-on command is received, the gauge display unit G19a flashes the unit gauge image G22 of the final number and color in the executed add-on sub-performance. This allows the add-on sub-performance to have continuity, and also gives a special feeling that the add-on wins are occurring consecutively. This increases the interest in the game. In addition, the final state of the add-on sub-performance that was being executed can be displayed to the player who was watching the add-on sub-performance that was being executed. In this way, in a configuration in which the executed add-on sub-performance is terminated and the added main performance and the added sub-performance are started without delay based on the reception of an ART add-on command, the final state of the add-on sub-performance that was being executed can be displayed to the player who was watching the executed add-on sub-performance.

When consecutive additional wins occur without interruption in the additional sub-effects, the address information for the display data set in the additional sub-effect table is replaced with address information for the display data for flashing the gauge and increasing the gauge in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games for the consecutive additional wins that occurred before the current additional win occurred. This makes it possible to reduce the number of additional sub-effect tables that are pre-stored in the effect side ROM 93, and reduces the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the additional sub-effect tables.

If no additional wins occur consecutively, the number of games to be added image G18 displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated when the additional game sub-performance ends. By making it impossible to know the number of games to be added based on the number of games to be added image G18 until the additional game sub-performance ends, interest in the additional game main performance that suggests the number of games to be added and the additional game sub-performance that shows the number of games to be added can be increased.

When consecutive additional wins occur without interruption in the additional win sub-effects, the display of the number of continued games is updated at the end of the additional win sub-effect of the last additional win in the consecutive additional wins. By not updating the number of continued games image G18 until the additional win sub-effect of the last additional win ends, interest in the additional main effect suggesting the number of added games and the additional sub-effect showing the number of added games can be increased. Also, by setting the number of added games added at one time to the display counter 134 in the effect side RAM 94 to a large value, it is possible to give the impression that the number of continued games in ART state ST6 has increased significantly due to the consecutive additional wins.

In the ART state ST6, the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, the added main performance, and the added sub performance are executed. There are multiple types of each of these performances, and the combinations of these performances are enormous. These performances are executed by reading out the ART base performance table, the ART normal performance table, the added main performance table, and the added sub performance table into different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to 3rd layer LY3) in the read area 94a, and executing and controlling the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables. As a result, compared to a configuration in which performance tables for all combinations of these performances are stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, it is possible to increase the variety of combinations of these performances while suppressing the increase in the data capacity of the performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93. In addition, when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART-in-ART add-on command while the ART base performance and ART normal performance are being executed, the processing for starting the add-on main performance and add-on sub performance while continuing the currently executed ART base performance and ART normal performance has been simplified.

There are four types of add-on main performance tables that are read out when an add-on win occurs in which the number of add-on games is "50", and there are two types of add-on sub-performance tables (the high-speed first add-on sub-performance table and the low-speed first add-on sub-performance table). In addition, there are four types of add-on main performance tables that are read out when an add-on win occurs in which the number of add-on games is "100", and there are two types of add-on sub-performance tables (the high-speed second add-on sub-performance table and the low-speed second add-on sub-performance table). The performance side ROM 93 stores an added main performance table and an added sub performance table, and the added main performance and the added sub performance are executed according to these performance tables read into different layers LYn (n = 2, 3) of the read area 94a. This configuration reduces the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance tables for executing the added main performance and the added sub performance, compared to a configuration in which one performance table containing performance data for executing the added main performance and performance data for executing the added sub performance is stored in the performance side ROM 93.

When a bonus win occurs in the role error state or the correction operation standby state, the role error state or the correction operation standby state is released based on the fact that the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established is set, and the correction operation of the role 75 is started. The correction operation of the role 75 is started before the bonus start performance. In addition, the time required for the correction operation of the role 75 is shorter than the execution period of the bonus start performance. Therefore, when the role error state and the correction operation standby state are released and the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the origin, the first game in the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) can be started. Even if a bonus win occurs in the role error state or the correction operation standby state, the role operation performance can be executed from the first game played after the bonus state starts, thereby reducing the frequency of the role operation performance being canceled and improving the interest of the game.

The reel error state and the correction operation standby state are released when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved. The event in which the production side MPU 92 receives the winning command occurs regardless of whether a bonus announcement effect or a re-changing effect is present. Therefore, when a bonus win is achieved, regardless of whether a bonus announcement effect or a re-changing effect is present, the reel error state or the correction operation standby state can be released and the correction operation of the reel 75 can be executed.

The role error state or the correction operation standby state is released when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved is set. Even if a bonus win occurs in the role lottery process (FIG. 14), the bonus state will not be transitioned to until the bonus win is achieved. If the role error state or the correction operation standby state is released when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved is set, it is possible that the spherical performance unit 77b is determined not to be at the origin in the origin detection performed from the release of the role error state or the correction operation standby state until the bonus win is achieved, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 increases before the transition to the bonus state. In this case, there is a high possibility that the correction operation standby state will be set in the middle of the bonus state. In contrast, since the role error state or the correction operation standby state is released when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved is set, the origin detection is not performed before the transition to the bonus state. Therefore, the value of the correction execution counter 141 does not increase before the transition to the bonus state, reducing the possibility of the correction operation standby state being set in the middle of the bonus state.

If the configuration is such that the device error state or correction operation standby state is released and the device 75's operation performance is executed based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command containing information indicating that a bonus win has occurred, the correction operation can be ended before the bonus start performance begins, but even if the bonus announcement performance is not won in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, the device error state or correction operation standby state is released and the device 75's correction operation is executed, so the player will know that a bonus win has occurred based on the execution of the correction operation. In contrast, the configuration is such that the device error state or correction operation standby state is released and the device 75's correction operation is executed based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been established, so that the device operation performance can be started from the first game in the bonus state while preventing the player from knowing that a bonus win has occurred based on the execution of the device 75's correction operation.

In a configuration in which the trigger for starting the reel operation performance occurs during the execution of a bonus announcement performance, by configuring the reel error state or correction operation standby state to be released based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command corresponding to the establishment of a bonus win, it is possible to start the reel operation performance during the execution of a bonus announcement performance, while also making it possible to release the reel error state or correction operation standby state at the timing of the establishment of a bonus win.

When it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin during origin detection of the reel 75, a correction operation of the reel 75 is performed and the spherical performance unit 77b returns to the origin, provided that the conditions for setting the reel 75 to a correction operation standby state and a reel error state are not met. Compared to a configuration in which the reel 77b is immediately set to a correction operation standby state or a reel error state when it is determined that the reel 77b is not at the origin, this configuration reduces the frequency of maintenance by the amusement hall manager, thereby easing the manager's burden.

Even if the spherical performance unit 77b does not return to the origin during the correction operation of the reel 75, the state will not be a correction operation standby state or a reel error state. In this case, the next time the origin is detected, it will be determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin again. Compared to a configuration in which the state is immediately set to a correction operation standby state or a reel error state if the spherical performance unit 77b does not return to the origin during the correction operation of the reel 75, the frequency with which the reel error state occurs can be reduced, and the frequency of maintenance by the manager of the amusement hall can be reduced.

When the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", if it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin during origin detection, the reel is set to a correction operation standby state in which origin detection and correction operation are not performed. This makes it possible to avoid situations in which correction operations are frequently performed, and to increase the safety of the reel operation performance.

The correction operation standby state is released when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the correction operation standby state was started, when the number of games played since the correction operation standby state was started reaches a predetermined number of times (specifically, 30 times), when the performance side MPU 92 receives a role initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or when the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command from the main side MPU 72 in which information indicating that a bonus has been won is set. By configuring the correction operation standby state so that the role 75 is returned to a state in which the correction operation can be performed without maintenance being performed by the manager of the game hall after the correction operation standby state is entered, the frequency of maintenance by the manager of the game hall can be reduced. This reduces the management burden on the manager.

When the value of the standby execution counter 142 and the correction execution counter 141 is "3", if it is determined that the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is not at the origin during origin detection, a reel error state is set. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the position of the spherical performance part 77b has shifted so frequently that the value of the standby execution counter 142 reaches "4". It is also possible to avoid a situation in which a state requiring maintenance by the manager continues for a long period of time.

The origin detection of the reel 75 is triggered when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command. By configuring the origin detection to be triggered by a frequently occurring event, it becomes possible to quickly return the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin when a state occurs in which the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin while the drive control of the reel 75 is not being executed. This reduces the possibility that the reel operation performance will be canceled due to the spherical performance unit 77b not staying at the origin.

If the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin when the origin detection of the reel 75 is executed, priority is given to performing a correction operation of the reel 75 to return the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin, and execution of the reel operation performance is prohibited until the game following the game in which the correction operation was performed is started. This makes it possible to create a state in which the spherical performance unit 77b is at the origin early on. In addition, the reel operation performance is started between the return of the spherical performance unit 77b to the origin by the correction operation of the reel 75 and the start of the game following the game in which the correction operation was performed, and it is possible to avoid a state in which the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin again when the next execution timing of the origin detection of the reel 75 comes.

When an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs, history configuration data is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The history configuration data is stored in the image playback storage area 94c, and when an opportunity to display the history image G23 occurs, display data for the history image G23 is generated based on the history configuration data stored in the image playback storage area 94c. Then, one frame of history image data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the display data for the history image G23. By storing the history configuration data and generating one frame of history image data based on the history configuration data each time an opportunity to display the history image G23 occurs, the storage capacity of the performance side RAM 94 for enabling the display of past history images G23 can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the history image data itself is stored. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the game history data used to generate the history configuration data is stored, and one frame of history image data is generated based on the game history data each time an opportunity to display a history image G23 occurs, the storage capacity of the presentation side RAM 94 required to enable display of past history images G23 can be reduced, and the processing load required to display past history images G23 can be reduced.

When there are multiple pieces of text designation data in the first to third selection condition tables that satisfy the selection conditions and have the same display priority, a lottery process (step S5211 of the text selection process (Figure 88)) is executed to select one piece of text designation data to be displayed from the multiple pieces of text designation data. By configuring the text designation data to be displayed to be selected by lottery, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the contents of the history image G23 can be predicted before it is displayed on the image display device 63. This aims to increase the interest of the game.

The history image G23 has a character image area 154 in which a character image G28 corresponding to the first text image G25 displayed in the first heading area 151 is displayed. By displaying the character image G28 corresponding to the game history, it is possible to display the history image G23 in a configuration that makes it easy to recall the contents of effects that have been performed in the past.

If a trigger for generating history configuration data occurs after the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 has been performed, the history image G23 corresponding to that history configuration data will always include the ending image G29. Therefore, even if the player does not leave a record of the ending performance with a camera or the like while the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 is being performed, the player can later display the history image and check the record of the ending performance. This makes it possible for the player to take a good look at the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2.

When multiple pieces of designated wording data are set in the candidate areas 171-173 as candidates for the designated wording data to be set in the first to third selection areas 165-167, among the multiple pieces of designated wording data, the designated wording data that is different from the designated wording data contained in the history configuration data that was previously generated and stored in the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31) of the image playback memory area 94c is preferentially set in the first to third selection areas 165-167. This reduces the possibility that the contents of the history configuration data generated in succession will overlap, making the game more interesting.

A plate lottery is performed using one of the plate lottery tables PA1-PA6, PB1-PB6, and PD1-PD6 that correspond to the combination of the total number of games executed since the previous ART state ST6 ended and the current setting value of the slot machine 10, and background plate image designation data that corresponds to the background plate image G24 that suggests the setting value is set in the history configuration data. This makes it possible to predict the current setting value based on the type of background plate image G24 included in the history image G23, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

When the item "Intermediate generation of history images" is selected on the history menu screen, history configuration data is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b at the time of selection. This allows "Intermediate generation of history images" to be selected at any time to display a history image based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b up to that time. For example, when it is desired to display a history image without waiting for the end of ART state ST6, such as when business hours are about to end, it becomes possible to display a history image based on the game history data up to that point.

When history configuration data is generated based on the selection of the item "Intermediate generation of history image," background plate image designation data that designates a background plate image G24 that suggests a setting value is not set in the history configuration data. Therefore, the intermediately generated history image G23 does not include a background plate image G24 that suggests a setting value. This makes it possible to prevent the act of guessing the current setting value by repeatedly selecting "Intermediate generation of history image" at short intervals and repeatedly checking the type of background plate image G24.

The game history data stored in the 0th to 5th history memory areas RA0 to PA5 and the 7th to 15th history memory areas RA7 to RA15 in the history memory area 94b is cleared when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of ART state ST6. This allows history configuration data to be generated based on the game history data stored in the history memory area 94b from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6.

Even if the player does not perform an operation to generate the history configuration data, the history configuration data is generated when the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"). If the trigger for generating the history configuration data were to occur only at the end of the ART state ST6 and the end of the ending performance in the advantageous zone SC2 when the player does not perform an operation to generate the history configuration data, the more games are played in the ART state ST6, the more the game history that is not reflected in the contents of the history image G23 will increase. In contrast, by using a configuration in which the history configuration data is generated each time the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined division number, the number of history images G23 reflecting the game history in the ART state ST6 can be increased when the number of games played in the ART state ST6 increases. This makes it possible to check the past game history in detail.

The image playback memory area 94c can store multiple (specifically, 32) pieces of history configuration data. The player can select one piece of history configuration data from among the multiple pieces of history configuration data stored in the image playback memory area 94c, whose displayable flags are set to "1", and display the history image G23 corresponding to that history configuration data on the image display device 63. By making it possible to check multiple past history images G23, it is possible to check multiple history images G23 all at once, without having to display a history image G23 each time a piece of history configuration data is generated. This makes it possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted in order to check a history image G23.

When the period during which the start lever 41 has not been operated since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 reaches 10 minutes, all displayable flags set to "1" among the displayable flags provided in each reproduction memory area RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction memory area 94c are cleared to "0". As a result, it becomes impossible to select and display on the image display device 63 the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31 up to now. In this way, when a state is reached in which it is predicted that the player will leave the seat, it becomes impossible to select and display on the image display device 63 the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the state and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31. This makes it possible to prevent the act of guessing the setting value by referring to the past history images G23 of players other than the player himself.

When it is predicted that the player will leave the seat, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed, but the history configuration data stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction memory areas RD0 to RD31 remains without being deleted. In addition, since the image reproduction memory area 94c is a memory area to which backup power is supplied after the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off, information is stored and maintained in the image reproduction memory area 94c even in a situation in which the power supply to the performance side MPU 92 is stopped because the power supply to the slot machine 10 is OFF. Therefore, when new history configuration data is generated, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the same wording designation data as the wording designation data contained in these history configuration data will be selected. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a history image G23 containing wording images G25 to G27 that have not been seen before will be displayed.

When history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ART state ST6, when history configuration data is generated in response to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, or when history configuration data is generated in response to the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaching a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000," "2000," or "3000"), the image display device 63 displays a pop-up indicating that the latest history image G23 can be displayed. This allows the player to recognize that new history configuration data has been generated, and also prompts the player to perform an operation to display the history image G23 corresponding to that history configuration data.

When an operation of the down button 64c on the performance operation device 64 is detected while a pop image is being displayed on the image display device 63, the latest history image G23 corresponding to the pop image can be displayed directly without going through the history menu screen. By simplifying the operation for displaying the latest history image G23 during a pop display, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data will not be displayed even if the new history configuration data is generated.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the content of the performance executed based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving the ART add-on command is different from the first embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 103 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART base effect and ART normal effect in this embodiment. The effect contents of the ART base effect and ART normal effect are the same as the effect contents of the ART base effect and ART normal effect in the first embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the number of continued games is displayed in the ART state ST6. In the continued game number display, as shown in Figure 103 (a), a continued game number image G18 indicating the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6 is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63. As shown in Figure 103 (a), in this embodiment, the sub-display area 131 (Figure 57) in the first embodiment is not provided, and the gauge flashing display and the gauge increase display are not performed.

In this embodiment, when the performance side MPU 92 receives an ART-in-add command from the main side MPU 72, an add-on performance is performed. Figures 103 (b) and 103 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the add-on performance in the ART state ST6. In the add-on performance, an add-on video is displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 63 for a predetermined period (specifically, 4 seconds). In the add-on video, as shown in Figure 103 (b), a video of the add-on character images G20 and G21 is displayed for 3 seconds. The video is a video that suggests the number of add-on games. After that, as shown in Figure 103 (c), an add-on game number image G41 is displayed for 1 second. These add-on character images G20 and G21 and the add-on game number image G41 are displayed on the front side of the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17 (Figure 103 (a)). Therefore, while the added video is displayed on the image display device 63, the background image G16 and the ART character image G17 cannot be seen. On the other hand, the continued game count image G18 is displayed closer to the screen than the added character images G20, G21 and the added game count image G41, so it can be seen even while the added video is displayed.

As in the first embodiment, the master MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the master RAM 74 when the added performance starts. A player who is in a hurry due to a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 in the middle of the added performance. If the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game during the execution of the added performance and the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command, the added performance that was being executed ends, and the ART base performance and ART normal performance corresponding to the received game start command start. In addition, in parallel with the ART base performance and ART normal performance, a reduced added performance corresponding to the added performance that ended halfway this time starts. Figures 104(a) and 104(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the reduced added performance.

In the reduced-scale added performance, as shown in Figures 104(a) and 104(b), a reduced-scale added video is displayed in the lower right display area 181 provided at the lower right side of the image display device 63. The reduced-scale added video of the reduced-scale added performance is a reduced display size obtained by reducing the number of pixels of the image in the added video of the corresponding added performance. The length (execution period) of the reduced-scale added video is the same as the length (execution period) of the corresponding added video. The reduced-scale added video is played from the continuation of the added video that was ended halfway.

When displaying the reduced-size added video, as shown in FIG. 104(a), a video of reduced-size added character images G42 and G43 is displayed in the lower right display area 181, and then as shown in FIG. 104(b), a reduced-size added game count image G44 is displayed for one second. These reduced-size added character images G42 and G43 and reduced-size added game count image G44 are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16, the ART character image G17, and the added character images G20 and G21.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the presentation side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command while a reduced-size add-on effect is being executed, the image display device 63 starts an add-on effect corresponding to the received ART add-on command, as shown in FIG. 104(b). If the remaining execution period of the reduced-size add-on effect being executed in the lower right display area 181 when the ART add-on command was received is 1 second or less, i.e., if the display of the reduced-size add-on game count image G44 has already started, the display of the reduced-size add-on video continues in the lower right display area 181.

On the other hand, if the remaining execution period of the reduced-addition effect that was being executed in the lower right display area 181 when the ART-in-addition command was received is longer than 1 second, i.e., if the display of the reduced-addition game count image G44 has not started in the lower right display area 181, the display of the last 1 second of the reduced-addition video will start in the lower right display area 181. Specifically, the display of the reduced-addition game count image G44 will start in the lower right display area 181. As shown in FIG. 104(b), in the lower right display area 181, the reduced-addition video will be displayed closer to the screen than the added character images G20, G21.

In this way, if the next added performance is started while a reduced-scale added performance is being executed, only the result portion of the reduced-scale added performance (reduced-scale added game count image G44) is displayed, and the reduced-scale added performance ends. This allows the reduced-scale added performance to end promptly after the number of added games in the reduced-scale added performance is clearly indicated. By shortening the period during which the reduced-scale added performance and an added performance that started after the reduced-scale added performance are executed in parallel to less than one second, attention can be increased to the added performance that started later.

The display time of the added video is 4 seconds, and the reduced added video is played from the continuation of the corresponding added video. Therefore, when the start lever 41 is operated to start the display of the reduced added video, the display time of the reduced added video is less than 4 seconds. As already explained in the first embodiment, the wait time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R started in the previous game until the next time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can start is 4.1 seconds. Therefore, the number of games that can be newly started during the execution of the reduced added performance is "1" or "0", and in a situation where the reduced added performance and the added performance started after the reduced added performance are executed in parallel, it is not the timing to execute a new added performance.

The value of the number of games to be continued displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the number of games added in the added performance at the end of the added performance when the added performance is executed to the end. In addition, the value of the number of games to be continued displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the number of games added in the reduced added performance at the end of the reduced added performance when the added performance is switched from the added performance to the reduced added performance during the added performance and the reduced added performance is executed to the end without starting a new added performance during the execution of the reduced added performance. Furthermore, in the case where multiple added wins occur consecutively, the value of the number of games to be continued displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the total number of games added in the consecutive added wins at the end of the added performance or the reduced added performance triggered by the last added win. In this embodiment, the case where added wins occur consecutively is the case where a new added performance starts during the execution of the reduced added performance.

Even in a situation where additional wins are occurring consecutively, the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time the game is started. If the value of the number of continued games to be displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less before the total number of added games from the consecutive added wins is finally added together, "?" is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 instead of the value "0" or less. Therefore, the ART state ST6 does not continue in a state where a value of "0" or less is displayed as the number of continued games in the upper left corner of the image display device 63. In a situation where additional wins are occurring consecutively, after the value of the number of continued games to be displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less, when the additional sub-performance of the last added win ends, the total number of added games from the consecutive added wins is added to the value "0" or less, and the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the production side ROM 93 and production side RAM 94 for executing various performances in ART state ST6. Figure 105 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side ROM 93, and Figure 105 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side RAM 94.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the performance side ROM 93 is provided with an add-on performance table memory area 133h and a reduced add-on performance table memory area 133i in addition to the ART base performance table memory area 133a and the ART normal performance table memory area 133b already described in the first embodiment. As in the first embodiment, there are "50" and "100" as the number of add-on games in the add-on win that occurs in the ART state ST6. There are eight types of add-on performances that are executed in the ART state ST6, and the add-on performance table memory area 133h of the performance side ROM 93 stores four types of add-on performance tables for executing the add-on performance corresponding to the number of add-on games of "50" and four types of add-on performance tables for executing the add-on performance corresponding to the number of add-on games of "100". In addition, the reduced-scale add-on performance table storage area 133i of the performance side ROM 93 stores eight types of reduced-scale add-on performance tables for executing eight types of reduced-scale add-on performances corresponding to these eight types of add-on performances.

In the overlay performance table, multiple pieces of numerical information are arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and various performance data are set for the pointer information. In the overlay performance table, address information and setting destination information for display data for displaying the overlay video on the image display device 63, and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that sound corresponding to the overlay video is output are set. As setting destination information for the display data for the overlay performance, information indicating the third performance area 113d of the display setting area 113 is set. The overlay performance table is read out to the second layer LY2 in the read out area 94a.

The reduced-scale add-on performance table is set with the same pointer information (numeric information) as the pointer information (consecutive numerical information) set in the corresponding add-on performance table, and various performance data is set for the pointer information. The reduced-scale add-on performance table is set with address information and setting destination information for display data for displaying reduced-scale add-on video in the lower right display area 181 of the image display device 63, and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that sound corresponding to the reduced video is output. The setting destination information for the display data for the reduced-scale add-on performance is set with information indicating the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113. The reduced-scale add-on performance table is read out to the third layer LY3 in the read out area 94a.

In this way, in the read area 94a, the add-on performance table and the reduced-scale add-on performance table are read out into different layers LYn (n = 2, 3). Therefore, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a new add-on during ART command while a reduced-scale add-on performance is being executed, it is possible to start a new add-on performance based on the reception of the add-on during ART command while continuing the reduced-scale add-on performance that is being executed.

If an added performance based on an added performance table ends midway and a reduced added performance based on the corresponding reduced added performance table starts, the pointer information for the added performance table that was in progress is carried over as the pointer information for the reduced added performance table. Also, the frame number information of the display data for the added performance that was in progress is carried over as the frame number information of the display data for the reduced added performance. This makes it possible to start a reduced added performance from a continuation of the added performance that was in progress.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), the presentation side RAM 94 is provided with a total number of added games counter 182 and an added performance type counter 183 in addition to the display counter 134 already described in the first embodiment. The total number of added games counter 182 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the number of added games waiting to be added to the display counter 134. When an added win occurs consecutively, the total number of added games counter 182 is set to the total number of added games of the consecutive added wins. The added performance type counter 183 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the type of added performance being executed. The added performance type counter 183 is set to one of the numerical values "1" to "8" depending on the type of added performance being executed.

Next, the processing configuration in the production side MPU 92 for executing various effects in the ART state ST6 will be described. Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the processing for starting a game during ART executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the processing for starting a game during ART is executed in step S3015 of the non-normal performance control processing (Figure 62) when a game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 in the ART state ST6.

In the process for starting a game during ART, first, it is determined whether the additional performance flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6401). The additional performance flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that an additional performance is being executed.

If the on-top performance flag is set to "1" (step S6401: YES), a progress information storage process is executed (step S6402). In the progress information storage process, the value of the pointer counter PC2 of the second layer LY2 from which the on-top performance table is read is set in a pointer storage counter provided in the performance side RAM 94. The pointer storage counter is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the pointer information of the on-top performance table at the timing of switching from the on-top performance to the reduced on-top performance. In addition, in the progress information storage process (step S6402), the frame number information of the display data for the on-top performance set in the third performance area 113d of the display setting area 113 is set in the frame number storage counter. The frame number storage counter is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the frame number information of the display data for the on-top performance at the timing of switching from the on-top performance to the reduced on-top performance.

Then, the process of ending the added performance is executed (step S6403). In the process of ending the added performance, the second layer LY2 of the read area 94a from which the added performance table has been read is cleared, and the display data for the added performance set in the third performance area 113d of the display setting area 113 is cleared. This ends the added performance that has been executed in the speaker 62 and the image display device 63.

Then, based on the value of the added performance type counter 183 in the performance side RAM 94, the type of added performance that was terminated in step S6403 is determined (step S6404), and a reduced added performance table corresponding to the determined type of added performance is read from the reduced added performance table storage area 133i of the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a (step S6405). As already explained, the reduced added performance table is read to the third layer LY3.

Then, a pointer setting process is executed (step S6406). In the pointer setting process, the pointer information set in the pointer storage counter in the performance side RAM 94 in the progress information storage process (step S6402) is set in the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 from which the reduced-addition performance table was read in step S6405. As a result, the pointer information of the added-on performance table in the added-on performance that has now ended is carried over as the pointer information of the reduced-addition performance table in the reduced-addition performance that is now starting.

Then, based on the pointer information set in the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 in step S6406, the display data set in the reduced-addition performance table is identified, and the identified display data is set in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113 (step S6407). Specifically, in the reduced-addition performance table, the pointer information in which the display data is set first is identified by going back in the direction in which the pointer information decreases from the pointer information inherited in the pointer setting process (step S6406), and the display data is set in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113. As a result, the display data for the reduced-addition video corresponding to the display data set in the third performance area 113d at the end of the added performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e.

After that, a frame number setting process is executed (step S6408). In the frame number setting process, the frame number information set in the frame number storage counter in the performance side RAM 94 in the progress information storage process (step S6402) is set as the frame number information for the start of display of the display data for the reduced added performance set in the fourth performance area 113e in step S6407. This makes it possible to start the reduced added video in the reduced added performance from the same frame number as the frame number at the end of the added performance in the display data for the reduced added video corresponding to the display data set in the third performance area 113d at the end of the added performance. This makes it possible to play the reduced added video from a continuation of the added video that ended midway.

Then, the add-on performance type counter 183 in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6409), and the add-on performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6410). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the add-on performance has ended. Then, the reduced add-on performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6411). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that a reduced add-on performance is being executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6401, or if the processing of step S6411 is performed, the process proceeds to step S6412. In steps S6412 to S6417, the same processing as steps S3204 to S3209 in the processing for starting the game during the ART in the first embodiment described above (Figure 63 (b)) is executed, and the processing for starting the game during this ART is terminated.

Next, the performance adjustment process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 107(a). Note that the performance adjustment process is executed in step S3017 of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62) when an ART-in-ART add-on command is received from the main side MPU 72 in the ART state ST6.

In the presentation adjustment process, it is first determined whether the reduced-addition presentation in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6501), and if the reduced-addition presentation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S6501: YES), it is determined whether the remaining time of the reduced-addition presentation is 1 second or less based on the value of the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 from which the reduced-addition presentation table has been read (step S6502). If a positive determination is made in step S6502, this means that the display of the reduced-addition game count image G44 has already started in the lower right display area 181 of the image display device 63, and therefore this presentation adjustment process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S6502, a pointer adjustment process for the reduced-addition effect is executed (step S6503), and this effect adjustment process is terminated. In the pointer adjustment process for the reduced-addition effect (step S6503), the value of the pointer counter PC3 is updated so that the last second of the reduced-addition effect is executed. Specifically, the pointer information to be referenced in the reduced-addition effect table is updated to the pointer information in which the address information and setting destination information of the display data for displaying the reduced-addition game count image G44 (Figure 104 (b)) on the image display device 63 are set.

As described above, if the production side MPU 92 receives an ART-in-add command while a reduced-size add-on effect is being executed, a reduced-size add-on game count image G44 is displayed in the lower right display area 181. This allows the results of the reduced-size add-on effect to be shown in an easy-to-understand manner. The display of the reduced-size add-on game count image G44 ends within one second. This allows the period during which the reduced-size add-on effect and the add-on effect started after the reduced-size add-on effect are executed in parallel to be short, allowing the player's attention to be shifted to the add-on effect that started later.

Next, the process for the added performance executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 107(b). Note that the process for the added performance is executed in step S3018 of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62) when an added command is received during ART.

In the process for the additional play effect, the number of additional play games is first determined based on the information set in the currently received ART additional play command, and the determined number of additional play games is set in the additional play game number counter 135 in the performance side RAM 94 (step S6601).

After that, the add-on performance lottery process is executed (step S6602). In the add-on performance lottery process, first, an add-on performance lottery table for selecting an add-on performance is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, the add-on performance table storage area 133h (FIG. 105(a)) of the performance side ROM 93 stores four types of add-on performance tables for executing an add-on performance corresponding to the number of add-on games of "50" and four types of add-on performance tables for executing an add-on performance corresponding to the number of add-on games of "100". The first add-on performance lottery table has type information of four types of add-on performance tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not each type of information is a hit is set. The second add-on performance lottery table has type information of four types of add-on performance tables set, and a numerical range for determining whether or not each type of information is a hit is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read add-on performance lottery table. This identifies the additional performance table to be read this time. Specifically, the additional performance table to be read is identified as the table to be read, which has a numerical range set that includes the numerical information read from the random number counter.

Then, the add-on performance table identified in the add-on performance lottery process (step S6602) is read from the add-on performance table memory area 133h of the performance side ROM 93 (step S6603). As described above, the add-on performance table is read into the second layer LY2 in the read area 94a. The performance is executed by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the performance according to the add-on performance table. Then, the add-on performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6604). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the add-on performance is being executed.

Then, the information of the added-on performance table that was selected in the added-on performance lottery process (step S6602) (numerical information of any one of "1" to "8") is set in the added-on performance type counter 183 in the performance side RAM 94 (step S6605). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know the type of added-on performance that is being executed. Then, the game number update waiting flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6606), and this added-on performance process is terminated. The added-on update waiting flag is a flag that allows the performance side RAM 94 to know that the process of adding the number of added games to the display counter 134 is in a waiting state.

Next, the flag clearing process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 108. Note that the flag clearing process is executed in step S2006 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) when the referenced pointer information has been updated to the final pointer information and repeat information has not been set in the final pointer information.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "2" (step S6701: YES), it is determined whether the added performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6702). If a positive determination is made in step S6702, this means that the data table that has reached the current end timing is an added performance table, so the added performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6703). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the added performance that was being executed has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S6701 and the value of the target layer counter 114 is "3" (step S6704: YES), it is determined whether the reduced-addition performance in progress flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6705). If a positive determination is made in step S6705, this means that the data table that has reached the current end timing is a reduced-addition performance table, so the reduced-addition performance in progress flag is cleared to "0" (step S6706). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the reduced-addition performance that was being executed has ended.

After a negative determination is made in step S6704, in steps S6707 and S6708, the same processing as in steps S3507 and S3508 in the flag clearing processing in the first embodiment (Figure 66 (a)) is executed, and then this flag clearing processing ends.

Next, the game count update process executed by the presentation side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 109. Note that the game count update process is executed in step S3022 in the non-normal presentation control process (FIG. 62).

In the game count update process, it is determined whether the game count update waiting flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6801). If a positive determination is made in step S6801, it is determined whether the additional presentation in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6802). If a negative determination is made in step S6802, it is determined whether the reduced additional presentation in progress flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6803).

If the game count update waiting flag is set to "1" (step S6801: YES) and neither the add-on performance in progress flag nor the reduced add-on performance in progress flag is set to "1" (step S6802: NO, step S6803: NO), this means that all add-on performances and reduced add-on performances have ended while the process of adding the number of add-on games to the display counter 134 is waiting to be completed, so processing is performed to update the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 to the value after the addition of the number of add-on games (processing of steps S6804 to S6807).

Specifically, first, an addition process of the display counter 134 is executed (step S6804). In this addition process, the value of the total added game number counter 182 in the presentation side RAM 94 is added to the display counter 134. When an added performance is started in a situation where a reduced added performance is not being executed, and the added performance is executed to the end, the total added game number counter 182 is set to the added game number of the added performance. When an added performance is started in a situation where a reduced added performance is not being executed, and the added performance is switched to a reduced added performance corresponding to the added performance, and the reduced added performance is executed to the end without starting a new added performance during the execution of the reduced added performance, the total added game number counter 182 is set to the added game number of the reduced added performance. When consecutive added wins occur, and the added performance corresponding to the last added win or the reduced added performance is executed to the end, the total added game number counter 182 is set to the total added game number of the consecutive added wins.

After that, a process for updating the display of the number of continued games is executed (step S6805). In the process for updating the display of the number of continued games, the value of the display counter 134 after the addition process in step S6804 is grasped as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6, and display data for displaying a continued game number image G18 corresponding to the grasped number of continued games is set in the fifth presentation area 113f of the display setting area 113. Display control of the image display device 63 is performed based on the display data, and the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition of the number of added games or the total number of added games.

Then, the value of the total added game count counter 182 is cleared to "0" (step S6806), the game count update waiting flag is cleared to "0" (step S6807), and this game count update process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in either step S6802 or step S6803, the process for updating the number of games to be played is terminated without executing the process for updating the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 to the value after adding the number of added games (the process of steps S6804 to S6807).

As described above, when at least one of the added-on effects and the reduced-on-addition effects is being executed, the value of the number of games to be continued displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is not updated to the value after the added number of games. When a situation occurs in which neither the added-on effect nor the reduced-on-addition effect is being executed, the value of the number of games to be continued displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the number of added games set in the total added-on game count counter 182 or the value after the added number of total added games.

Next, the manner in which the additional effect is executed in ART state ST6 will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 110. FIG. 110(a) shows the execution period of the additional effect, FIG. 110(b) shows the execution period of the reduced additional effect, FIG. 110(c) shows the timing at which the pointer information of the reduced effect table is updated so that the last second of the reduced additional effect is executed, FIG. 110(d) shows the start timing of the ART base effect and the ART normal effect, FIG. 110(e) shows the update timing of the display of the number of games to be continued, FIG. 110(f) shows the timing at which the performance side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART, and FIG. 110(g) shows the timing at which the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command.

First, we will explain what happens when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command while an additional production is being executed.

When the performance side MPU92 receives an ART-in-ART add-on command at timing t1 in ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 110(f), the add-on performance starts at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 110(a).

After that, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command at the timing of t2 while the additional performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 110(g), the additional performance ends at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 110(a), and a reduced additional performance corresponding to the ended additional performance starts as shown in FIG. 110(b). As already explained, the reduced additional performance starts from the continuation of the currently ended additional performance. Also, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 110(d), the ART base performance and the ART normal performance start based on the currently received game start command, and the value of the display counter 134 is decremented by 1 with the start of a new game. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), at the timing of t2, the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the decrement of 1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the execution period of the reduced-addition effect ends at the timing of t3, and a process is executed to add the number of added games in the reduced-addition effect that has ended to the display counter 134. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 at the timing of t3 is updated to the value after the addition.

Next, we will explain what happens when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART-in-add command while a reduced-add production is being executed.

At the timing t4 when the reduced-scale add-on performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 110(f), the performance side MPU92 receives an ART add-on command. If the remaining execution period of the currently executing reduced-scale add-on performance is longer than 1 second, as shown in FIG. 110(c), the value of the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 from which the reduced-scale add-on performance table is read is updated so that the final second of the reduced-scale add-on performance is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 110(a), at the timing t4, the add-on performance corresponding to the currently received ART add-on command is started.

At time t5, one second after time t4, the reduced-addition effect ends, as shown in FIG. 110(b). As shown in FIG. 110(a), at time t5, the added-on effect is being executed, so the display of the number of games to be played is not updated at time t5, as shown in FIG. 110(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(a), when the additional performance ends at the timing of t6, the additional performance and reduced additional performance are no longer being executed, so a process is executed to add the total number of additional games for the consecutive additional wins to the display counter 134. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), the number of continued games displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 63 at the timing of t6 is updated to the value after the addition.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

If the presentation side MPU 92 receives a game start command while an added performance is being executed, the added performance that was being executed ends, and the ART base performance and ART normal performance corresponding to the received game start command, as well as the reduced added performance corresponding to the ended added performance, are started. This makes it possible to start the ART base performance and ART normal performance corresponding to the operation without delay when the start lever 41 is operated to start a new game.

By not setting a freeze period that disables operation of the start lever 41 while an added effect is being performed, it is possible for a player who wants to hurry on in a situation where the end of business hours is approaching to start the next game in the middle of an added effect. In addition, after the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, a reduced added effect is executed in parallel with the ART base effect and the ART normal effect, so that a reduced added effect with content corresponding to the added effect can be displayed even to a player who has skipped the added effect and rushed on. This can increase the excitement of the game.

When switching from an added performance to a reduced added performance, the reduced added performance table corresponding to the added performance that was being executed is read out, and the pointer information of the added performance table is carried over as the pointer information of the read reduced added performance table. In addition, the display data for the reduced added performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113, and the pointer information of the display data for the added performance is carried over as the pointer information of the display data for the reduced added performance. This makes it possible to start a reduced added performance from a continuation of an added performance that was ended midway, making the switch from the added performance to the reduced added performance continuous and easy to understand.

If the production side MPU 92 receives an ART add-on command while a reduced-size add-on performance is being executed, the add-on performance corresponding to the currently received ART add-on command is started. This allows a new add-on performance to be started without delay after the ART add-on command is received. If the remaining display period of the reduced-size add-on video at the time the ART add-on command is received is longer than one second, the pointer information of the reference target in the reduced-size add-on performance table is updated so that the last second of the reduced-size add-on performance is executed. This allows the reduced-size add-on performance to be ended promptly after the number of added games in the reduced-size add-on performance is clearly indicated. By shortening the period during which the reduced-size add-on performance and the add-on performance started after the reduced-size add-on performance are executed in parallel to less than one second, attention can be increased for the add-on performance started later.

In the ART state ST6, the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, the added effect, and the reduced added effect are executed. There are multiple types of each of these effects, and the combinations of these effects are enormous. These effects are performed by reading out the ART base effect table, the ART normal effect table, the added effect table, and the reduced added effect table into different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to 3rd layer LY3) in the read area 94a, and executing and controlling the effects in the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables. This makes it possible to increase the variety of combinations of these effects while suppressing the increase in the data capacity of the performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, compared to a configuration in which performance tables for all combinations of these effects are stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93. In addition, when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command in a situation where the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, and the added performance are being executed, the processing configuration for terminating the added performance that was being executed while continuing the ART base performance and the ART normal performance that are being executed, and starting a reduced added performance corresponding to the added performance is simplified. Furthermore, when the production side MPU 92 receives a new ART add-on command in a situation where the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, and the reduced added performance are being executed in the image display device 63, in addition to the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, and the reduced added performance that are being executed, the processing configuration for starting an added performance based on the reception of the ART add-on command in a manner parallel to these performances is simplified. In addition, if the production side MPU 92 receives an ART-in-add command when the execution period of the reduced-scale add-on performance remains longer than one second, it is possible to continue the currently-executing ART base performance and ART normal performance while updating the pointer information of the reduced-scale add-on performance table to pointer information corresponding to the last second.

Third Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that even if 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 and the presentation side MPU 92 has not received a game start command, and a situation occurs in which the player is predicted to leave the seat, the historical image G23 corresponding to the historical configuration data generated and stored before the situation occurs can be displayed. Below, the configurations that differ from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, the displayable flag in the first embodiment is not provided in the 0th to 30th playback memory areas RD0 to RD30 of the image playback memory area 94c. As already explained in the first embodiment, when the item "Display past history images" is selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), a heading list is displayed on the image display device 63. In this embodiment, a heading list including all headings of the history configuration data stored in the 0th to 31st playback memory areas RD0 to RD31 is displayed. The player can select a heading by operating the up button 64b and down button 64c of the performance operation device 64, and confirm the selection of the heading by operating the center button 64a, thereby displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in any of the 0th to 31st playback memory areas RD0 to RD31 on the image display device 63 and confirming it.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the type of background plate image G24 included in the history image G23 suggests the current setting value of the slot machine 10. In this embodiment, when 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and a situation occurs in which the player is predicted to leave the seat, and then a heading of history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the situation is selected in the heading list, a history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data is displayed on the image display device 63 in a manner that does not suggest a setting value. Specifically, regardless of the value of the background plate counter 161g in the reproduction memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31), a history image G23 including a common background plate image is displayed instead of the background plate image G24. This makes it possible to eliminate the possibility that the setting value of the day will be guessed by referring to the type of background plate image G24 of the history image G23 generated based on the game history of another person.

In the history image management process (FIG. 95) in this embodiment, if a positive determination is made in step S5714, that is, if 10 minutes have passed since the start lever 41 was last operated in normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, the date and time data acquired in step S5713 is set in an absence time counter provided in presentation side RAM 94. The absence time counter is a counter that enables the presentation side MPU 92 to grasp the date and time when 10 minutes have passed since the start lever 41 was last operated in normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and the player is predicted to be absent from his/her seat.

Next, the past history selection process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 111. Note that the past history selection process is executed in step S5907 of the display operation response process (FIG. 98).

In steps S6901 to S6907, the same processing as steps S6201 to S6207 of the past history selection process (FIG. 101) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, the date and time data stored in the absence counter in the presentation RAM 94 is grasped (step S6908), and it is determined whether or not a situation has occurred in which the presentation MPU 92 has not received a game start command for 10 minutes since the start lever 41 was last operated in the normal game state ST1 after the history configuration data corresponding to the currently selected heading was generated, and a situation in which the player is predicted to leave the seat has occurred (step S6909). In step S6909, the date and time data grasped in step S6908 is compared with the date and time data corresponding to the currently selected heading, and a positive determination is made if the date and time data grasped in step S6908 is newer than the date and time data included in the history configuration data corresponding to the currently selected heading.

If a positive judgment is made in step S6909, the plate adjustment flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6910). The plate adjustment flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that a common background plate image should be displayed regardless of the value of the background plate counter 161g in the playback memory area RDn. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S6909, the process proceeds to step S6911 without setting the plate adjustment flag to "1".

If a negative judgment is made in step S6909, or if the processing of step S6910 is performed, display data is generated for displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the currently selected history configuration data on the image display device 63 (step S6911). In step S6911, if the plate adjustment flag is set to "1", even if the value of the background plate counter 161g of the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31) in which the currently selected history configuration data is stored is "1" or greater and any background plate image G24 has been selected, display data is generated for displaying the history image G23 including the common background plate image instead of the background plate image G24 on the image display device 63.

Then, the display data generated in step S6911 is set in the display setting area 113 (step S6912). This causes the history image G23 corresponding to the currently selected past history configuration data to be displayed on the image display device 63. Then, the plate adjustment flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6913), the history image display flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6914), and this past history selection process is terminated. This allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

Even if 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command and a situation has occurred in which the player is predicted to leave the seat, it is possible to display a history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data that was generated and stored before the situation occurred. Since a history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data generated based on the game history of another person can be displayed on the image display device 63, it is possible to compare the player's own history image G23 with the history image G23 of another person, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

When 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and a situation occurs in which the player is predicted to leave his/her seat, and then an operation is performed to display a history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the situation, a history image G23 including a common background plate image is displayed instead of the background plate image G24, regardless of the value of the background plate counter 161g in the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31). By displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data in a manner that does not suggest a setting value, it is possible to increase the number of history images G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 while preventing the setting value from being guessed based on the game history of others.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. The configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually or in combination with each other to the configuration obtained by combining the configurations of the above-described embodiments with each other.

(1) In the read area 94a, the layer LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 11) from which each data table is read is specified, but the data table to be read may be read into the topmost layer LYn that is available in the read area 94a when the data table is read. In this configuration, when sound data is set for the pointer information of various data tables read into the read area 94a, sound priority data is set for the pointer information. In addition, sound data and sound priority data are set in various areas 112a to 112c (Figure 42 (b)) of the sound output setting area 112. In the data setting process (step S1906 of the performance execution process (Figure 47)), when sound data and sound priority data are set for the pointer information to be referenced, the performance side MPU 92 determines whether sound data and sound priority data have already been set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112. When sound data and sound priority data are not set, the sound data and sound priority data set for the reference pointer information are set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. On the other hand, when sound data and sound priority data are already set, it is determined whether the sound priority data set for the reference pointer information is greater than the already set sound priority data (whether the priority is high or not), and when a positive determination is made, the sound data and sound priority data set for the reference pointer information are set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. As a result, the sound data set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c is changed to sound data with a high priority. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made, the sound data and sound priority data are not changed. In this way, the sound data with a high priority is preferentially set in the various areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112 based on the sound priority data, so that even if the layer LYn (n is an integer of 0 to 11) from which the performance table is read varies depending on the progress of the performance, the sound data with a high priority can be preferentially output from the speaker 62.

In this configuration, when light emission data is set for the pointer information of various data tables read into the read area 94a, light emission priority data is set for the pointer information. In addition, light emission data and light emission priority data are set in the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(a)). In the data setting process (step S1906 of the performance execution process (FIG. 47)), when light emission data and light emission priority data are set for the reference pointer information, the performance side MPU 92 judges whether light emission data and light emission priority data are already set in the light emission setting area 111. If light emission data and light emission priority data are not set, the light emission data and light emission priority data set for the reference pointer information are set in the light emission setting area 111. On the other hand, if light emission data and light emission priority data are already set, it is judged whether the light emission priority data set for the reference pointer information is greater than the light emission priority data already set (whether the priority is high or not), and if a positive judgment is made, the light emission data and light emission priority data set for the reference pointer information are set in the light emission setting area 111. As a result, the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111 is changed to light emission data with a high priority. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made, the light emission data and light emission priority data are not changed. In this way, because the light emission data with a high priority is preferentially set in the light emission setting area 111 based on the light emission priority data, even if the layer LYn (n is an integer between 0 and 11) from which the performance table is read varies depending on the progress of the performance, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 can be executed based on the light emission data with the high priority.

In this way, by configuring the data table to be read to be read into the topmost available layer LYn in the read area 94a when reading a data table, the number of layers LYn in the read area 94a can be reduced.

(2) A multiple-use layer capable of reading out multiple data tables at one time may be provided in the performance-side RAM 94, and various performance tables may be read into one multiple-use layer in a game in which the second expected performance is executed. By switching the data table to be executed in the multiple-use layer, the performance to be executed can be switched. Specifically, in a game in which the second expected performance is executed and the re-changing performance is not executed, the pattern change performance table, the valid notification performance table, the left stop performance table, the right stop performance table, the long press notification performance table, the middle stop performance table, the first expected performance table, and the second expected performance table are read into the multiple-use layer based on the occurrence of the first trigger. Then, the pattern change performance table is set as the execution target. After that, the valid notification performance table is set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the second trigger, the left stop performance table is set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the third trigger, the right stop performance table and the long press notification performance table are set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, and the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table are set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger. After that, the second expected performance table is set as the execution target based on the fact that both the condition that the pointer information of the reference target in the first expected performance table reaches a predetermined value and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are both satisfied. This makes it possible to ensure at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected performance while eliminating the need for a configuration to generate the first composite performance table.

In addition, in a game in which the second expected performance and the re-change performance are executed, the pattern change performance table, the valid notification performance table, the left stop performance table, the right stop performance table, the long press notification performance table, the middle stop performance table, the first expected performance table, the second expected performance table, and the re-change performance table are read into the multiple layers based on the occurrence of the first trigger. Then, the pattern change performance table is set as the execution target. After that, the valid notification performance table is set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the second trigger, the left stop performance table is set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the third trigger, the right stop performance table and the long press notification performance table are set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, and the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table are set as the execution target based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger. After that, the second expected performance table and the re-change performance table are set as the execution target based on the fact that both the condition that the pointer information of the reference target in the first expected performance table reaches a predetermined value and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. This makes it possible to secure at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected performance while eliminating the need for a configuration to generate the second composite performance table.

(3) In a game in which the second expected performance is executed and the re-changing performance is not executed, if the performance data in the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table are set in the first composite performance table, some or all of the symbol changing performance table, the valid notification performance table, the left stop performance table, the right stop performance table, the long press notification performance table, and the middle stop performance table may be read into a layer LYn different from the first composite performance table. For example, a first composite performance table may be generated in which the performance data of the middle stop performance table, the first expected performance table, and the second expected performance table are set. In this configuration, when the first trigger occurs, the normal base performance table is read into the 0th layer LY0 and the pattern change performance table is read into the first layer LY1, when the second trigger occurs, the valid notification performance table is read into the second layer LY2, when the third trigger occurs, the left stop performance table is read into the third layer LY3, when the fourth trigger occurs, the right stop performance table is read into the fourth layer LY4 and the long press notification performance table is read into the fifth layer LY5, and when the fifth trigger occurs, the first composite performance table is read. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of performance data set in the first composite performance table in a configuration in which the execution period of the first expected performance is secured for at least a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the first composite table stored in advance in the composite table storage area 93n (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93, and to reduce the processing load for generating the first composite performance table.

(4) In a game in which the second expected performance and the re-changing performance are executed, if the performance data in the first expected performance table, the second expected performance table, and the re-changing performance table are set in the second composite performance table, some or all of the symbol change performance table, the valid notification performance table, the left stop performance table, the right stop performance table, the long press notification performance table, and the middle stop performance table may be read into a layer LYn different from the second composite performance table. For example, a second composite performance table may be generated in which the performance data in the middle stop performance table, the first expected performance table, the second expected performance table, and the re-changing performance table are set. In this configuration, when the first trigger occurs, the normal base performance table is read into the 0th layer LY0 and the pattern change performance table is read into the first layer LY1, when the second trigger occurs, the valid notification performance table is read into the second layer LY2, when the third trigger occurs, the left stop performance table is read into the third layer LY3, when the fourth trigger occurs, the right stop performance table is read into the fourth layer LY4 and the long press notification performance table is read into the fifth layer LY5, and when the fifth trigger occurs, the second composite performance table is read. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of performance data set in the second composite performance table in a configuration in which the execution period of the first expected performance is secured for at least a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the second composite table stored in advance in the composite table storage area 93n (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93, and to reduce the processing load for generating the second composite performance table.

(5) In a game in which the second expected performance is executed and the re-variable performance is not executed, the performance side MPU 92 may be configured to end various performances being executed and start the performance of the next game based on the fact that both the condition that the middle stop performance ends and the condition that the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command are satisfied. In this configuration, in the stop operation response process (FIG. 25), if an OFF operation command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S717) and it is determined that the second expected performance flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S718: YES), the main MPU 72 proceeds to step S720 without executing the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), clears the second expected performance flag to "0" (step S720), and ends this stop operation response process. By clearing the second expected performance flag to "0", a positive determination is made in step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13). In addition, since the freeze setting process for the second expected performance is not executed, a positive judgment is also made in step S314 of the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, even if the middle stop performance, the first expected performance, or the second expected performance is being executed, a game start command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 based on the operation of the start lever 41. Note that after the main MPU 72 sends an OFF operation command to the performance side MPU 92, a game start command can be sent based on the operation of the start lever 41. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated before the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned OFF, the game start command is not sent based on the operation of the start lever 41.

Even if only one of the conditions that the middle stop performance ends and the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command is satisfied, the processing for ending the performance is not executed until both of these two conditions are satisfied. Specifically, if a game start command is received during the execution of the middle stop performance, the performance side MPU 92 executes processing for ending the performance based on the end of the execution period of the middle stop performance (specifically, one second). Also, if a game start command is received during the execution of the first expected performance or the second expected performance, the performance side MPU 92 executes processing for ending the performance based on the reception of the game start command. In the processing for ending the performance, the 0th layer LY0 and the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a are cleared. This ends the sound output control of the speaker 62 and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 in the first expected performance or the second expected performance that was being executed. Also, the performance side MPU 92 clears the background area 113a and the first to fifth performance areas 113b to 113f in the display setting area 113. By clearing the display data for displaying the background image G4, left pattern image G5, right pattern image G6, center pattern image G7, and expected performance images (bubble image G8, water current image G9, whirlpool image G10, school of fish image G11, or giant character image G12) on the image display device 63, these images are no longer displayed on the image display device 63, and the performance of the game being executed ends.

Then, the presentation side MPU 92 starts presentation of the next game based on receiving the game start command. Specifically, if the second expected presentation is not executed in the next game, based on receiving the game start command, the normal base presentation table is read into the 0th layer LY0 in the read area 94a, and the pattern change presentation table is read into the first layer LY1. Also, if the second expected presentation is executed in the next game and the re-change presentation is not executed, based on receiving the game start command, the first composite presentation table is generated, the normal base presentation table is read into the 0th layer LY0 in the read area 94a, and the generated first composite presentation table is read into the first layer LY1. Furthermore, if the second expected presentation and the re-change presentation are executed in the next game, based on receiving the game start command, the second composite presentation table is generated, and the normal base presentation table is read into the 0th layer LY0 in the read area 94a, and the generated second composite presentation table is read into the first layer LY1.

In this way, in a game in which the second expected effect is executed but the re-changing effect is not executed, the various effects currently being executed are terminated and the effect for the next game is started based on both the condition that the intermediate stop effect ends and the condition that the effect side MPU 92 receives a game start command being satisfied, thereby avoiding a situation in which a player who is in a hurry to move on is unable to start the next game until the execution period of the second expected effect ends.

(6) In the first embodiment, when the video display of the main performance of the addition is completed without being terminated halfway, the high-speed display of the gauge increase display may be replaced by a slow display of the gauge increase display, and when the video display of the main performance of the addition is terminated halfway, the high-speed display of the gauge increase display may be replaced by a slow display of the gauge increase display. Specifically, in step S3405 of the processing for the addition performance (FIG. 65), if the number of added games set in the number of added games counter 135 in step S3401 is "50", a slow-speed first added sub-performance table is identified, and if the number of added games set in the number of added games counter 135 in step S3401 is "100", a slow-speed second added sub-performance table is identified. Then, in step S3406, it is determined whether the continuous added flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". If a negative judgment is made in step S3406, the additional sub-effect table for slow display identified in step S3405 is read into the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a (step S3407). The execution of the effect is controlled according to the additional sub-effect table for slow display, and an additional sub-effect including a slow gauge increase display is executed on the image display device 63.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S3406, a table rewrite process is executed (step S3408). In the table rewrite process, as in the first embodiment, the address information for the display data set for each pointer information of the slow display add-on sub-effect table is rewritten so that the gauge flashing display and the gauge increase display are performed in a manner corresponding to the total number of add-on games for the consecutive add-on wins that occurred before the current add-on win. After that, the slow display add-on sub-effect table after the table rewrite process (step S3408) is read into the third layer LY3 of the read area 94a (step S3409). The execution of the effects is controlled according to the rewritten slow display add-on sub-effect table, and the image display device 63 executes the add-on sub-effect including the slow gauge increase display.

In the process of updating the added sub-performance table executed in step S3203 of the process for starting a game during ART (FIG. 63 (b)), instead of the added sub-performance table for low-speed display read into the third layer LY3 of the read area 94a, the corresponding added sub-performance table for high-speed display is read into the third layer LY3. Specifically, when the low-speed first added sub-performance table is read into the third layer LY3, the high-speed first added sub-performance table is read, and when the low-speed second added sub-performance table is read into the third layer LY3, the high-speed second added sub-performance table is read. In the process of updating the added sub-performance table (step S3203), the value of the pointer counter PC4 in the third layer LY3 is carried over without being cleared. Also, in the process of updating the added sub-performance table (step S3203), the fifth performance area 113f of the display setting area 113 in which the display data for the added sub-performance is set is not cleared. Therefore, the gauge display section G19a continues to display the flashing gauge. In the update process for the add-on sub-performance table (step S3203), if the data of the add-on sub-performance table for slow display read into the fourth layer LY4 has been rewritten, the rewritten data set for each pointer information of the add-on sub-performance table for slow display is set for the corresponding pointer information in the add-on sub-performance table for fast display read into the fourth layer LY4. As a result, in a situation where add-on wins occur continuously without interruption in the add-on sub-performance, the gauge flashing display and the gauge increase display in the add-on sub-performance can be executed in a manner corresponding to the total number of add-on games of the add-on wins that occurred continuously before the current add-on win occurred.

In this way, by configuring the gauge increase display to be displayed at high speed when the video display of the added main performance ends midway, a player who has chosen to end the video display of the added main performance midway and start the next game can confirm the gauge increase display in a short time. In addition, the period during which the ART base performance and ART normal performance in a game started by operating the start lever 41 during the video display of the added main performance, and the added sub performance in the game immediately before that game, are executed in parallel can be shortened. By configuring the gauge increase display to be displayed at low speed when the video display of the added main performance is completed to the end without being terminated midway, a player who has watched the video display of the added main performance to the end without being terminated midway can carefully confirm the gauge increase display.

(7) In the first embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which an additional main performance is executed in a pattern in which the number of games is added when an additional win occurs in the ART state ST6, and an additional main performance is executed in a pattern in which the number of games is not added with a predetermined probability when an additional win does not occur in the ART state ST6. In step S1202 of the additional processing (Figure 31), as already explained in the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", or "16" has been set in the lottery processing for the current role (Figure 14). If a positive judgment is made in step S1202, as already explained in the first embodiment above, an additional win is made in the additional lottery process (step S1203) (step S1204: YES), and if the game state is the ART state ST6 (step S1205: YES), an additional setting process during ART is executed (step S1206), and the additional flag during ART in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1207).

On the other hand, in this configuration, if a negative judgment is made in step S1202, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute an add-on effect with a pattern in which the number of games is not added. The probability of winning in this lottery is 1/10. If the lottery is won and the game state is the ART state ST6, the fake ART add-on flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The fake ART add-on flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the game is the target game for which an add-on effect with a pattern in which the number of games is not added in the ART state ST6 is executed.

In the ART state processing (FIG. 33), as already explained in the first embodiment, if the ART-in-add flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), an ART-in-add command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1402). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the ART-in-add command, it executes the addition main presentation and the addition sub-presentation of a pattern in which the number of games is added, as in the first embodiment. In the video display of the addition main presentation of a pattern in which the number of games is added, an image indicating that the number of games has been added is displayed at the end of the video displayed on the image display device 63. The number of added games is not notified in the video display of the addition main presentation, but is notified in the gauge increase display of the addition sub-presentation.

In the ART state processing in this configuration (Figure 33), if the fake ART addition flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", a fake ART addition command is sent to the performance side MPU 92. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the fake ART addition command, it executes an addition main performance and an addition sub performance of a pattern in which the number of games is not added. In the video display of the addition main performance of a pattern in which the number of games is not added, an image indicating that the number of games has not been added is displayed at the end of the video displayed on the image display device 63. In the addition sub performance, only the gauge flashing display is executed, and the gauge increase display is not executed.

In this way, by configuring the additional main performance to have a performance that indicates whether or not the number of games will be added, even if the video display of the additional main performance begins, it is unclear whether or not the number of games has been added until an image indicating that the number of games has been added is displayed at the end of the video display, which increases the attention paid to the additional main performance. Also, by configuring the number of added games to be notified in the additional main performance but in the gauge increase display of the additional sub-performance, even if the video display of the additional main performance is executed to the end, the number of added games to be added remains unknown until the gauge increase display ends, which increases the attention paid to the gauge increase display.

(8) The configuration may be such that when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is set, the reel error state and the correction operation standby state are released and the reel 75 performs a correction operation. Receiving a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is an event that always occurs before transitioning to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4). Therefore, even if the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred, in which the reel error state and the correction operation standby state are released and the reel 75 performs a correction operation, it is possible to increase the possibility that the reel error state and the correction operation standby state have been released at the start of the first game to be executed after transitioning to the bonus state. This increases the possibility that the reel operation performance can be executed from the first game.

(9) If a state in which no correction operation is performed continues for a predetermined period of time, the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 may be cleared to "0". Specifically, if 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and it is predicted that the player will leave his/her seat, the setting of the history storage mode may be released and the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 may be cleared to "0". This can reduce the possibility of a correction operation standby state or a role error state occurring immediately after a player is changed.

(10) The bonus start performance may be configured to perform the reel operation performance from the beginning. As already explained in the first embodiment, if the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is in the timing when the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established is set, the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released and the correction operation of the reel 75 is executed. As already explained in the first embodiment, the time required for the correction operation of the reel 75 is a maximum of 1.4 seconds, and the correction operation ends at a timing before the bonus start performance starts. Therefore, even if the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is in the timing when the bonus win is established, it is possible to start the bonus start performance with the spherical performance unit 77b staying at the origin, and the reel operation performance can be executed from the beginning of the bonus start performance. If the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving the bonus start command and the correction operation of the reel 75 is started, the reel operation performance cannot be executed from the beginning of the bonus start performance. In contrast, the configuration is such that the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released and the correction operation of the reel 75 is executed based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command set with information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, so that the reel operation performance can be started from the beginning of the bonus start performance. If the configuration is such that the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released and the correction performance of the reel 75 is executed based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command set with information indicating that a bonus win has been generated, the correction operation can be ended before the start of the bonus start performance, but even if a bonus announcement performance indicating that a bonus win has been generated is not performed, the reel error state or the correction operation standby state is released and the correction operation of the reel 75 is executed, so that the player will know that a bonus win has been generated based on the execution of the correction operation. In response to this, the configuration is such that the device error state or correction operation standby state is cancelled and the device 75 performs a correction operation based on the fact that the device MPU 92 has received a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, making it possible to start the device operation presentation from the beginning of the bonus start presentation while preventing the player from realising that a bonus win has been achieved based on the fact that the device 75 has performed a correction operation.

(11) A role light emitter may be built into the spherical performance unit 77b, and when a role operation performance is performed, the role light emitter may flash in a manner visible from the outside. Specifically, an LED is installed inside the spherical performance unit 77b of the role 75 as a role light emitter. The role 75 is equipped with a light emission control board that controls the light emission of the role light emitter. The light emission control board is electrically connected to the performance control device 90, and controls the light emission of the role light emitter based on a signal received from the performance side MPU 92. The spherical performance unit 77b is transparent or translucent, and all or part of the light emitted from the role light emitter provided inside the spherical performance unit 77b passes through the spherical performance unit 77b and is visible from outside the spherical performance unit 77b. In this configuration, a role operation performance table is stored in the performance side ROM 93. In the reel action performance table, multiple pieces of numerical information are arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and the drive data (first drive data and second drive data) for the reel 75 and the light emission data for controlling the light emission of the reel light emitter in accordance with the operation of the spherical performance section 77b are set for the pointer information. When it is time to start the reel action performance, the performance side MPU 92 reads out the reel action performance table from the performance side ROM 93 to the 11th layer LY11 of the read area 94a.

In the reel action performance table, the light emission data is set as first light emission data for turning on the reel light-emitting body, and second light emission data for turning off the reel light-emitting body. The performance side MPU 92 transmits the first light emission data to the light emission control board when the first light emission data is set in the pointer information of the reference object in the reel action performance table, and transmits the second light emission data to the light emission control board when the second light emission data is set in the pointer information of the reference object. The light emission control board turns on the reel light-emitting body when it receives the first light emission data, and turns off the reel light-emitting body when it receives the second light emission data.

By executing drive control of the reel 75 and light emission control of the reel light emitter in the performance side MPU 92 according to the reel operation performance table read out to the 11th layer LY11, it is possible to execute a reel operation performance in which the reel light emitter flashes and the spherical performance part 77b moves up and down. This increases the attention to the reel operation performance, and improves the entertainment value of the game.

(12) Instead of a configuration in which the reel action presentation is performed according to a reel action table in which only the drive data of the reel 75 is set, a configuration in which the reel action presentation is performed according to a reel action presentation table in which the drive data of the reel 75 and sound data for the reel action presentation are set may be used. In the reel action presentation table, multiple pieces of numerical information are arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and the drive data of the reel 75 (first drive data and second drive data) and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 in accordance with the operation of the spherical presentation unit 77b are set for the pointer information. By configuring the sound output of the speaker 62 to be controlled in accordance with the up and down movement of the spherical presentation unit 77b in the reel action presentation, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

When it is time to start the reel action performance, the production side MPU 92 reads out the reel action performance table from the production side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the read area 94a. When sound data for reel action performance is set for the pointer information of the reference target in the read out reel action performance table, the production side MPU 92 sets the sound data in the performance area 112b (FIG. 42 (b)) of the sound output setting area 112. The sound data set in the reel action performance table read out to the eleventh layer LY11 is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112 with priority over the sound data set in the various performance tables read out to the first layer LY1 to the eighth layer LY8 of the read out area 94a. By giving priority to the sound output control for the reel action performance over the sound output control for other performances, it is possible to execute a highly attention-grabbing reel action performance in a manner that does not miss any sound.

(13) Instead of a configuration in which the reel action performance is executed in all games in the bonus state, a reel action lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the reel action performance is executed in each game in the bonus state, and the reel action performance may be executed in a game in which the reel action performance is won in the reel action lottery. When a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 in the bonus state, the production side MPU 92 performs a reel action lottery. In the reel action lottery, first, the reel action lottery table is read from the production side ROM 93. In the reel action lottery table, a numerical range is set for each result so that the probability of winning the reel action performance is 1/2 and the probability of not winning the reel action performance is 1/2. Then, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the read reel action lottery table. Then, it is determined that the result is a win in the set numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter (a result in which the reel action performance is won or a result in which the reel action performance is not won). If the reel action performance is won in the reel action lottery, the performance side MPU 92 reads out the performance table in which the address information of the drive table of the reel 75 is set into the read area 94a. As a result, in the bonus state, the reel action performance can be executed only in the game in which the reel action performance is won.

(14) A bonus device performance may be configured to show the player that a bonus win has occurred or that a bonus prize has been awarded, and the bonus device performance may be executed either when a bonus win has occurred or when a bonus prize has been awarded. The bonus device performance is a performance in which the spherical performance portion 77b of the device 75 moves up and down, similar to the device action performance in the first embodiment. As already explained in the first embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, in a game in which a bonus win has occurred in the lottery process for winning a role (FIG. 14), a notification lottery process (step S2311 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)) is executed. If the bonus notification performance is won in the notification lottery process, the bonus notification performance is executed in the current game in which the bonus win has occurred. On the other hand, if the re-variation performance is won in the notification lottery process, the re-variation performance is executed in a game that starts after five games have been played without a bonus prize being awarded. In the performance side ROM 93 in this configuration, a bonus device drive table for executing the bonus device performance is stored. When the bonus announcement effect is won in a game in which a bonus has been won, the production side MPU 92 reads out the intermediate stop effect table in the sixth layer LY6 of the read area 94a, reads out the first expected effect table in the seventh layer LY7, and reads out the bonus announcement effect table in the eighth layer LY8 based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity in the game, as in the first embodiment. In this configuration, after reading out the bonus announcement effect table in the eighth layer LY8, it is determined whether or not the driving table of the reel 75 is in a readable state in which it can be read out in the eleventh layer LY11. Specifically, it is determined that the reel 75 is in a readable state when none of the reel error flag, the correction operation standby flag, the reel initialization flag, the correction operation flag, the correction operation completion flag, the return operation flag, and the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1". If it is determined that the reel 75 is in a readable state, it sets "1" to the reel performance execution flag provided in the production side RAM 94. The reel performance execution flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that a bonus reel performance has been executed. The address information of the bonus reel drive table is set in the bonus announcement performance table. In the current game in which the bonus announcement performance table is read into the eighth layer LY8, if a bonus win is not achieved, the bonus reel drive table is read into the eleventh layer LY11 based on the address information set in the bonus announcement performance table. The performance side MPU 92 executes the bonus reel performance by executing drive control of the reel 75 according to the bonus reel drive table. In this way, when a bonus reel performance is executed in the bonus announcement performance, the reel performance execution flag is cleared to "0" when the performance side MPU 92 receives a bonus start command from the main side MPU 72.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus announcement performance table is not in a readable state after being read into the eighth layer LY8, the process of reading the bonus feature driving table into the eleventh layer LY11 is canceled even if the bonus announcement performance table has been read. Therefore, if it is determined that the bonus announcement performance table is not in a readable state, the performance side MPU 92 does not set the feature performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 to "1". This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to know that the bonus feature performance is not being executed.

In addition, after reading the bonus announcement performance table in the eighth layer LY8 and setting the role performance execution flag to "1", if the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established is set, the performance side MPU 92 executes a bonus announcement performance cancellation process in the same manner as step S2803 of the winning result response process (FIG. 56(a)) in the first embodiment. In the bonus announcement performance cancellation process, the eighth layer LY8 in which the bonus announcement performance table is read in the read area 94a is cleared, and the bonus announcement performance flag 122 is cleared to "0". This cancels the bonus announcement performance. In addition, in this configuration, the role performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" in the bonus announcement performance cancellation process. In this way, if the bonus role performance is also canceled due to the cancellation of the bonus announcement performance, the role performance execution flag is cleared to "0". This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the bonus role performance is not being executed.

In the case where a re-variation effect is won in a game where a bonus win has occurred, and a game for which the re-variation effect is to be executed is started after five games have been played without a bonus win, the production side MPU 92 generates a second composite effect table based on the reception of a game start command, as in the first embodiment, and reads out a normal base effect table to the 0th layer LY0 of the read area 94a, and reads out the second composite effect table to the 1st layer LY1. In this configuration, after reading out the second composite effect table to the 1st layer LY1, it is determined whether or not the drive table of the reel 75 is in a readable state in which it can be read out to the 11th layer LY11. Specifically, it is determined that the reel 75 is in a readable state when none of the reel error flag, the correction operation standby flag, the reel initialization flag, the correction operation flag, the correction operation completion flag, the return operation flag, and the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d are set to "1". If it is determined that the reel 75 is in a readable state, the reel performance execution flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the feature performance execution flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that a bonus feature performance has been executed. The address information of the bonus feature drive table is set in the performance data of the re-variable performance table set in the second composite performance table. The bonus feature drive table read in the re-variable performance is the same drive table as the bonus feature drive table read in the bonus notification performance described above. In the current game in which the second composite performance table is read in the first layer LY1, if a bonus win is not established, the bonus feature drive table is read in the 11th layer LY11 based on the address information set in the second composite performance table. The performance side MPU 92 executes the bonus feature performance in the re-variable performance by executing the drive control of the feature 75 according to the bonus feature drive table. When the bonus feature performance is executed in the re-variable performance, the feature performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" when the performance side MPU 92 receives a bonus start command from the main side MPU 72.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second composite performance table is not in a readable state after being read into the first layer LY1, the process of reading the bonus feature driving table into the eleventh layer LY11 is canceled even if the second composite performance table has been read into the first layer LY1. For this reason, if it is determined that the table is not in a readable state, the feature performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1". This allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the bonus feature performance is not being executed.

In addition, after reading the second composite performance table into the first layer LY1 and setting the role performance execution flag to "1", when the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established is set, the re-changing performance is stopped in the same manner as step S2805 of the winning result response processing (FIG. 56 (a)) in the first embodiment described above. In the re-changing performance stop processing, the performance data for the re-changing performance is deleted from the performance data set in the second composite performance table read into the first layer LY1 of the read area 94a. As a result, the re-changing performance is canceled and the bonus role performance is canceled. In addition, in this configuration, the role performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" in the re-changing performance stop processing. In this way, in the game in which the re-changing performance is executed, if a bonus win corresponding to the carried-over bonus win is established and the re-changing performance is canceled and the bonus role performance is canceled, the role performance execution flag is cleared to "0". This allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the bonus feature is not being performed.

Next, the role setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 when a bonus is won in this configuration will be described. As in the first embodiment, the role setting process when a bonus is won is executed in step S2806 of the winning result response process (FIG. 56(a)) based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus has been won.

In the bonus winning reel setting process, the same process as steps S4701 to S4705 of the bonus winning reel setting process (FIG. 78) in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, if the reel error flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), the error release flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4702). As a result, a positive determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for releasing the reel error state (steps S4104 to S4106 and steps S4109 to S4111) is executed.

If the reel error flag is not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), it is determined whether the correction operation standby flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4703). If the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S4703: YES), the standby release flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4704). As a result, a positive determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for releasing the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4104 to S4108) is executed. After that, the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the reel management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4705). As a result, the number of times the correction operation standby state was set, which was counted by the standby execution counter 142, is cleared.

When the processing of step S4702 or step S4705 is performed, in this configuration, the bonus winning flag provided in the reel management area 94d is set to "1". The bonus winning flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to determine whether the correction operation of the reel 75 was started as a result of the establishment of a bonus winning. The bonus winning flag is not cleared to "0" in the first clearing process of the reel management information (step S4107 of the start setting process of the correction operation (FIG. 72)) and the second clearing process of the reel management information (step S4110 of the start setting process of the correction operation (FIG. 72)). The performance side MPU 92 determines that the correction operation of the reel 75 was started as a result of the establishment of a bonus winning based on the fact that the correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" and the bonus winning flag is set to "1". In the bonus winning feature setting process, the bonus winning flag is set to "1", and then the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed, similar to step S4706 of the bonus winning feature setting process (FIG. 78) in the first embodiment described above, and the bonus winning feature setting process ends.

In the role setting process when a bonus is won, if neither the role error flag nor the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S4701: NO, step S4703: NO), the same process as steps S4707 to S4709 in the role setting process when a bonus is won in the first embodiment (FIG. 78) is executed. Specifically, the 11th layer LY11 in the read area 94a is cleared (step S4707). As a result, even if the drive table of the role 75 has been read out in the 11th layer LY11, drive data is no longer output to the role drive unit 78. Specifically, if a correction operation is being performed, the correction operation is terminated midway.

Then, a third clearing process of the reel management information is executed (step S4708). In the third clearing process of the reel management information (step S4708), the values of the various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (specifically, the reel initialization flag, initialization end flag, reel error flag, error release flag, correction operation standby flag, standby release flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completed flag, reel operation flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag, and return operation in progress flag) in the reel management area 94d, except for the origin displacement flag, are cleared to "0". This clears the management information of the reel 75, except for the information on the origin displacement flag.

After that, it is determined whether the spherical performance part 77b of the reel 75 is staying at the origin (step S4709). In this configuration, if the spherical performance part 77b is staying at the origin (step S4709: YES), the bonus reel performance start setting process is executed, and the reel setting process when the main bonus is won is terminated. In the bonus reel performance start setting process, it is first determined whether the reel performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". If the reel performance execution flag is set to "1", this means that the bonus reel performance has already been executed, and the reel setting process when the main bonus is won is terminated. In this way, if the bonus reel performance has already been executed before the bonus start performance is executed, the bonus reel performance is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel performance execution flag is not set to "1", this means that the bonus reel performance has not yet been performed, so the bonus reel drive table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the 11th layer LY11 of the read area 94a, and the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1", and the start setting process of this bonus reel performance is terminated. The performance side MPU 92 executes the bonus reel performance by executing the drive control of the reel 75 according to the read bonus reel drive table. In this way, when a winning result command indicating that a bonus win has been achieved while the bonus reel performance has not yet been performed is received, and the reel error state and correction operation standby state are not in effect, and the spherical performance section 77b is staying at the origin, the bonus reel performance is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not at the origin after the third clear process of the reel management information is executed in step S708 (step S4709: NO), the bonus winning flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1". After that, the same process as step S4710 and step S4711 of the reel setting process at the time of bonus winning in the first embodiment (FIG. 78) is executed. Specifically, a read process for correction operation is executed (step S4710). In step S4710, the drive table corresponding to the current origin among the initial position drive table and the displacement position drive table already described in the first embodiment is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. The performance side MPU 92 drives and controls the reel 75 according to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read to the 11th layer LY11, and the spherical performance unit 77b moves to the origin (initial position or displacement position).

Then, the correction operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4711), and the reel setting process for the actual bonus win is terminated. In this way, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command indicating that a bonus win has been achieved while the bonus reel performance has not yet been executed, and the reel is not in a reel error state or a correction operation standby state, and the spherical performance section 77b is not staying at the origin, the performance side MPU 92 executes the correction operation of the reel 75 in a manner that allows it to recognize that the correction operation was initiated as a result of the bonus win being achieved.

Next, the reel flag setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 in this configuration will be described. Note that, as in the first embodiment, the reel flag setting process is executed in step S3508 of the flag clearing process (Figure 66 (a)).

In the reel flag setting process, the same process as steps S4601 to S4604 of the reel flag setting process (FIG. 77) in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, if the reel initialization flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4601: YES), this means that the initialization operation of the reel 75 based on the reel initialization table has ended, so the initialization end flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4602), and the reel flag setting process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4601, it is judged whether the correction operation in progress flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4603). If the correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES), this means that the correction operation of the reel 75 based on the drive table for the correction operation has ended, so the correction operation in progress flag is cleared to "0" (step S4604).

In this configuration, after clearing the correction operation in progress flag to "0" in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1". If the bonus winning flag is set to "1", it means that the correction operation of the reel 75, which was started as a result of the bonus winning, has ended, so it is determined whether or not the reel performance execution flag is set to "1". If the reel performance execution flag is not set to "1", the same process as the start setting process of the bonus reel performance described above is executed. As a result, the bonus reel driving table is read out to the 11th layer LY11, and the performance side MPU 92 executes the drive control of the reel 75 according to the read out bonus reel driving table, thereby executing the bonus reel performance. In this way, if the correction operation of the reel 75 is started as a result of the bonus winning when the bonus reel performance has not yet been executed, the bonus reel performance is started based on the end of the correction operation.

On the other hand, even if it is determined that the bonus winning flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" after the correction operation in progress flag is cleared to "0" in step S4604, if the reel performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", this means that the bonus reel performance has already been executed, and the start setting process for the bonus reel performance is not executed, and the main reel flag setting process is terminated. In this way, if the correction operation of the reel 75 is started in response to the establishment of a bonus winning after the bonus reel performance is executed, the bonus reel performance will not start even if the correction operation is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the bonus reel performance from being executed twice before the bonus start performance.

In the reel flag setting process, after the correction operation in progress flag is cleared to "0" in step S4604, if the bonus winning flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1", the correction operation completion flag in the reel management area 94d is set to "1" as in step S4605 of the reel flag setting process in the first embodiment (Figure 77), and the reel flag setting process is terminated.

In the reel flag setting process, if it is determined in step S4603 that the correction operation in progress flag is not set to "1", the same processing as steps S4606 to S4608 in the reel flag setting process (Figure 77) in the first embodiment described above is executed.

As described above, in the configuration in which when a bonus announcement effect is executed in a readable state, a bonus device effect is executed in the bonus announcement effect, and when a re-variation effect is executed in a readable state, a bonus device effect is executed in the re-variation effect. In the configuration in which a bonus win is achieved without a bonus device effect being executed, the bonus device effect is executed in response to the bonus win being achieved. In addition, in the case in which a bonus win is achieved without a bonus device effect being executed, if the spherical performance section 77b is not at the origin, a correction operation of the device 75 is executed, and the bonus device effect is started based on the completion of the correction operation. This allows the bonus device effect to be executed at a timing before the bonus start effect is executed, thereby indicating to the player that a bonus win has occurred or that a bonus win has been achieved. This can increase the interest in the game.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, the reel error state or the standby state for correction operation is released, and the reel 75 performs a correction operation. If the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, and the reel error state or the standby state for correction operation is released and the reel 75 performs a correction operation, the reel error state or the standby state for correction operation is released and the reel 75 performs a correction operation even if the bonus announcement performance is not won in a game in which a bonus win has been achieved, so the player will know that a bonus win has been achieved based on the fact that the correction operation has been performed. In contrast, the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command containing information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved, and the reel error state or the standby state for correction operation is released and the reel 75 performs a correction operation, so that the player will know that a bonus win has been achieved based on the fact that the correction operation has been performed, and an opportunity to release the reel error state or the standby state for correction operation can be secured before the transition to the bonus state, while preventing the player from knowing that a bonus win has been achieved based on the fact that the reel 75 performs a correction operation.

In the above configuration (14), when the correction operation of the reel 75 is performed based on the fact that the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been achieved is set, the time required for the correction operation is measured, and depending on the length of time required for the correction operation, a bonus reel performance may be performed, a shortened bonus reel performance in which the operation time of the spherical performance part 77b is shortened compared to the bonus reel performance, or a bonus reel performance may not be performed. Specifically, the production side ROM 93 stores a bonus reel drive table in which the drive data (first drive data and second drive data) of the reel 75 for performing the bonus reel performance is set, and a shortened bonus reel drive table in which the drive data (first drive data and second drive data) of the reel 75 for performing the shortened bonus reel performance is set. In the bonus reel performance, the spherical performance part 77b moves up and down for 1.5 seconds, and in the shortened bonus reel performance, the spherical performance part 77b moves up and down for 1 second.

When the bonus winning flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" during the bonus winning reel setting process (step S2806 of the winning result corresponding process (Figure 56)), numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the reel performance timer counter provided in the presentation side RAM 94. The value of the reel performance timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 each time the reel management process (Figure 68), which is executed at 4 millisecond intervals by the presentation side MPU 92, is executed. In the present configuration, in the role drive control process (step S1915 of the performance execution process (FIG. 47)), the performance side MPU 92 determines that the correction operation of the role 75 has ended when the spherical performance unit 77b returns to the initial position while the bonus winning flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the initial position drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11, or when the spherical performance unit 77b returns to the displaced position while the bonus winning flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the displaced position drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11. The performance side MPU 92 determines that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the initial position when it detects a rise from a LOW state to a HI state in the detection signal received from the initial position sensor 75a, and determines that the spherical performance unit 77b is staying at the displaced position when it detects a rise from a LOW state to a HI state in the detection signal received from the displacement position sensor 75b.

When the performance side MPU 92 determines that the correction operation of the reel 75, which was started in response to the establishment of a bonus winning, has ended, it determines whether the reel performance execution flag is set to "1". If the reel performance execution flag is not set to "1", it means that the bonus reel performance has not yet been performed, so it determines the time required for the correction operation of the reel 75 based on the value of the reel performance timer counter in the performance side RAM 94. If the time required for the correction operation is less than 0.5 seconds, the performance side MPU 92 reads the bonus reel drive table from the performance side ROM 93 to the 11th layer LY11 of the read area 94a and sets the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d to "1". The performance side MPU 92 executes drive control of the reel 75 according to the bonus reel drive table read to the 11th layer LY11, thereby executing the bonus reel performance.

If the time required for the correction operation of the reel 75 is 0.5 seconds or more and less than 1 second, the production side MPU 92 reads out the shortened bonus reel drive table from the production side ROM 93 to the 11th layer LY11 of the read area 94a and sets the reel operation flag in the reel management area 94d to "1". The production side MPU 92 executes drive control of the reel 75 according to the shortened bonus reel drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11, thereby executing a shortened bonus reel performance. On the other hand, if the time required for the correction operation is 1 second or more, the production side MPU 92 does not read out either the bonus reel drive table or the shortened bonus reel drive table. In this case, neither the bonus reel performance nor the shortened bonus reel performance is executed.

In this way, when a bonus win is achieved without the bonus device performance being performed and the correction operation of the device 75 is performed, the time required for the correction operation is measured. When the correction operation is not performed or the time required for the correction operation is short (when the time required for the correction operation is less than 0.5 seconds), the bonus device performance is performed. When the time required for the correction operation is medium (when the time required for the correction operation is 0.5 seconds or more and less than 1 second), the shortened bonus device performance is performed. When the time required for the correction operation is long (when the time required for the correction operation is 1 second or more), neither the bonus device performance nor the shortened bonus device performance is performed. Since the configuration varies the presence or absence of a performance in which the device operates and the length of the performance according to the time required for the correction operation of the device 75, the correction operation of the device 75 is performed, and the performance in which the device 75 operates (bonus device performance or reduced bonus device performance) can be performed using the time remaining after the correction operation is completed. This can improve the interest of the game.

(15) Instead of a configuration in which game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b on the condition that the history storage mode is set, a configuration in which game history data is always stored in the history storage area 94b and a game history data clearing process is executed when a player operates the game may be used. Specifically, in the history image process (FIG. 82), the history storage process (FIG. 83) is executed unconditionally in step S4802 without determining whether the history storage flag 158 is set to "1". The history menu screen (FIG. 97) has an item "delete history" instead of the item "mode selection". When the item "delete history" is selected on the history menu screen, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a process to clear the game history data. In the game history data clearing process, the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are cleared, similar to step S5114 in the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85) in the first embodiment. The player can select the "Clear History" item on the history menu screen to erase the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b, except for the game history data indicating the number of ART wins, before starting play, to prevent the game history performed before the player started playing from being reflected in the history image G23.

As in the first embodiment, in the history image management process (FIG. 95), if it is determined that 10 minutes have passed since the start lever 41 was last operated in the normal game state ST1 (step S5712: YES, step S5714: YES), a game history data clearing process is executed (step S5716). In this clearing process, the 0th to 5th history memory areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history memory areas RA7 to RA15 in the history memory area 94b are cleared. This makes it possible to prevent the game history data of the next player to take a seat from being mixed with the game history data of players who were seated before that player.

In this way, by configuring the game history data to always be stored in the history storage area 94b, it is possible to generate history configuration data based on the game history data and display a history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data, without the need for the player to make settings to store the game history data in the history storage area 94b. This eliminates the possibility of a situation occurring in which the history image G23 cannot be displayed because the player has forgotten to make settings to store the game history data in the history storage area 94b when starting a game.

(16) The frequency of use of each piece of text designation data may be ascertained based on the history configuration data stored in the image playback memory area 94c, and if the frequency of use exceeds a predetermined reference value, the text designation data may not be set in the selection areas 165-167. Also, in the lottery process for text designation data executed in step S5211 of the text selection process (FIG. 88), the probability of winning frequently used text designation data may be set low. This can prevent history configuration data with the same text designation data set from being frequently generated.

(17) If the text designation data selected in the lottery process for the text designation data (step S5211 of the text selection process (FIG. 88)) is included in the history configuration data stored in the playback memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31) of the image playback memory area 94c, and there is no other text designation data that has the same display priority as the text designation data and satisfies the selection conditions, the text designation data to be set in the selection areas 165 to 167 may be selected from among the text designation data that has a lower display priority than the text designation data selected in the lottery process for the text designation data (step S5211). This can reduce the possibility that the same text designation data as history configuration data that was previously generated and stored is set.

(18) Instead of displaying the history image G23, which is a still image, on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data, a history video, which is a video, may be played based on the history configuration data. This allows the player to look back on the game history through the video, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(19) A plurality of arrangement data with different arrangements for the first to third heading ranges 151 to 153, the character image range 154, and the ending image range 155 may be stored in the production side ROM 93, and an arrangement lottery may be executed to select one arrangement data from the plurality of arrangement data. This increases the variation of the history image G23, and reduces the possibility that the same history configuration data is generated.

(20) In the first embodiment, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested by the type of background plate image G24 displayed, but the image suggesting the setting value is not limited to the background plate image G24. The setting value of the slot machine 10 may be suggested by the type of the text images G25 to G27, the character image G28, or the ending image G29.

(21) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the production side MPU 92 determines that 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without receiving a game start command and that the state is predicted to be one in which the player will leave the seat, a change button may be provided that allows the player to know that the player has changed due to the player's operation, and the change button may be known based on the operation of the change button. Specifically, the change button is electrically connected to the production control device 90. The production side MPU 92 clears the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b based on the detection of the operation of the change button. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of times ART wins have occurred. When the production side MPU 92 detects the operation of the change button in a state in which the history storage flag 158 is already set to "1", the production side MPU 92 maintains the state. Furthermore, if the operation of the change button is detected when the history storage flag 158 is not set to "1", the history storage flag 158 is set to "1". This causes the game history data to be stored in the history storage area 94b. In this configuration, even if the player changes in a game state other than the normal game state ST1, or if the period between when a player finishes playing and leaves his/her seat and when the next player sits down and starts playing is less than 10 minutes, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b, except for the game history data indicating the number of ART wins, can be cleared to "0" based on the detection of the operation of the change button, and new game history data can be stored in the history storage area 94b.

(22) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the production side MPU 92 determines that 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without receiving a game start command and that the player is expected to leave his/her seat, an imaging device that can recognize the player may be provided and a change in player may be recognized based on the imaging result. Specifically, the imaging device is electrically connected to the production control device 90. The imaging range of the imaging device is set to a range that can capture an image in a manner that allows the face of the player sitting in front of the slot machine 10 to be identified. The imaging device captures images at a predetermined time interval (for example, every 3 minutes). When the production side MPU 92 determines that the player has changed based on the imaging result, it clears the 0th to 5th history memory areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history memory areas RA7 to RA15 in the history memory area 94b. As a result, the game history data stored in the history memory area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of times ART wins have occurred. When the production side MPU 92 determines that the player has changed based on the imaging result of the imaging device while the history storage flag 158 is already set to "1", the state is maintained. Also, when the history storage flag 158 is not set to "1" and the production side MPU 92 determines that the player has changed based on the imaging result of the imaging device, the production side MPU 92 sets the history storage flag 158 to "1". This allows the game history data to be stored in the history storage area 94b. In this configuration, even if the player has changed in a game state other than the normal game state ST1, and even if the period from when the player finished playing and left the seat to when the next player sat down and started playing was less than 10 minutes, when the change of the player is determined based on the imaging result of the imaging device, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b, except for the game history data indicating the number of ART wins, can be cleared to "0" and new game history data can be stored in the history storage area 94b.

(23) A configuration may be adopted in which a player can log in by inputting a password or the like, and whether or not a player is being replaced may be determined based on the login information. In this configuration, only the history image G23 of the logged-in player may be selected as the display target. This allows a history image G23 based on the player's own past playing history to be displayed, while preventing the act of guessing the setting value of the slot machine 10 by displaying a history image G23 based on the playing history of another person.

(24) As a configuration for executing a premier performance that may give a large profit to a player, a configuration may be adopted in which a premier performance image indicating that the premier performance has been executed is always displayed in the history image G23 based on the execution of the premier performance. Specifically, in the ART state ST6, there is a special additional winning in which an additional game number of 100 games or more is awarded. When a special additional winning occurs, a premier performance lottery is held in the performance side MPU 92, and when the premier performance is won in the premier performance lottery, the premier performance is executed. A premier performance flag is provided in the history storage area 94b. The premier performance flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that a premier performance has been executed. When the premier performance is won in the premier performance lottery, the premier performance flag is set to "1". The configuration data storage area 161 is provided with a premier flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that the premier performance image is to be displayed. When the premier performance flag is set to "1" at the time of generating the history configuration data, the premier flag is always set to "1". This makes it possible to display a history image G23 containing a premium performance image at any time, without the player having to take a photograph or other record while the premium performance is being performed, and to record the history of the premium performance being performed.

(25) In the first embodiment, when the set value is changed in the winning probability setting process (step S106 of the main process (FIG. 11)), the displayable flag of the reproduction memory area RDn (n is an integer between 0 and 31) in which the history configuration data is stored in the image reproduction memory area 94c (FIG. 41(a)) may be set to "1". By setting the displayable flag to "1", it is possible to make the history configuration data that was not selectable as a display target before the change of the set value selectable as a display target selectable. It is possible to increase the number of history configuration data that can be selected as a display target while preventing the act of guessing the setting value of the slot machine 10 by displaying a history image G23 based on another person's playing history, thereby improving the entertainment value of the game.

(26) Instead of the configuration in which both the tenth history memory area and the eleventh history memory area RA11 are provided in the history memory area 94b, only one of the tenth history memory area and the eleventh history memory area RA11 may be provided. As already described in the first embodiment, the tenth history memory area RA10 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6, and the eleventh history memory area RA11 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6. In a configuration in which the tenth history memory area RA10 is provided in the history memory area 94b while the eleventh history memory area RA11 is not provided, history configuration data including wording designation data corresponding to the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 can be generated, as in the first embodiment. In this configuration, as in the first embodiment, history configuration data can be generated based on the number of game media awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaching a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"). In addition, in a configuration in which the eleventh history storage area RA11 is provided in the history storage area 94b, while the tenth history storage area RA10 is not provided, history configuration data including text designation data corresponding to the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 can be generated, as in the first embodiment. In this configuration, history configuration data can be generated when the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined division number (specifically, "400", "800", or "1200").

(27) In the second embodiment described above, the image display device 63 is configured to have one display area (only the lower right display area 181) in which the reduced video display in the reduced-top-up performance is performed, but a configuration in which two or more display areas in which the reduced video display is performed may be provided. In this configuration, it becomes possible for the image display device 63 to simultaneously perform two or more reduced video displays in the reduced-top-up performance. As a result, even if the timing for performing a new reduced-top-up performance arrives while a reduced-top-up performance is being performed, the reduced-top-up performance that was being performed and the newly started reduced-top-up performance can be performed simultaneously without terminating the reduced-top-up performance that was being performed midway.

(28) When the number of games continuously played in the favorable zone SC2 reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), the favorable zone SC2 may end regardless of whether or not a winning number of "1" to "3" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) after the transition to the favorable zone SC2 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is notified. Specifically, in the second control process (FIG. 29) of the game zone, when the value of the favorable continuation counter reaches a predetermined number of games, an initialization process of the favorable zone SC2 is executed (step S1014) regardless of the state of the unannounced flag. This ends the favorable zone SC2. Then, a process of turning off the favorable zone display is executed (step S1015). This makes it possible to make the end of the favorable zone SC2 easy to understand.

(29) If the game is in the favorable zone SC2 but not in the ART state ST6, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the player to win a favorable prize may not be notified when the winning combination that is achieved according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is different. Specifically, in the notification control process (step S420) of the lottery process for the prize (FIG. 14), if the favorable zone flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and a winning number of "1" to "3" is set in the lottery process for the prize (FIG. 14), a process is executed to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won, provided that the game state is in the ART state ST6. This allows the player to be notified of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the player to achieve a winning combination that is advantageous to the player only in ART state ST6, making it possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not to transition to ART state ST6.

(30) The ratio display 85 may be configured to display the ratio of the game with instructions. The main RAM 74 is provided with a first award number counter to which the number of game media awarded is incremented when game media are awarded in a game in which a stop order notification has been made, a second award number counter to which the number of game media awarded is incremented when game media are awarded in a game executed in a bonus state, and a total award number counter to which the number of game media awarded is incremented when game media are awarded regardless of the game state. When game media are awarded in a game in which a stop order notification has been made, the number of game media awarded is incremented to both the first award number counter and the total award number counter. Also, when game media are awarded in a game executed in a bonus state, the number of game media awarded is incremented to both the second award number counter and the total award number counter.

When an instruction to display the results of the game history management is issued, the ratio display 85 calculates the ratio of the sum of the value of the first award number counter and the value of the second award number counter to the value of the total award number counter. In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = ("value of the first award number counter" + "value of the second award number counter") / "value of the total award number counter".

Then, the display start process is executed. In the display start process, the display of the calculation result on the ratio display 85 is started. In this case, the identifier "7P.", which indicates that the value displayed on the ratio display unit 87 is the instruction-inclusive role ratio, is displayed on the identifier display unit 86. Specifically, the display of the identifier display unit 86 is controlled so that "7" is displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 86a of the identifier display unit 86, "P" is displayed on the right 7-segment display unit 86b of the identifier display unit 86, and the auxiliary display unit 86c for the identifier is lit. In addition, the display of the ratio display unit 87 is controlled so that the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 87a of the ratio display unit 87, and the ones digit is displayed on the right 7-segment display unit 87b. This makes it possible to confirm the instruction-inclusive role ratio.

The values of the first award number counter, the second award number counter, and the total award number counter are not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process is executed in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to measure the ratio of the instructed features for games executed in the game hall on multiple business days.

(31) When a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, an end lottery process may be executed each time the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won in the advantageous zone SC2 is announced, and a transition to the normal zone SC1 occurs when an end lottery process results in an end win. In this case, it is possible to make it possible to announce the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won multiple times even in the advantageous zone SC2 to which a transition has been made in the normal gaming state ST1.

(32) The number of times that the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the first bell winning required to trigger the end of favorable zone SC2 is not limited to once, but may be multiple times, such as two, three, four or more times.

(33) Instead of a configuration in which the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win to be announced as the trigger for the end of the favorable zone SC2, if there is a specific win that awards more game media than the first bell win and is won when the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is a predetermined sequence, the favorable zone SC2 may not end until the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the specific win to be won is announced a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or twice). In other words, in this configuration, the favorable zone SC2 does not end until the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the win that awards the largest number of game media among the wins that are won when the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is a predetermined sequence is announced a predetermined number of times. In this case, even if the player is in the advantageous zone SC2 entered in the normal game state ST1, until the notification of the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the specific winning has occurred a predetermined number of times, if a role that results in the first bell winning according to the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is won, the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the first bell winning may be configured to be notified.

(34) When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the first bell to be won is announced in a situation where the game is in normal game state ST1 and the game is in favorable zone SC2, the announcement may be made on the dual-purpose display unit 66, but not on the image display device 63. In this case, it is possible to announce the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the first bell to be won, which triggers the end of favorable zone SC2, in an unobtrusive manner.

(35) In a configuration in which the advantageous zone display unit 67 is in an illuminated state (i.e., a display state) in the advantageous zone SC2, if a specified abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous zone display unit 67 may be in an unlit state (i.e., a non-display state). In this case, a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state may be performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. In this configuration in which the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 are integrated in the common display area 68, if a specified abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is turned off and a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state is performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. This prevents the display mode of the common display area 68 from changing depending on whether the zone is in the advantageous zone SC2 or not, even if the same abnormal state occurs, making it easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(36) The freeze period at the end of the ending may be longer when the ending performance ends and the BB performance starts than when the BB performance does not start after the ending performance ends. In this case, when the ending performance ends and the BB performance starts, it is possible to use the longer period to execute the BB start performance after executing the ending performance end performance.

(37) The ending performance may be executed on the condition that the total number of game media awarded in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This makes it possible to prevent the ending performance from being executed even if the player has not been awarded enough game media to be satisfied.

(38) When an ending performance is executed, a video performance is performed in increments of 5 games, and at the end, an ending screen may be displayed indicating the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST6 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST6.

(39) If the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, the bonus presentation may be ended and the ending presentation may be started, or the ending presentation may be started after the bonus state ends, or the ending presentation may be started when a transition from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 occurs after the bonus state ends.

In a configuration in which the ending performance starts after the bonus state ends, the start of the ending performance will be delayed relative to the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, while the ending performance basically involves video performance in increments of 5 games, it is also possible to make it possible to display all of the performance contents by the time the ending performance ends by making it possible to display all of the performance contents by the time the ending performance ends by utilizing the freeze period that occurs when the ending performance ends.

In addition, multiple types of ending effects may be prepared, such as effects for 30 games, 40 games, and 50 games, and an effect may be selected according to the start timing of the ending effect for the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2.

(40) The number of games played in the bonus state may be excluded from the measurement of the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state from reaching the upper limit number of games, and also makes it possible to prevent the ending performance from starting during the bonus state.

(41) The configuration of the offset table 97 for associating each index value IV of the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode with the winning number is not limited to the configuration in the first embodiment. For example, instead of being set in the order of small role group → bonus role group → replay role group, it may be set in the order of bonus role group → replay role group → small role group.

(42) The offset table 97 may not be set in common to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, but may be set individually to correspond to each lottery table. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, a group of roles whose winning probability varies according to a set value and a group of roles whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value are aggregated separately, whereas an offset table may be provided to aggregate a group of small roles, a group of bonus roles, and a group of replay roles. For the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the first RT mode lottery table, and an offset table may be provided for the second RT mode lottery table. In this case, the winning numbers of each offset table may be set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even in this configuration, the index value IV can be set in each lottery table in a manner that makes it easy to design, and the winning numbers can be set in each offset table in a manner that makes it easy to handle the information on the winning roles in the subsequent processing.

(43) In the bonus internal state ST2, the symbols corresponding to the bonus role may be prioritized over the symbols corresponding to the role that generates the award of gaming media during the stop control. In this case, when a winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win to be achieved may be notified, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning bonus role may be notified. When this notification is executed, it is possible to achieve the first bell win instead of the bonus win by performing the stop operation in the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win to be achieved at a stop operation timing that does not result in a bonus win.

(44) The game zone is not limited to a configuration in which a normal zone SC1 in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified and an advantageous zone SC2 in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified is set, and a configuration in which multiple zones in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified but the type of winning data for which the stopping order is notified is different may be set, or a configuration in which multiple zones in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified but the frequency with which the stopping order is notified is different may be set. Even in this case, by providing a difference in the degree of advantage for notifying the stopping order in multiple zones, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the transition of the game zone.

(45) The notification for allowing the player to recognize which game zone it is may be configured to be executed by something other than the advantageous zone display unit 67. For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize which game zone it is. Furthermore, in addition to or instead of these configurations, the information indicating which game zone it is may be externally output to the hall computer of the gaming hall.

(46) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 to the total number of games, the number of games played in the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 may be configured not to be added to the total number of games in the advantageous zone SC2.

(47) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the set value is changed, the calculation must be continued without initializing the information on the ratio for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp the ratio for each set value.

(48) The total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of wins of the predetermined role that is the subject of the lottery in the role lottery process and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined role may be calculated. In this case, the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role are present as the target predetermined roles, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role may be stored as history information individually, and the winning probability for each of the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role may be calculated. Also, the number of wins for each of all roles may be stored as history information individually, and the winning probability for each role may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the roles under management.

The total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games. The combination of the total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information separately for each gaming state and advantageous zone SC2, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may also be calculated separately for each gaming state and advantageous zone SC2.

In addition, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games played in a game state other than the bonus state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the bonus state may be calculated.

(49) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous zone SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous zone SC2 may end and transition to the normal zone SC1 may occur when the result of the end lottery process executed in the advantageous zone SC2 is a final winning result. The trigger for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, the end lottery process may be executed in each game, or the end lottery process may be executed when a predetermined lottery trigger role is won or a predetermined lottery trigger winning is established. Also, on the condition that the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the end lottery process may be executed each time a lottery trigger occurs, and the advantageous zone SC2 may end and transition to the normal zone SC1 if the result of the end lottery process is a final winning result.

(50) In the advantageous section SC2, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not limited to being notified so that the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1. For example, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1 because a larger number of game media are awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, or the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1 because a smaller number of game media are required to start one game.

(51) Notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which it is performed by the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67, and may be performed, for example, by using the credit display unit 65, or may be performed by using the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66. Furthermore, when there are multiple types of calculation results to be notified, the events to be notified of each type may be displayed in a sequential switching manner. When the events to be notified are displayed in a sequential switching manner, for example, the type of event to be notified may be displayed in the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result for the event to be notified or information corresponding to the content of the calculation result may be displayed in the combined display unit 66. This makes it possible to notify of multiple types of events to be notified using a small number of display units, even when there are multiple types of events to be notified.

(52) The normal section SC1 may also be configured to have an upper limit on the number of continuing games. In this case, when the number of games played continuously in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit, it will be set to the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to compensate for the normal section SC1 continuing until it reaches the upper limit. In addition, by making the upper limit in the normal section SC1 the same for each of the setting values "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", it is possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage arising from the setting value with respect to the upper limit.

(53) The number of active lines is not limited to the main line ML, and may be two, three, four or more active lines. In this case, the number of active lines may be increased as the number of gaming media bets increases, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of gaming media bets.

(54) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus of paying out medals is awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be configured in any way as long as the bonus is awarded to the player. For example, a prize other than medals may be awarded when a small winning combination is achieved. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have a function for inserting actual medals or paying out medals, and instead manages medals owned by the player by credit, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a bonus.

(55) The present invention may be applied to so-called B-type slot machines, and may also be applied to any type of slot machine, such as C-type, a combination of A-type and C-type, a combination of B-type and C-type, or a type equipped with an RT game, CT game, or AT game.

(56) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. In addition, symbols may be formed using light, color, etc., or using three-dimensional shapes, etc., or a combination of these. In other words, the symbols may function as identifiable information.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of a slot machine 10 is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as a gaming medium, or to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance side MPU 92) that controls the execution of performance,
The performance control means includes:
A first performance control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2712 and S2714 in the performance side MPU 92) for starting a first performance (first expected performance) based on the occurrence of a first execution opportunity (fifth opportunity) during performance execution;
a second performance control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2009 to S2014 in the performance side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2415 and S2419 in the performance side MPU 92) for starting a second performance (second expected performance) based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger (the execution period of the first expected performance reaching one second) after the occurrence of a second execution trigger (sixth trigger) during the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A1, the first performance can be started based on the occurrence of a first execution trigger while the performance is being executed. If a second execution trigger occurs while the performance is being executed, the second performance can be started based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger thereafter. Therefore, while setting the condition that the second execution trigger occurs as one of the conditions for starting the second performance, it is possible to wait for the start of the second performance to occur after the second execution trigger occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the second performance from being executed before the predetermined start trigger occurs.

Feature A2. The performance control means controls the execution of a performance according to the performance information (performance data in the performance table) read into the execution target area (layers LY0 to LY11 in the read area 94a),
A plurality of execution target regions are set,
The first performance control means performs execution control of the first performance according to first performance information (performance data of a first expected performance table) corresponding to the first performance read out to the execution target area of a type different from the execution target area into which the performance information corresponding to the performance being executed when the first execution trigger occurs is read out;
The gaming machine described in feature A1, characterized in that the second performance control means controls the execution of the second performance in accordance with second performance information (performance data of the second expected performance table) corresponding to the second performance that is read out in an area different from the area in which predetermined performance information (performance data of either the first expected performance table or the middle stop performance table) corresponding to the performance being executed when the second execution trigger occurs is read out in the execution target area.

According to feature A2, the execution control of the first performance is performed according to the first performance information corresponding to the first performance that is read into a different type of execution target area from the execution target area into which the performance information corresponding to the performance being executed when the first execution trigger occurs is read. This makes it possible to start the first performance in parallel with the performance being executed when the first execution trigger occurs without affecting the progress of the performance being executed.

The execution control of the second performance is performed according to the second performance information corresponding to the second performance that is read in an execution target area where the predetermined performance information corresponding to the performance being executed when the second execution trigger occurs is read, and the area where the predetermined performance information is read is different from the area where the predetermined performance information is read. This simplifies the processing configuration for continuing the performance being executed until the predetermined start trigger occurs, and switching from the performance being executed to the second performance when the predetermined start trigger occurs.

Feature A3. The plurality of execution target areas include a first execution target area (e.g., a first layer LY1) and a second execution target area (e.g., a second layer LY2),
A gaming machine as described in feature A2, characterized in that when the performance information is read out for each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area, execution control of the performance in accordance with the performance information in the second execution target area is prioritized over execution control of the performance in accordance with the performance information in the first execution target area, at least with respect to a specific performance content.

According to feature A3, it is possible to execute a performance according to the performance information of the second execution target area and a performance according to the performance information of the first execution target area in parallel, with the execution control of the performance according to the performance information of the second execution target area taking precedence over the execution control of the performance according to the performance information of the first execution target area, at least with respect to certain performance content. Since the execution control of the performance according to the performance information of the second execution target area takes precedence over the execution control of the performance according to the performance information of the first execution target area, it is possible to execute a combination of these performances in the manner intended at the design stage. This makes it possible to make the content of these performances executed in parallel easy to understand.

Feature A4: The configuration is such that the performance information can be read out to each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area in a situation where the first execution trigger may occur,
A gaming machine described in feature A3, characterized in that in a situation where the second execution trigger may occur, the specified presentation information and the second presentation information are read out into either the first execution target area or the second execution target area.

According to feature A4, in a situation where a first execution trigger may occur, multiple performances can be executed in parallel according to the performance information read out into each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area. In a situation where a second execution trigger may occur, the specified performance information and the second performance information are read out into one execution target area (either the first execution target area or the second execution target area), so that the second performance can be executed according to the second performance information without requiring a configuration for grasping the progress of the specified performance according to the specified performance information.

Feature A5. Equipped with a predetermined operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated by the player,
the first execution trigger occurs based on the start of an operation of the predetermined operation means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the second execution trigger occurs based on completion of operation of the specified operating means.

According to feature A5, a first execution trigger occurs based on the start of operation of a predetermined operation means during the execution of a performance, and the first performance can be started based on the occurrence of the first execution trigger. Also, a second execution trigger occurs based on the end of operation of a predetermined operation means during the execution of a performance, and if the second execution trigger occurs, the second performance can be started based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger thereafter. In a configuration in which the period from the occurrence of the first execution trigger to the occurrence of the second execution trigger varies depending on the operation mode of the predetermined operation means by the player, the second performance is started on the condition that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the operation of the predetermined operation means is ended, so that the execution period of the first performance can be guaranteed over the period from the occurrence of the first execution trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger. This makes it possible to prevent the execution period of the first performance from becoming so short that the content of the performance cannot be understood even if the period from the occurrence of the first execution trigger to the occurrence of the second execution trigger becomes short.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the second performance control means starts the second performance when the second execution trigger occurs when the execution status of a predetermined performance (either a first expected performance or a middle stop performance), which is either the first performance or a different performance, is a predetermined status (a status in which the execution period of the first expected performance has not reached one second), and thereafter, the predetermined start trigger occurs and the second performance is started based on the end of the predetermined status.

According to feature A6, if a second execution trigger occurs when the execution status of a specified performance is a specified status, the start of the second performance can be made to wait until the specified status ends. As a result, even if the second execution trigger occurs earlier than the specified status ends, the start of the second performance can be made to wait, and the execution period of the specified performance can be secured until the specified status ends. Then, the second performance can be made to start based on the end of the specified status.

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that the predetermined situation is a situation in which a predetermined period of time (one second after the first expected performance starts in the first embodiment) has not elapsed since the start of the predetermined performance.

According to feature A7, the specified situation does not end until a specified period of time has elapsed since the start of the specified performance. With the configuration of feature A6 above, if a second execution trigger occurs when the execution situation of the specified performance is a specified situation, the start of the second performance is put on hold until the specified situation ends. Therefore, if the second execution trigger occurs before the specified period has elapsed since the start of the specified performance, the start of the second performance can be put on hold until the specified period has elapsed since the start of the specified performance. This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the specified performance is executed is extended over a specified period of time when the second performance is not being executed. Therefore, even if the second execution trigger occurs before the specified period has elapsed since the start of the specified performance, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the specified performance from becoming so short that the content of the specified performance cannot be understood.

Feature A8. A gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for starting the second performance (a function for executing the processing of steps S2009 to S2014 in the performance side MPU 92) when the second execution trigger occurs when the execution status of the predetermined performance is not the predetermined status.

According to feature A8, in a configuration in which if the execution status of a predetermined performance is a predetermined status and the second trigger occurs, the start of the second performance is put on hold until the end of the predetermined status, but if the execution status of the predetermined performance is not the predetermined status, the second performance can be started without delay when the second execution trigger occurs. This gives the impression that the second performance has started based on the occurrence of the second execution trigger, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied to the features A1 to A8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance side MPU 92) that controls the execution of performance,
The performance control means includes:
a presentation start means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3207 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S6412 to S6415 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the second embodiment) for starting a predetermined unit presentation (a base presentation for ART and a normal presentation for ART) based on the occurrence of a presentation start trigger (the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command in the ART state ST6), and for terminating the predetermined unit presentation being executed and starting a new predetermined unit presentation if the presentation start trigger occurs while the predetermined unit presentation is being executed;
a specific response means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3201 to S3203 in the performance side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S6401 to S6411 in the performance side MPU 92 in the second embodiment) for executing a specific response corresponding to the specific performance in the specific unit performance when the specific performance (an added main performance and an added sub performance in the first embodiment, and an added performance in the second embodiment) is newly started by the occurrence of the performance start trigger in a situation where the specific performance is being executed in the specific unit performance;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, when a specific performance is being executed and a performance start trigger occurs, causing a new predetermined unit performance to start, a specific corresponding performance corresponding to the specific performance is executed, making it possible to grasp the performance content corresponding to the specific performance based on the specific corresponding performance, while also being able to start a new predetermined unit performance without causing a delay based on the occurrence of the performance start trigger.

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, characterized in that the specific response means starts the specific response performance in a manner corresponding to the execution content of the specific performance immediately before the specific performance is newly started when the specific performance is being executed in the specific unit performance and the specific unit performance is newly started due to the performance start trigger occurring.

According to feature B2, the specific response performance is started in a manner that corresponds to the execution content of the specific performance immediately before the start of a new predetermined unit performance, so that the content of the specific performance and the content of the specific response performance that corresponds to the specific performance can be made continuous. This makes it possible to understand the continuation of the performance content of the specific performance by checking the content of the specific response performance.

Feature B3. When the specific performance is being executed, at least the first specific performance (the top-up main performance in the first embodiment) and the second specific performance (the top-up sub performance in the first embodiment) are both executed;
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that the second specific performance is executed as the specific corresponding performance, and the first specific performance is not executed.

According to feature B3, in a configuration having the configuration of feature B1 described above, in which a specific response performance corresponding to a specific performance is executed when a performance start trigger occurs while a specific performance is being executed and a new predetermined unit performance is started, the first specific performance is not executed as the specific response performance, and a second specific performance is executed. When the first specific performance ends, the player's attention can be shifted from the first specific performance to the newly started predetermined unit performance. In addition, the second specific performance can be confirmed in parallel with the newly started predetermined unit performance, making it possible to understand the performance content corresponding to the specific performance.

Feature B4. The gaming machine described in Feature B3, wherein the specific response means continues the second specific performance from the start of the newly started specific unit performance when the specific performance is being executed in the specific unit performance and the specific unit performance is newly started due to the performance start trigger occurring.

According to feature B4, by continuing the second specific performance from the start of a new predetermined unit performance that is started based on the occurrence of a performance start trigger, it is possible to prevent the second specific performance from being interrupted and to make the content of the second specific performance continuous and easy to understand.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B3 or B4, wherein the specific response means, when the specific performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance and the performance start trigger occurs to newly start the predetermined unit performance, thereby executing the second specific performance as the specific response performance, changes the progress speed of the second specific performance from the progress speed of the second specific performance up until that point.

According to feature B5, when the second specific performance is executed as a specific response performance, the progress speed of the second specific performance is made slower than the previous progress speed, so that the specific response performance executed in parallel with the newly started predetermined unit performance can be carefully confirmed, and the performance content of the specific response performance can be easily understood. In addition, when the second specific performance is executed as a specific response performance, the progress speed of the second specific performance is made faster than the previous progress speed, so that the period during which the newly started predetermined unit performance and the specific response performance are executed in parallel can be shortened, and the player's attention can be shifted to the newly started predetermined unit performance at an early stage.

Feature B6: The performance control means controls the execution of performance according to performance information (performance data in a performance table);
A gaming machine described in any one of features B3 to B5, characterized in that the performance information for executing the second specific performance is set as performance information separate from the performance information for executing the first specific performance.

According to feature B6, by setting the presentation information for executing the second specific presentation as presentation information separate from the presentation information for executing the first specific presentation, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ending the first specific presentation and continuing the second specific presentation when both the first and second specific presentations are being executed. Furthermore, when there are multiple types of the first and second specific presentations, it is possible to increase the variety of combinations of the first and second specific presentations while suppressing an increase in the amount of presentation information data stored in advance, compared to a configuration in which the first and second specific presentations are executed based on a single presentation information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature B7: The performance control means controls the execution of performance according to the performance information read into the execution target area (layers LY0 to LY11 in the read area 94a),
A plurality of execution target regions are set,
The gaming machine described in feature B6, characterized in that the performance information for executing the second specific performance is read out into an execution target area different from the execution target area into which the performance information for executing the first specific performance is read out.

According to feature B7, the execution target area from which performance information for executing the first specific performance is read is different from the execution target area from which performance information for executing the second specific performance is read, so that the processing configuration for ending the first specific performance and continuing the second specific performance in a situation where both the first and second specific performances are being executed can be simplified.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B7, characterized in that the presentation control means includes a special presentation start means (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3305 in the presentation side MPU 92, a function for executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3412 in the presentation side MPU 92, in the second embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S6501 to S6503 in the presentation side MPU 92, a function for executing the processing of steps S6601 to S6606 in the presentation side MPU 92) that starts the special presentation in a manner corresponding to the execution content of the special response presentation when an execution trigger for the special response presentation (the presentation side MPU 92 receiving an ART-add command) occurs in a situation where the special response presentation is being executed in the predetermined unit presentation.

According to feature B8, when a trigger for executing a specific response performance occurs while a specific response performance is being executed, it is possible to establish a correspondence between the execution content of the specific response performance that was executed before the trigger for executing the specific response performance occurred and the execution content of the specific response performance that is started based on the occurrence of the trigger for executing the specific response performance. This makes it possible to switch performances in a continuous and easy-to-understand manner when a trigger for executing the specific response performance occurs.

Feature B9. The execution trigger of the specific performance is configured to occur when a predetermined benefit is awarded to the player (addition of the number of continued games in the ART state ST6),
The configuration is such that the player can recognize the content of the predetermined profit (the number of added games) that triggered the execution of the specific performance by the execution of the specific performance,
The gaming machine described in feature B8 is characterized in that, when the specific effect starting means starts the specific effect by the occurrence of an execution trigger for the specific effect while the specific response effect is being executed in the specified unit effect, the specific effect is started in a state in which the player can recognize the content of the specified profit that triggered the execution of the specific response effect that is currently being executed.

According to feature B9, when a trigger for the execution of a specific response effect occurs while a specific response effect is being executed in a specified unit performance, it is possible to prevent a specific response effect from starting based on the occurrence of the trigger for the execution of a specific response effect without the content of the specified profit that triggered the execution of the specific response effect being disclosed to a player who was watching the specific response effect. This makes it possible to switch the performance content in a manner that allows the content of the specified profit to be understood when a trigger for the execution of a specific response effect occurs while a specific response effect is being executed in a specified unit performance.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied to the features B1 to B9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group A and feature group B can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a lottery is held when a certain lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common for the machine to be configured to perform effects that allow the player to predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light-emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and perform effects using images, sounds, lights, movable objects, etc. depending on the progress of the game.

Specifically, for slot machines, the effect selected by lottery is executed when the start lever is operated. In addition, an opening effect is executed when a specified game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a specified ending trigger occurs.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control the execution of presentations, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A movable object (the spherical performance part 77b of the role object 75) and
A motion control means for controlling the motion of the movable object (a function for executing the processes of steps S4501 to S4507 in the performance side MPU 92);
A transition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1502 and S1506 in the master MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (either the first to fourth BB winnings or the first to second RB winnings);
A prohibition setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4201 to S4209 in the performance side MPU 92) for setting the movable object to a prohibited state (a correction operation standby state, a role error state) in which the movement of the movable object is prohibited;
a prohibition release means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4101 to S4111 in the presentation side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processes of steps S4701 to S4705 in the presentation side MPU 92) for releasing the operation prohibition state based on the fact that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the operation prohibition state (a bonus prize is won) or a transition to the predetermined game state occurs (the game state transitions to the bonus state);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C1, the movement of a movable object can be prohibited by setting the movement prohibited state. In addition, by releasing the movement prohibited state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition or the occurrence of a transition to a predetermined game state, if the predetermined transition condition is established in the movement prohibited state or a transition to the predetermined game state occurs, it is possible to operate the movable object after the transition to the predetermined game state.

Feature C2. Equipped with a role selection means for executing a role selection process (a function for executing the processes of steps S401 to S413 in the master MPU 72),
When a predetermined role (any of the first to fourth BB roles and the first to second RB roles) is won in the lottery process of the role, and a predetermined role win (any of the first to fourth BB wins and the first to second RB wins) is established, the predetermined transition condition is established,
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the prohibition release means releases the operation prohibition state based on the achievement of the predetermined winning combination while the operation prohibition state is in effect.

According to feature C2, even if the motion is prohibited when the predetermined winning combination is achieved, the motion prohibition can be released based on the achievement of the predetermined winning combination. This ensures an opportunity to release the motion prohibition before transitioning to the predetermined game state, making it possible to operate the movable object after transitioning to the predetermined game state.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C2, characterized in that the operation control means includes winning response control means (functions of executing the processes of steps S2503 and S2516 to S2518 in the production side MPU 92, function of executing the processes of step S2607 in the production side MPU 92, function of executing the processes of step S2715 in the production side MPU 92, function of executing the processes of steps S4401 to S4405 in the production side MPU 92, function of executing the processes of steps S4501 to S4507 in the production side MPU 92) that causes the movable object to operate based on the winning of the predetermined role in the lottery process for the role in a situation where the operation is not prohibited.

According to feature C3, if a predetermined role is won when the action is not prohibited, the action of the movable object is performed based on the winning of the predetermined role. This configuration also includes the configuration of feature C2, and the action prohibition state is released based on the establishment of a predetermined role win in the action prohibited state. If the action prohibition state is released based on the occurrence of an opportunity to execute the action of the movable object based on the winning of a predetermined role, if the action of the movable object is canceled, the opportunity to release the action prohibition state before the transition to the predetermined game state is lost. In contrast, by using a configuration in which the action prohibition state is released based on the establishment of a predetermined role win, it is possible to ensure an opportunity to release the action prohibition state before the transition to the predetermined game state. This increases the possibility that the action of the movable object will be possible in the predetermined game state.

Feature C4. A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that it is provided with a means for moving the movable object when the movement prohibition state is released by the prohibition release means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4104 and S4105 in the presentation side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4507 in the presentation side MPU 92).

According to feature C4, by operating the movable object when the operation prohibition state is released, it is possible to ensure an opportunity to operate the movable object before transitioning to a specified game state. In addition, it is possible to create a state in which it is possible to execute an effect of operating the movable object after transitioning to the specified game state.

Feature C5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C4, wherein the prohibition setting means sets the movable object to the operation prohibited state based on repeated occurrences of an event in which the movable object does not operate normally.

According to feature C5, the movable object is configured to be set to the motion-prohibited state based on repeated occurrences of an event in which the movable object does not operate normally, and this reduces the frequency with which the movable object is set to the motion-prohibited state compared to a configuration in which the movable object is immediately set to the motion-prohibited state when an event in which the movable object does not operate normally occurs once. This reduces the number of times the motion of the movable object is canceled, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied to the features C1 to C5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in Group C above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a lottery is held when a certain lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common for the machine to be configured to perform effects that allow the player to predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light-emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and perform effects using images, sounds, lights, movable objects, etc. depending on the progress of the game.

Specifically, in slot machines, the effect selected by lottery is executed when the start lever is operated. In addition, an opening effect is executed when a specified game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a specified ending trigger occurs.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control the moving objects, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the presentation side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processing of steps S5001 to S5015 in the presentation side MPU 92) for storing game history information (game history data) in a history storage means (history storage area 94b);
a generation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the performance side MPU 92) for generating history corresponding information (history configuration data) that enables a history corresponding image (history image G23) to be displayed on a display means (image display device 63) based on the history information stored in the history storage means when a predetermined generation trigger occurs (the end of ART state ST6, the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media awarded after the transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined division number);
A storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5112 in the performance side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generating means in a correspondence information storage means (image playback storage area 94c);
a history display control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S6008 to S6012 in the production-side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processes of steps S6205 to S6210 in the production-side MPU 92) for causing the display means to display the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means upon the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger (selection of the item "display latest history image" on the history menu screen, selection of a heading in the heading list display, and operation of the down button 64c in a situation where a pop-up display is being performed);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the history corresponding information that has become the display target of the history corresponding image based on the occurrence of the specified display trigger can again become the display target of the history corresponding image based on the subsequent occurrence of the specified display trigger.

According to feature D1, game history information is stored in a history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, history correspondence information is generated that enables a history corresponding image to be displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, a history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. This makes it possible to display the history of a game later, without requiring the player to take any action to record the game with a camera or the like while the game is in progress. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation that is being carried out while the game is in progress.

By storing the generated history-corresponding information in the correspondence information storage means, when the history-corresponding information that became the display target of the history-corresponding image based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger becomes the display target of the history-corresponding image again based on the occurrence of a subsequent predetermined display trigger, the history-corresponding image can be redisplayed on the display means based on the history-corresponding information that became the display target and is stored in the correspondence information storage means. Compared to a configuration in which game history information is stored and history-corresponding information is generated based on the history information each time a predetermined display trigger occurs, the data volume of data stored to cause the display means to redisplay the history-corresponding image can be reduced, and the processing load for redisplaying the history-corresponding image on the display means can be reduced.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the correspondence information storage means stores a plurality of pieces of the history correspondence information with different timings at which the predetermined generation trigger occurs.

According to feature D2, it is possible to repeatedly display multiple history-corresponding images on the display means based on multiple pieces of history-corresponding information stored in the correspondence information storage means. By making it possible to display history-corresponding images on the display means based on history-corresponding information that was generated and stored in the past, it is possible to check past game history, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature D3. The predetermined display opportunity occurs when a display selection operation (operation of the performance operation device 64) is performed by the player,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the history display control means displays the history corresponding information corresponding to the display selection operation as the history corresponding image.

Feature D3 allows the player to arbitrarily select history-corresponding information to be displayed as a history-corresponding image from among multiple pieces of history-corresponding information that have been generated and stored in the past, and display the selected history-corresponding information on the display means. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in Feature D3, wherein the history display control means displays one piece of the history corresponding information as the history corresponding image for each display selection operation.

According to feature D4, since one piece of history-corresponding information is displayed as the history-corresponding image for one display selection operation, one history-corresponding image is displayed on the display means at one time, allowing the user to carefully check the history-corresponding image. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history-corresponding images that have not been selected from being displayed together.

Feature D5. A gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that the generating means includes a content adjusting means (a function for executing the process of step S5213 in the presentation side MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S5303 in the presentation side MPU 92) for adjusting the content of the history corresponding information so that the content of the history corresponding information already stored in the corresponding information storage means is not identical to that of the history corresponding image.

Feature D5 reduces the possibility of generating history-corresponding information whose content is identical to history-corresponding information already stored in the corresponding information storage means. This prevents history-corresponding information whose content is identical to the history-corresponding image from being frequently generated, which would reduce the player's interest in the history-corresponding image.

Feature D6. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that there are multiple types of the predetermined generation trigger.

Feature D6, compared to a configuration in which there is only one type of predetermined generation trigger, can increase the possibility that the history information stored in the history storage means will be different when the predetermined generation trigger occurs, and can also increase the possibility that the history-corresponding information generated based on the history information will be different. This increases the variety of history-corresponding images displayed on the display means, making the game more entertaining.

Feature D7: Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the master MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the history corresponding image may include a suggestion image (in the first embodiment, a background plate image G24) that suggests the setting value of the object to be used.

Feature D7 makes it possible to infer setting values for targets of high interest to the player that correspond to the player's degree of advantage based on suggestive images contained in the history-compatible images, thereby increasing the player's interest in the history-compatible images.

Feature D8. The gaming machine described in Feature D7 is characterized by being equipped with a restriction means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5712 to S5715 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S6908 to S6910 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) that prevents at least the suggestive image from being displayed based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (the passage of 10 minutes without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1).

Feature D8 makes it possible to prevent a setting value from being predicted based on a suggested image included in a history correspondence image based on history correspondence information that was generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the restriction means prevents the historical correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means from being displayed based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger.

According to feature D9, when a restriction trigger occurs, it is possible to prevent the display of a history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means, thereby preventing the setting value from being guessed based on a suggestion image included in the history corresponding image.

Feature D10. The gaming machine described in Feature D8, characterized in that the restriction means changes the information for displaying the suggestive image among the historical correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means to information for displaying an image that does not suggest the setting value to be used (a common background plate image) based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger.

Feature D10 makes it possible to display a history-corresponding image based on history-corresponding information even when a restriction trigger occurs, while preventing the setting value from being guessed based on a history-corresponding image based on history-corresponding information that was generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred.

Feature D11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D8 to D10, characterized in that the restriction trigger occurs when a change operation indicating that the player has been changed occurs or when a situation in which no play has been performed continues for a predetermined period of time (10 minutes in the first embodiment).

According to feature D11, by preventing at least the suggestion image from being displayed based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has been changed, it is possible to prevent the new player from guessing the setting value to be used based on the playing history of the previous player when the player is changed. Also, by preventing at least the suggestion image from being displayed based on the continuation of a situation in which no play is being performed for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent the new player from guessing the setting value to be used based on the playing history of the previous player when a situation occurs in which it is highly likely that the player has been changed.

Feature D12. The display device includes a data storage means (character ROM in the performance control board 91) for storing image data for displaying an image on the display means.
The history display control means
a display data generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2101 to S2114, S2119, and S2120 in the performance-side MPU 92) that reads out the image data corresponding to the history-related information from the data storage means, and sets the image data in a display setting means (a frame area in the video RAM 96) to generate display data corresponding to the history-related information in the display setting means;
A means for displaying the history-corresponding image corresponding to the display data on the display means based on an image signal corresponding to the display data being output to the display means (a function for executing the process of step S2116 in the performance-side MPU 92);
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D11, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature D12, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated by reading image data corresponding to the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which display data for all patterns of combinations of image data that can be displayed as a history correspondence image are stored in advance, the data capacity of the data stored in advance to enable the history correspondence image to be displayed can be reduced. In addition, the configuration includes the above feature D1, and based on the occurrence of a predetermined display opportunity, the display means displays the history correspondence image based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which display data generated once is stored and the history correspondence image is displayed again based on the display data, the data capacity of the data stored in order to enable the history correspondence image to be displayed can be reduced, and a configuration for storing the display data can be eliminated. This simplifies the configuration for displaying the history correspondence image on the display means.

Feature D13. The history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information (background plate image designation data, base plate image designation data, first wording designation data, second wording designation data, third wording designation data, rank image designation data, data indicating the presence or absence of an ending image G29, and data indicating a history point);
The gaming machine described in feature D12 is characterized in that the display data generation means reads out the image data corresponding to each of the multiple element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means, and sets the image data to the display setting means to generate the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information in the display setting means.

According to feature D13, the history correspondence information includes a plurality of pieces of element correspondence information, and image data corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of element correspondence information is set in the history correspondence image, thereby increasing the variety of combinations of image data corresponding to the element correspondence information included in the history correspondence image. In addition, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated by reading out image data corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of a plurality of element correspondence information that can be displayed is stored in advance, the data volume of data stored in advance to enable the history correspondence image to be displayed can be reduced.

Feature D14: The plurality of pieces of element correspondence information include predetermined element correspondence information (e.g., text designation data) and specific element correspondence information (e.g., background plate image designation data),
A plurality of pieces of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element corresponding information are set,
A gaming machine described in feature D13, characterized in that multiple selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element corresponding information is set.

According to feature D14, multiple selection candidate information that can be selected as predetermined element corresponding information is set, and multiple selection candidate information that can be selected as specific element corresponding information is set, so that it is possible to increase the variety of combinations of predetermined element corresponding information and specific element corresponding information. This increases the variety of history corresponding images that can be displayed on the display means, and increases interest in the history corresponding images. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature D15. The gaming machine described in Feature D13 or D14, wherein the generating means includes a content adjustment means (a function for executing the process of step S5213 in the presentation side MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S5303 in the presentation side MPU 92) for adjusting the content of the adjustment target information (first wording designation data, second wording designation data, and third wording designation data) in the newly generated history correspondence information so that the adjustment target information is not identical to the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means, for a portion of the plurality of element correspondence information.

Feature D15 reduces the possibility of generating history-corresponding information in which the content of the information to be adjusted is the same. This prevents history-corresponding information in which the content of the history-corresponding image is the same from being frequently generated, which would result in a decrease in the player's interest in the history-corresponding image. Because some of the multiple pieces of element-corresponding information are the information to be adjusted, it is possible to generate history-corresponding information with less overlap as a whole in a form that includes element-corresponding information that is not the information to be adjusted.

Feature D16. The gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D15, characterized in that the generating means includes intermediate generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5101 to S5111 in the presentation-side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processes of steps S6015 and S6016 in the presentation-side MPU 92) that generates the history-related information based on the history information set in the history storage means at the timing when an intermediate display operation (an operation for selecting "intermediate generation of history image" on the history menu screen) is performed before the occurrence of the predetermined generation trigger.

According to feature D16, by performing an intermediate display operation, history correspondence information based on history information stored in the history storage means can be generated at any timing by the player, and a history correspondence image can be displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information. This makes it possible to display the history correspondence image to a player who wishes to check the history correspondence image before a predetermined generation opportunity occurs in a situation such as when closing time is approaching.

Feature D17: Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the performance side MPU 92) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage degree of the player;
The history corresponding image corresponding to the history corresponding information generated based on the occurrence of the predetermined generation trigger may include a suggestion image (a background plate image G24 in the first embodiment) suggesting a setting value of the target to be used,
The gaming machine described in feature D16, wherein the intermediate generation means generates the history corresponding information so that the suggestive image is not included in the history corresponding image.

According to feature D17, by making it possible to infer the setting value to be used that is of great interest to the player and corresponds to the player's degree of advantage based on the suggested image included in the history-compatible image, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the history-compatible image. By configuring the history-compatible information generated based on the performance of an intermediate display operation so that no suggested image is set, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be used from being inferred in an unauthorized manner based on the types of the multiple suggested images by repeatedly performing the intermediate display operation in a short period of time to check multiple suggested images included in the multiple history-compatible images.

Note that any one or more of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied to the features D1 to D17. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the presentation side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processing of steps S5001 to S5015 in the presentation side MPU 92) for storing game history information (game history data) in a history storage means (history storage area 94b);
a generation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the performance side MPU 92) for generating history corresponding information (history configuration data) that enables a history corresponding image (history image G23) to be displayed on a display means (image display device 63) based on the history information stored in the history storage means when a predetermined generation trigger occurs (the end of ART state ST6, the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media awarded after the transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined division number);
A storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5112 in the performance side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generating means in a correspondence information storage means (image playback storage area 94c);
A data storage means (character ROM in the performance control board 91) for storing image data for displaying an image on the display means in advance;
a display data generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2101 to S2114, S2119, and S2120 in the production-side MPU 92) for reading out the image data corresponding to the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storing means from the data storing means based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger (selection of the item "display latest history image" on the history menu screen, selection of a heading on the heading list display, and operation of the down button 64c in a situation where a pop-up display is being performed), and setting the image data in a display setting means (a frame area in the video RAM 96) to generate display data corresponding to the history corresponding information in the display setting means;
A means for displaying the history-corresponding image corresponding to the display data on the display means based on an image signal corresponding to the display data being output to the display means (a function for executing the process of step S2116 in the performance-side MPU 92);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature E1, game history information is stored in a history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, history correspondence information is generated that enables a history corresponding image to be displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, a history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. This makes it possible to display the history corresponding image later to check the game history, without requiring the player to take any action to record the game with a camera or the like while the game is in progress.

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, a history correspondence image can be displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. Compared to a configuration in which game history information is stored and when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the history correspondence information is generated based on the history information, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of data stored to display the history correspondence image on the display means, and also to reduce the processing load for displaying the history correspondence image on the display means.

A history-compatible image can be displayed by combining image data stored in the data storage means. Display data corresponding to the history-compatible information is generated by reading image data corresponding to the history-compatible information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of image data that can be displayed as a history-compatible image is stored in advance, the data volume of data that is stored in advance to enable the display of a history-compatible image can be reduced.

Feature E2. The history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information (background plate image designation data, base plate image designation data, first wording designation data, second wording designation data, third wording designation data, rank image designation data, data indicating the presence or absence of an ending image G29, and data indicating a history point);
The gaming machine described in feature E1 is characterized in that the display data generation means reads out the image data corresponding to each of the multiple element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means, and sets the image data to the display setting means to generate the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information in the display setting means.

According to feature E2, the history correspondence information includes a plurality of pieces of element correspondence information, and image data corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of element correspondence information is set in the history correspondence image, thereby increasing the variety of combinations of image data corresponding to the element correspondence information included in the history correspondence image. In addition, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated by reading out image data corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of a plurality of element correspondence information that can be displayed is stored in advance, the data volume of data stored in advance to enable the history correspondence image to be displayed can be reduced.

Feature E3: The plurality of pieces of element correspondence information include predetermined element correspondence information (e.g., wording designation data) and specific element correspondence information (e.g., background plate image designation data),
A plurality of pieces of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element corresponding information are set,
A gaming machine described in feature E2, characterized in that multiple selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element corresponding information is set.

According to feature E3, multiple selection candidate information that can be selected as predetermined element corresponding information is set, and multiple selection candidate information that can be selected as specific element corresponding information is set, so that it is possible to increase the variety of combinations of predetermined element corresponding information and specific element corresponding information. This increases the variety of history corresponding images that can be displayed on the display means, and increases interest in the history corresponding images. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, wherein the generating means includes a content adjustment means (a function for executing the process of step S5213 in the presentation-side MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S5303 in the presentation-side MPU 92) for adjusting the content of the adjustment target information (first wording designation data, second wording designation data, and third wording designation data) in the newly generated history correspondence information so that the adjustment target information is not identical to the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means, for a portion of the plurality of element correspondence information.

Feature E4 reduces the possibility of generating history-corresponding information in which the content of the information to be adjusted is the same. This prevents history-corresponding information in which the content of the history-corresponding image is the same from being frequently generated, which would result in a decrease in the player's interest in the history-corresponding image. Because some of the multiple pieces of element-corresponding information are the information to be adjusted, it is possible to generate history-corresponding information with less overlap as a whole in a form that includes element-corresponding information that is not the information to be adjusted.

Feature E5. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the correspondence information storage means stores a plurality of pieces of the history correspondence information, each of which has a different timing at which the predetermined generation trigger occurs.

According to feature E5, it is possible to repeatedly display multiple history-corresponding images on the display means based on multiple pieces of history-corresponding information stored in the correspondence information storage means. By making it possible to display history-corresponding images on the display means based on history-corresponding information that was generated and stored in the past, it is possible to check past game history, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature E6. The predetermined display opportunity occurs when a display selection operation (operation of the performance operation device 64) is performed by the player,
The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the display data generating means sets the history corresponding information corresponding to the display selection operation as the display target of the history corresponding image.

Feature E6 allows the player to arbitrarily select history-corresponding information to be displayed as a history-corresponding image from among multiple pieces of history-corresponding information that have been generated and stored in the past, and display the selected history-corresponding information on the display means. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature E7. The gaming machine described in Feature E6, wherein the display data generating means displays one piece of history-related information as the history-related image for each display selection operation.

According to feature E7, since one piece of history-corresponding information is displayed as the history-corresponding image for one display selection operation, one history-corresponding image is displayed on the display means at one time, allowing the user to carefully check the history-corresponding image. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history-corresponding images that have not been selected from being displayed together.

Feature E8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E5 to E7, characterized in that the generating means includes a content adjusting means (a function for executing the process of step S5213 in the presentation side MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S5303 in the presentation side MPU 92) for adjusting the content of the history corresponding information so that the content of the history corresponding image is not identical to the history corresponding information already stored in the corresponding information storage means.

Feature E8 reduces the possibility of generating history-corresponding information whose content is identical to the history-corresponding information already stored in the corresponding information storage means. This prevents history-corresponding information whose content is identical to the history-corresponding image from being frequently generated, which would reduce the player's interest in the history-corresponding image.

Feature E9. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that there are multiple types of the predetermined generation trigger.

Feature E9 increases the likelihood that the history information stored in the history storage means will be different when the predetermined generation trigger occurs, compared to a configuration in which there is only one type of predetermined generation trigger, and increases the likelihood that the history-corresponding information generated based on the history information will be different. This increases the variety of history-corresponding images displayed on the display means, making the game more entertaining.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied to the features E1 to E9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the master MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4901 to S4917 in the presentation side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processes of steps S5001 to S5015 in the presentation side MPU 92) for storing game history information (game history data) in a history storage means (a history storage area 94b);
a generation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the performance side MPU 92) for generating history corresponding information (history configuration data) that enables a history corresponding image (history image G23) to be displayed on a display means (image display device 63) based on the history information stored in the history storage means when a predetermined generation trigger occurs (the end of ART state ST6, the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media awarded after the transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined division number);
A storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5112 in the performance side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generating means in a correspondence information storage means (image playback storage area 94c);
a history display control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S6008, S6010, and S6011 in the production-side MPU 92, and a function for executing the processes of steps S6205 to S6209 in the production-side MPU 92) for causing the display means to display the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means upon the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger (selection of the item "display latest history image" on the history menu screen, selection of a heading in the heading list display, and operation of the down button 64c in a situation where a pop-up display is being performed);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the history corresponding image may include a suggestion image (in the first embodiment, a background plate image G24) that suggests the setting value of the object to be used.

According to feature F1, game history information is stored in a history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, history correspondence information is generated that enables a history corresponding image to be displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, a history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. This makes it possible to display the history of a game later and check the game history, without requiring the player to take any action to record the game with a camera or the like while the game is in progress.

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, a history correspondence image can be displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. Compared to a configuration in which game history information is stored and when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the history correspondence information is generated based on the history information, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of data stored to display the history correspondence image on the display means, and also to reduce the processing load for displaying the history correspondence image on the display means.

By making it possible to infer setting values for targets of high interest to players that correspond to the player's degree of advantage based on suggestive images contained in the history-compatible images, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the history-compatible images.

Feature F2. A gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5712 to S5715 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S6908 to S6910 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) that prevents at least the suggestive image from being displayed based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (the passage of 10 minutes without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1).

Feature F2 makes it possible to prevent a setting value from being predicted based on a suggested image included in a history-corresponding image based on history-corresponding information that was generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the restriction means prevents the historical correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means from being displayed based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger.

According to feature F3, when a restriction trigger occurs, it is made impossible to display a history-corresponding image based on the history-corresponding information stored in the correspondence information storage means, thereby preventing the setting value from being guessed based on a suggestion image included in the history-corresponding image.

Feature F4. The gaming machine described in Feature F2, characterized in that the restriction means changes the information for displaying the suggestive image among the historical correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means, based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger, to information for displaying an image that does not suggest the setting value of the target to be used.

Feature F4 makes it possible to display a history-corresponding image based on history-corresponding information even when a restriction trigger occurs, while preventing the setting value from being guessed based on a history-corresponding image based on history-corresponding information that was generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred.

Feature F5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F2 to F4, characterized in that the restriction trigger occurs when a change operation indicating that the player has been changed occurs or when a situation in which no play has been performed continues for a predetermined period of time (10 minutes in the first embodiment).

According to feature F5, by preventing at least the suggestive image from being displayed based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has been changed, it is possible to prevent the new player from guessing the setting value to be used based on the playing history of the previous player when the player is changed. Also, by preventing at least the suggestive image from being displayed based on the continuation of a situation in which no play is being performed for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent the new player from guessing the setting value to be used based on the playing history of the previous player when a situation occurs in which it is highly likely that the player has been changed.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F5, characterized in that the generating means includes intermediate generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5101 to S5111 in the presentation-side MPU 92, and a function for executing the process of step S6016 in the presentation-side MPU 92) that generates the history-related information based on the history information set in the history storage means at the timing when an intermediate display operation (an operation for selecting "intermediate generation of history image" on the history menu screen) is performed before the occurrence of the predetermined generation trigger.

According to feature F6, by performing an intermediate display operation, the player can generate history-corresponding information based on the history information stored in the history storage means at any timing of his/her choice, and can display a history-corresponding image on the display means based on the history-corresponding information. This makes it possible to display the history-corresponding image to a player who wishes to check the history-corresponding image before a predetermined generation opportunity occurs in a situation such as when closing time is approaching.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F6, wherein the intermediate generation means generates the history correspondence information such that the suggestive image is not included in the history correspondence image.

According to feature F7, by making it possible to infer the setting value to be used that is of great interest to the player and corresponds to the player's degree of advantage based on the suggested image included in the history-compatible image, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the history-compatible image. By configuring the history-compatible information generated based on the performance of an intermediate display operation so that no suggested image is set, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be used from being inferred in an unauthorized manner based on the types of the multiple suggested images by repeatedly performing the intermediate display operation in a short period of time to check multiple suggested images included in the multiple history-compatible images.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied to the features F1 to F7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group D, feature group E, and feature group F can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a lottery is held when a certain lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common for the machine to be configured to perform effects that allow the player to predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light-emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and perform effects using images, sounds, lights, movable objects, etc. depending on the progress of the game.

Specifically, for slot machines, the effect selected by lottery is executed when the start lever is operated. In addition, an opening effect is executed when a specified game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a specified ending trigger occurs.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

10...slot machine, 41...start lever, 42-44...stop buttons, 63...image display device, 64...performance operation device, 64c...down button, 72...main MPU, 75...game device, 77b...spherical performance section, 91...performance control board, 92...performance MPU, 94a...read area, 94b...history storage area, 94c...image playback storage area, 96...video RAM, G23...history image, G24...background plate image, G29...ending image, LY0-LY11...0th to 11th layers, SC2...advantageous zone, ST1...normal game state, ST3...BB state, ST4...RB state, ST6...ART state.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine having a performance control means for controlling the execution of a performance,
The performance control means includes:
A first performance control means for controlling the execution of the first performance according to the first performance information based on the occurrence of a first execution opportunity during the execution of the performance;
a second performance control means for controlling the execution of the second performance in accordance with the second performance information when a second execution trigger occurs during the execution of the performance and a predetermined start trigger occurs thereafter;
A means for controlling execution of a specific performance in accordance with specific performance information based on the occurrence of a specific trigger;
A means for reading out the first performance information and the specific performance information into separate storage areas in a predetermined situation in which the second performance is not executed;
a means for reading out the first performance information, the specific performance information, and the second performance information into a same storage area in a specific situation where the second performance is executed;
Equipped with
A plurality of display effects are set as the display effects to be executed as the first effect,
A plurality of display effects are set as the display effects to be executed as the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized in that, regardless of which display effect is set as the first effect, it is configured so that it does not affect the determination of the type of display effect to be executed as the second effect.

Images